<rji30Nvsoi=^     "^/^ajAiNn-awv^      ^oim-i^"^ 


so      3 


.•\MfUNIV[RJ/A 


•<^7^3'^sv\m>^ 


^lOSANCElfj^ 


"'J/'A-.yjAifjn.w'S: 


^ 


^ 


^^..OFCAlIFOff^      ^ 

o       oc 


^VvtLIBRAftYOf 

5 


^^x\tilBRARY-ar 


%ojnv>io'^ 


^<!fOJnV3JO'^ 


.\WtUNIVEI?y/A        ^ 


^■5^ 


.1 


^OF'CAllFOff;)^      ^OFCAllFOff^ 


AMtUNIVtl?%  t 


> 


.^Mt■^)NIVERS■/A 

OS 

"<  'HA  > 


.^W£•^JNIV£R% 


o 


%a3AINa-3WV^ 

^lOSANCn^;> 
o 


"^AaaAiNii-awv 


^HIBRARYO^      ^illBRARY(9/:^ 

m        3 


^11  -uii 


^lUBRARYOc 


-^ 


<IV130KVS01^ 


CO 

so 

> 

so 

■^Aa3AlN^•3\Vi^ 


\^m)'i^    %{ii\ 


„^  ^\V\fUNIV£Rj'/^       ^lOSANCElij^        ^OF-CAIIFOR^      ^OFO 


<ri]3DNVS01^        "^//^aMINflJWV^ 


^ 


-< 


-j^lUBRARYOr^ 


-^l-llBRARY(?/r 


^OF:CAllP0ff^ 


^<?Aava8n# 


^OfCAllFOi?^ 


^l^{UNIVeR% 


^        —  ^ 


^^V\EUNIVERy/^ 


<(3UDNVS(n-'<^ 


%3A] 


.^w^UNlvtf<% 


^^WEUNIVER% 


<ril]3NVS01^ 


o 


%3AiNnmv^ 


v^lOSANCElfj^ 


-< 

%a3AINn-3WV^ 


^lUBRARYf?/. 
§  1  ir- '  ^ 


^^lUBI 


^OFCAUFO^i^      ^OFCA 


^<?ABvaani^     ^omi 


^lUBRARYi?/^ 


^^HIBRARYOr  .^Vl^UNIVFR%       ^lOSA 


RACQUETS, 

TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH 


RACQUETS, 

TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH 


EUSTACE    MILES,    M.A., 

FORMERLY    SCHOLAR    OF   KING'S    COLLEGE,  CAMBRIDGE 

AUTHOR    OF   'muscle,   BRAIN    AND   DIET,'   ETC. 

AMATEUR    RACQl'ET  CHAMPION    OF   THE   WORLD  AT  SINGLES   AND    OF   ENGLAND  AT 
DOUBLES,  AMATEUR    TENNIS    CHAMPION    OF  THE   WORLD,  HOLDER    OF   THE   GOLD 
PRIZE,   AMATEUR    SQUASH-TENNIS    CHAMPION    OF   AMERICA   (I900). 


ILLUSTRATED   WITH  ^4  PHOTOGRAPHS   AND  i6  DIAGRAMS 


NEW    YORK 
D.    APPLETON    AND    COMPANY 

1903 


yuhU'ih^^l  Javuar,!,  1903 


C-V 


This  Book  is  Dedicated 

TO 

QTh^  Uiglit  ^ononrabk  Sir  (gbtuarb  (©rcn,  Cart.,  ill. p. 


430C83 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

PREFACE  ......       XVii 


PART  I— HINT5   ON   TRAINING 

:hap. 

INTRODUCTORY   NOTE         ....  2 

I.      AIR    AND    BREATHING                   ...  6 

II.       FOOD    AND    FEEDING            .                  .                  .                 .  9 

III.  PREPARATORY    AND    SUPPLEMENTARY   EXERCISES  14 

IV.  HEAT,    WATER,    MASSAGE                     .                 .                  .24 
V.       REST,    WORK  ;   AND   MISCELLANEOUS    NOTES     .  26 


PART   II —RACQUETS,    TENNIS,    AND 
SQUASH 

PRELIMINARY    NOTE             .                  .                 .  .34 

VI.       IDEAL   CONDITIONS    FOR   A    GAME          .                  .  35 

VII.       MERITS   OF   THE   THREE   GAMES     .                  .  •          S^ 

VIII.       FEATURES   COMMON    TO   THE   THREE   GAMES    .  47 

IX.       THE    STROKES    AND    THE    ALPHABET    OF    PLAY  .          52 

X        MOVEMENTS    AND    POSITIONS    BEFORE   STROKES  63 

XI.       MOVEMENTS    DURING   STROKES       .                  .  .         70 

XII.       MOVEMENTS    AND    POSITIONS    AFTER    STROKES  74 


CONTENTS 


CHAP. 
XIII. 


PRACTICE   WITH    APPARATUS 

PRACTICE   AGAINST    A  WALL    AND    IN    A    SQUASH- 
COURT      ..... 
HINTS   ON    MATCH-PLAY 
GENERAL   HINTS   AND   WARNINGS       . 
XVII.      THE    COMMONEST    FAULTS    AND    FALLACIES 
XVIII.      RACQUETS    AND   TENNIS   CONTRASTED 


XIV. 


XV. 
XVI. 


PAGB 
76 

84 

92 

98 

109 

21 


PART   III.— RACQUETS 

XIX.  MERITS   OF   RACQUETS 

XX.  THE   COURT   AND    IMPLEMENTS  . 

XXI.  PLAY    AND   THE   RULES    OF   PLAY 

XXII.  HANDICAPS 

XXIII.  THE   GRIP   AND   THE    STROKES 

XXIV.  SERVICE 

XXV.  PRACTICE   OUTSIDE   THE   COURT 

XXVI.  PRACTICE    INSIDE   THE    COURT     . 

XXVII.  DOUBLES        .... 


129 

140 

165 
170 

177 


PART   IV.— TENNIS 

XXVIII.  MERITS   OF   TENNIS  ....  183 

XXIX.  THE   COURT   AND    IMPLEMENTS    AND    PLAY    .  1 87 

XXX.  A   SAMPLE   GAME   TO    ILLUSTRATE   THE    PLAY        .  203 

XXXL  RULES    AND    ETIQUETTE  .  .  .  2o6 

XXXII.  HANDICAPS  .  .  .  .  .2x6 

XXXIII.  THE   GRIP   AND   THE   STROKES  .  .  222 

XXXIV.  SERVICE  .....  236 

XXXV.       PRACTICE    OUTSIDE   THE    COURT         .  .  247 


CONTENTS 


XI 


CHAP. 

XXXVI.  PRACTICE   INSIDE   THE   COURT 

XXXVII.  FOUR-HANDED   GAMES 

XXXVIII.  HINTS    FOR   PLAY   AND   MATCH-PLAY 


PAGE 
261 


PART  v.— HISTORICAL  AND   PERSONAL 


XIX. 

BALL-GAMES   IN   GENERAL 

XL. 

TENNIS 

XLI. 

RACQUETS 

XLH.      TENNIS-PLAYERS   IN   ENGLAND    AND   AMERICA 
XLIII.      RACQUET- PLAYERS  IN   ENGLAND   AND   AMERICA 


267 
270 
280 
283 

295 


PART  VI.— SUGGESTIVE 

XLIV.  HANDICAPS   AND   SCORING 

XLV.  COURTS    AND    IMPLEMENTS 

XLVI.  CLUBS   AND    EVENING    PLAY 

XLVII.  HINTS   TO    MARKERS    AND   TEACHERS 

XLVIII.  GENERAL   PRINCIPLES   OF    PRACTICE 


303 
307 
314 
319 
322 


PELOTA :  A  CONTRAST 


329 


LIST   OF   PHOTOGRAPHS 


FACING 

FIGURE  PAGE 

51.  A  four-handed  game    ....  Frontispiece 

I,  2.  Body-swing.     Two  positions       .....  18 

3,  4,  5.  Wrist-exercise.     Three  positions         ....  19 

da,  t)b.  Thumb-exercise.     Two  positions        ....  20 

7.  A  waiting  position       .......  21 

8.  The  handle — before  a  grip  of  the  racquet  ...  64 
9,  10.  Moore  ready  for  forehand  and  backhand  strokes       .  65 

II,  12.  Backhand  stroke,  with  apparatus.     Two  positions  .  78 

13,  14.  Forehand  stroke,  with  apparatus.     Two  positions    .  79 

15.  Moore,  in  a  squash-court,  serving  forehand       .         .  86 

16.  Sketch  for  a  squash-court 91 

17.  Wrong  position    ........  87 

18.  Various  balls 138 

19.  The  grip  (not  unlike  Latham's) 139 

20,  21.  The  forehand  stroke,  Crosby.     Two  positions  .         .  156 

22.  The  forehand  stroke  (incomplete  apparatus)      .         .  157 

23.  Moore,  waiting  for  forehand  service  ....  158 

24.  Self-protection      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .159 

25.  Backhand  stroke  by  Crosby        .....  160 

26.  During   backhand    stroke,    with    incomplete    appa- 

ratus          161 

27.  Moore,  waiting  for  service  in  backhand  court   .         .  162 

28.  Half-volley  drop-stroke,  by  Moore      ....  163 

29.  Crosby,  before  a  forehand  service       ....  171 

30.  Crosby,  before  a  backhand  service     ....  171 

xiii 


xiv  LIST  OF  PHOTOGRAPHS 

FACING 

FIGURE  PAGE 

31,  32.  Wrist-exercise  for  racquets.     Two  positions        .         .  172 

33.  Waiting  for  a  back-wall  stroke 188 

34.  Tennis  ball 189 

35.  A  tennis  grip          .         .         , 222 

36.  A  "correct"  backhand  stroke 223 

37.  A  cut-stop-stroke,  forehanded       .....  226 

38.  A  "correct"  forehand  stroke         .....  227 

39.  Jim  Harradine  ready  for  volley  off  penthouse     .         .  228 

40.  Practice  of  volley  off  penthouse  (first  position)   .         .  229 

41.  Practice  of  volley  off  penthouse  (second  position)        .  232 

42.  Latham  returning  a  boasted  force        ....  233 

43.  Jim  Harradine  serving 238 

44.  Side-wall  service,  with  apparatus  (first  position).         .  239 

45.  Side-wall  service,  with  apparatus  (second  position)     .  240 

46.  Finish  of  side-wall  service 241 

47.  The  finish  of  a  "  Punch  "  Fair's  service        .         .         .  242 

48.  Charles  Saunders  serving 243 

49,  50.  An  overhead  service  (two  positions)     ....  244 

52.  Various  racquets  and  balls  for  squash          .         .  245 

53.  Latham  v.   Standing,   for  world's   championship,   in 

New  York 298 

54.  A  four-handed  game  in  America — England  v.  Amer- 

ica   299 


DIAGRAMS 


1.  A     GOOD     POSITION     OF     THE     FEET     BEFORE    A     FOREHAND 

STROKE  .  .  .  .  .  .  '54 

2.  A     GOOD     POSITION     OF     THE     FEET     BEFORE    A     BACKHAND 

STROKE      .......  54 

3.  HOW     TO     MOVE    THE    FEET    FROM    THE    WAITING    POSITION 

INTO   THE   FOREHAND   POSITION  .  .  ,  -57 

4.  HOW    TO    MOVE    THE     FEET     FROM    THE    WAITING     POSITION 

INTO  THE   BACKHAND   POSITION                  ...  58 

5.  A  CONVENIENT   DISTANCE   OF   THE   BALL   FROM   THE    FEET     .  65 

6.  HOW    TO    MOVE    TOWARDS    A    BALL    AFTER    THE    FOREHAND 

POSITION   OF  THE   FEET   HAS   BEEN   FORMED      .                ,  66 

7.  HOW    TO    MOVE    TOWARDS   A    BALL    AFTER    THE    BACKHAND 

POSITION   OF   THE   FEET   HAS   BEEN   FORMED               .                .  67 

8.  ROUGH   IDEA   OF   THE   RISK    INCURRED   BY  THE  WRIST-FLICK 

ALONE         .......  72 

9.  FRONT-WALL  OF   A   SQUASH-TENNIS  COURT       .                .                •  §5 

10.  PLAN   OF  A   SQUASH-TENNIS  COURT                ...  88 

11.  GROUND-PLAN   OF  A   RACQUET   COURT:    FRONT-WALL                  .  136 

12.  PLAN   OF  THE   RIGHT-HAND   SIDE-WALL      .                .                .  I90 

13.  PLAN   OF  THE   LEFT-HAND   SIDE- WALL  .  .  .193 

14.  GROUND-PLAN   OF  A  TENNIS   COURT              .                .                .  I97 

15.  THE   SECOND   BOUNCE  OF  THE  BALL:    "  CHASE  2"     .               .  199 

16.  THE   ANGLES   MADE   BY   A    BOASTED   BALL  .                .                ,  233 


PREFACE 

Conscientious  teachers  of  elementary  things  are  a 
mystery  or  even  an  abomination  to  the  genius,  who  does 
not  realise  that  his  own  exquisite  skill  must  possess 
not  only  the  outward  and  visible  signs,  that  inimitable 
blending  of  dignity,  power,  and  gracefulness,  but  also 
certain  imitable  foundations,  even  if  these  latter  parts 
of  his  play  be  (as  foundations  love  to  be)  least  appar- 
ently important.  To  the  genius  it  seems  mere  waste 
of  time  to  analyse  a  complex  whole — to  him  the  stroke 
is  a  single  "  organism  " — into  many  simple  parts,  and 
to  explain  the  why  and  the  whereby ;  the  function  of 
each  part,  and  the  way  of  manufacturing  each  part 
by  accurate  and  attentive  effort.  To  the  genius  it  seems 
sufficient  that  the  clock  is  a  clock  and  can  be  wound  up 
with  one  small  key.  Why  take  the  works  to  pieces? 
Why  spoil  a  beautifully  harmonious  unity  by  describing 
its  mechanism — its  spring  and  wheel,  its  pendulum  and 
escapement  ? 

Why  ?  Because  we  want  to  find  out  and  to  be  able 
to  alter  the  parts  which  compel  the  clock  to  keep  poor 
time  and  to  work  altogether  badly.  Otherwise  we  might 
for  ever  gaze  at  the  skilful  and  unskilful  players  side 
by  side,  and  continue  in  vain  to  urge  the  latter  to  rise 
to  the  standard  of  the  former. 

Such  an  analysis  of  parts  I  have  just  been  obliged  to 


xviii  PREFACE 

make,  in  January  1902,  at  the  age  of  thirty-three — an 
age  assumed  to  be  near  the  end  of  a  Racquet  career — 
in  order  to  re-model  the  mechanism  of  my  own  stroke 
at  that  game  !  That  is  a  strange  confession.  But  what 
else  was  I  to  do?  Was  I  to  go  on  with  an  unsatis- 
factory stroke  because  it  seemed  expensive  to  pull  down 
the  old  stroke  and  lay,  brick  by  brick,  foundations  for 
a  better  building?  Is  it  imagined  that  such  carefulness 
is  morbid  ?  Or  will  the  result  be  a  jerky,  mechanical, 
artificial  stroke?  Yes,  at  first.  But  not  after  months 
of  practice.  By  that  time  the  new  stroke  will  have 
become  part  of  me,  ingrained  in  the  very  fibres  of  my 
muscles,  registered  in  the  very  cells  of  my  cerebro-spinal 
system.  Its  mechanism  will  be  the  task  no  longer  of 
my  conscious  mind  but  of  that  infinitely  useful  under- 
self,  the  sub-conscious  mind,  which  walks  for  us,  runs 
for  us,  talks  for  us,  writes  for  us,  lives  most  of  our  life 
for  us,  and  eventually,  so  we  might  guess,  dies  for  us. 

How  shall  I  be  criticised  for  this  ?  Shall  I  be  blamed 
for  turning  a  "  sport "  into  a  serious  occupation  ?  That 
depends  upon  what  a  "  sport  "  is.  A  "  sport "  is  to  me 
one  of  those  parts  of  character-making  that  bring  best 
enjoyment — that  is  by  itself  not  a  nothing — ,  most  health, 
best  intellectual  calmness  together  with  promptitude  and 
adaptability,  most  fineness  of  three  senses  (sight,  hearing, 
and  touch),  and  best  social  and  international  intercourse. 
In  view  of  its  effects,  a  "  sport "  is  to  me  as  well  worth 
careful  planning  and  construction  as — what  shall  we 
say? — a  house,  a  book,  a  dinner,  anything  over  which 
we  grudge  no  painstaking  trouble.  A  "  sport "  is  not, 
any  more  than  these  things  are,  an  end  in  itself  It  is  a 
means  to  an  end.  What  is  the  end  of  it  and  of  these 
things?  Character-making,  happiness,  health,  repose, 
sense-development,  friendly  relations  and  reactions. 


PREFACE  xix 

Hence  my  careful  analysis  and  practice  justifies  itself. 
And,  besides,  I  want  to  reach  my  own  due  standard,  I 
want  to  improve,  I  want  to  win.  I  shall  not  enjoy  the 
game  any  the  less,  nor  think  of  the  mechanism  any  the 
more,  because  I  shall  have  once  laboured  with  effort. 

To  as  many  others  as  agree  with  me  on  the  merits  (or 
on  some  of  the  merits)  of  these  two  games,  similar 
efforts — sensible  training,  practice  of  exercises  with  or 
without  the  Bali-Game  Apparatus,  study  and  imitation  of 
positions  in  photographs  (taken  from  behind  for  this  very 
purpose) — these  and  other  helps  will  appear  abundantly 
worth  while.  It  is  only  to  the  few  who  regard  games  as 
mere  muscle-developers  or  as  mere  frivolities  that  no 
such  care  can  appeal.  Let  these  critics  either  be  total 
abstainers  from  the  games,  or  else  continue  to  play 
them  carelessly.  For  every  one  Racquets  and  Tennis 
should  serve  as  gardens  to  be  cultivated  in  proportion  to 
the  amount  and  value  of  the  fruits  and  flowers  expected 
from  them.  "  Use  determines  all  things."  Why  should 
I  be  ashamed  if  to  me  the  use  of  Racquets  and  Tennis 
is  manifoldly  great  ? 

The  headings  of  the  main  Parts  in  this  volume  will 
give  the  reader  some  idea  as  to  the  method  of  treat- 
ment. After  the  general  hints  on  training  for  Racquets 
and  Tennis  and  Squash,  there  follows  a  section  de- 
voted to  the  elements  and  features  which  these  three 
games  have  in  common,  and  to  the  ways  in  which 
the  foundation-positions  and  foundation-movements 
of  all  three  may  be  most  easily  built  up  by  average 
players  or  by  players  who  are  below  the  average. 
Part  III  deals  with  Racquets;  Part  IV  with  Tennis. 
Part  V  deals  with  the  history  and  the  chief  exponents 
of  the  two  games.     Last  of  all,  in  Part  VI,  there  are 


XX  PREFACE 

offered  various  suggestions  as  to  how  the  games  might 
be  altered  with  a  view  to  increased  cheapness  and  popu- 
larity— which  they  too  sadly  need — ;  together  with  a  few 
hints  to  Markers  and  teachers. 

Racquets  and  Tennis  are  treated  here  in  their  alpha- 
betical order,  in  the  order  in  which  they  should  be  learnt 
— and  given  up.  The  simpler  game  should  come  before 
the  more  complex,  the  more  active  brisk  game  before 
the  game  that  is  in  some  respects  gentler  and  in  others 
perhaps  a  greater  strain. 

The  book  has  several  further  new  features.  In  the  first 
place,  it  treats  modern  Racquets  and  Tennis  and  Squash 
together  up  to  a  certain  point,  after  which  they  must  be 
considered  separately.  Common  to  both  these  games  are 
such  features  as  the  following  : — the  position  of  the  body 
and  feet  before  and  during  and  after  strokes;  the  swing 
of  ordinary  strokes ;  the  advisability  of  hitting  usually 
only  a  little  above  the  line — this  feature  is  shared  by 
Lawn  Tennis — ;  the  necessity  of  Squash  as  a  preparation; 
the  advantage  of  other  preparation  and  practice  outside 
the  Court,  so  that  the  player  may  not  fail  to  do  himself 
justice  in  the  Court,  and  may  not  give  up  his  game  in 
self-disgust,  or  go  out  of  training ;  the  necessity  for 
cheapening  the  games ;  the  need  of  opportunities  for 
evening  play  by  artificial  light ;  the  want  of  a  better  and 
more  frequent  use  of  the  many  possible  Handicaps  (as 
by  left-handed  play,  by  smaller  implements,  by  the 
docking-off  of  Volleys,  etc.);  and  the  demand  for  more 
serviceable  methods  in  learning  and  in  teaching. 

Even  when  the  two  greater  games  are  treated  separ- 
ately, they  are  treated  as  being  far  less  different  in  nature 
than  most  authorities  maintain.  For  example.  Racquets 
is  characterised  by  the  hard  and  straight  drive  ;  but 
Tennis  also  has  its  hard  and  straight  drive,  both  when 


PREFACE  xxi 

one  is  playing  for  an  Opening,  and  when  one  is  playing, 
as  Pettitt  teaches  his  pupils  to  play  in  Boston,  for  the 
length  of  the  Court  and  the  "  Nick."  Tennis,  on  the 
other  hand,  is  characterised  by  the  heavy  Cut ;  but 
Racquets  also  has  its  heavy  Cut  in  the  Service.  I  have 
seen  a  whole  game  of  Racquets  in  which  there  was 
practically  nothing  else  but  Cut.  The  Server  served  so 
well — with  so  grievous  a  Cut — that  his  opponent  never 
returned  the  ball  at  all ! 

The  main  value  of  the  book  will  be  its  attempt  to 
enable  ordinary  persons  to  teach  themselves  cheaply  at 
odd  moments,  so  that  they  may  get  over  the  apprentice- 
ship and  may  learn  to  play  easily  and  without  the  worst 
faults,  by  a  course  of  brief  exercises  which  seem  to  me 
far  better  for  the  general  health  of  the  muscles  and  nerves 
and  brain  than  are  all  the  ordinary  strain-movements 
with  apparatus — those  movements  which  seem  especi- 
ally devised  to  hinder  speed,  prompt  agility,  and 
versatility. 

Surely  some  such  exercises  as  those  which  appear  in 
this  book  should  be  taught  throughout  England  and 
America.  Surely  every  boy  should  be  able  to  use  his 
body-swing  and  his  body-weight ;  to  move  briskly,  and 
at  will,  this  part  or  these  parts  of  the  right  side,  and  that 
part  or  those  parts  of  the  left  side,  without  upsetting  his 
balance ;  and  to  start  alertly  in  this  direction  or  in  that. 
Surely,  also,  this  bodily  training  has  something  intel- 
lectual and  moral  corresponding  to  it  and  aided  by  it. 
We,  more  especially  in  England,  do  need  rapidity  and 
quick  adaptation  ;  and  we  need  the  physical  as  well  as 
the  mental  education  which  shall  tend  to  this  result. 

Many  may  be  surprised  that  so  much  care  is  devoted 
to  the  veriest  rudiments  of  play.  The  conviction  that 
this  care  must  be  essential   is  based  on  the  idea  that 


xxH  PREFACE 

games  which  can  be  played  in  the  heart  of  some  of  our 
chief  cities  in  England  and  America  are  worth  mastering, 
and  so  claim  as  their  due  a  proper  apprenticeship  in  the 
ABC  of  skill,  especially  if  that  ABC  is,  in  itself,  an 
apprenticeship  for  other  games  also,  and,  in  no  small 
degree,  for  health,  social  life,  character-building,  and 
self-expression  ;  and  if  at  least  one  of  the  games  can  be 
continued  into  the  late  years  which  are  just  the  time  when 
most  of  us  will  have  money  wherewith  to  play  it,  and 
leisure  and  a  gap  in  life  to  be  filled  in  by  a  hobby. 

With  this  object  in  view — namely,  to  set  forth  the 
preparation  for  good  play — I  have  mapped  out  clearly 
from  the  beginning  the  lines  along  which  I  improved  my 
own  play.  There  was  a  time  at  which  one  of  the  leading 
amateur  Racquet  experts  said  my  style  was  so  hopeless 
that  I  should  never  improve  at  all.  Nearly  all  the 
writers  on  Games  and  Athletics  are  born  experts  ;  they 
have  indeed  improved  their  play,  but  they  have  not  con- 
structed their  foundations  consciously  and  with  effort. 
Thus  I  believe  that  Peter  Latham  and  Mr.  Percy 
Ashworth  at  Racquets  and  Tennis,  Brown  and  the 
Foster  family  at  Racquets,  Mr.  Heathcote  and  Mr. 
Lyttelton  at  Tennis,  have  always  played  in  excellent 
style.  I  had  to  build  up  my  own  play  brick  by  brick  ; 
to  learn  most  of  it  long  after  I  was  twenty-five,  when  I 
had  bad  habits  of  style  already  implanted  in  me.  Of 
course  my  way  of  learning  is  only  one  out  of  many 
possible  ways,  and  it  demands  a  certain  amount  of  time 
and  concentration  ;  but  this  time  does  not  now  seem  to 
me  to  have  been  wasted.  In  spite  of  a  busy  life,  I 
cannot  regret  having  given  so  much  care  to  the  practice 
of  any  single  exercise.  And  this  way  is  just  worth  a 
trial  by  others  who  want  to  begin  or  to  progress.  All 
criticisms  of  the  method  will  be  welcome.     It  does  not 


PREFACE  xxiii 

represent  merely  my  own  ideas  ;  for  it  contains  parts  of 
the  theory  or  practice  of  various  authorities.  Among 
many  professionals,  I  may  mention  Crosby,  Fairs, 
Fennell,  Harradine,  Ted  Johnson,  Kirton,  George 
Lambert,  Latham,  Bob  Moore,  Pettitt,  Saunders,  Smale, 
Standing,  and  Alfred  Tompkins  ;  and,  among  amateurs, 
Messrs.  W.  A.  Briscoe,  E.  F.  Benson,  Sir  Edward  Grey, 
the  Hon.  Alfred  Lyttelton,  Messrs.  H.  S.  Mahony,  Julian 
Marshall,  and  G.  E.  A.  Ross.  All  have  contributed 
more  or  less  to  the  advice  which  I  offer  here,  though 
some  of  the  contributions  have  been  made  by  actions 
and  concrete  examples  rather  than  by  words  and 
abstract  principles. 

If  a  new  work  on  Racquets  and  Tennis  ought  to 
apologise  for  its  existence,  let  it  set  forth  as  its  first  plea 
that  it  offers  hope  of  great  improvement  to  any  one  who 
cares  to  spend  a  few  minutes,  at  intervals  during  the 
day,  in  careful  and  patient  practice  of  a  few  simple  and 
healthy  exercises  which  seem  to  form  the  very  foundation- 
stones  of  style  and  of  success.  Since  practically  every 
player  of  these  two  games  has  decided  that  they  are 
worth  playing,  and  that  therefore  they  are  worth  playing 
well  or  better,  and  that  therefore  (in  the  case  of  average 
human  beings)  they  demand  an  intelligent  system  of 
preparation  no  less  imperatively  than  do  piano-playing 
or  singing,  it  follows  that  the  exercises,  in  so  far  as  they 
are  what  they  claim  to  be,  justify  the  existence  of  the 
book.  I  have  devoted  considerable  space  to  the  founda- 
tion-positions and  foundation-movements,  from  the  con- 
viction that,  until  these  are  assured,  the  recommendation 
of  graceful  pose  and  elaborate  finish  will  be  out  of  place. 
A  great  part  of  the  book  cannot  appeal  to  the  expert 
player  who  plays  correctly  and  in  good  style  by  an 
unconscious  and    natural   instinct.      Instead    of  saying 


xxiv  PREFACE 

simply  and  solely  how  a  player  who  already  has  a  good 
style  can  improve  it,  I  have  preferred  to  analyse  "  style," 
and  to  show  how  a  bad  player  may  build  up  a  better 
style.  I  possess  this  almost  unique  advantage,  for 
teaching  purposes,  that  I  laboured  out  my  own  style, 
part  by  part,  with  conscious  effort ;  and  that  I  do  not 
forget  any  part  of  the  process. 

The  reader  will  perhaps  feel  more  confidence  in  the 
advice  offered  in  this  book  if  he  remembers  that  it  is 
chiefly  by  following  it  myself  that  I  have  improved  my 
own  game  very  considerably  within  the  last  few  years. 
A  little  piece  of  personal  experience  may  encourage 
those  who  despair  of  progress. 

When  I  began  to  play  Racquets,  I  used  to  play  up  as 
hard  as  I  could,  but  still  my  stroke  was  atrocious. 
Every  one  said,  "  He'll  never  be  a  Racquet-player." 
And,  for  all  the  good  I  was  likely  to  get  from  actual 
games,  I  never  should  have  been  one.  I  used  to  hold 
my  racket  in  the  wrong  way,  and  to  stand  in  the 
wrong  way,  and  to  hit  in  the  wrong  way :  great  keen- 
ness, much  play,  and  constant  reminders  that  my  style 
was  atrocious,  did  little  to  help  me. 

Then  I  had  one  or  two  short  lessons  from  a  great 
teacher — Smale,  the  veteran  open-Court  champion,  who 
(alas !)  has  just  retired  from  his  post  as  the  Racquet- 
coach  at  Wellington  College.  What  he  advised  was  a 
complete  change.  (Smale's  later  advice  has  enabled  me 
to  free  my  limbs  very  considerably.)  All  my  muscles 
had  been  accustomed  to  work  together  in  a  certain  way, 
and  I  had  to  undo  the  effects  of  years  of  bad  practice. 
At  first,  then,  my  game  went  back. 

Soon,  however,  with  the  help  of  a  friend,  I  devised 
some  exercises  which  could  be  practised  in  an  ordinary 
room.     The  exercises,  which  I  have  tried  to  amend  from 


PREFACE  XXV 

time  to  time,  I  now  offer  in  this  book.  The  diagrams 
are  simple ;  the  photographs,  to  help  imitation,  are  taken 
from  behind  and  not  from  in  front.  I  wish  here  to 
thank  most  heartily  Mr.  Crowder,  Mr.  F.  H.  Hewitt,  and 
others,  for  permission  to  produce  their  very  excellent 
work. 

That  mine  are  the  best  possible  exercises  I  cannot  for 
one  moment  claim.  I  only  claim  that  they  are  those 
which  I  myself  should  use  if  I  were  to  start  my  play 
afresh.  Their  precise  merits — and  be  it  remembered 
that  they  merely  claim  to  be  deserving  of  a  fair  trial  by 
all  except  genius-players — must  be  judged  by  each 
individual  reader  for  himself.  But  at  least  they  have 
altered  my  own  style  not  to  positive  gracefulness,  but  from 
and  out  of  positive  disgracefulness — so  that  its  former 
depth  of  ugliness  and  clumsiness  cannot  be  believed  or 
pictured  by  people  who  see  me  play  now.  And  they 
have  also  helped  to  raise  my  standard  of  play  more 
than  either  my  teachers  or  myself  (except  in  lovely 
dreams — who  does  not  know  them  ? — )  had  thought  to 
be  possible.  Most  of  those  who  have  tried  the  exer- 
cises have  enjoyed  a  like  progress. 

Besides  the  first  plea,  that  the  exercises  may  be  useful 
to  many  beginners  and  others,  without  much  expenditure 
of  money  or  time  or  energy,  there  is  a  second  plea,  namely, 
that  they  are  to  a  great  extent  shared  by  Racquets, 
Tennis,  and  Squash — a  game  of  growing  popularity 
among  Anglo-Saxons  on  both  sides  of  the  water — ,  and 
also,  to  a  smaller  extent,  by  Lawn  Tennis  and  Fives 
and  other  forms  of  Athletics.  It  is  an  obvious  truth 
needing  no  reasoned  proof  that  a  basis  will  be  the 
more  valuable  in  proportion  to  the  number  of  good 
things  of  which  it  is  the  basis  or  may  be  used  as  the 
basis.     If  some   of  the   exercises   will   be   a   help,   let 


xxvi  PREFACE 

us  say,  for  Fives,  Boxing,  Cricket,  Golf,  and  Ping- 
Pong,  as  well  as  for  Racquets  and  Tennis  and  Squash, 
to  say  nothing  of  physical  health  and  so  of  general 
health,  then  they  are,  by  themselves,  a  sufficient  exjcuse 
for  this  publication.  Indeed,  it  were  almost  a  sufficient 
excuse  in  itself  that  they  are  common  to  Racquets  and 
Tennis  alone. 

The  third  plea  is  implied  in  the  last  clause.  I  have 
treated  Racquets  and  Tennis  as  a  single  game  up  to  a 
certain  point.  It  used  to  be  maintained  that  the  two 
games  were  utterly  different ;  that  to  import  Racquet 
methods  into  Tennis  was  sheer  desecration.  George 
Lambert  and  Peter  Latham  have  done  much  to  disprove 
this  view,  which  includes  the  time-worn  fallacy  that,  in 
the  typical  Tennis-stroke  off  the  floor,  the  head  of  the 
racket  should  be  above  the  level  of  the  wrist.  The 
ordinary  Forehand  and  Backhand  stroke  of  Latham  and 
*'  Punch "  Fairs  and  most  players  violates  this  theory. 
And  I  prefer  to  advise  the  ordinary  player  to  imitate 
these  experts  rather  than  to  essay  the  exceedingly 
difficult  (though  exceedingly  graceful)  stroke  of  Charles 
Saunders  and  Mr.  Alfred  Lyttelton. 

Last  of  all,  the  issue  of  a  new  book  is  timely  at  this 
special  crisis.  The  modern  games  of  Tennis  and 
Racquets — partly  because  of  the  true  Courts,  tight 
rackets,  and  true  balls — differ  from  the  ancient  games ; 
and  the  future  must  rest  with  the  modern  games,  if  only 
because  there  are  competitions  to  be  won !  Besides 
this,  the  games  are  enjoying  a  great  "  boom  "  in  America, 
where  magnificent  new  Courts  are  being  built  and  will 
be  built  in  ever-increasing  numbers — for  the  games  suit 
the  rich  American  city-dwellers — ,  and  where  the  standard 
of  play  is  rising,  and  the  keenness  of  play  is  increasing, 
and    Squash,   the   ill-named   game,   is   by   its   growing 


PREFACE  xx\'il 

popularity  paving  a  way  which  must  inevitably  lead 
upwards  to  its  two  superiors.  In  England,  also,  Tennis — 
but  alas !  not  Racquets — has  recently  shown  a  decided 
revival.  The  two  games  need  a  book  to  explain  the 
way  in  which  they  may  be  learnt  and  played  to-day, 
and  to  justify  that  way  as  the  best,  not  in  all  respects 
(there  is  much  to  be  urged  fairly  against  it),  but  in  most 
respects,  at  any  rate  for  the  busy  workers  in  crowded 
towns. 

For  the  modern  games.  Squash  is  an  almost  indis- 
pensable preparation.  By  giving,  at  a  small  cost  of  time 
or  money,  abundance  of  hard  and  brisk  and  simple  yet 
exciting  exercise  for  all  times  of  life,  of  the  year,  and 
even  of  the  day — if  we  have  good  artificial  light — ;  by 
habituating  the  player  to  correct  positions  and  move- 
ments of  the  body  and  its  various  parts  ;  by  accustoming 
him  to  start  and  move  quickly,  to  recover  balance 
quickly,  to  use  the  Side-walls  and  Back-walls,  some- 
times to  volley  and  half-volley,  and  sometimes  to  cut 
the  ball,  and  always  to  judge  the  ball,  it  forces  itself 
with  irresistible  arguments  upon  him  whose  ambition  is 
to  excel. 

Nor  can  such  a  player  afford  to  neglect  the  clearest 
yet  most  neglected  principles  of  health  and  training. 
Large  muscles  are  here  of  little  value.  To  have  a  clear 
eye,  quick  to  obser\-e  and  then  send  reports  to  the  brain, 
to  have  a  keen  brain,  apt  to  receive  reports  and  then 
send  messages  to  this  or  the  other  limb  or  controlling 
nerve-centre,  to  have  prompt  and  rapid  yet  powerful 
and  enduring  muscles,  capable  of  being  directed  in- 
dependently or  in  various  groups,  to  be  patient  and 
hopeful  even  after  the  frown  of  fate  seems  to  have 
settled  into  a  fixed  wrinkle — all  this  and  much  more 
besides  is  not  merely  a  matter  of  practice.     It  postu- 


xxviii  PREFACE 

lates  either  a  splendid  constitution  that  may  for  years 
defy  ill-treatment,  or  else  a  careful  attention  to  general 
laws  and  individual  bye-laws  with  regard  to  morals  and 
minds,  nerves  and  muscles,  organs  and  limbs ;  with 
regard  to  food  and  air,  water  and  heat,  sleep  and 
rest,  associates  and  associations.  Such  matters  belong 
especially  to  Racquets  and  Tennis,  since  so  many  of  the 
players  of  these  games  are  among  the  hardest  brain- 
workers  in  England  and  America.  The  mental  as  well 
as  the  physical  helps  to  health  cannot  be  passed  over  as 
unimportant.  Speaking  from  my  own  experience,  I  find 
them  near  the  very  roots  of  successful  and  pleasant 
work  and  play. 

It  may  be  objected  that  few  people  will  attend  even 
to  general  instructions  about  health  and  training,  or 
about  preparation.  If  this  is  so,  the  instructor  is 
largely  to  blame.  Somehow  he  has  said  wrong  things, 
or  has  expressed  right  things  badly.  I  must  run  the 
risk  of  having  comparatively  few  readers  who  will  put 
my  practice  and  theory  to  the  test  of  their  own  personal 
experience,  and  who  will  be  content  to  wait  for  a  few 
days  or  weeks  until  the  fruits  begin  to  appear.  If  some 
players  find  the  hints  useful,  if  some,  who  have  been 
given  up  (or  who  have  given  themselves  up)  as  "hope- 
less duffers,"  can  improve  their  play  by  following  out 
these  principles  (adapted  to  their  own  special  conditions), 
I  shall  not  have  made  a  mistake  in  offering  them.  To 
be  perfectly  frank,  I  am  convinced  that  nine  out  of  every 
ten  so-called  "  duffers  "  need  just  such  a  help  as  this — a 
means  by  which  they  can  teach  themselves  the  elements 
of  common  strokes  with  the  smallest  expenditure  of 
money,  time,  trouble,  and  disappointment.  Knowing 
how  much  I  improved  my  own  game  by  this  con- 
scious effort,  I  cannot  regard  any  "  duffer  "  as  past  hope 


PREFACE  xxix 

or  beyond   the    benefits    of  carefulness    and    attention 
concentrated  on  the  Alphabet  of  success. 

Eustace  Miles. 

Kings  College,   Catnbridge. 


I  MUST  thank  the  pubh'shers  (Messrs.  Macmillan  and 
Bowes,  of  Cambridge)  for  their  kind  permission  to 
reproduce  the  following,  from  '  Lapsus  Calami,'  by  Jim 
Stephen  (J.  K.  S.).  It  appeared  first  in  the  '  Cambridge 
Review,'  in  1891. 

To  see  good  Tennis  !     What  diviner  joy 

Can  fill  our  leisure,  or  our  minds  employ? 

Not  Sylvia's  self  is  more  supremely  fair 

Than  balls  that  hurtle  through  the  conscious  air. 

Not  Stella's  form  instinct  with  truer  grace 

Than  Lambert's  racket  poised  to  win  the  Chase. 

Not  Chloe's  harp  more  native  to  the  ear 

Than  the  tense  strings  which  smite  the  flying  sphere. 

When  Lambert  boasts  the  superhuman  Force, 

Or  splits  the  echoing  Grille  without  remorse  : 

When  Harradine,  as  graceful  as  of  yore. 

Wins  " Belter-tkan-a-yard"  upon  the  floor  ; 

When  Alfred's  ringing  cheer  proclaims  success, 

Or  Saunders  volleys  in  resistlessness ; 

When  Heathcote's  Service  makes  the  Dedans  ring 

With  just  applause,  and  own  its  honoured  king  ; 

When  Pettitt's  prowess  all  our  zeal  awoke 

Till  high  Olympus  shuddered  at  the  stroke ; 

Or  when,  receiving  ^'■Thirty  and  ihe floor" 

The  novice  serves  a  dozen  Faults  or  more  ; 

Or  some  plump  don,  perspiring  and  profane, 

Assails  the  roof,  and  breaks  the  exalted  pane  ; 

When  "  Va?ifage,  five  games  all,  the  Door'"  is  called, 

And  Europe  pauses,  breathless  and  appalled, 

Till  lo  !  the  ball  by  cunning  hand  caressed 

Finds  in  the    Winning  Gallery  a  nest ; 

These  are  the  moments,  this  the  bliss  supreme, 

Which  make  the  artist's  joy,  the  poet's  dream. 

Let  Cricketers  await  the  tardy  sun. 

Break  one  another's  shins  and  call  it  fun  ; 

Let  Scotia's  Golfers  through  the  afifrighted  land 

With  crooked  knee  and  glaring  eyeball  stand  ; 

Let  Football  rowdies  show  their  straining  thews, 

And  tell  their  triumphs  to  the  mud-stained  Muse  ; 

Let  india-rubber  pellets  dance  on  grass. 

Where  female  arts  the  ruder  sex  surpass  ; 

Let  other  people  play  at  other  things ; 

The  King  of  Games  is  still  the  Game  of  Kings, 


Part   I 
HINTS   ON    TRAINING 


INTRODUCTORY  NOTE   ON   TRAINING 

In  order  to  enjoy  a  game  of  Racquets  or  Tennis,  we 
need  not  only  the  ideal  conditions  (to  be  mentioned  in 
Chapter  VI) :  we  need  not  only  a  good  Court,  good 
light,  good  balls,  good  rackets,  and  a  good  Marker ;  not 
only  an  opponent  who  is  energetic,  and  on  equal  terms 
with  us  either  naturally  or  by  means  of  a  Handicap; 
not  only  some  good  luck  ;  but  also  good  temper  and 
good  physical  condition,  so  that  we  may  be  able  to  do 
ourselves  justice.  For  to  play  below  one's  standard  is  a 
cause  of  discomfort  rather  than  of  pleasure. 

But  how  can  we  arrive  at  this  good  condition  amidst 
all  the  disadvantages  of  business  and  social  life?  The 
ideal  is  to  be  perfectly  healthy  even  in  these  circum- 
stances. The  ideal  is,  also,  not  so  much  to  give  up 
forcibly  and  to  abstain  by  effort,  as  to  get  rid  of  the  want 
or  even  the  craving  for  those  things  which  we  know  to 
be  bad  for  training. 

In  training,  as  elsewhere,  prevention  is  better  than 
cure,  and  permanent  cure  is  better  than  temporary  cure. 
But  temporary  cure  is  more  popular  than  prevention. 
Here  it  is  my  aim  to  suggest  a  few  helps  which  may  be 
used  either  for  prevention  or  for  cure.  The  helps  shall 
all  be  simple  :  details  about  electricity  and  other  matters 
cannot  be  treated  here.  They  are  dealt  with  elsewhere. 
We  must  confine  ourselves  in  this  short  space  rather  to 


INTRODUCTORY  NOTE  ON  TRAINING  3 

those  most  feasible  avenues  to  health  and  training  which 
all  or  nearly  all  men  can  easily  use  in  a  somewhat  busy 
and  physically  inactive  life. 

Is  training  worth  while  ?  I  remember  meeting  an 
American  millionaire  who  had  time  to  be  ill — one  would 
be  afraid  to  say  how  many  weeks  in  every  year  and 
hours  in  nearly  every  other  week — ,  but  who  said  that  he 
was  too  busy  to  take  exercise.  This  is  an  exaggerated 
case ;  but  myriads  have  been  too  busy  to  spend  a 
quarter  of  an  hour  a  day,  which  would  amount  to  less 
than  four  days  in  a  year,  in  saving  time  which  might 
amount  to  many  weeks  every  year. 

If  in  life  we  aim  to  do  either  everything  or  almost 
everything  through  our  bodies  ;  if  through  them  we 
move  and  act,  speak,  write,  think,  remember,  feel,  see, 
hear :  then,  for  all  purposes  of  life,  proper  training  is 
worth  while,  so  long  as  it  be  regarded  as  a  means 
towards  an  end. 

Here,  of  course,  we  must  chiefly  consider  the  value  of 
training  for  Racquets  and  Tennis. 

The  value  of  training  for  Racquets  and  Tennis  will 
depend  largely  on  the  answer  to  the  question  :  Is  it 
worth  while  to  play  Racquets  and  Tennis  well,  or,  rather, 
to  improve  at  Racquets  and  Tennis?  We  shall  deal 
with  the  value  of  these  games,  in  special  Chapters.  For 
the  present  let  us  be  content  to  say  :  Yes,  it  is  abundantly 
worth  while,  from  all  points  of  view — physical,  aesthetic, 
intellectual,  moral,  social,  economical,  prospective. 

But  how  shall  we  train?  There  are  certain  general 
rules  which  will  be  worked  out  more  fully  in  a  special 
volume  which  Mr.  E.  F.  Benson  and  I  are  preparing  for 
the  Imperial  Athletic  Library.  And  among  these  rules 
the  following  is  pre-eminent,  that  the  things  which  are 
done  most  frequently  should  be  practised  most  carefully. 


4  INTRODUCTORY  NOTE   ON  TRAINING 

We  should  practise  most  carefully  a  correct,  full,  slow 
breathing  through  the  nose,  and  a  thorough  mastication 
of  the  food. 

Practice  of  exercises  should  not  be  continued  for  long 
periods  of  time  together  ;  it  is  better  to  use  the  odd 
moments  which  otherwise  one  would  waste.  Easy 
conditions  should  be  chosen,  and  a  large,  free,  well- 
ventilated  room  is  of  importance. 

The  increase  should  be  gradual — the  increase  in  the 
number  of  exercises,  the  pace,  the  endurance,  the 
promptitude  and  the  rapid  control,  and  the  power  of 
adaptation. 

But  correctness  must  come  first  and  foremost ;  and 
therefore  there  must  be  at  the  start,  for  most  of  us,  slow- 
ness and  carefulness  and  concentration  of  mind.  A 
complex  exercise  must  be  split  up  into  many  parts,  and 
each  part  must  be  made  half-automatic  by  itself  before 
the  different  parts  be  combined. 

Last  of  all,  a  certain  amount  of  strength  may  be 
added  by  strain  and  resistance  ;  but  it  is  a  grand  mistake 
to  set  strength  and  strain  first  and  foremost.  This  is 
against  the  order  of  natural  development.  That  word 
"development"  is  responsible  for  many  mistakes.  All 
sorts  of  so-called  trainers  offer  to  "  develop "  muscles ; 
but  it  matters  little  whether  the  muscles  be  very  large  or 
not.  The  question  is  not.  How  large  are  our  muscles  ? 
What  weight  can  we  lift  with  our  muscles.-'  but.  What 
can  our  muscles  do  for  us  .-•  If  they  can  only  look  large 
and  lift  a  great  load,  they  are  of  very  little  service  in 
ordinary  life,  and  probably  do  considerable  harm  to  the 
nervous  system. 

What  I  say  will  have  been  founded  chiefly  on  personal 
experience :  for  I  believe  that  this  must  form  the 
basis  of  any  sound  system  of  health.     I  do  not  mean 


INTRODUCTORY  NOTE  ON  TRAINING  5 

that  what  suits  one  person  will  necessarily  suit  every 
other  person — far  from  it :  but  at  any  rate  it  may  be 
worth  an  individual  trial.  I  have  found  that  what  I 
recommend  here  as  worth  an  individual  trial  has  made  a 
great  difference  to  my  own  enjoyment  of  Racquets  and 
Tennis,  and  to  my  standard  of  play,  and  to  my  powers 
of  endurance,  and  also  to  my  capabilities  of  brain-work 
after  exercise :  and  it  seems  reasonable  to  conclude 
that  some  others  may  derive  some  benefit  from  similar 
practices. 

At  any  rate  I  have  been  very  much  struck  with  the 
readiness  of  most  people  to  test  these  methods,  and  also 
with  the  success  which  has  resulted  where  they  have  been 
tested  :  I  have  been  scarcely  less  struck  with  the  utter 
ignorance  that  prevails  almost  throughout  England  and 
America  as  to  anything  like  a  "  Science  "  of  Health  and 
Training.  Such  a  "  Science  "  can  never  be  final  for  all 
individuals  alike.  But  a  careful  study  of  various  one- 
sided systems  has  enabled  me  to  see  already  much 
general  truth  that  they  hold  in  common,  a  little  special 
truth  that  each  holds  as  its  own,  and  in  the  future  a  vast 
mass  of  both  general  and  special  truth,  when  the  subject 
shall  have  ceased  to  be  left  to  uneducated  empirics  and 
cranks  and  shall  be  regarded  as  worthy  of  the  whole-souled 
investigation  of  technically  trained  and  certificated 
specialists. 


CHAPTER   I 

AIR  AND   BREATHING 

Not  only  is  a  good  "  wind  "  essential  to  success  and 
pleasure  at  these  two  active  games,  but  breathing  is  also 
the  commonest  act  in  our  everyday  lives.  I  never  had 
a  lesson  in  breathing  before  I  was  already  over  thirty 
years  of  age.  Till  then  I  used  to  breathe  chiefly  through 
the  mouth,  and  used  to  employ  chiefly  the  lower  part  of 
my  apparatus,  namely  the  abdominal.  Now  I  breathe 
through  the  nose,  and  use  not  only  the  abdominal,  but 
also  the  middle  and  upper  chest-breathing. 

There  are  many  ways  of  breathing,  but  I  think  I  may 
safely  assume  here  that  the  lowest  has  already  been 
developed  :  this  is  a  common  Anglo-Saxon  symptom. 
We  may  therefore  proceed  to  the  development  of  the 
middle  and  upper  parts.  Here  is  one  of  many  exer- 
cises.    It  should  be  added  to  others. 

Keep  the  spine  straight;  that  is  to  say,  let  it  incline 
slightly  forwards,  but  not  to  either  side.  Raise  the  chest 
and  shoulders,  either  before  or  during  a  deep  upward  and 
expanding  breath  through  the  nose.  During  this 
breath  the  head  may  be  slightly  lifted  ;  or,  rather,  it 
should  naturally  throw  itself  back,  as  when  one  first 
scents  the  fresh  sea-breeze  on  a  sunny  day.  Now  hold 
in  this  breath  for  a  little  ;  then  gently  let  it  out,  or  allow 


CH.  I]  AIR  AND  BREATHING  7 

it  to  ooze  out,  to  squeeze  itself  out,  as  an  india-rubber 
bladder  empties  itself  of  air.  '  While  you  are  sending  the 
breath  out  slowly,  you  can  let  the  shoulders  go  down  ; 
though  a  valuable  exercise  (with  a  different  effect)  is  to 
keep  the  shoulders  still  up.  But  anyhow  you  may  relax 
the  arms  (which  should  hang  by  your  side),  feel  them  as 
heavy  leaden  things,  right  down  to  the  finger-tips.  The 
head  will  naturally  sink  forwards  and  downwards. 

The  value  of  correct  breathing  is  inestimable,  so  long 
as  the  air  be  pure.  For  the  oxygen  tends  towards  clean- 
liness and  vigour  of  blood  ;  deep  breathing  tends  towards 
endurance  and,  together  with  muscular  relaxing,  towards 
calmness  and  self-control — qualities  indispensable  to  the 
playing  of  Racquets  and  Tennis,  in  which  it  may  be  fatal 
to  lose  one's  head. 

Other  physical  exercises  which  might  accompany  the 
breathing  inwards  and  outwards  will  be  found  in  '  The 
Training  of  the  Body.'  But  they  are  not  so  important 
as  the  above  simple  rule  of  lifting  the  shoulders  before 
or  during  the  inward  breath,  and  relaxing  the  limbs 
during  the  outward  breath,  for  the  sake  of  economy.  For 
the  purposes  of  self-restraint,  it  is  necessary  to  breathe  in 
slowly ;  then  to  hold  in  the  breath  ;  then  to  breathe  out 
slowly ;  and  then,  as  it  were,  to  hold  out  the  breath. 
The  Hindus  practise  various  breathing-exercises  sedu- 
lously from  their  very  earliest  years.  They  are  the  most 
reposeful  of  people — probably  far  too  reposeful. 

The  three  different  parts  of  the  apparatus  should  be 
developed  separately,  at  intervals  during  the  day.  The 
abdominal  breathing  is  quite  easy ;  the  middle  breath- 
ing is  fairly  easy ;  the  upper  is,  for  many  of  us,  the 
hardest.  But  we  can  breathe  more  thoroughly  with 
each  part  independently,  if  we  put  our  hands  upon  that 
part  and  feel  it  moving  upwards  and  outwards. 


8  HINTS  ON  TRAINING  [pt.  i 

Too  many  deep  breaths  should  not  at  first  be  taken 
in  succession,  lest  giddiness  ensue.  The  best  times  for 
practice  are  the  early  morning  and  the  late  night,  in  a 
bedroom,  where  the  windows  are  to  be  open  both  top  and 
bottom.  But  breathing-exercises  are  quite  feasible  at 
any  odd  moment  during  the  daytime,  especially  when  one 
is  waiting  and  apt  to  be  impatient.  The  deep  full  breath 
should  become  habitual  and  automatic,  and  an  integral 
part  of  one's  very  character.  As  it  becomes  so,  one 
ceases  to  be  flustered  and  worried,  as  players  so  often 
are  before  important  Matches.  If  we  watch  them  care- 
fully, we  see  that  they  are  breathing  quickly  with  a 
shallow  surface-breath.  If  they  could  only  breathe 
deeply  and  slowly,  they  would  soon  become  quite  calm. 
Many  Matches  are  lost  through  sheer  nervousness. 

It  is  a  good  plan  to  take  a  few  extra-deep  breaths 
when  one  first  goes  out  into  the  air  at  the  beginning  of  a 
walk.  Every  morning  without  fail  there  should  be  deep 
breathing,  and  also  every  night,  and  also  just  before  and 
just  after  meals. 

The  whole  body  should  be  made  to  breathe  while  it 
has  its  air-and-light-bath.  During  this  bath  one  could 
take  exercise  or  one  could  do  work.  Benjamin  Franklin 
used  to  do  work :  most  people,  however,  prefer  to  take 
exercise.  But  the  morning  and  the  evening  air-baths, 
and  an  occasional  midday  air-bath  in  a  light-coloured 
and  well-ventilated  room,  are  of  the  greatest  importance. 

The  above  notes  on  breathing  will  give  an  idea  of 
some  of  the  present  habits  of  the  writer  ;  he  is,  however, 
quite  prepared  to  alter  these  habits  and  to  substitute 
better  methods.  He  recommends  them  as  the  best  he 
knows  at  present. 


CHAPTER   II 

FOOD  AND  FEEDING 

If  the  air  is  bad,  it  may  be  well  to  take  in  as  little 
as  possible  ;  and  the  same  will  apply  to  food.  But  the 
problem  arises :  What  food  is  bad  ?  It  is  almost 
entirely  a  matter  for  individuals,  though  some  general 
rules  have  been  laid  down  elsewhere.  And  the  problem 
of  what  is  good  is  also  a  matter  for  individuals,  though 
here  also  general  rules  have  been  laid  down  ;  and  nearly 
twenty  dietaries  have  been  suggested  for  the  choice  of 
experimenters,  so  that,  if  one  fails,  another  may  perhaps 
succeed.  As  yet  there  is  no  such  thing  as  an  ideal 
dietary  for  every  one.  Those  who  say  that  there  is, 
have  failed  to  understand  the  constitution  of  human 
bodies. 

But,  though  there  be  no  universal  law  as  to  the  one 
best  food  for  all  alike,  yet  there  seems  to  be  one  general, 
if  not  universal  law,  as  to  the  way  in  which  we  should 
eat  our  food.  We  cannot  say  exactly  what  we  are  to 
eat,  but  we  can  say  exactly  how  we  are  to  eat — and  that 
is,  slowly.  One  authority  allows  his  food  to  swallow 
itself;  he  simply  chews  it  so  long  as  he  can  taste  it, 
and  the  food  disappears  by  degrees.  Whatever  is  left, 
he  puts  out.  Gladstone  used  to  chew  his  mouthfuls 
about   thirty   times.     If  one   counts   the   bites    for   an 

9 


10  HINTS  ON  TRAINING  [pt.  i 

ordinary  mouthful,  the  number  does  not  prove  so  large 
as  it  sounds  ;  and  of  course  different  numbers  of  jaw- 
movements  will  suit  different  foods  and  different 
individuals.  Starchy  foods  need  most  saliva,  and 
therefore  most  mastication. 

What  shall  we  eat  ?  Here  we  can  only  suggest  a 
sample  or  two  for  a  single  meal  as  being  worth  a  trial. 
For  a  single  meal,  especially  lunch,  one  does  not  mind 
a  trial  experiment :  the  result  of  failure  is  not  so 
disastrous. 

1.  Plasmon,  in  the  form  of  whipped  cream  or  biscuit 
or  blanc-mange,  can  be  eaten  with  fruit.  If  two  ounces 
of  Plasmon  be  taken,  then  theoretically  one  has  a 
complete  meal ;  and  cyclists  are  able  to  do  a  great  deal 
of  work  on  such  a  meal. 

2.  As  an  alternative,  one  might  try  Hovis  or  Ber- 
maline  or  Graham  bread,  toasted  if  possible,  together 
with  cheese  and  salad,  with  which  there  should  be 
oil  and  lemon  (rather  than  vinegar).  This,  again,  is 
theoretically  a  complete  meal. 

3.  Another  meal  would  be  nuts,  either  carefully 
chewed,  or  else  first  passed  through  a  nut-mill,  or  in  the 
form  of  some  nut-product,  together  with  vegetables 
either  steamed  or  cooked  in  a  Duplex  Boilerette  for  the 
sake  of  the  juices,  which  are  usually  thrown  away  by 
English  cooks,  but  are  invaluable  for  the  human  body. 
The  alkaline  juices  do  much  to  counteract  the  acidities 
of  modern  life. 

These  are  three  simple  meals  ;  but  besides  these  there 
is  an  enormous  variety.  These  three  are  my  own 
favourites.  Less  strict  than  these  (according  to  Dr. 
Haig)  would  be  : — 

4.  Raw  eggs  and  milk  mixed  together.  Cyclists  find 
this  most  useful. 


CH.  ii]  FOOD  AND  FEEDING  II 

5.  A  dish  of  a  very  pleasant  flavour  is  the  following, 
for  which  I  am  indebted  to  a  lady-writer  in  '  Health 
and  Strength.' 

Lentils,  to  be  soaked,  in  a  saucepan,  for  about  six 
hours;  then  boiled  in  very  little  water  (which  after- 
wards does  for  stock)  till  they  are  quite  tender.  This  will 
mean  about  twenty  minutes.  Now  take  another  sauce- 
pan, and  in  it  put  a  piece  of  butter  the  size  of  a  walnut, 
and  three  slices  of  eschalots,  Saut6  these,  with  the  lid 
of  the  saucepan  on,  for  another  twenty  minutes,  or  till 
they  smell  cooked.  Then  put  in  the  lentils,  which  shall 
have  been  drained  in  a  cullender ;  stir  in  one  dessertspoon- 
ful of  Plasmon  ;  stir  again  till  the  contents  bubble. 
Add  salt,  and  a  very  little  pepper,  if  you  take  condi- 
ments, and  a  teaspoonful  of  lemon-juice,  and  serve. 

Our  aim  should  be  to  eat  enough  but  not  too  much  of 
the  right  kinds  of  foods. 

Viewed  in  the  light  of  this'  ideal,  our  methods  of 
feeding  in  England  are  extraordinarily  unscientific  : 
while  "  Science "  has  calculated  by  elaborate  experi- 
ments that  an  average  person,  eating  at  an  average  pace, 
needs  about  4  ounces  or  4I  ounces  of  "  Proteid  "  a  day, 
the  family  or  Club  meal-provider  blissfully  ignores  the 
theory  and  provides  sometimes  as  many  as  8  ounces  and 
sometimes  as  few  as  2.  If  people  are  eating  either 
twice  as  much  or  half  as  much  as  they  ought  to  eat, 
can  we  wonder  at  bad  results  ? 

There  is  not  any  need  to  describe  the  ordinary  meal ; 
or  the  ordinary  (far  less  unscientific)  training-meal  ;  for 
every  one  knows  it,  with  its  dry  bread  or  toast,  its 
moderate  allowance  of  drink,  its  plain  meat,  and  perhaps 
plain  pudding.  I  have  preferred  to  suggest  to  readers 
one  or  two  meals  which  they  do  not  know  so  well,  and 


12  HINTS  ON  TRAINING  [PT.  I 

which  they  may  find  useful.  But  of  course  everything 
has  to  be  judged  by  its  results  upon  the  individual. 
The  above  dietaries  seem,  however,  to  be  easily  digested 
by  most  people,  and  pleasant  also  to  most  people. 

There  can  be  little  doubt  that,  for  those  who  live  on 
the  mixed  diet,  flesh-food  is  stimulating  in  its  immediate 
effect.  Therefore  for  such  people  a  meal  containing 
flesh-food,  if  it  be  easily  digested,  may  produce  great 
vigour  and  energy,  even  if  this  feeling  may  tend  to  pass 
off  somewhat  quickly.  Suddenly  to  change  the  diet 
just  before  an  important  match  might  be  a  serious 
mistake.     The  usual  fillip  might  be  sadly  missed. 

If  any  one  wishes  to  make  a  change  of  diet,  it  is  best 
to  make  it  during  Sunday,  or  during  the  holidays,  rather 
than  when  anything  important  is  at  stake  ;  and  it  may 
be  better  to  begin  gradually  than  to  rush  into  any  ex- 
treme form  of  fleshless  foods,  though  hundreds  have  tried 
this  extreme  form  at  once  without  any  disadvantage. 

Having  considered  how  to  eat,  and  what  to  eat,  and 
having  referred  the  reader  to  '  Muscle,  Brain,  and  Diet ' 
for  details,  we  may  now  consider  when  to  eat. 

It  is  generally  assumed  that  the  best  plan  for  the 
Anglo-Saxon  is  a  heavy  breakfast,  a  fairly  heavy 
lunch,  perhaps  an  afternoon  tea,  and  a  very  heavy 
dinner.  Individuals  differ,  and  therefore  again  a  change 
is  worth  trying,  in  case  one  may  be  an  individual  whom 
the  orthodox  plan  does  not  suit.  And,  once  more,  a 
Sunday  or  a  holiday  will  be  the  best  time  for  an 
experiment. 

Breakfast  is  a  meal  with  regard  to  which  a  change 
is  most  likely  to  be  useful.  Dr.  Dewey,  in  America, 
insists  that  every  one  shall  give  up  breakfast  absolutely 
or  almost  absolutely.  For  this  sudden  giving  up  of  a 
meal  there  is  no  vital  necessity.     Instead  of  the  heavy 


CH.  II]  FOOD  AND  FEEDING  13 

breakfast  there  may  be  taken,  for  example,  Plasmon 
cocoa,  or  weak  China  tea,  or  weak  coffee,  or  hot  water, 
either  with  Hovis  toast  and  butter,  or  with  fruit : 
banana,  orange,  grapes,  or  apple  may  be  best.  Hundreds 
find  this  fruit-breakfast  plan  admirable.  If  it  can  be 
taken  without  cocoa  or  tea  or  coffee,  or  hot  water,  so 
much  the  better. 

With  regard  to  drink,  it  is  a  safe  rule  to  avoid 
stimulants  as  much  as  is  feasible.  With  stimulants  I 
have  made  many  experiments,  and  especially  with  tea ; 
and  my  conclusion  is  that  in  perfect  training  one  does 
not  need  tea,  but  that,  if  one  is  already  exhausted  and 
yet  feels  that  he  must  play  the  game  out,  it  may  be  better 
to  take  tea  or  some  other  acid.  Meanwhile,  however, 
one  must  try  to  find  out  how  to  get  rid  of  the  desire  for 
stimulants.  Do  not  give  them  up  completely  just  before 
an  important  match,  but  give  them  up  when  nothing  of 
vital  moment  is  at  hand. 

In  order  to  get  rid  of  the  desire,  a  useful  plan  is  to 
cut  off  a  meal  or  two  absolutely,  to  take  an  air-bath 
and  light-bath  with  brisk  exercise  and  muscular  relax- 
ing, and  to  give  the  system  a  tonic  by  means  of  cold 
water  pourings,  followed  by  rubbings.  I  have  had 
numbers  of  letters  from  those  who  have  tried  this  triple 
plan  of  fasting,  air-and-light-baths  with  exercise  and 
relaxing,  and  water-treatments  ;  and  they  say  that  the 
desire  for  stimulants  has  very  soon  disappeared. 

As  a  rule,  little  or  nothing  should  be  drunk  during  a 
meal,  and  what  is  drunk  should  be  drunk  slowly  rather 
than  fast. 

As  to  the  temperature,  cool  water  is  probably  the 
best  drink  for  health,  if  we  do  not  take  our  drink  in 
the  form  of  the  soft  water  which  is  found  in  fruits  and 
properly  cooked  vegetables. 


CHAPTER   III 

PREPARATORY  AND   SUPPLEMENTARY  EXERCISES 
I.   PREPARATORY   EXERCISES 

Although  we  shall  deal  with  the  question  more 
fully  in  a  later  Chapter,  it  may  be  as  well  to  state  here 
that  preparatory  exercises  cannot  be  a  waste  of  time 
provided  that  Racquets  and  Tennis  themselves  are  not 
a  v/aste  of  time.  We  hear  many  learned  theorists,  with 
three-quarters  of  their  muscles  (and  nerves)  unexercised 
and  atrophied,  storm  against  the  attention  given  to 
games.  But,  if  games  are  to  be  played  at  all,  they  may 
as  well  be  played  in  the  least  incorrect  way.  And,  if 
they  are  not  to  be  played  at  all,  or  merely  to  be  played 
for  the  sake  of  exercise,  in  either  case  we  had  better 
learn  as  early  as  possible  how  to  use  these  muscles  in 
some  occupation  or  other.  They  were  not  given  us 
to  be  sacrificed  on  the  altar  of  information-cramming. 
And  it  seems  to  me  that,  granted  we  had  better  learn 
how  to  use  them,  we  may  use  them  in  the  following 
ways  with  as  much  advantage  as  in  other  ways.  If, 
incidentally,  these  ways  shall  help  to  raise  our  standard 
and  therefore  to  give  us  more  interest  and  more  enjoy- 
ment in  athletics,  what  harm  ?  Surely  a  quarter  of  an 
hour  a  day  is  not  a  morbid  space  of  time  to  devote 

14 


CH.  Ill]  EXERCISES  15 

to  physical  development  and  grace  and  activity  and 
health. 

These  special  exercises  are  only  a  few  out  of  many. 
They  are  not  play,  they  are  not  strokes  :  they  are  the 
component  parts  which  go  to  make  up  strokes.  They 
have  to  be  combined  in  strokes  before  they  can  be  of 
much  service.  The  correct  stroke  is  a  correct  (and 
correctly  timed)  harmonising  of  many  correct  parts. 
Unless  each  part  be  correct  per  se,  the  whole  will  fail  to 
be  correct. 

As  we  use  our  muscles  outside  the  Court,  so  we  shall 
tend  to  use  them  inside  the  Court  also.  "  As  without, 
so  within."  The  habits  formed  in  preparation-time  will 
be  carried  on  into  the  time  of  action. 

It  is  only  the  genius-player  who  will  not  need  to 
prepare  by  means  of  any  such  arts.  He  has  his 
mechanism  already  automatic.  And  even  the  veriest 
duffer  will  gradually  cease  to  need  such  conscious 
preparation  ;  if  only  he  gives  enough  attention  at  the 
start,  he  will  soon  be  able  to  hand  over  the  direction  of 
the  movements  to  his  sub-conscious  servant,  the  inner 
mind. 

Out  of  the  list  I  should  select,  for  preference,  the 
large-muscle  movements.  The  larger  muscles  give  more 
reliable  strokes  than  the  smaller  muscles,  as  I  have 
shown  in  '  The  Training  of  the  Body.' 

The  immediate  effects  may  not  be  altogether  satis- 
factory. One  of  the  first  signs  of  progress  may  be  a 
backward-movement — a  breaking-up  of  the  old  growths 
that  the  new  plant  may  receive  all  the  nourishment. 
It  seems  to  me  that  it  is  better  to  get  through  our 
preparation  outside  the  Court,  so  that  when  we  come 
into  the  Court  we  may  play  and  no  longer  toil. 
Besides  this,  if  we  practise  part-by-part  we  may  be  able 


l6  HINTS  ON  TRAINING  [PT.  i 

to  teach  others,  and  to  detect  and  correct  what  is  amiss 
in  ourselves.  The  conductor  of  an  orchestra  (Richter  is 
a  good  example)  can  best  detect  which  particular 
instrument  is  out  of  tune  or  out  of  time  if  he  can  play 
each  instrument  himself 

Having  gone  through  his  apprenticeship,  then  the 
player  may  dare  to  be  original.  But  to  go  through  the 
apprenticeship  first  will  save  much  money  and  time  and 
disappointment. 

It  must  not  be  concluded  that,  by  practice  of  the 
system  recommended  here,  all  hope  of  developing  a  new 
and  original  Service  or  whatever  it  may  be,  individual 
to  the  player,  is  lost.  Even  in  the  most  sedulous  imita- 
tion of  certain  strokes  admittedly  the  invention  of 
certain  players,  the  personal  equation  will  find  room  to 
assert  itself;  and  the  conscientious  analyser  of  his  and 
other  men's  games  has  as  good  a  chance  as  the  unrecking 
genius  of  creating  a  stroke  or  method  so  uniquely  his 
own  that  it  must  bear  his  name.  The  careful  student 
will  have  this  advantage  that,  when  he  does  it,  he  will 
know  what  he  is  doing,  and  why,  and  how.  And  he  will 
be  able  to  tell  others,  and  to  talk  intelligently  and 
intelligibly  about  his  play  and  theirs. 

Of  all  systems  of  practice  for  Racquets  and  Tennis, 
probably  the  average  "  Physical  Culture  "  exercises  are 
the  worst ;  for  they  tend  to  produce  slowness  and 
muscle-bound  over-developed  arms  and  chest,  and  utterly 
inadequate  legs.  The  Macdonald  Smith  system  is 
certainly  among  the  best. 

His  system  may  be  called  the  Fast  Full  Movement 
System.  It  aims  at  giving  independent  control  of  each 
part  of  the  body  and  of  any  required  combinations  of 
parts.     It  acts  as  a  nerve-tonic,  and  demands  very  little 


CH.  Ill]  EXERCISES  17 

exertion,  so  that  after  it  the  person  feels  fresher  than 
before  it.  Each  movement  is  carried  out  briskly  and 
promptly,  and  as  far  as  it  will  go  in  both  directions. 

This  system  I  have  adapted  and  amended.  Besides 
the  Fast  Full  Movements,  there  should  be  Fast  Partial 
(or  Arrested)  Movements.  Stand  upright,  and  put  your 
right  hand  against  the  front  of  your  left  shoulder.  Now 
swing  it  round  briskly  with  a  snap  as  far  as  it  will  go, 
till  it  stands  out  like  a  sign-post  to  your  right,  in  a  line 
with  your  two  shoulders.  Now  bring  it  back  again  as 
far  as  it  will  go  to  its  place  on  the  left  shoulder.  This 
is  a  Macdonald  Smith  Fast  Full  Movement  exercise. 
To  this  I  should  add  the  Fast  Partial  (or  Arrested) 
Movement.  Starting  in  the  same  position,  let  the  arm 
fly  out  briskly  a  quarter  of  the  way,  and  stop  there  ; 
and  then  come  back  again  briskly  to  the  left  shoulder. 
Then  let  it  come  out  half  the  way,  so  that  it  points 
straight  in  front  of  you,  then  back  briskly  ;  then  the 
whole  way,  then  back  briskly;  then  back  once  more. 
Starting  from  the  right  side  of  you,  in  the  sign-post 
position,  let  it  move  a  quarter  of  the  way  towards  the 
left,  then  back ;  then  half-way,  then  back  ;  then  three- 
quarters  of  the  way,  then  back ;  then  the  whole  way, 
then  back.  By  this  means  we  acquire  the  power  of  a 
partial  stroke  or  partial  movement.  We  do  not  always 
wish  to  run  from  terminus  to  terminus.  Throughout  life 
we  need  the  power  of  stopping  suddenly  at  any  given 
point,  and  of  starting  suddenly  from  any  given  point. 

To  this  system  of  Fast  Full  and  Fast  Partial  (Arrested) 
Movements,  we  must  certainly  add  the  system  of  mus- 
cular relaxing,  so  that  those  muscles  of  the  body  which 
are  not  being  used  shall  be  quiet,  and  shall  not  waste 
energy  by  motion  or  by  tension.  This  is  for  the  sake 
not  only  of  gracefulness  but  also  of  economy. 
4 


i8  HINTS  ON  TRAINING  [pt.  i 

Especially  valuable  as  preparatory  exercises  for 
Racquets  and  Tennis  and  Squash  are  the  following. 

1 .  Foot-  iHovemen  is. 

The  Macdonald  Smith  Foot-Exercises  are  invaluable 
for  rapidity  and  readiness.  But  there  is  no  space  to 
describe  these  fully  in  this  present  volume.  We  must 
be  content  to  suggest  one  or  two  movements  that  do 
not  belong  to  his  list. 

Stand  with  the  body  inclined  slightly  forwards,  the 
feet  about  12  to  18  inches  apart,  the  toes  turning 
slightly  outwards.  Now  shift  your  weight  and  start 
first  in  one  direction,  then  in  another.  Be  prepared, 
as  it  were,  to  throw  your  body  in  this  direction,  or  in 
that,  without  losing  your  balance. 

The  feet  may  then  move  so  as  to  get  ready  for  a 
Forehand  position  or  a  Backhand  position.  A  Diagram 
of  the  steps  will  be  found  in  Chapters  IX  and  X. 

We  shall  see  below  that  the  best  players,  when  they 
are  running  to  take  a  ball,  do  not  run  in  the  ordinary 
way,  but  first  get  into  position,  and  then  run.  Peter 
Latham  is  the  clearest  example.  Directly  he  sees  to 
which  side  a  ball  is  coming,  he  immediately  gets  into 
position  and  faces  sideways  ;  then  he  runs  to  the  ball, 
still  facing  sideways.  Therefore  it  is  essential  that  a 
player  should  practise  running  not  only  with  his  body 
facing  straight  forwards,  but  also  with  his  body  facing 
sideways.  And  in  the  two  sideways  positions.  Fore- 
hand and  Backhand,  he  should  be  able  to  move  forward 
or  backwards  or  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  without  delay 
and  without  loss  of  the  invaluable  poise. 

2.  The  Body-swing  is  essential  to  success  in  Racquets 
and  Tennis  and  Squash.  The  feet  and  head  and  eyes 
should  be  kept  as  still  as  possible.  Meanwhile  the  body 
should  swing,  first  round  to  the  right,  and  then  round  to 


fc 


m 


V 


CH.  Ill]  EXERCISES  19 

the  left — very  much  as  though  one  were  playing  Golf, 
except  that  there  should  be  the  equally  powerful  and 
vigorous  swing  in  both  directions.  This  is  almost  the 
foundation  of  a  successful  stroke  of  the  ordinary  kind 
for  the  ordinary  player.  It  should  not  be  practised  too 
quickly  nor  too  violently  nor  too  fully  at  first.  After 
practising  it,  one  finds  that  one  will  be  able  to  move 
more  quickly  and  more  completely  day  by  day.  The 
Illustrations  (I  and  II)  will  show  the  two  positions. 

3.  Most  people  will  find  it  hard  to  keep  their  head 
still  while  they  are  moving  their  trunk  thus  ;  and  there- 
fore it  is  important  to  practise  neck-exercises.  Stand 
upright  and  face  forwards.  Now  move  the  head  slowly 
round  to  the  right,  then  slowly  round  to  the  left.  Do 
not  strain  at  first,  but  increase  the  distance  gradually 
day  by  day.  The  head  may  also  be  moved  in  other 
directions,  e.  g.  up  and  down.,. 

4.  Eye-exercises  are  almost  unknown  in  physical  train- 
ing. But  how  indispensable  they  are  for  most  games 
and  athletics.  We  can  hold  our  heads  still  and  look, 
with  our  eyes  alone,  first  from  side  to  side,  then  up  and 
down,  then  from  upper  right  corner  to  lower  right 
corner,  then  from  upper  right  corner  to  lower  left  corner, 
and  so  on. 

5.  Observation-practice  must  be  classed  under  prepara- 
tory exercises.  Notice  some  object,  say  a  picture  on  a 
wall  or  a  handle  on  a  door ;  now  shut  your  eyes  and  try 
to  reproduce  it  in  imagination  ;  then  open  your  eyes 
again,  and  correct  your  mental  copy  ;  then  shut  your  eyes 
again,  and  again  try  to  reproduce  the  original  correctly. 
This  exercise  can  be  easily  repeated  in  trains  and 
rooms. 

With  regard  to  this  important  branch  of  training,  I 
wrote  in  another  book  as  follows: — 


20  HINTS  ON  TRAINING  [pt.  i 

"We  seldom  regard  the  eye  as  being  worked  by  muscles,  and 
yet  of  course  it  is.  And  we  can  exercise  the  eye  in  many  ways. 
Later  on  we  shall  see  the  value  of  a  correct  picture  of  the  Court  in 
one's  mind's  eye,  even  while  one's  '  body's  eye '  is  fixed  on  the  ball. 
Besides  this  practice  in  the  registry  of  sights,  it  is  possible  to  treat 
the  eyeball  as  a  kind  of  hand.  Let  it  move  (at  first  slowly,  then 
with  increasingly  fast  and  full  movements  in  both  directions)  from 
side  to  side  and  back  again.  .  .  .  How  strange  these  movements 
seem  at  first.  And  yet  why  should  one  always  move  the  whole 
head  in  order  to  see  something,  as  if  one  were  just  an  average 
animal  ? " 


6.  For  the  shoulder,  with  which  we  should  be  able  to 
add  a  great  deal  of  power  to  the  stroke,  the  next  move- 
ment should  be  tried  with  a  jerk.  Imagine  that  you 
want  to  strike  with  your  shoulder  something  which  is  in 
the  air  a  few  inches  in  front  of  it.  Then  draw  the 
shoulder  sharply  back  again,  as  far  as  it  will  go. 

7.  A  good  quick  movement  for  the  arm  as  a  whole 
has  already  been  described.  The  arm  was,  in  this 
exercise,  on  a  level  with  the  shoulders.  It  should  be 
moved  also  on  a  lower  level,  and  on  a  higher  level. 
And  another  swinging  exercise  for  the  arms,  when  the 
arms  go  not  across  but  up  and  down,  is  also  admirable. 
Here,  again,  the  arms  should  move  in  at  least  four 
directions,  the  right  arm  coming  up  as  high  as  it  will  go 
in  front  of  the  left  shoulder,  and  then  back  again  as  far 
and  as  high  as  it  will  go  ;  then  high  up  in  front  of  the 
right  shoulder,  then  back  again ;  then  high  up  still  more 
to  the  right ;  then  high  up  in  a  line  with  the  shoulders. 
The  Arrested  Movements  should  be  added. 

8.  The  forearm  should  be  exercised.  Bend  the  arm 
briskly  at  the  elbow,  bringing  the  hand  up  towards  the 
right  shoulder.  Then  let  it  move  briskly  down  again,  as 
if  one  were  trying  to  hit  a  fly.  Other  Fast  Full  Move- 
ments  are   good  here.     There   are  five  or   six   of  the 


^ 


Fig.  7. — A  Waiting  Position. 


(See  page  64.) 


CH.  Ill]  EXERCISES  21 

simpler   kind.     To   these   should   again    be   added  the 
Arrested  Movements. 

9.  A  useful  zvrist-exercise  has  been  suggested  in  '  The 
Game  of  Squash.'  A  Photograph  of  the  exercise  is 
given  here  (III,  IV,  and  V).  This,  with  the  other 
movements,  should  be  fast  and  full  in  both  directions, 
i.e.  from  III  to  V,  and  from  V  to  III,  though  the  fast 
and  partial  movements  (e.g.  from  III  to  IV  and  back, 
and  from  IV  to  V  and  back)  should  not  be  neglected. 

For  the  special  Racquet-stroke  which  Latham  uses,  I 
must  refer  to  a  later  Chapter. 

10.  A  thumb-movement  is  represented  in  Illustrations 
Via  and  VI/3. 

It  is  also  useful  for  Lawn  Tennis  Backhand  strokes 
(as  Burke  and  Mr.  R.  F.  Doherty  do  them),  as  well  as 
for  Ping-Pong. 

All  the  exercises — except  the  neck-exercise — should 
be  done  with  a  snap,  but  not  to  excess  at  first ;  the 
increase  should  be  gradual. 

While  one  is  practising,  one  should  have  good  air, 
good  light,  and  little  or  no  clothing.  The  other  muscles 
should  be  relaxed  when  they  are  not  wanted,  but  should 
be  exercised  afterwards.  After  one  has  practised,  one 
should  wash  and  rub  the  body. 

The  exercises  should  be  tried  one  at  a  time,  rather 
than  all  in  succession.  Each  should  be  repeated  by 
itself,  until  it  shall  have  become  easy  and  nearly  auto- 
matic. To  do  a  few  of  these  movements  often,  may  be 
better  than  to  do  many  of  them  at  a  long  stretch.  But 
individuals  differ  in  their  ways  of  learning. 

The  list  should  be  enlarged  and  emended  by  each 
reader  for  himself.  Thus  some  readers  may  add  to  it 
the  use  of  the  skipping-rope,  others  the  whipping  of  the 
peg-top,  which  Latham  recommends. 


22  HINTS  ON  TRAINING  [pt.  I 


2.   SUPPLEMENTARY  EXERCISES 

No  game  will  exercise  all  the  muscles  of  the  body 
thoroughly ;  and,  though  Racquets  and  Tennis  may 
exercise  many,  they  also  leave  some  parts  undeveloped. 
These  should  be  developed  by  the  Fast  Full  Movements, 
and  by  the  Fast  Partial  (Arrested)  Movements. 

In  addition  to  this  brisk  motion,  there  should  be 
practice  in  relaxing  the  whole  of  the  body,  part  by  part. 
Miss  A.  P.  Call  in  America,  and  Mrs.  William  Archer 
in  England,  are  the  chief  exponents  of  this  system  of 
repose  and  extension.  It  cannot  be  described  adequately 
here.  It  is,  however,  essential  to  correct  play  that  the 
parts  which  are  not  being  used  should  not  be  held 
rigidly  strained.  It  is  not  enough  merely  to  keep  them 
still ;  they  should  as  a  general  rule  be  kept  relaxed  and 
limp. 

Extension,  especially  of  the  extremities,  should  be  a 
part  of  the  physical  education  of  every  one.  Delsarte 
was  the  chief  exponent  of  the  importance  of  extension. 

The  left  side  should  be  exercised  as  well  as  the  right. 
In  England  we  leave  it  almost  altogether  in  the  back- 
ground. There  is  no  need  to  be  absolutely  ambidextrous ; 
in  fact,  the  right  and  the  left  sides  seem  to  have  some- 
what different  functions  (as  we  have  explained  in  '  The 
Training  of  the  Body').  But  the  left  side  should  be  able 
to  move  itself  almost  as  well  as  the  right.  The  prepara- 
tory exercises  suggested  in  this  Chapter  should  be 
applied  to  the  left  side  as  well  as  to  the  right ;  and  the 
two  sides  should  be  moved  independently.  A  great 
fault  of  nearly  every  system  of  "  Physical  Culture "  is 
that  the  two  sides  are  moved  together.  He  who  has 
practised  them  separately  can  soon  learn  afterwards  to 


CH.  Ill]  EXERCISES  23' 

practise  them  together.  He  who  has  always  practised 
them  together  will  find  it  very  hard  afterwards  to  practise 
them  separately.  Handicap  games  should  occasionally 
be  played  left-handed. 

It  is  needless  to  say  that  Boxing,  Fencing,  and 
"  Bartitsu "  are  among  the  very  best  supplementary 
exercises  for  Tennis  and  Racquets,  though  they  also 
might  be  classed  among  preparatory  exercises. 

More  especially  supplementary  are  continuous  running, 
of  which  one  has  very  little  in  these  games ;  and  move- 
ments of  strength  and  strain,  such  as  one  gets  in  Rowing 
and  Gymnastics.  But  we  cannot  too  often  insist  that 
movements  of  strength  or  strain,  obstacle-movements, 
movements  to  which  there  is  much  resistance,  should 
not  be  tried  by  any  one  until  he  shall  first  have  acquired 
correctness  and  ease  and  rapidity  and  promptitude  in 
the  movements  themselves,  and  independent  control  of 
the  two  sides  of  the  body.  Till  then,  "  Sandowism  "  is  a 
grand  mistake,  whatever  may  be  its  value  afterwards. 
Mere  "  development "  and  size  is  not  enough  per  se. ' 
"  Use  determines  all  things."  Muscles  should  be  prompt 
to  obey,  prompt  to  move  quickly,  prompt  to  combine 
quickly,  skilled  to  work  economically,  expressive  of 
grace,  capable  of  endurance.  After  all  these  qualities 
are  ours  it  will  be  time  enough  for  weight-lifting  and  for 
heavy  dumb-bells. 


CHAPTER   IV 

HEAT,  WATER,   MASSAGE 

It  is  a  hopeful  sign  that  the  Turkish  Bath  is  coming 
into  common  use  in  England,  especially  in  the  form  of 
the  Bath-Cabinet,  which  is  far  better  than  the  larger 
form  of  Turkish  Bath  ;  since  with  it  the  head  can  breathe 
cool  and  fresh  air.  The  finest  form  of  Turkish  Bath  is 
that  in  which  the  heat  is  given  by  electric  lights ;  they 
meanwhile  play  upon  the  body  and  give  it  a  light-bath. 
But  this  form  of  bath  is  somewhat  expensive. 

The  general  rules  for  water-treatment  are  as  follows: — 

1.  One  should  be  either  hot  or  warm  before  one  uses 
cool  or  cold  water.  One  can  become  hot  or  warm  by 
exercise  or  by  massage  or  by  friction,  or  by  hot  or  warm 
water  or  air. 

2.  One  should  wet  oneself  with  warm  water  before  one 
applies  soap. 

3.  One  should  take  cool  or  cold  water  after  hot  or 
warm  water,  except  after  very  hot  water  such  as  the 
Japanese  sometimes  use  at  midday,  as  a  tonic-bath  to 
close  the  pores  of  the  skin.  Many  American  players 
prefer  this  very  hot  bath  after  Racquets  or  Tennis  or 
Squash.     They  never  catch  cold  as  the  result  of  it. 

4.  The  cool  or  cold  water  need  not  be  given  to  the 

24 


CH.  IV]  HEAT,    WATER,  MASSAGE  25 

body  all  at  once.  One  can  have  a  partial  cool  or  cold 
washing,  as  one  can  have  a  partial  air-bath. 

5.  After  the  bath,  there  should  be  rubbings  of  the 
whole  body  with  a  not  too  rough  towel  ;  and  during  and 
after  the  bath  there  should  be  singing.  People  do  not 
sing  nearly  often  enough, — at  least  not  nearly  often 
enough  for  their  own  health  and  pleasure. 

Besides  the  rubbings  after  the  bath,  every  one  should 
learn  a  few  of  the  principles  of  massage.  Massage  may 
be  done  either  with  the  hands  or  with  a  glove  or  with  a 
soft  towel.  Only  one  form  of  it  need  be  suggested  here 
as  a  sample.  This  may  be  massage  by  pressure  or  by 
pinching.  Starting  at  the  part  of  the  body  which  is  just 
above  the  right  leg,  move  upward  to  below  the  right 
ribs,  then  across  the  body  to  below  the  ribs  on  the  other 
side  ;  then  down  again  as  far  as  the  left  leg.  This  is 
good  massage  for  the  colon,  and  will  help  to  cure  con- 
stipation. Other  forms  of  it  should  be  learnt  from 
Turkish  Bath  attendants.  It  is  partly  owing  to  massage 
and  rubbing,  as  well  as  to  general  practice  of  a  most 
scientific  kind,  that  the  American  track-athletes  excel  us 
in  Athletic  Sports. 


CHAPTER  V 

REST,  WORK;  AND   MISCELLANEOUS  NOTES 
REST 

Rest  and  sleep  are  vital  to  health.  During  rest  and 
sleep  there  should  of  course  be  good  air.  The  spine 
should  be  kept  straight  laterally,  and  the  muscles  should 
be  relaxed.  They  can  best  be  relaxed  as  one  breathes 
outwards  after  a  deep  and  full  breath  inwards  through 
the  nose.  To  repeat  the  comparison  already  suggested, 
one  should  feel  as  if  each  part  of  one's  body  in  turn  were 
an  air-balloon  losing  its  air  gradually. 

The  feet  should  be  kept  warm.  There  is  a  prejudice 
against  hot-water  bottles  and  other  means  of  warming 
the  extremities ;  but  anything  is  better  than  sleepless- 
ness. There  is  a  word  to  be  said  in  favour  of  comfortable 
night-socks.  Why  should  there  be  anything  unmanly  in 
such  things  if  they  give  one  a  good  night's  rest.  Sleep- 
lessness is  very  far  from  manliness  ! 

For  alternate  hot  and  cold  foot-baths,  slow  chewing  of 
simple  foods  (say  apples,  bananas,  or  rice),  and  other 
feasible  cures  for  insomnia,  I  must  refer  to  a  special 
Chapter  in  '  Avenues  to  Health '  (Sonnenschein,  and 
E.  P.  Dutton,  New  York). 


26 


CH.  v]    REST,    WORK,  MISCELLANEOUS  NOTES      27 


WORK 

Racquets  and  Tennis  are  not  ends  in  themselves.  At 
the  best  they  are  partial  preparations  for  life.  If  we  are 
content  to  have  only  a  preparation  for  life,  and  no  life 
itself,  then  we  are  making  a  serious  mistake.  The  value 
of  these  games  is  in  what  they  enable  us  to  do  in  other 
spheres. 

Besides  this,  brain-work  is  necessary  to  health.  The 
body  cannot  be  healthy  unless  the  brain  have  its  regular 
exercise.  Here,  again,  as  in  food,  the  individual  problem 
comes  in.  There  are  many  ways  of  working.  I  myself, 
at  one  time,  used  to  work  at  my  best  late  at  night.  Then 
I  used  to  work  at  my  best  during  the  morning,  in  bed. 
Now  I  can  work  fairly  well  at  almost  any  time.  But  a 
certain  amount  of  interesting  work  is  to  be  insisted  upon 
if  these  games  are  to  have  anything  like  their  full  value. 

It  is  a  good  plan  to  do  some  work  in  connection  with 
these  games  themselves,  especially  with  the  theory  of 
them :  the  theory  of  positions,  movements,  and  tactics. 
Very  little  has  been  written  about  them  yet,  and  they 
are  well  worth  studying  for  many  reasons. 

The  imagination  should  be  exercised.  One  should 
picture  to  oneself  the  best  players  at  their  best  strokes  ; 
and  not  a  little  improvement  will  be  found  to  result  from 
the  imagination  of  oneself  as  doing  certain  strokes.  To 
imagine  an  action  is  really  to  perform  this  action  in  a 
mild  way. 

And  training  suggests  a  large  number  of  problems 
which  are  worth  working  at :  What  exercises  are  best 
for  certain  purposes,  and  especially  for  certain  strokes  ? 
What  diet  is  best  for  ordinary  life,  if  we  cannot  get  our 
regular  exercise  ?     On  such  matters  we  can  reason,  and 


28  HINTS  ON  TRAINING  [PT.  i 

later  on  we  can  put  our  theories  to  the  test  of  personal 
experience.     Some  brain-work  there  must  be. 


MISCELLANEOUS   NOTES 

Fatness. — Fatness,  beyond  a  certain  degree,  is  a 
positive  disadvantage ;  for  it  means  the  clogging  of 
the  system,  and  extra  weight  for  the  muscles  to  carry. 
Beyond  what  is  needed  to  supply  the  body  with  warmth 
and  energy,  it  is  a  cause  of  strain. 

There  are  three  kinds  of  excessive  bulk,  which  are 
not  altogether  disconnected  one  with  another. 

The  first  is  due  to  acid  fermentation.  In  such  cases,  it 
is  easy  to  avoid  the  causes,  which  may  be  sugar,  potatoes, 
or  other  starchy  foods  like  cabbage-stalks,  oatmeal,  and 
so  on,  according  to  the  individual's  power  of  digestion. 

The  second  kind  is  caused  by  fat  itself,  by  the  excess 
of  starchy  or  oily  foods.  Of  course  a  certain  amount  of 
fat  is  necessary  to  the  system  ;  but  it  seems  to  be  a  safe 
plan  for  most  people  to  add  no  more  to  their  store  when 
they  already  have  an  excessive  store.  By  degrees  the 
fuel  burns  itself  out.  They  can  live  especially  on  a  pure 
Proteid,  like  Plasmon,  and  on  chemical  "  Salts,"  which 
can  be  had  from  fruit.  Fruit  will  give  enough  fibre  and 
water,  and  these  may  help  to  cure  constipatio;i. 

The  third  kind  of  fatty  appearance  and  feeling  is  from 
water.  Here,  also,  we  can  easily  avoid  the  cause  ;  we 
can  cease  to  drink,  especially  at  meals,  till  our  weight  be 
right  again ;  or  we  can  sip  what  we  drink  ;  or  we  can 
take  very  acid  drinks,  which  quench  the  thirst  better, 
and  are  thus  needed  in  smaller  quantities. 

Staleness. — A  usual  remedy  for  staleness  is  champagne 
and  a  large  dinner.     This  remedy  is,  to  say  the  least  of 


CH.  V]    REST,    WORK,   MISCELLANEOUS  NOTES       29 

it,  expensive ;  nor  is  it  always  reliable.  The  absolute 
reverse  of  it  may  be  preferable  in  many  instances : 
namely,  to  drop  meals  altogether,  if  there  be  no  Match 
in  the  immediate  future  ;  and,  in  lieu  of  the  meals,  to 
take  water,  especially  hot  water ;  or  else  to  change  the 
diet,  or  the  air,  or  the  scene,  or  the  exercise  itself. 
Instead  of  exercise  one  may  take  an  extra  dose  of 
muscular  relaxing. 

But  the  ideal  is  not  to  get  stale  at  all,  to  avoid  over- 
training, and  especially  to  avoid  such  mischiefs  as 
constipation. 

Constipation. — If  I  seem  to  lay  undue  stress  on  this 
question  of  constipation,  it  is  because  it  has  been  said 
that  nine-tenths  of  the  English  people  are  constipated. 
In  seeking  a  remedy,  we  must  try  to  get  at  the  primary 
causes,  even  though  in  individual  examples  the  causes 
might  be  quite  different.  The  following  are  suggested 
as  possible   remedies  in  ordinary  cases. 

Avoid  meats  and  flesh-foods  in  general  ;  and  avoid 
certain  starchy  foods  also,  especially  the  white  starchy 
foods — white  bread,  potatoes,  etc.  Instead  of  these, 
take  Graham  or  wholemeal  bread,  if  it  suits  you,  and 
such  fruits  as  are  the  most  aperient  for  you.  These  may 
be  apples,  or  prunes,  or  figs,  or  raisins. 

Try  special  exercises,  such  as  the  body-swing  (Chapter 
III),  and  others  which  are  mentioned  in  'Avenues  to 
Health.' 

The  massage  of  the  colon  is  useful  (Chapter  III),  as 
well  as  other  forms  of  massage  also. 

Hot  water  may  be  drunk  in  the  early  morning  ;  and 
the  hot  or  warm  hip-bath  may  prove  valuable.  Cold 
water  pourings  down  the  spine  may  also  be  effective. 

The  enema  has  its  function ;  but  it  is  not  a  thing  to 


30  HINTS  ON  TRAINING  [pt.  i 

be  depended  upon.  What  has  been  said  about  drugs 
will  apply  to  this  remedy.  If  it  remove  the  constipa- 
tion, so  that  after  a  time  it  becomes  unnecessary,  then 
it  is  good ;  and,  even  if  it  remove  the  constipation 
and  still  remain  a  necessity,  it  may  still  be  better  than 
constipation  itself,  and  better  than  most  drugs.  But  the 
ideal  is  to  have  something  which  will  first  effect  its  end, 
and  then  cease  to  be  necessary  at  all.  One  needs  some- 
thing to  enable  nature  to  work  by  itself  What  the  best 
cure  will  be  in  any  individual  case  we  cannot  possibly 
say.  It  may  be  a  dose  of  castor  oil,  or  something  else. 
But  all  are  agreed  that  constipation  is  one  of  the  greatest 
evils  of  the  age,  and  must  be  removed. 

Nervousness  and  the  '■^Needle!' — Nervousness  is  a  grand 
error  in  training.  It  means  a  loss  of  muscular  as  well  as 
of  mental  energy ;  and  the  best  cure  for  it  is  usually 
found  to  be  deep  breathing  (which  we  have  mentioned 
above),  followed  by  muscular  relaxing  during  the  out- 
ward breath. 

Some  persons  find  "  Self-suggestion  "  of  value.  This  is 
held  to  be  most  effective  late  at  night,  just  before  sleep. 
It  is  not  to  be  confused  with  hypnotism.  It  is  rather  an 
extension  of  that  principle  by  which  we  suggest  to  our- 
selves that  we  shall  wake  early  next  morning.  Instead 
of  saying,  "I  will  get  up  at  six  o'clock  to-morrow,"  we 
may  say,  "  I  will  be  calm." 

Others  may  prefer  other  interesting  occupations  and 
hobbies. 

But  anything  is  better  than  nervousness,  because  it 
achieves  absolutely  no  useful  purpose.  It  shows  itself  in 
an  anxious  and  tense  expression  of  face,  and  in  physical 
weakness  and  trembling.  Whatever  will  remove  these 
physical  signs  will  also  go  far  towards  removing  the 


CH.  V]    REST,    WORK,  MISCELLANEOUS  NOTES      31 

anxiety  and  nervousness  themselves.  A  special  book 
will  be  devoted  to  this  important  subject ;  for  we 
cannot  be  reminded  too  often  that  nervous  anxiety  is  an 
absolute  curse.  It  does  no  one  any  good  ;  and  it  is 
often  the  most  practical  form  of  blasphemy,  implying 
that  we  fear  there  is  none  who  has  the  power  to  set 
things  right. 


Part  II 
RACQUETS,   TENNIS,   AND   SQUASH 


PRELIMINARY   NOTE 

Racquets  and  Tennis  are  generally  treated  separately.  Here 
they  are  treated  together  up  to  a  certain  point.  Most  of  that  which 
is  suggested  up  to  this  point,  namely  up  to  the  end  of  Part  II,  will 
apply  also  to  Squash- Racqi'ets  and  Squash-Tennis  ;  much  of  it 
will  apply  to  Fives  and  Lawn  Tennis,  and  not  a  little  to  Cricket, 
Hockey,  and  even  Golf.  It  is  most  important  to  gain  the  right 
position  of  each  part  of  the  body,  and  to  get  the  habit  of  having 
moved  into  this  right  position,  before  one  attempts  to  hit  the  ball 
hard  or  with  a  severe  cut  ;  or  indeed  before  one  attempts  to  hit  the 
ball  at  all.  It  is  most  important  to  make  the  foundation  complete 
and  firm  before  one  attempts  to  build,  and  certainly  before  one 
attempts  to  work  within  the  building.  The  foundation  of  the  Golf 
and  Cricket  stroke,  as  of  the  Racquet,  Tennis,  and  Squash  stroke, 
is  the  right  position  of  the  body  and  especially  of  the  feet.  It  is 
no  simple  matter,  this  right  position,  for  it  also  involves  many 
different  parts  of  the  body,  some  of  which,  owing  to  our  want  of 
physical  training,  are  singularly  rebellious.  The  average  beginner 
may  compare  his  various  muscles  to  pigs  in  clover.  He  can  keep 
a  few  of  them  in  order  ;  but,  while  he  is  attending  to  these  few,  he 
loses  control  of  the  rest.  Even  when  he  has  made  the  two  correct 
positions  for  the  ordinary  Forehand  and  Backhand  strokes  quite 
easy  and  natural,  even  then  it  is  not  easy  for  him  to  pass  rapidly 
into  either  of  them  from  the  waiting  and  alert  position,  and  to  pass 
rapidly  into  the  waiting  and  alert  position  from  either  of  them. 

Therefore,  let  us  take  the  foundation  and  the  scaffolding  common 
to  Tennis  and  Racquets  and  Squash,  in  this  part  of  the  book  ;  and 
then  let  us  consider  this  foundation  and  scaffolding  as  having  been 
built  up  before  we  come  to  treat  Racquets  and  Tennis  separately. 
By  this  means,  to  change  the  comparison,  the  learner  will  have 
killed  three  or  four  birds  with  one  stone.  For  example,  he  who  can 
run  sideways — a  difficult  art— at  Racquets  and  Tennis,  can  run 
sideways  at  Cricket,  Hockey,  and,  as  he  occasionally  should  do,  at 
Football.  He  will  find  it  less  unnatural  to  stand  sideways  at  Golf. 
He  will  also  gain  some  sort  of  foundation  for  Boxing,  Fencing, 
and  other  forms  of  exercise.  He  will  not  have  had  his  originality 
hampered.  On  the  contrary,  he  will  have  acquired  the  means  by 
which  he  can  now  more  safely  and  freely  express  his  originality. 


34 


CHAPTER  VI 

IDEAL  CONDITIONS  FOR  A  GAME 

Before  beginning  the  practical  side  of  this  part  of 
the  work,  let  a  few  words  be  offered  as  to  what  seem 
to  be  the  ideal  conditions  for  a  game  of  Racquets, 
Tennis,  or  Squash. 

First  of  all,  the  game  should  last  the  right  time :  I 
consider  an  hour  to  be  too  short,  at  any  rate  for  an  ordin- 
ary game  of  Tennis,  or  for  a  Four  at  Racquets.  The 
average  time  for  a  good  hard  struggle  I  should  put  down 
at  one  and  a  half  hours.  For  a  game  of  Squash,  three- 
quarters  of  an  hour  may  be  enough. 

Within  the  Court,  the  floor  and  the  walls  (and  the 
Tennis  Penthouse  etc.)  should  be  uniform  and  free  from 
"  tricks  "  :  they  should  be  fairly  fast,  though  it  is  possible 
for  a  Court  to  be  too  fast ;  and  fastness  sometimes  means 
an  unpleasant  or  even  a  dangerous  slipperiness.  But  any- 
how the  floor  and  the  walls  should  be  equally  fast  :  many 
Courts  err  grievously  in  this  respect.  They  are  not 
uniform. 

The  proportions  should  be  as  near  to  the  average  as 
possible  :  I  should  take  as  Courts  of  model  proportions 
the  two  Match-courts  at  Queen's  Club.  There  are  Courts 
in  which  I  prefer  to  play,  but  I  think  the  proportions 
here  are  decidedly  fair  for  every  one. 

35 


36  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

The  light  must  be  good.  This  does  not  mean,  as 
some  seem  to  think,  that  the  light  should  be  good  in 
parts  (like  the  nervous  curate's  egg  at  the  Bishop's 
breakfast),  nor  does  it  mean  that  the  light  should  be 
satisfactory  to  those  who  are  constantly  playing  in 
the  Court  (especially  the  Markers).  There  should  be 
no  glare  from  the  roof  or  the  sides,  no  bright  reflec- 
tion from'  the  floor,  and  no  large  beams  to  obscure  the 
light.  On  the  other  hand,  a  gloomy  Court  is  objection- 
able to  many  players.  I  cannot  but  think  that  most 
Tennis-Courts  are  far  inferior  to  Racquet-Courts  in  their 
light. 

There  should  be  good  balls,  not  greyish  badly-sewn 
polygons  with  loose  skins,  such  as  one  unfortunately  sees 
at  times  in  a  Tennis-Court.  It  is  in  the  outward  make 
of  the  ball  that  the  French  excel  us  ;  as  to  other  and  no 
less  important  qualities,  I  shall  not  speak  yet,  but  it 
would  help  somewhat  towards  the  ideal  conditions  if  we 
had  a  uniform  ball  throughout  the  world.  Racquet  balls 
should  be  of  good  shape  and  well-sewn  with  superior 
thread. 

The  racket  should  be  well-weighted,  well-strung,  and 
with  a  comfortable  handle:  it  has  seemed  to  me  that 
much  remains  yet  to  be  done  to  make  the  handle  of 
the  Tennis-racket  more  comfortable.  An  enterprising 
Firm  might  give  some  attention  to  this  and  try  some 
experiments. 

One  requires  a  good  Marker — not  only  accurate,  but 
also  quick  and  cheerful  and  interested. 

The  opponent  should  be  energetic,  and  the  game 
should  be  so  even  that  both  have  to  play  up  their  hardest: 
this  can  be  arranged  for  by  the  various  Handicaps  to  be 
suggested  later.  The  opponent  should  not  be  too  slow, 
nor  too  serious  and  gloomy ;  he  should  also  not  be  un- 


CH.  VI]      IDEAL  CONDITIONS  FOR  A   GAME  37 

willing  to  applaud  your  good  strokes  and  to  condole 
with  you  on  your  bad  luck ! 

The  pet  strokes  on  which  you  pride  yourself  are  to 
come  off  fairly  frequently,  and,  generally,  you  are  to  be 
in  good  form  and  in  a  good  temper,  the  latter  usually 
resulting  from  the  former. 

A  good  hot  bath  afterwards,  followed  by  cool  or  cold 
water  in  some  form,  and  then  by  a  little  exercise — this 
completes  the  ideal.  Some  would  add  a  whisky-and- 
soda  and  a  smoke. 


430083 


CHAPTER  VII 

MERITS  OF   THE   THREE  GAMES 

"  The  lithe  htle  hand  ball  whether  it  be  of  some  softer  stuffe,  and 
vsed  by  the  hand  alone,  or  of  some  harder,  and  used  with  the 
rackette,  whether  by  tennice  play  with  an  other,  or  against  a  wall 
alone,  to  exercise  the  bodie  with  both  the  handes,  in  euerie  kinde 
of  motion,  that  concemeth  any,  or  all  the  other  exercises,  is  gener- 
ally noted,  to  be  one  of  the  best  exercises  and  the  greatest  preser- 
uatios  of  health." — RicJiard  Mulcaster,  Head-Master  of  Merchant 
Taylors'  School  (and  also  of  St.  Paul's),  1581. 

In  order  that  we  may  understand  the  merits  of 
Racquets  and  Tennis  and  Squash,  we  should  contrast 
them  with  other  games.  In  Cricket,  for  example,  and  in 
many  other  branches  of  athletics,  we  have  the  advantage 
of  open  air  in  the  country ;  but  Cricket  involves  a  great 
deal  of  waiting,  and  it  has  no  system  of  Handicaps. 
Rowing  scarcely  exercises  the  two  sides  of  the  body 
independently  ;  it  does  not  encourage  prompt  change  of 
action  ;  it  is  largely  an  exercise  of  strain.  Running  and 
Track-Athletics  are  apt  to  be  monotonous.  Golf  is 
expensive  of  time  as  well  as  of  money. 

Racquets  and  Tennis,  however,  are  not  complete 
physical  training.  They  should  rather  be  considered  in 
early  life  as  supplementary  to  ordinary  games  and  to 
Rowing — both  supplementary  and  corrective.  Later  on, 
they  may  be  preferred  by  a  large  number  of  people, 

38 


CH.  vii]      MERITS  OF  THE  THREE  GAMES  39 

and  may  be  taken  up  as  a  special  hobby.  But  it  would 
be  a  mistake  to  devote  oneself  to  them  at  a  time  of  life 
when  Cricket,  Baseball,  Football,  and  Hockey  were 
possible ;  although,  if  they  be  rightly  practised,  their 
movements  and  the  qualities  which  they  encourage  form 
valuable  foundations  for  many  other  games. 

In  spite  of  what  is  admitted  in  actual  practice  (as  by 
those  who  select  school-masters  partly  for  their  success 
in  games),  the  fallacy  still  crops  up  from  time  to  time 
in  the  writings  and  sayings  of  those  who  are  not  them- 
selves athletic,  that  games  have  at  the  most  three  main 
functions :  the  first  being  to  increase  the  size  of  the 
muscles,  the  second  to  serve  as  a  change  from  work,  the 
third  to  encourage  frivolity  (or  whatever  they  like  to  call 
it).  Abroad,  there  is  a  still  more  serious  misunder- 
standing. One  cannot  induce  the  average  Professor  in 
Germany  to  realise  that  there  is  any  distinction  between 
games  and  Gymnastics.  He  will  not  see  the  effects  of 
games  upon  any  other  part  of  us  except  the  muscles.  It 
is,  however,  important  that  we  should  know  the  objects 
and  aims  of  what  we  are  doing. 

It  must  be  granted  at  the  start  that  these  two  games 
are  expensive,  though  we  may  doubt  whether  they  are 
much  more  expensive  than  Golf  and  Lawn  Tennis  under 
the  best  conditions.  The  Court  itself,  with  its  rent,  the 
wages  of  the  Marker  and  the  tips  to  the  Marker,  the 
rackets  and  the  balls,  the  baths  and  the  flannels  and  the 
washing  of  the  flannels,  do  much  to  account  for  the 
costliness  of  play.  Besides  this,  there  are  comparatively 
few  Courts ;  nearly  all  are  roofed  over ;  and  at  the  most 
four  people  can  join  in  a  game. 

The  advantages  of  the  games  would  be  far  greater  if 
the  games  were  cheaper,  if  there  were  more  Courts  and 
more  wisely   ventilated    Courts   (we   are  better  off  in 


40  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

England  than  in  America),  and  if  there  were  more 
Handicaps  used  ;  and,  last  but  not  least,  if  the  games 
were  practised  rightly — if  the  players  would  be  content 
to  spend  far  more  time  in  the  apprenticeship  for  play. 
At  present,  Racquets  and  Tennis  and  Squash  are  not 
nearly  so  valuable  as  they  should  be,  and  as  they  shall 
be  some  day.  But  they  have  enormous  advantages  in 
spite  of  this. 

In  the  first  place,  they  can  be  played  in  many  great 
cities,  e.g.  in  London,  Paris,  Melbourne,  New  York, 
Boston,  Philadelphia,  Chicago,  Montreal ;  and  they  can 
be  played  in  all  weathers,  an  important  consideration  in 
England  and  America ;  at  all  times  of  the  year,  the 
Courts  being  fairly  cool  in  summer  and  fairly  warm  in 
winter ;  and  till  considerably  late  in  life.  Tennis  has 
been  called  the  wife  of  the  old  bachelor.  Besides  this,  it 
is  easier  to  get  a  single  opponent  than  to  get  a  team  for 
Cricket  or  Baseball  or  Football  or  Hockey ;  and,  if  one 
has  no  opponent,  then  the  Marker  will  play.  The 
Markers  provide  and  mend  rackets  ;  and  the  Markers 
are,  for  the  most  part,  quiet  and  interesting  men,  and 
often  well-read.  They  stand  among  the  very  highest  of 
all  professionals. 

We  may  now  proceed  to  consider  what  these  games 
can  do  for  us  if  they  be  properly  taught  and  learnt. 

Looking  at  the  aesthetic  side,  we  see  at  once  that  they 
may  develop  grace.  There  are  few  more  beautiful  sights 
than  the  play  of  Mr.  Alfred  Lyttelton  or  Peter  Latham. 
They  improve  the  carriage,  and  give  it  the  appearance 
of  self-control  and  self-direction.  They  train  the  eye,  the 
ear,  and  the  touch.  If  we  take  the  other  meaning  of  the 
word  "  EESthetic,"  we  cannot  deny  that  they  give  intense 
enjoyment.  Competition  is  the  breath  and  soul  of  the 
Anglo  Saxon.     By  competition  in  games  he  can  get  rid 


CH.  vii]      MERITS  OF  THE   THREE  GAMES  41 

of  his  bad  temper  far  more  profitably  than  in  any  other 
way.  The  actual  and  positive  enjoyment  has  its  favourable 
effects  upon  the  blood,  and  therefore  upon  the  digestion 
and  other  functions  of  the  body ;  the  enjoyment  of 
certain  strokes  in  particular,  such  as  the  Half-volley,  and 
the  Half-a-yard  Chase,  can  scarcely  be  equalled. 

Thus  these  games  supply  us  with  a  motive  for  healthi- 
ness. We  do  not  need  to  be  encouraged  to  play  by  offer 
of  prizes.  Racquets  and  Tennis  and  Squash  are  not 
games  for  pot-hunters.  In  themselves  they  are  enough 
inducement  to  most  of  us.  They  encourage  us  to  keep 
in  fairly  good  condition — a  desideratum  in  city  life. 
When  the  rower  has  ceased  to  row,  the  runner  to  run, 
and  the  footballer  to  play  Football,  the  Racquet  and 
Tennis  and  Squash  players  are  still  in  training  and 
ready  to  take  exercise  whenever  the  opportunity  offers. 

And  the  exercise  does  lead  us  indirectly  to  a  change 
of  clothing  during  the  day,  and  to  a  wash  afterwards,  the 
washing  apparatus  being  on  the  premises.  In  this 
respect  Racquets  and  Tennis  have  a  distinct  advantage 
over  many  other  forms  of  exercise.  The  bathing 
arrangements  are  generally  excellent. 

Being  played  in  flannels,  they  promote  cleanliness  by 
the  sweat  which  they  produce.  The  exercise  need  not 
be  too  violent :  it  may  and  should  be  exactly  right  both 
for  the  heart  and  for  the  lungs.  Although  we  do  not 
play  in  the  open  air,  yet  we  play  under  high  roofs,  which 
give  us  free  space  for  extending  our  limbs ;  in  rooms 
crowded  with  furniture  we  unconsciously  cramp  ourselves. 
We  need  more  free  space  in  which  to  move  at  our 
ease.  As  to  the  general  effects  of  exercise,  to  express  it 
in  technical  terms  we  can  say  that  it  eliminates  waste- 
products,  promotes  metabolism,  improves  the  nerves,  and 
tends  to  an  all-round  development  of  the  body.     These 


42  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

forms  of  sport  in  particular  are  a  profit  to  us  because 
they  use,  or  should  use,  the  powerful  body-swing  (which 
is  a  preventive  of  constipation),  and  because  they  help 
us  to  throw  our  shoulders  back.  If  the  Handicap  were 
freely  used,  they  would  exercise  the  left  side  also.  The 
left-handed  game  is  an  excellent  variety:  it  teaches  us 
a  great  deal  that  the  right-handed  game  by  itself  may 
fail  to  teach  us ;  but  even  the  right-handed  game 
exercises  most  of  the  muscles,  and  much  nerve. 

In  these  games  we  gain  skill  in  playing  and  placing, 
and  accuracy  in  timing  the  ball :  we  learn  to  be  rapid 
and  prompt,  to  move  with  alertness,  which  may  stand  us 
in  good  stead  on  a  path  or  a  road,  or,  indeed,  for  any 
occasion  when  presence  of  mind  and  control  of  body  are 
essential.  They  exercise  the  endurance,  the  balance, 
and  a  certain  amount  of  strength. 

Then,  again,  they  are  exercises  that  demand  the 
whole  attention  :  Racquets,  chiefly  because  it  is  so  fast 
that  we  have  no  time  or  desire  to  think  of  other  things ; 
Tennis,  chiefly  because  it  is  so  interesting  that  we  have 
no  desire  to  think  of  other  things. 

With  regard  to  the  intellectual  advantages,  we  may 
mention,  in  the  first  place,  that  the  players  have  included 
many  men  of  greatest  culture.  Selecting  a  few  at  random 
from  our  own  time,  we  have  in  England  the  Balfours, 
Mr.  Alfred  Lyttelton,  Sir  William  Hart-Dyke,  Sir  Edward 
Grey,  Lord  Kinnaird,  the  Vice-Chancellor  of  Cambridge, 
and  the  Provost  of  King's  College  :  it  would  be  easy  to 
enlarge  the  list.  The  games  do  not  produce  the  sleepy 
feeling  that  follows  many  of  the  more  violent  forms  of 
exercise.  They  should  improve  the  memory,  and  the 
power  of  independent  thought,  and  the  foresight — that 
power  which  we  have  to  employ  when,  at  Tennis,  we 
play  with  a  view  to  two  or  three  strokes  ahead.     We 


CH.  VII]      MERITS  OF  THE  THREE  GAMES  43 

have  to  adapt  ourselves  quickly  to  new  conditions,  to  use 
our  head,  to  think  promptly,  and  promptly  turn  the 
thought  into  action  ;  for  here  the  body  carries  out  the 
idea  immediately.  This  is  rarely  the  case  in  so-called 
education,  which  to  a  large  extent  deals  with  words 
rather  than  with  ideas  which  should  be  evolved  into  reali- 
ties. The  player  has  to  decide  in  a  moment  whether  he 
shall  volley  a  ball,  or  leave  it  for  the  Back-wall ;  he  has 
to  decide  and  to  act ;  according  to  the  success  or  failure 
of  his  first  attempt  he  can  be  guided  in  his  second 
attempt. 

After  his  stroke,  he  has  to  return  to  his  balance  and 
poise.  This  is  valuable  in  its  effect  on  character — this 
return  to  poise  after  excitement.  Throughout  the  play, 
there  is  an  opportunity  for  resource  and  originality,  as 
Latham  and  Pettitt  both  prove.  This  original  self- 
activity  is  not  to  be  found  in  the  German,  in  spite  of  his 
long  time  spent  in  drill.  The  German  has  no  genius  for 
single  play.  Yet,  with  this  self-activity,  there  is  a  certain 
amount  of  imitation  of  the  best  models,  a  vast  amount 
of  obedience  to  law  and  etiquette. 

Not  the  least  advantage  of  these  games  is  that  such 
qualities  are  developed  for  the  most  part  unconsciously. 
Thus  the  player  exercises  his  memory  without  thinking 
of  his  memory.  He  does  not  give  too  much  morbid  care 
to  the  game,  although  he  might  with  advantage  give 
considerably  more  care  than  he  does  to  his  preparation 
for  it ;  for  he  would  find  that  the  things  which  he  prac- 
tises would  soon  become  mechanical,  and  that  then  he 
would  be  able  to  devote  his  attention  to  tactics  and  head- 
play.  And,  while  he  is  taking  care,  he  would  be  disci- 
plining himself,  and  acquiring  a  valuable  general  method 
of  self-improvement. 

The  effects  upon  the  character  and  morals  are  obvious. 


44  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

Both  are  games  in  which  a  considerable  amount  is  left 
to  the  honour  of  the  players.  It  is  possible  to  cheat,  and 
to  baulk  the  opponent  (which  is  a  mild  form  of  cheating). 
This,  however,  one  seldom  sees  in  play.  There  is  rather 
a  tendency  towards  "self-sacrifice."  I  noticed  this  in 
America  no  less  than  in  England.  And  there  is  nearly 
always  a  decorous  acknowledgment  of  a  good  stroke  by 
an  opponent.  Among  the  other  qualities  encouraged, 
are  pluck,  coolness,  and  self-control. 

The  social  value  is  not  inconsiderable.  These  games 
are  the  games  of  gentlemen.  Yet  in  them  the  amateurs 
and  the  Markers  have  the  most  friendly  relations — though 
the  Americans  cannot  yet  entirely  grasp  our  English 
freedom  between  professionals  and  amateurs.  And  they 
are  not  only  social  in  their  effects :  they  are,  or  ought  to  be, 
national  and  international.  It  is  by  friendly  intercourse 
in  games  that  we  can  best  learn  to  understand  foreigners. 
Their  language  in  words  may  be  hard  to  tackle  ;  but  in 
games  there  is  little  need  for  words.  One  can  meet  and 
make  friends  of  Frenchmen  in  the  Tuilleries  with  scarcely 
a  word  of  conversation  :  just  as  one  can  of  Americans  in 
America  with  many  words.  One  is  introduced  to  the 
leading  men  in  each  city.  And  for  a  while  one  is  cut  off 
from  the  society  of  ladies.  In  fact,  one  is  shut  out  from 
the  world  both  of  society  and  of  business.  But  the  black 
cloud  may  be  not  without  a  soupqon  of  white  lining. 

The  economical  value  arises  partly  from  the  social 
value.  In  the  Court  may  be  formed  useful  friendships 
and  acquaintanceships.  And  the  game  should  give  one 
renewed  power  to  work  with  the  brain.  The  qualities 
which  it  encourages — the  self-discipline,  the  power  to 
bear  defeat,  the  adherence  to  the  laws  of  honour,  the 
resource,  the  foresight,  the  originality, — all  these  should 
have  their  counterparts  in  commercial  life.    The  Double 


CH.  VII]      MERITS  OF  THE   THREE  GAMES  45 

Game  will  give  one  the  power  of  combination  with  others, 
a  power  becoming  more  and  more  important  in  business 
every  year. 

But  the  chief  plea  of  the  games  is  that  they  make  for 
manliness,  manliness  which  does  not  in  any  way  interfere 
with  religion,  as  Swedenborg  showed  in  his  exceedingly 
sensible  and  accurate  description  of  heaven.  According 
to  his  visions,  "  at  the  extreme  parts  of  the  City  there 
are  various  sports  of  boys  and  young  men,  as  running, 
hand-ball,  tennis."     Of  course  there  are ! 

In  conclusion,  one  can  hardly  do  better  than  add  a 
few  testimonials  of  other  writers  as  to  the  surpassing 
advantages  of  the  play.  Quotations  about  Tennis  will 
be  found  in  the  Chapter  on  the  special  merits  of  Tennis. 

"While  making  a  rush  at  a  distant  ball,  the  player  will  some- 
times, as  Barre  often  did,  change  his  mind,  on  account  of  some  idea 
which  has  suddenly  struck  him,  and  omit  to  return  the  ball,  though 
he  might  probably  have  succeeded  in  doing  so.  He  deems  the 
ball,  perhaps  at  the  last  minute,  too  difficult  of  return  to  allow  him 
to  make  a  sufficiently-telling  stroke  from  it ;  or  he  thinks  that,  once 
on  the  other  side  of  the  net,  he  will,  through  his  own  strong  attack, 
be  able  to  win  easily  the  chase,  or  to  compensate  for  its  loss  in  case 
he  loses  it.  All  these  material  considerations,  as  well  as  some 
moral,  will  be  present  to  the  mind  of  a  really  great  player  in  the 
moment  or  just  before  the  moment  at  which  he  strikes,  and  will 
modify  his  design  ;  but  this  determination  or  change  of  purpose 
must  be  made  instantaneously.  Here  lies  the  great  difference 
between  Tennis  and  those  sedentary  games  which  require  as  much 
headwork  as  Tennis. 

"  In  the  enumeration  of  the  qualities  required  to  place  a  man 
amongst  the  first  rank  of  players,  should  be  included  strength  com- 
bined with  activity,  great  flexibility  of  body,  force  and  pliancy  of 
wrist,  quickness  of  eye,  self-possession,  perseverance,  temper,  and 
judgment  ;  and  to  these  should  be  added  a  mind  full  of  resources, 
quick  to  discover  the  weakest  part  of  his  adversary's  game,  and  to 
apply  his  own  peculiar  powers  to  the  best  advantage  ;  for  the  body 
and  mind,  at  Tennis,  are  equally  upon  the  stretch  ;  and,  as  the 
hurry  of  action  is  unfavourable  to  the  reflective  part  of  the  game,  it 
is  the  last  and  most  difficult  acquirement,  to  recollect,  in  the  vehe- 
mence of  execution,  what  it  may  be  most  judicious  to  endeavour  to 
execute. 


46  RACQUETS,    TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH       [pt.  ii 

"  Those  who  have  it,  owe  its  possession  to  a  clear  head,  a  keen 
eye,  and  the  faculty  of  penetrating  the  design  of  their  opponent,  as 
shown  by  his  movements  and  the  manner  in  which  he  strikes  the 
ball ;  to  the  power  of  observation  necessary  to  inform  them  how 
that  manner  in  which  he  strikes  the  ball  will  act  upon  it  and  in- 
fluence its  course  ;  and  to  their  general  experience  of  the  game, 
founded  on  innumerable  results  of  this  kind,  watched,  remembered, 
and  applied  systematically." 

These  paragraphs,  from  Mr.  Julian  Marshall's  excellent 
'  Annals  of  Tennis,'  will  apply  to  Racquets  as  well  as  to 
Tennis,  with  scarcely  the  need  for  a  single  word  to  be 
changed. 

M.  de  Garsault,  in  his  book  called  *  L'Art  du  Paumier- 
raquetier,  et  de  la  Paume,'  1767  (quoted  by  Mr.  Marshall), 
says : — 

"  La  Paume  is  the  only  game  which  can  take  rank  in  the  list  of 
Arts  and  Crafts,  the  description  of  which  has  been  undertaken  by 
the  Royal  Academy  of  Science." 

He  goes  on  to  remark  : — 

"  Let  us  no  longer  consider  la  Paume  as  a  Game,  nor  as  a  mere 
pastime  that  is  without  any  use  to  us  ;  an  Art  which,  with  the  aid 
of  only  a  few  instruments,  becomes  a  very  stately  exercise,  by 
means  of  which  youth  may  gain  robust  health,  and  that  activity 
which  is  so  necessary  in  the  course  of  life.  This  exercise  is  there- 
fore in  such  estimation  that  edifices  are  built  on  purpose  for  it,  as 
others  are  built  for  learning  the  Art  of  Riding.  The  King  has  a 
fine  Court  in  each  of  his  royal  mansions  at  Versailles,  at  Fontaine- 
bleau,  at  St.  Germain,  and  at  Compi^gne.  Both  officers  and  soldiers 
who  shall  have  practised  it  will  find  themselves  by  far  superior 
to  those  who  know  only  their  ordinary  exercise,  or  even  that  of  the 
sword,  for  the  former  liberates  the  arms  alone,  and  the  latter  directs 
the  body  in  but  one  way  ;  whereas  the  bending,  starting,  and  run- 
ning which  are  necessary'  in  this  game  make  the  body  equally 
supple  throughout,  and  train  it  (if  I  may  say  so)  in  every  possible 
way.'' 


CHAPTER   VIII 

FEATURES  COMMON  TO  THE  THREE  GAMES 

It  has  seemed  well  to  justify,  in  a  short  preliminary 
note,  my  novel  plan  of  treating  Racquets  and  Tennis 
and  Squash  together.  Let  us  now  consider  how  much 
the  games  have  in  common,  and  especially  the  two 
greater  games. 

Both,  as  a  general  rule,  are  played  in  covered  Courts, 
and  therefore  both  can  be  played  at  any  time  of  the 
year,  or  in  any  weather,  and  even  in  the  heart  of  a  city. 
At  present  both  are  played  chiefly  by  the  rich,  A 
Marker  plays,  marks,  and  provides  and  mends  the  vari- 
ous implements  of  the  game.  Connected  with  the 
building  there  is  often  a  social  Club  with  all  its  usual 
advantages. 

The  Courts  have  the  Back-wall,  which  is  both  high 
and  level,  and  Side-walls,  which  are  also  high  and 
level.  The  Back-walls  and  Side-walls  form  a  desirable 
and  important  feature  in  the  play.  Lawn  Tennis  of 
course  is  lacking  in  this  respect.  That  is  one  reason 
why  it  is  very  hard  for  a  Racquet  or  Tennis  or  Squash 
player  to  play  Lawn  Tennis  well.  He  lets  the  ball  pass 
by  him  as  if  he  would  be  able  to  return  it  after  it  had 
struck  the  Back-wall ;  then  he  remembers  that  the  Back- 
wall  is  not  provided ! 

47 


48  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

In  both  games  wd  have  tightly-strung  and  expensive 
wooden  rackets,  and  a  hard  ball  made  of  cloth  and 
thread  and  covered  with  a  white  substance.  There  is  a 
certain  height  above  which  the  racket  must  strike  the 
ball  before  the  ball  has  bounced  twice,  and  a  certain 
height  aboye  which  the  racket  must  not  strike  the  ball. 
The  Service  in  both  games  may  be  volleyed.  The 
general  aim  is  to  hit  the  ball  only  just  above  the  required 
height  and  out  of  the  opponent's  reach  (or  else  too 
dazzlingly  "within"  his  reach). 

In  both  games  one  need  have  only  a  single  opponent ; 
though  a  Four-game  at  Racquets  is  common,  and  a 
Three-game  is  excellent,  being,  in  the  opinion  of  some, 
preferable  either  to  the  Single  or  to  the  Four. 

In  both  games  there  are  some  hard  straight  drives, 
not  unlike  the  drives  at  Cricket.  In  Racquets  these  are 
the  ordinary  strokes  ;  in  Tennis  they  are  commonest 
when  one  is  playing  for  the  "  Openings."  The  leading 
Tennis  experts  at  Boston  use  the  hard  drive  with  great 
freedom  and  success.  Tom  Pettitt  was  practically  the 
inventor  of  this  stroke. 

In  both  games,  also,  there  are  some  heavily  cut  or 
sliced  strokes.  This  is  the  regular  stroke  for  the  Service 
at  Racquets.  At  Tennis  it  is,  or  rather  it  used  to  be,  the 
regular  stroke  for  ordinary  play ;  but  now  hundreds  of 
players  are  beginning  to  find  that  the  risk  of  cutting 
every  ball  is  not  compensated  for  by  the  result.  There 
is  a  tendency  to  get  the  ball  up,  somehow,  with  a  severe 
cut  if  it  be  not  too  risky ;  but  with  a  severer  cut  in  pro- 
portion as  the  stroke  is  easier.  Personally,  I  make  it  a 
general  rule  in  Tennis  to  put  the  hardest  cut  on  to  the 
easiest  ball.  On  the  most  difficult  ball  I  put  next  to  no 
cut  intentionally ;  I  am  quite  content  to  scrape  it  over. 
the  net  somehow.     At  Racquets  the  chief  aim  is  pace, 


CH.  viii]    FEATURES  COMMON  TO  THE  GAMES      49 

the  typical  stroke  being  a  hard  low  drive.  In  this  respect 
Racquets  resembles  Lawn  Tennis. 

In  both  games  the  Volley  and  the  Half- volley  have 
come  very  much  into  fashion  of  late  years.  1  hey  make 
the  game  far  more  rapid  than  before ;  and  indeed,  in 
late  years,  the  play  has  become  faster  and  faster,  partly 
owing  to  the  reliability  and  trueness  of  the  Court,  its 
floor  and  walls ;  the  racket  and  its  tightly-strung  gut ; 
the  balls  and  their  superior  contour ;  but  also  owing  to 
this — that  the  rapid  game  really  pays.  There  are  re- 
markably few  of  the  old  school  who  could  make  head- 
way against  the  dash  and  rush  of  an  active  player  like 
Latham  or  Pettitt. 

And  so  both  games  need  a  certain  amount  of  training. 
I  have  heard  one  or  two  of  the  leading  professionals  say 
that  a  man  has  to  give  up  his  active  game  of  Racquets 
before  he  gives  up  his  active  game  of  Cricket,  partly 
owing  to  the  modern  system  of  boundary  hits  at  Cricket. 
Though,  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  due  to  the  Back-wall, 
and  to  the  fact  that  the  standard  of  play  rises  with  the 
growing  experience  and  knowledge  of  the  angles,  that 
one  might  continue  to  play  Racquets  and  Tennis  long 
after  one  has  given  up  Football  and  Hockey.  It  is 
perhaps  the  value  of  this  experience  that  sets  the  pro- 
fessionals so  far  ahead  of  the  amateurs.  Since  Sir 
William  Hart-Dyke,  no  amateur  has  beaten  a  profes- 
sional on  equal  terms  at  either  of  the  two  games.  In 
Billiards,  as  in  bowling  at  Cricket  and  Baseball,  the 
professionals  are  ahead. 

As  to  the  scoring,  in  both  games  Handicaps  are 
possible,  so  that  any  player  can  be  put  on  level  terms 
with  any  other  player.  But  we  shall  see  later  on  that 
the  possibilities  of  Handicaps  are  not  at  all  realised 
to-day ;  in  fact,  Handicaps  are  almost  entirely  confined 


50  RACQUETS,    TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH       [pt.  ii 

to  points,  as  at  Lawn  Tennis.  We  seldom  see  a  Match 
at  which  one  player  gives  the  other  "  Half-the-Court," 
or  "  Touch-no-Side-walls,"  or  some  such  excellent  odds. 
There  is  not  nearly  enough  variety.  The  games  would  be 
far  more  popular  if  there  were. 

The  scoring  of  both  games  is  subdivided.  In  either 
game  a  crushing  error  at  the  beginning  of  the  play  need 
not  be  fatal :  it  is  more  like  a  bad  hole  at  Golf  than  a 
stumping  at  Cricket.  A  player  might  get  only  one  point 
while  his  opponent  scored  the  whole  of  the  first  game 
at  Racquets,  or  first  set  at  Tennis,  and  yet  might  win 
the  Match. 

Both  games  give  exercise  for  nearly  the  whole  of  the 
body,  including  much  of  the  left  side  if  the  strokes  be 
properly  played.  A  useful  form  of  Backhander  may  be 
helped  out  by  a  very  powerful  movement  of  the  left  side, 
not  perhaps  to  the  same  extent  as  in  Cricket  and  Golf, 
but  still  to  a  far  greater  extent  than  is  common  with  the 
average  player  to-day. 

Both  games  should  exercise  the  intelligence.  Racquets, 
however,  tends  to  become  dull  and  mechanical,  to  de- 
generate into  a  game  of  monotonous  strokes  just  above 
the  line  and  down  the  sides.  Nearly  all  games  are  liable 
to  become  mechanical  if  they  are  not  properly  played  ; 
but  it  seems  as  though,  at  Racquets,  some  of  the  pro- 
fessionals have  come  almost  to  the  end  of  their  tether. 
There  is  no  necessity  for  this,  if  players  will  only 
think. 

Both  games  also,  as  we  have  seen,  give  exercise  to  the 
character  and  moral  qualities. 

In  Racquets,  as  in  Tennis,  the  ABC  of  play  must 
either  be  acquired  by  art,  or  else  be  present  by  natural 
instinct,  if  the  player  is  to  do  himself  justice,  and  to 
enjoy  himself  (which  he  can  hardly  do  unless  he  improves 


CH.  viii]    FEATURES  COMMON  TO    THE   GAMES      51 

and  succeeds).  Both  games  require  an  alert  position 
before  and  after  the  strokes  ;  both  games  require  the 
position  to  be  ready  formed  before  the  stroke  be  made ; 
both  games  say  to  us,  and  especially  to  our  feet :  "  Be 
there  in  time,  and  the  hard  will  have  become  easy."  This 
is  a  fundamental  principle  of  play,  and  has  been  recog- 
nised as  holding  good  in  other  forms  of  Sport  by  one  of  the 
greatest  athletic  authorities,  Mr.  C.  B.  Fry.  Both  before 
and  after  the  strokes  the  foot-movements  are  all-essential. 
During  the  strokes  the  body-swing,  in  which  the  weight 
is  thrown  forwards  and  the  stroke  is  carried  through — 
with  some  movement  of  the  shoulder,  arm,  forearm,  and 
wrist,  as  the  racket  strikes  the  ball — is  of  vital  moment. 
The  racket  must  be  held  up  both  before  and  after  the 
strokes. 

Last  of  all,  in  both  games  it  is  essential  that  balance 
should  be  preserved  under  difficulties.  The  beginner  is 
apt  either  not  to  move  his  body  enough  when  he  makes 
his  stroke,  or  else  to  move  it  enough  and  then  to  be 
thrown  off  his  legs.  The  hurling  of  nearly  one's  whole 
self  into  any  "  stroke  "  in  life  is  by  no  means  unimportant. 
One  should  put  one's  whole  vigour  into  it,  and  yet  at  the 
end  of  it  remain  self-possessed  and  ready  for  the  next 
stroke.  This  is  what  we  English,  as  a  nation,  do  really 
need  :  we  need  not  merely  an  effort  with  the  whole  per- 
sonality, but  immediate  readiness  afterwards  to  repeat 
a  similar  or  a  different  effort,  and  to  have  moved  rapidly 
into  position  for  that  new  effort. 


CHAPTER   IX 

THE  STROKES  AND  THE  ALPHABET  OF  PLAY 

"How  ought  one  to  hold  the  racket?  How  ought  one  to  stand 
before  one  makes  a  Backhand  stroke,  and  when  one  makes  it  ? 
How  ought  one  to  move  during  the  stroke?  What  ought  one  to 
do  afterwards  ?  How  can  one  practise,  when  one  is  busy  all  day  ? 
How  can  one  improve  one's  game  and  correct  one's  faults  ?  Why 
has  one  hitherto  failed  to  improve  ?  How  can  one  keep  in  training 
and  yet  lead  a  sedentary  life  ? " 

This  quotation  from  '  The  Game  of  Squash '  will 
illustrate  some  of  the  difficult  "  words  "  of  which  the 
game  is  composed.  It  is  the  purpose  of  this  Chapter  to 
teach  the  spelling  of  these  words.  The  spelling  is  not 
uniform  throughout  the  world,  or  for  all  individuals  : — 
for  example,  the  American  spelling  is  somewhat  different 
from  the  English  spelling.  The  reader  must  be  content 
with  generalities. 

"  I  see  the  ball  and  I  hit  it."  This  was  the  way  in 
which  a  leading  expert  summed  up  his  method.  Now 
as  often  as  he  hit  the  ball  correctly — and  he  generally 
did — not  only  must  his  mind,  the  master,  have  had  an 
intention ;  his  body,  the  servant,  must  have  had  an 
absolute  understanding  of  the  intention  and  have  given 
an  intelligent  obedience  to  it.  But  the  weakness  of  this 
method  of  a  genius  is  its  uncertainty.  Not  knowing 
how  he  does  it,  he  also  does  not  know  why  he  (sometimes) 

52 


CH.  ix]    STROKES  AND  ALPHABET  OF  PLAY         53 

does  not  or  can  not  do  it.  For  my  meticulous  and  more 
tedious  method  I  claim  that  it  reduces  the  margin  of 
error;  that  it  should  enable  one  to  adapt  his  style  to 
diverse  players  and  diverse  occasions  and  conditions. 
He  who  can  analyse  his  own  method  can  analyse 
another's  method  and  get  from  it  what  he  most  needs. 
/  want  to  know  not  only  that  I  do  certain  things,  but 
also  how  I  do  them,  and  why^  and  how  and  why  others 
do  these  or  other  things. 

It  is  possible  for  certain  people  to  speak,  and  to  speak 
well,  without  ever  having  learnt  the  letters  of  the 
alphabet  in  their  orthodox  order.  But,  even  if  they  do 
not  know  the  alphabet  at  all,  yet  at  least  they  must 
know  the  letters  in  their  combinations.  They  must 
possess  the  elements  of  the  words,  although  they  may 
not  know  that  the  words  can  be  divided  into  elements. 
Let  us  here  consider  the  alphabet  of  play,  the  letters 
that  go  to  make  up  Racquets  and  Tennis  and  Squash. 
The  genius-player  is  seldom  aware  that  such  letters 
exist. 

If  we  imagine  the  body  to  be  a  clock,  and  the  arm  and 
racket  to  be  the  pendulum  of  the  clock,  and  if  we  imagine 
that  we  want  the  pendulum  to  hit  the  ball  with  great 
force,  and  in  a  long  sweeping  line  rather  than  with  a 
quick  jerk,  we  shall  get  one  important  letter  of  the 
alphabet,  namely,  the  direction  in  which  the  body  should 
face  while  the  stroke  is  being  made.  For  a  long  and 
free  swing,  the  body  should  generally  face  not  towards 
the  net  or  play- line  but  towards  the  side  on  which  the 
ball  will  be,  whether  the  ball  will  approach  from  the 
opponent's  racket,  or  from  one's  own  hand  (during  the 
Service). 

And  this  sideways  position  must  have  been  already 
formed  before  the  stroke  be  made.     It  therefore  follows 


54  RACQUETS,    TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 


Fronf  Wall    or  Ncf .  

©TK«  Baill  fi  commq 
,  fe  fKe  ForaK^.^d  or 
I     rlqK^   side    of    ^Ke 


Left 


742  4^lSmcKcl   Jkp&rl* 


Right 


^ 


Di&qram  1 


Diagram  i. — A  good  piosition  of  the  feet  before  a  Forehand  Stroke. 


Fror\>  Wall  or  Ne>. 

vtfh>}m>miuaw>fiumimim^wi-!^)Hfi-..,,»>..v:j.>\my:j/j.'jn/?ir\-m^ 


I 
TKe  Ball  is  comirig   ^L 
1-0   <-K«    B&ckKar\d    ^P 
or    l€f^  side  o^  <■>%*    I 
Player.  V' 


Diaqra,m  2 


tol8  inches    Ap&rt 


Uf<' 


Diagram  2. — A  good  position  of  the  feet  before  a  Backhand  Stroke. 


CH.  ix]    STROKES  AND  ALPHABET  OF  PLA  V         55 

that  the  feet  should  be  in  the  right  places  before  the 
stroke;  for  the  feet  are  the  bases  of  the  body. 

Golf  teaches  us  two  lessons  here.  The  first  thing  that 
we  learn  in  Golf  is  not  to  let  the  body  face  the  direction 
in  which  we  are  going  to  hit.  Let  it  face  the  direction 
in  which  the  ball  is.  As  an  experiment,  stand  with  a 
Golf-ball  on  the  ground  at  your  right  side,  instead  of  in 
front  of  you.  Swing  your  body  round  to  the  right  on 
your  hips,  keeping  your  feet  still.  Then  make  a  stroke. 
You  will  find  that  the  ball  will  go  some  distance,  owing 
to  the  body-swing,  but  will  not  go  nearly  the  distance  of 
an  ordinary  drive  from  the  ordinary  position. 

The  first  rule  will  be  illustrated  by  Diagrams  i  and  2, 
showing  how  the  feet  should  face  the  approaching  ball, 
and  should  not  face  the  net  or  the  play-line.  In  Golf  we 
have  plenty  of  time  to  get  into  position  :  in  Racquets 
and  Tennis  and  Squash  we  have  not.  Therefore  in 
Racquets  and  Tennis  and  Squash  we  have  to  consider 
not  only  the  correct  position  itself,  but  also  the  movements 
which  will  lead  to  that  correct  position. 

The  reasons  for  the  position  are  obvious.  Quite  apart 
from  the  healthiness  of  the  body-swing,  we  must  notice 
the  formation  of  the  body.  We  cannot  make  a  free 
stroke  as  long  as  the  body  is  facing  forwards.  Imagine 
a  stroke  to  come  to  your  Backhand  ;  you  cannot  possibly 
hit  with  full  force  straight  forwards  if  your  body  is  facing 
forwards.  The  whole  of  your  left  shoulder  would  be  in 
the  way.  You  must  stand  like  the  left-handed  cricketer 
when  he  wants  to  hit  to  the  off.  You  will  thus  bring 
the  larger  muscles  into  play,  and  the  larger  muscles 
make  more  reliable  curves  than  the  smaller  muscles, 
as  we  shall  point  out  in  Chapter  XI. 

The  second  lesson  from  Golf  is  that  the  implement 
should  be  raised  before  the  stroke,  in  order  to  give  power 


56  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

and  impetus  ;  just  as,  if  one  wishes  to  go  up-hill,  one  can 
acquire  pace  by  going  down-hill  first.  The  golfer  carries 
through  his  stroke  in  as  straight  a  line  as  possible,  and 
at  the  finish  of  it  his  club  is  up  again.  It  has  gone  far 
beyond  the  spot  at  which  it  has  hit  the  ball.  In  Racquets 
and  Tennis  and  Squash,  for  ordinary  players,  I  think 
there  is  the  same  rule.  Lift  your  racket  before  the 
stroke ;  carry  it  through  (as  a  rule)  in  as  straight  a  line 
as  possible ;  carry  it  up  afterwards.  This  leaves  the 
racket  ready  for  the  next  stroke,  and  ready  also  to 
protect  the  head. 

For  those  who  can  time  the  ball  very  accurately,  a 
more  effective  stroke  is  the  arrested  movement,  which 
will  be  described  in  a  later  Chapter.  It  is  shown  in  the 
illustration  in  Chapter  XXIII,  which  gives  the  point 
beyond  which  the  racket  scarcely  moves  forwards,  but 
rather  moves  suddenly  backwards.  Latham  does  not 
use  full  follow-through  strokes  at  Racquets  or  Tennis. 
But  they  seem  to  me  to  involve  far  less  risk.  Each  player 
must  decide  for  himself.  In  this  Chapter  I  am  only 
writing  with  reference  to  a  good  average  stroke  for 
average  players. 

Having  these  two  letters  of  the  alphabet  to  start  with, 
namely,  that  the  racket  should  be  kept  up  before  and 
after  each  stroke,  and  that  the  body  should  be  ready 
facing  the  side  on  which  the  ball  is  approaching,  we  are 
brought  to  a  third  letter :  namely,  that  one  should  have 
moved  into  this  position  before  one  makes  the  stroke, 
and,  therefore,  that  one  should  be  limber  and  alert.  The 
player  who  is,  like  the  boxer,  on  his  "toes,"  and  who 
keeps  his  eye  on  the  ball,  has  a  natural  and  instinctive 
tendency  to  move  into  position  of  his  own  accord,  and 
to  time  the  ball  accurately.  For  to  time  the  ball,  to  have 
"  a  good  eye,"  means  not  merely  to  see  the  ball  itself, 


CH.  IX]    STROKES  AND  ALPHABET  OF  PLA  V         57 


Line  of  Fronf  Wall  or  Ne».  ^ 


EITHER   (C) 


lef^-  Ip-^        I  / 


R'lqK^fiJsh^^^^K^  ^M*' 


OR    (D) 


UfM 


Diagram  3 


'•^RigKtE 


1^ 


UfMA    \      /       \  V/*^ 


1 


Diagram  3. — How  t6  move  the  feet  from  the  Waiting  Position  into  the  Foi-fe 
hand  Position.  (C)  brings  the  feet  further  back  and  to  the  left ;  (D)  bring 
them  further  forward  and  to  the  right. 


5B 


RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  il 


Lir\e  of    Front  Wall  or  Net. 

J 


•8 

o 


» 
I 
I 
I 
I 

\ 

I 

r  I 

?    ! 


o 


03 

S>» 

o 

7" 
Q. 


^      I 


I 
I 
I 


EITHER  (A) 


AUftl 


/hx^\s\  I 


*"•-. .n^ 


OR  (B) 


'*^. 


f    /ufrn 

'^^         Diagram  4 


Diagram  4. — How  to  move  the  feet  from  the  Waiting  Position  into  the  Back- 
hand Position.  (A)  brings  the  feet  further  back  and  to  the  left ;  (B)  brings 
them  further  forward  and  to  the  right. 


CH.  IX]    STROKES  AND  ALPHABET  OF  PLA  Y         59 

but  to  reckon  its  flight,  and,  if  necessary,  to  judge  its 
angles  off  the  floor  and  off  the  walls. 

And  so  we  have  as  elements  of  success  not  only  the 
right  Forehand  position  and  the  right  Backhand  position 
during  strokes,  but  also  the  waiting  position  before  and 
after  strokes.  The  feet  may  be  twelve  to  eighteen  inches 
apart,  with  the  toes  turned  slightly  outwards,  and  the 
knees  slightly  bent,  though  individuals  differ  as  to  the 
best  waiting  position. 

From  this  waiting  position — a  position  of  poise  upon 
the  balls  of  the  feet — one  must  be  able  to  pass  quickly 
into  the  Forehand  position  with  the  racket  up  and 
back.  The  steps  by  which  one  passes  from  the  waiting 
into  the  Forehand  position  are  shown  in  Diagram  3. 

Then  follows  the  Forehand  stroke  itself. 

Next  come  the  steps  from  the  waiting  position  to  the 
Backhand  position,  as  seen  in  Diagram  4. 

Then  the  Backhand  stroke  is  made. 

Diagrams  3  and  4  are  thus  described  in  '  The  Game 
of  Squash'  (p.  61). 

"  In  the  Diagram  you  see  your  feet  in  the  waiting  position,  rest- 
ing OH  their  balls  and  not  on  their  heels. 

"  To  pass  into  the  Forehand  position,  you  may  move  your  right 
foot  back,  so  that  it  will  be  behind  your  left,  and  then  turn  your 
left  foot  round  as  on  a  pivot.  This  will  be  better  if  the  ball  is  to  be 
taken  further  back  in  the  Court. 

"  If,  however,  the  ball  pitches  '  shorter,'  and  is  to  be  taken  rather 
more  forward  in  the  Court,  then  move  your  left  foot  forward,  and 
let  your  right  foot  rest  on  its  toe.  (If  the  ball  is  to  be  taken  very 
near  where  you  are,  you  may  move  your  left  foot  forward  actually 
during  the  stroke  itself.) 

"  Notice  how  either  movement  may  help  to  bring  the  left  shoulder 
forwards. 

"  To  pass  into  a  Backhand  position  from  the  waiting  position, 
either — 

"  Move  your  left  foot  back  and  pivot  your  right  foot  round,  as  in 
the  Diagram  ;  or  else 

"  Move  your  right  foot  forward,  and  pivot  your  left  foot  round. 
Here,  again,  notice  how  either  movement  may  help  to  draw  the  left 


6o  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  Il 

shoulder  back.  The  steps  should  be  practised  again  and  again 
until  they  have  become  quite  easy  and  automatic.  I  have  had  to 
practise  them  many  thousands  of  times." 

For  further  notes  on  these  Diagrams,  see  Chapter  X. 

The  ideal  of  movement,  if  it  is  to  be  continued  for  a 
long  while,  is  that  large  muscles  should  be  employed, 
and  that  each  action  should  be  a  preparation  for  the 
next.  Thus  in  walking  we  use  large  muscles  and  the 
step-forward  of  one  leg  helps  the  other  leg  towards  its 
step-forward.  And  so  we  have  to  practise  such  Fore- 
hand and  Backhand  strokes  as  will  naturally  lead  us  not 
only  to  use  large  muscles,  but  also  to  end  up  somewhat 
near  to  the  waiting  position. 

Hitherto  we  have  spoken  of  the  strokes  as  if  they  were 
single  and  simple  things.  It  is  essential,  however,  to 
consider  the  whole  apparatus  of  a  full  stroke,  the  move- 
ments of  the  trunk  and  the  shifting  of  the  body's  weight, 
the  movements  of  the  shoulder,  the  upper  arm,  the  fore- 
arm, the  wrist,  the  fingers,  to  say  nothing  of  the  grip  of 
the  racket. 

It  is  almost  indispensable  to  a  correct  and  safe  stroke 
that  the  racket  should  be  meeting  the  ball  in  a  line 
opposite  to  the  line  of  its  approach,  for  as  long  as  possible, 
and  therefore  that  the  large  muscles  of  the  body  should 
be  employed.     See  the  Diagram  in  Chapter  XI. 

And  in  the  ordinary  stroke  there  are  other  points 
which  various  players  would  consider  to  be  essential :  the 
help  given  by  the  left  hand  and  arm  and  shoulder  during 
the  stroke  is  by  no  means  unimportant. 

It  is  vital  also  that  we  should  economise  the  energy  of 
the  rest  of  the  body ;  we  should  not  make  unnecessary 
exertions  with  muscles  that  we  do  not  in  the  least  need 
to  employ. 

In  addition,  we  should  have  at  our  control  a  stroke 


CH.  IX]    STROKES  AND  ALPHABET  OF  PLA  Y         6i 

independent  of  the  position  of  the  feet — a  stroke  which 
relies  chiefly  upon  the  body-swing  and  the  shoulder- 
movement.  Now  and  then  there  is  no  time  even  for 
this,  and  we  have  to  rely  mainly  upon  some  of  the 
smaller  mechanisms,  for  example,  the  arm  or  forearm  or 
even  the  wrist  alone.     But  always  there  must  be  poise. 

So  much  for  the  two  ordinary  strokes,  Forehand  and 
Backhand.  These  should  be  practised  at  first  with  a 
free  outward  swing,  rather  than  with  a  swing  across  the 
body.     That  stroke  can  be  added  later. 

Later  also  can  be  added  the  cut-stroke,  which  is  not 
altogether  distinguishable  from  the  twist-stroke.  The 
cut-stroke  is  an  integral  part  both  of  Racquets  and 
Tennis.  In  Racquets  it  is  found  in  the  Service ;  in 
Tennis  it  is  found  in  the  ordinary  play.  It  will  be 
described  in  Chapter  XXXIII. 

Besides  this,  we  have  the  Half-volley  and  the  Volley. 
Every  player  must  be  able  to  use  these  two  strokes.  It 
does  not  in  the  least  follow  that  he  should  use  them 
frequently ;  but,  if  they  are  not  part  of  his  available 
mechanism,  he  will  always  be  liable  to  fail  in  them,  just 
as  the  Lawn  Tennis  player  will,  if  he  cannot  come  up  to 
the  net  to  volley.  He  may  be  able  to  play  a  whole 
Match,  as  Mr.  A.  W.  Gore  (last  year's  Amateur  Lawn 
Tennis  Champion  of  England)  may  have  done,  without 
a  single  Volley  ;  but  until  he  can  volley  well  he  is  always 
liable  to  be  beaten  by  an  otherwise  inferior  opponent. 

This  is  not  the  whole  of  the  ABC  of  play.  One  must 
know  the  angles  as  well  as  the  flight  of  a  ball ;  one  must 
know  what  will  happen  to  a  ball  that  has  struck  the 
Back-wall,  or  a  Side-wall,  or  both.  Back-wall  strokes  hold 
quite  an  important  place  among  the  elements  of  success. 

Then  we  must  know  how  the  balls  will  bounce  accord- 
ing to  their  pace,  cut,  twist,  and  so  on. 


62  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

We  must  also  master  at  least  one  kind  of  Service. 
Nor  is  this  enough.  For  we  must  know  in  what  part 
of  the  Court  we  should  stand  whilst  we  are  waiting. 
There  seems  to  be  little  doubt  that,  usually,  we  should 
stand  near  the  central  line  down  the  Court.  But  whether 
we  should  stand  near  the  Back-wall,  or  further  forward, 
is  doubtful.  Much  depends  on  our  activity.  A  player 
with  a  quick  eye,  like  Latham,  can  afford  to  stand 
forwards :  a  slower  player  might  find  it  better  to  wait. 

Each  stroke,  let  us  remember,  seems  a  simple  thing  ; 
in  fact,  a  rally  consisting  of  many  of  these  strokes,  let  us 
say  a  rally  consisting  of  several  ordinary  Forehand  and 
Backhand  strokes,  two  cut-strokes,  a  twist-stroke,  a 
Volley,  a  Half- volley,  and  some  Back-wall  and  some 
Side-wall  play,  will  itself  seem  quite  a  simple  thing. 
Yet  each  stroke  is  complex,  each  stroke  is  a  word  of 
many  letters,  each  rally  is  a  sentence  of  many  words. 
And  most  of  us  would  find  it  worth  while  to  learn  the 
letters  very  early  in  our  life  (not  necessarily  before  we 
learn  any  words)  ;  and  the  words  ^  before  we  learn  the 
sentences :  and  the  sentences  before  we  learn  the 
paragraphs  and  chapters.  We  need  not  learn  the  alpha- 
bet at  the  very  beginning,  but  it  is  worth  while  to  learn 
it  somewhere  near  the  beginning. 

For  my  own  part,  I  do  not  play  games  merely  for 
amusement  and  recreation.  To  me  they  are  work,  they 
are  creation.  I  find  them  teeming  with  problems  which 
I  long  to  solve ;  the  test  of  the  solution  is  progress  and 
increased  pleasure  and — further  problems.  Each  problem 
truly  solved  becomes  in  turn  a  fresh  letter  in  my  alphabet, 
a  fresh  word  in  my  vocabulary. 

1  The  word  STROKE  might  suggest  the  initials  of  Sideways 
position,  Timing  the  ball,  Racket  up,  One  full  body-swing,  Knee  of 
right  leg  unbent,  Eye  on  ball. 


CHAPTER  X 

MOVEMENTS  AND   POSITIONS  BEFORE  STROKES 

The  holding  of  the  racket  must  be  correct.  That  is 
an  essential  of  good  play.  This  does  not  mean  that  one 
should  always  grip  the  racket  tightly,  but  that,  except 
for  intervals  of  rest,  one  should  habitually  have  the 
fingers  placed  ready  for  a  correct  tight  grip.  The  special 
"  grips "  for  Racquet  and  Tennis  strokes  will  be  con- 
sidered in  Parts  III  and  IV.  Meanwhile  we  must  be 
content  with  generalities. 

In  '  The  Game  of  Squash '  (p.  38),  I  wrote  as 
follows  : — 

"What  part  of  the  handle  should  one  hold?  Should  one  hold 
the  handle  near  to  the  end  or  somewhat  nearer  to  the  face  ?  For 
ordinary  purposes  the  hand  might  reach  to  about  three  inches  from 
the  end.  But,  if  one  has  a  weak  wrist,  or  if  one  is  taking  a  ball 
from  close  to  the  Back-wall,  it  might  be  better  to  hold  the  handle 
at  a  point  far  nearer  to  the  face.  This  'clubbing  '  of  the  racket  will 
give  n)ore  certainty.  For  a  hard  drive,  on  the  other  hand,  it  may 
be  better  to  hold  the  racket  almost  at  the  end." 

As  to  the  fingers,  they  may  "  group  themselves  "  in 
various  ways.  The  Latham  Racquets-grip  will  be 
described  in  Part  III.  A  useful  arrangement  for  ordin- 
ary strokes  is  the  one  in  which  the  flat  of  the  handle 
lies  across  the  middle  of  the  pointing  finger,  as  in  Illustra- 
tion VIII.     The  right  hand  is  closed  over  the  handle, 

63 


64  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

the  fingers  being  somewhat  apart  rather  than  hunched 
and  huddled  together. 

If  the  player  now  holds  his  racket  with  the  head  up, 
say  in  the  hand-mirror  fashion,  as  in  Illustration  VII, 
he  may  proceed  thus  to  master  the  ordinary  movements, 
and  positions  of  the  feet  before  strokes. 

To  the  following  general  movements  and  positions 
before  strokes  there  must  be  some  noticeable  exceptions, 
as  when  one  is  taken  by  surprise,  and  has  to  resort  to 
the  flick  of  the  wrist  and  some  shoulder-jerk  in  order  to 
get  back  a  ball ;  and  when  one  is  only  able  to  turn  the 
body  rapidly  without  moving  the  feet.  Tom  Pettitt  is 
perhaps  the  best  exponent  of  the  shoulder-jerk  and 
wrist-flick.  It  is  marvellous  to  see  what  he  can  achieve, 
apparently  without  moving  any  other  part  of  his  body. 
But  for  ordinary  players,  without  the  wonderful  eye  and 
rapidity  and  strength,  such  a  stroke  would  not  be  worth 
the  risk.  Then,  again,  besides  the  occasions  when  one  is 
taken  unawares,  one  may  vary  the  position  of  the  body 
in  order  to  vary  the  pace  and  direction  of  the  stroke. 
But  as  a  rule,  in  Racquets  and  Tennis  and  Squash,  as  in 
Golf,  the  sideways  position  is  essential  to  safety. 

Of  the  forward-facing  position  of  the  feet  for  Forehand 
and  Backhand  strokes  I  need  add  little  to  what  I  said 
in  '  The  Game  of  Squash '  (p.  50),  where  it  was  pointed 
out  that  this  position  may  be  inevitable  in  sudden 
emergencies. 

"  It  is  true  that  this  may  need  less  shifting  of  the  feet,  or  rather 
that  it  may  need  a  less  unusual  and  more  'natural'  position  of  the 
feet,  and  that  it  gives  the  player  the  best  possible  view  of  the  coming 
ball,  i.e.  the  view  from  the  point  towards  which  the  ball  is  coming. 
But  it  has  too  many  disadvantages.  For  not  only  is  it  awkward 
for  a  large  number  of  strokes  ;  it  also  excludes  our  free  and  powerful 
body-swing  along  the  line  of  the  coming  ball.  It  relies  too  much 
on  an  absolutely  correct  timing  of  the  ball,  and  often  on  a  mere 
whip  with  the  wrist,  which  makes  a  very  risky  unreliable  curve." 


#-..*•' 


Pig,  8. — The  Handle — Before  a  Grip  of  the  KAigiET. 

(See  page  63.) 


P5 


P5 


^ 


P=^ 


CH.  x]  POSITIONS  BEFORE  STROKES  65 

Racquets  and  Tennis  and  Squash  differ  from  Golf  in 
this,  that  they  do  not  allow  one  plenty  of  time  in  which 
to  plant  one's  feet  correctly.  In  Racquets  and  Tennis 
and  Squash  one  must  have  come  into  position  for  the 
stroke  before  he  makes  the  stroke ;  and  he  must,  if 
he  can,  be  in  such  a  place  that  the  ball  meets  his 
racket  somewhat  as  in  the  following  Diagram,  the  ball 


Line  of  Appro&cK 


of  BALL  v**''^^ 


FOREHAND  I  BACKHAND 


Diagram  5. — A  convenient  distance  of  the  Ball  from  the  Feet. 

being  from  6  to  1 8  inches  above  the  floor,  and  nearly 
opposite  his  forward  foot ;  though  sometimes  a  little 
behind  it,  and  sometimes  a  little  in  front  of  it. 

Before  ordinary  strokes,  one  waits  poised,  with  the  feet 
on  their  balls,  alert  to  move  anywhere.  One  watches 
the  opponent,  as  a  boxer  does,  unless  one  knows  where 
the  ball  must  be  returned.  It  was  said  that  Barre,  the 
great  French  expert  at  Tennis,  used  to  know  almost 
invariably  the  direction  in  which  his  opponent  was 
7 


66  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

bound  to  hit  the  ball.  In  such  a  case  it  would  be  waste 
of  energy  to  be  ready  for  any  and  every  kind  of  stroke. 
The  Lawn  Tennis  player  is  content,  as  a  rule,  to  leave 
the  risky  shots  out  of  calculation,  and  to  go  to  the  place 


Diagram  6. — How  to  move  towards  a  ball  after  the  Forehand  Posi- 
tion of  the  feet  has  already  been  formed. 

where  the  chances  are  that  his  opponent  must  return 
the  ball.  Such  a  player  ignores  the  risky  stroke  by  his 
opponent :  indeed,  it  is  part  of  his  policy  to  tempt  his 
opponent  to  make  it,  the  odds  being  ten  to  one  that  he 
who  tries  to  make  it  will  fail. 

Suppose  the  opponent  hits  the  ball   to  one's  right 


CH.  X] 


POSITIONS  BEFORE  STROKES 


67 


hand,  i.  e.  hits  it  so  that  one  will  return  it  forehanded  ; 
then  one  of  two  movements  may  be  advisable. 

If  one  is  going  to  take  the  ball  at  some  spot  in  front 
of  the  spot  where  one  is  waiting,  then  one  has  to  move 
forwards ;  if  one  is  going  to  take  the  ball  at  some  spot 
behind  the  spot  where  one  is  waiting,  then  one  has  to 


Diagram  7. — How  to  move  towards  a  ball  after  the  Backhand  Posi- 
tion of  the  feet  has  already  been  formed. 

move  backwards.  In  such  cases  the  feet  may  shift  as 
in  Diagram  3  (Chapter  IX).  This  will  change  the  body 
from  the  waiting  position  to  the  Forehand  position  ;  the 
racket  is  up  in  the  air.  In  this  position  one  moves  to 
the  required  spot  either  by  short  steps  or  by  long  strides. 
Diagram  6  will  show  directions  in  which  one  should 
be  able  to  move  while  still  maintaining  the  Forehand 
position. 


68  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

Diagram  7  will  give  similar  directions  to  be  followed 
while  one  preserves  the  Backhand  position. 

The  principle  is,  first  to  form  the  sideways  position, 
and  then,  in  that  position,  to  move  towards  the  ball. 
This,  as  we  have  remarked  already,  seems  to  me  to  be 
one  of  the  most  essential  features  in  Latham's  success. 
When  he  runs  for  a  ball,  he  does  not  run  in  the  ordinary 
way,  facing  forwards,  but  runs  with  his  feet  and  body 
already  in  position.  He  can  run  sideways  almost  as 
well  as  he  can  run  straight.  Batting  at  Cricket  gives 
one  a  good  example  of  a  similar  method.  What  good 
cricketer,  when  he  is  going  to  run  out  to  the  ball,  first 
faces  forwards,  then  runs  out,  then  faces  sideways  again  ? 
The  good  cricketer  comes  out  sideways.  Thus  he  is 
already  in  position  when  the  ball  comes.  Success  in 
this  implies  practice  in  moving  both  backwards  and 
forwards  and  sideways,  with  the  feet  and  body  either 
in  the  Forehand  or  in  the  Backhand  positions. 

As  we  have  remarked  elsewhere  : 

"  It  is  needless  to  say  that  this  sideway  running-  is  extremely 
awkward  at  first.  But  it  will  become  easier  and  easier  with 
practice,  until  at  last  you  will  be  able  to  do  as  the  result  of  conscious 
and  repeated  effort  what  Latham  does  unconsciously  and  instinc- 
tively. The  illustrations  will  suggest  a  few  directions  in  which  the 
feet  may  move.  They  must  preserve  their  relative  positions.  And 
these  positions  must  have  been  formed  as  long  as  possible  before 
the  stroke  is  to  be  made. 

"  It  is  a  question  ^  whether  one  should  move  about  with  short  steps 
or  with  long  strides.  The  former  encourages  the  desirable  habit  of 
alertness  and  smartness,  the  latter  the  equally  desirable  habit  of 
calmness  and  deliberateness.  As  to  accuracy,  there  is  little  to 
choose  between  the  two  ways.  It  is  possible  that  with  long  strides 
you  will  be  less  likely  to  be  'caught  on  the  hop.'  But  I  expect  a 
good  deal  might  depend  on  the  nationality  and  temperament,  and 
on  whether  one  is  short  or  tall,  lithe  or  ponderous,  in  training  or 
out  of  training  ;  and  on  other  considerations." 

^  Compare  Cricket,  where  the  batsman  may  shuffle  out,  scuttle 
out,  jump  out,  stride  out,  or  only  stretch  out. 


CH.  x]  POSITIONS  BEFORE  STROKES  69 

It  is  no  feasy  task  to  preserve  the  balance  under  such 
conditions,  especially  when  one  remembers  that  it  may 
be  better  to  hold  the  racket  with  its  head  up.  Some 
prefer  to  hold  it  as  a  hand-mirror,  whereas  others  support 
the  head  with  the  left  hand  :  the  latter  is  the  commonest 
position  for  the  Lawn  Tennis  player. 

Before  the  stroke,  the  racket  and  the  arm  come  up 
and  back  with  the  shoulder,  in  order  to  prepare  for  the 
swing  of  the  stroke.  With  the  expert,  the  swing  back- 
wards knd  the  stroke  forwards,  together  with  the  shifting 
of  the  feet,  seem  to  be  one  single  indivisible  movement. 
But  the  parts  of  it  can  easily  be  separated,  and  then 
practised  one  by  one.  Before  the  stroke  the  head  is 
held  back,  the  eye  watches  the  ball,  the  shoulder  and 
the  arm  draw  away  from  the  ball,  the  other  arm  and 
the  shoulder  help  in  the  swing.  So  we  are  brought  to 
the  movements  during  the  strokes. 

Photographs  IX  and  X  will  show  the  player  (Moore) 
ready  for  a  Forehand  and  for  a  Backhand  stroke. 
These  positions  are  not  exactly  the  best  for  either 
Racquets  or  Tennis.  But  they  are  very  useful  for  Squash- 
Racquets  and  Squash-Tennis. 


CHAPTER  XI 

MOVEMENTS   DURING  STROKES 

We  may  assume  that  the  learner  is  now  in  position, 
with  his  feet  and  his  body  facing  sideways  in  the  direction 
of  the  spot  where  he  will  take  the  ball.  Not  only  this, 
but  we  may  assume  him  to  be  placed  so  that  the  ball 
will  be  hit  with  an  ordinary  stroke,  or  Volley,  or  Half- 
volley  ;  so  that  it  will  not  be  too  near  him,  nor  too  far 
from  him,  nor  too  much  in  front  of  him,  nor  too  much 
behind  him  ;  he  will  be  in  that  spot  where  a  good  swing 
will  catch  the  ball  fair  and  square ;  the  racket  is  lifted 
(or  ready  to  be  lifted)  up  and  back,  the  shoulder  being 
up  and  back  also,  the  eye  on  the  ball.  Now  for  the 
stroke  itself,  which  perhaps  should  not  be  taken  while 
one  is  running,  and  certainly  not  while  one  is  moving 
backwards.  The  weight  is  on  the  behind  foot ;  it  passes 
onto  the  forward  foot  as  the  body  swings  round. 

But  the  head  must  not  swing  round  with  the  body ; 
the  head  must  be  kept  almost  as  steady  as  it  is  at  Golf. 

For  the  full  stroke,  the  trunk  of  the  body,  the  shoulder, 

the  upper  arm,  the  forearm,  the  wrist,  and   even   the 

fingers,  may  all  move  together  at  the  moment  when  the 

racket  hits  the  ball.     The  pace  of  all  this   combined 

movement  may  be  enormous.     But  the  pace  may   be 

varied  by  the  disuse  of  one  or  more  parts,  and  even  by 

70 


CH.  XI]        MOVEMENTS  DURING  STROKES  71 

a  movement  in  the  opposite  direction,  to  give  a  kind  of 
drag.  Players  were  often  wont  to  wonder  how  Saunders 
altered  the  rapidity  of  his  stroke  so  imperceptibly.  The 
explanation  probably  was  that,  while  he  moved  most  of 
his  muscles  as  usual,  some  of  them  he  kept  still,  if  he 
did  not  actually  move  them  in  the  opposite  direction  to 
effect  a  drag. 

But,  although  the  pace  is  great  at  the  moment  while 
the  ball  is  being  struck,  as  a  rule  one  should  not  stop 
the  pace  at  that  very  instant,  but  should  let  the  racket 
follow  through  the  stroke,  and  along  the  direction  of  the 
retiring  ball,  as  at  Golf.  The  racket  may  fly  up,  and 
the  body  may  move  towards  the  waiting  or  forward- 
facing  position. 

As  we  shall  see  when  we  come  to  the  Latham  stroke 
at  Racquets,  there  is  a  better  method  for  any  one  who 
has  a  good  eye — the  arrested  stroke,  which  resembles  the 
flicking  of  a  peg-top.  Here  we  are  dealing  with  ordinary 
strokes  for  ordinary  players.  And  for  these  ordinary 
strokes  the  following  hints  will  be  found  useful. 

"  Although  there  may  be  exceptions,  still  the  beginner  should  try 
at  first  to  play  with  a  swinging  racket  which  shall  offer  its  full  face 
fair  and  square  to  the  approaching  ball.  Besides  the  swinging  and 
the  full  face,  there  is  a  third  requisite  :  the  racket  should  move  for 
as  long  as  possible  in  the  line  of  the  approaching  ball,  so  that,  in 
case  one  may  be  a  little  too  early  or  too  late,  the  racket  may  still 
be  meeting  the  ball  in  a  line  which  shall  carry  the  ball  to  the 
Front-wall.  Fourthly,  the  racket  should  usually  be  gripped  firmly 
during  the  stroke."     (From  '  The  Game  of  Squash,'  p.  36.) 

If  one  is  taken  by  surprise  with  the  feet  still  facing 
forwards,  then  one  must  be  content  to  twist  the  body 
itself  round,  and  to  get  the  swing  thus,  with  some  help 
from  the  shoulder  ;  or  even  merely  to  flick  up  the  ball 
with  the  wrist.  But  of  course  the  risk  of  such  a  move- 
ment is  great,  as  the  following  curves  will  show.     The 


72 


RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH       [pt.  ii 


(U  o 
c  " 
—  — 


o  o 
S2 


o  <u 
o 

(D 
C 

_o  o 


.S2'S 

■Bo 


c 
ji:  « 
bjo   - 

0  ce 

1  M 

00^5 

S  rt 

<  2 


wrist-curve  involves 
the  greatest  chance  of 
error  in  timing  the 
ball :  the  body-swing 
with  shoulder-move- 
ment and  arm-move- 
ment involve  the  least. 

There  are  some  who, 
during  the  stroke,  find 
it  useful  not  only  to 
shift  the  weight  from 
the  back  onto  the 
front  foot,  but  also  to 
take  a  step  forward 
with  the  front  foot,  as 
one  would  at  Fencing. 
I  think  that  few  if  any 
Racquet-players  do 
this. 

About  other  details 
of  the  stroke  and  its 
mechanism,  even  for 
ordinary  occasions 
such  as  a  game  of 
Squash,  there  may  be 
much  dispute,  but,  as 
I  said  in  the  little 
book  on  that  game, 

"  Whichever  stroke  be 
adopted,  three  things  are 
certain. 

"  I.  The  first  is  that  the 
position  must  have  been 
already  made  (grip  correct, 
racket  up  and  back,  etc.) 


CH.  XI]        MOVEMENTS  DURING  STROKES  y^ 

before  the  stroke  is  begun.  The  stroke  should  as  a  rule  not  be 
begun  by  the  player  while  he  is  running  on  his  toes. 

"  2.  The  second  is  that  the  player  must  keep  his  eye  on  the  ball 
from  the  very  moment  that  the  ball  has  left  the  opponent's  racket. 
Till  that  time  let  him  watch  his  opponent's  eye  or  racket  and  arm  ; 
but  after  that  time  he  must  observe  the  golden  rule  of  Golf. 

"  3.  The  third  is  that,  the  moment  the  stroke  is  over,  the  player 
must  be  alert  on  his  toes  and  prepared  to  have  already  got  into 
position  before  he  has  to  make  the  next  stroke.  Let  him  now  look 
no  longer  at  the  ball,  but  rather  at  his  opponent.'' 

When  the  player  proceeds  to  practise  the  ordinary 
strokes  (Chapters  XIII  and  XIV),  he  will  be  advised  to 
master  first  the  full  and  easy  swing,  then  the  direction 
of  the  stroke,  then  its  elevation,  then  its  length  and 
pace,  and,  last  of  all,  its  cut  or  twist  or  other  varieties. 


CHAPTER  XII 

MOVEMENTS  AND  POSITIONS  AFTER  STROKES 

The  stroke,  should  leave  the  player  ready  to  face 
forwards  with  the  feet  and  body  and  eye  ;  this  readiness 
may  be  the  effect  of  the  body-swing  and  of  the  stroke 
which  has  followed  the  direction  of  the  ball.  For  (unless 
one  has  tried  the  Latham  stroke)  one  has  carried  the 
racket  through,  and  has  not  stopped  it  soon  after  the 
instant  when  the  ball  has  been  touched.  As  if  one  were 
playing  Golf,  one  has  let  the  racket  move  beyond  the 
striking-point,  and  upwards.  This  full  stroke  leaves 
one  nearly  in  the  waiting  position,  so  that  one  may  pass 
easily  into  the  right  position  for  the  next  stroke.  The 
right  waiting  position  is  shown  in  the  Illustration  in 
Chapter  IX. 

Besides  the  position,  one  must  also  have  balance  in 
that  position.  The  tendency  of  the  powerful  body-swing 
is  to  throw  the  body  out  of  equilibrium,  and  the  player 
is  hurled  forwards.  It  requires  either  great  natural 
ability,  or  else  great  practice,  to  avoid  being  thus  dis- 
concerted. This  is  especially  the  case  when  a  player 
has  made  either  a  very  difficult  stroke,  or  what  he  thinks 
to  be  a  killing  stroke,  and  so  is  unready  for  the  ball  to 
be  returned.  He  is  content  with  his  supreme  effort.  It 
is  indeed  difficult,  as  it  were  to  give  half  the  body  away, 

74 


CH.  xii]        MOVEMENTS  AFTER  STROKES  75 

and  to  let  the  other  half  of  the  body  contribute  its  help, 
and  then  to  be  ready  to  do  the  same  thing  again  the 
next  moment.  And  yet  it  is  important  that  he  should 
be  ready,  unless  he  is  absolutely  sure  that  the  opponent 
will  not  return  the  ball  at  all ;  or  unless  he  is  sure  that 
the  opponent  will  return  the  ball  to  this  side  and  not  to 
the  other. 

As  a  general  rule,  however,  one  should  assume  that 
one's  opponent  may  return  the  ball  to  either  side,  unless 
one  knows  his  play  well.  Therefore  one  faces  forwards 
both  with  one's  feet  and  with  one's  body,  and  with  one's 
eye  one  watches  the  opponent  and  his  eye,  as  at  Boxing, 
and  then,  when  he  has  hit  the  ball,  one  notices  the  ball. 
One  is  alert  on  one's  toes,  not  on  one's  heels,  and  one 
has  the  head  of  the  racket  up. 

This  takes  one  again  to  the  position  before  the  stroke. 
Thus  we  have  the  complete  circle.  One  is  now  nicely 
balanced  on  the  balls  of  the  feet,  on  those  swing-points 
which  nature  has  so  placed  that  the  heel  behind  and  the 
toes  in  front,  if  pressed  upon,  impart  the  backward  or 
forward  impulsion  to  the  body.  One  has,  so  to  speak, 
alighted  poised,  prepared  to  move  into  the  position  either 
for  the  Forehand  or  for  the  Backhand  stroke,  as 'in 
Chapter  X. 


CHAPTER    XIII 

PRACTICE  WITH  APPARATUS 

Note. — The  Apparatus  alluded  to  here  can  be  obtained  from 
Messrs.  Prosser  and  Son,  Pentonville  Road,  London,  N.,  for 
seven  shillings. 

For  practice  outside  the  Court  one  needs  good  air, 
good  light,  and  as  open  a  space  as  is  possible.  Of  course 
exercise  out-of-doors  is  best  of  all ;  but,  if  that  be 
impossible  or  unfeasible,  then  exercise  in  a  large  barn 
or  empty  room  or  hall  or  passage  may  be  better  than 
nothing.  If  the  space  is  small,  then  it  might  be  better 
to  play  with  a  curtailed  racket-handle,  perhaps  weighted 
at  the  end.  I  often  carry  about  with  me  a  racket-handle 
in  order  that  I  may  practise  Racquet-strokes.  I  have  a 
similar  handle  for  Tennis.  Either  can  be  carried  about 
in  a  small  bag.  One  is  far  more  inclined  to  go  through 
this  exercise  in  the  early  morning,  if  one  has  some  such 
reminder. 

One  may  form  the  positions  before  the  strokes,  holding 
the  racket  up ;  then  one  may  do  the  strokes,  paying 
special  attention  to  the  body-swing.  Then  will  follow 
naturally  the  position  after  the  strokes.  And  one  may 
also  perfect  oneself  in  running  in  various  directions,  in 
J)Osition,  with  the  racket  up  in  the  air. 

It  is  important  at  first  to  do  the  foot- work  practically 

76 


CH.  xiii]        PRACTICE    WITH  APPARATUS  yy 

independently  of  the  body-work.  Later  on,  the  two 
may  be  combined.  The  foot-movements  have  already 
been  illustrated.  At  first  there  need  be  no  ball  at  all, 
except  in  imagination.  There  must  be  the  muscular 
movements,  but  there  need  not  necessarily  be  exercise 
for  the  eye  at  present.  It  is  essential  to  repeat  the 
muscular  movements  till  they  have  become  automatic, 
and  integral  parts  of  oneself  I  am  here,  as  indeed 
almost  throughout  the  book,  giving  suggestions  not  for 
genius-players  but  for  beginners,  and  for  those  who  find 
diflficulty  in  improving  as  much  as  they  feel  that  they 
might  and  should. 

When  one  has  made  such  common  movements  of  the 
feet  and  body  fairly  easy  by  constant  repetition,  then  it 
is  advisable  to  learn  the  normal  Forehand  and  Backhand 
strokes,  with  a  ball  stationary  in  the  ideal  place,  i.  e.  in 
the  place  where  one  would  always  like  it  to  be  during  a 
game.  It  has  been  said  that  very  kw  players  would  fail 
to  make  good  strokes  if  they  always  had  the  ball  just 
where  they  wanted  it.  Now  if  the  mountain  will  not 
come  to  Mahomet,  Mahomet  must  go  to  the  mountain  ; 
if  the  ball  will  not  come  to  the  player,  the  player  must 
go  to  the  ball — must  have  gone  to  the  ball  already  before 
he  attempts  to  strike  it.  Later  on,  of  course,  he  will 
learn  how  to  hit  the  moving  ball.  But  at  first  he  should, 
I  think,  hit  again  and  again  a  stationary  ball  in  the 
easiest  position,  whatever  that  may  be. 

If  he  once  gets  into  his  mind  the.  picture  of  himself 
standing  ready  in  the  right  position,  and  hitting  the  ball 
(which  is  itself  at  the  right  spot),  and  in  the  right  way, 
and  if  the  various  movements  are  already  correct  and 
half-unconscious — then,  directly  he  goes  into  the  Court 
to  play,  his  tendency  will  be  to  move  of  his  own  accord 
into  that  position  in  which  he  will  be  right  for  the  ball 


78  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  il 

and  the  ball  will  be  right  for  him.  In  his  memory  and 
imagination  there  is  registered  a  clear  impression  and 
scene,  and,  as  it  were,  a  sensation  of  himself  standing  at 
a  certain  place,  and  then  hitting  that  ball  correctly.  He 
will  find  himself  inclined  to  reproduce  that  memory  in 
reality  when  the  game  itself  begins. 

Photograph  XI  shows  a  Tennis  player  ready  for  his 
Backhand  stroke.  The  ball  is  just  where  one  would  like 
to  have  it.  And,  if  one  could  repeat  the  sight  of  such  a 
picture,  and  the  feeling  of  being  posed  thus,  a  sufficient 
number  of  times,  then  one  would  tend  to  judge  the 
flight  of  the  ball  more  and  more  accurately  the  oftener 
one  played. 

For  such  practice  it  is  necessary  to  have  a  ball 
which  can  be  placed  at  any  height,  and  which  will  return 
to  the  same  place  after  it  has  been  struck.  For  a 
long  time  I  could  not  see  how  this  problem  could  be 
solved. 

First  of  all  I  used  to  suspend  a  ball  after  the  fashion 
of  the  old  Punch-ball.  India-rubber  was  fastened  to  it 
both  above  (to  the  ceiling)  and  below  (to  the  floor).  It 
could  be  put  at  any  height,  for  it  was  attached  to  rings  in 
the  ceiling  and  the  floor.  And  it  would  always  return  to 
the  same  spot.  But  it  was  impossible  to  carry  through 
one's  stroke  with  the  racket,  because  the  india-rubber  was 
in  the  way. 

Then  at  last  I  solved  the  difficulty  by  the  Patent 
Apparatus  which  appears  in  Photographs  XI  and  XII. 
The  ball  is  hung  from  the  ceiling  ;  the  cord  by  which  it 
is  hung  passes  through  a  metal  ring  in  the  ceiling,  and  is 
fastened  to  a  clip  in  the  Side-wall.  At  this  clip  the  cord 
can  be  pulled  or  loosened,  and  thus  adjusted  so  that  the 
ball  may  be  set  at  any  height.  When  one  strikes  this 
ball  it  swings  freely,  and  then  returns  to  the  same  place. 


■KT^ 

i|^IH 

Br  i^  A 

n^^H 

^^■^Jl    ,      '^m 

^^^^^H 

H\  |J|I' 

^^H 

H^B   i  ^BBI^—-'"-  *"" 

""^          ™ 

Hb9B 

^^^^^^^^^^^^^Hp^  -««^ 

Fig.  11. — Backhand  Stroke,  with  Apparatus. 
First  position. 


Fig.  12. — Backhand  Stroke,  with  Apparatus. 
Second  position. 

(See  page  78.) 


i-^iG.  13. — Forehand  Stroke,  with  Apparatls. 
First  position. 


Ym.  14.— FoREHAXD  Stroke,  with  Apparatus. 
Second  posit icni. 


(See  page  79.) 


CH.  xiii]       PRACTICE   WITH  APPARATUS  79 

It  is  easy  to  carry  through  the  stroke.  But  of  course 
such  a  simple  Apparatus  would  have  had  this  dis- 
advantage, that  the  ball  would  swing  like  a  pendulum 
backwards  and  forwards  for  a  long  time  before  it  stopped 
again  at  the  right  place.  Therefore  two  other  cords  go 
out  from  the  ball  in  the  direction  of  the  stroke.  They 
are  tied  to  other  clips,  or  to  chairs  etc.  The  ball  is  now 
adjusted  as  before  to  any  required  height  When  it  is 
struck,  it  flies  freely  out,  followed  through  by  the  racket. 
The  ball  then  returns  to  the  same  place,  not  beyond  it 
as  before,  for  it  is  brought  up  suddenly  and  checked  by 
the  two  cords.  It  is  jerked  back,  trembles,  then  stops 
still,  and  awaits  the  next  stroke. 

We  may  give  here  a  few  general  instructions  for 
ordinary  strokes  to  be  made  in  a  large  room  with  this 
Apparatus.  Some  instructions  for  the  Tennis  Service 
will  be  suggested  later  on. 

For  ordinary  practice  one  may  take  a  Lawn  Tennis 
racket  or  Squash-Tennis  (Slazenger)  racket,  and  may 
use  the  Apparatus  with  the  Lawn  Tennis  ball.  This 
can  be  obtained  from  Messrs.  Prosser  and  Son, 
Pentonville  Road,  London,  for  seven  shillings. 

The  instructions  here  are  only  for  ordinary  practice. 
The  differences  for  individual  strokes  will  be  mentioned 
later  on.  The  chief  requisite  is  to  have  the  feet  in  the 
right  position.  There  are,  of  course,  several  right 
positions,  but  a  good  average  for  the  Forehand  stroke 
is  shown  in  Photographs  XIII  and  XIV.  This  position 
may  be  marked  with  chalk  on  the  floor.  The  left  foot  is 
almost  in  a  line  with  the  ball,  but  rather  in  front  of  it 
than  behind  it ;  and  is  at  a  distance  of  about  18  inches 
from  the  toe  of  it,  and  is  suspended  at  about  12  to  18 
inches  from  the  floor.  The  feet  are  in  the  right  position, 
i.  e.  facing  sideways  (see  Chapter  X) ;   the  racket  and 


8o  RACQUETS,  TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

the  right  shoulder  are  up  and  back ;  and  the  eye  is  on 
the  ball. 

Otiose  as  it  may  sound,  it  is  yet  true  that  a  few 
seconds  (or  even  minutes)  spent  in  the  right  position 
whilst  one  watches  the  ball  in  the  right  spot  for  play,  is 
by  no  means  wasted.  It  fixes  the  ideal  more  perma- 
nently upon  the  memories  of  sight  and  feeling.  For  the 
correct  position  produces  a  physical  "  feeling  "  of  a  very 
distinct  kind  :  it  produces  a  feeling  analogous  to  that 
produced  by  a  successful  Half-volley.  One  knows  that 
one  is  doing  well.  The  physical  conscience  (not  mens 
conscia  recti,  but  corpus  conscium  recti)  is  fed  and  satisfied. 

One  now  makes  a  plain  drive,  but  not  too  fast  at  first. 
All  the  movements  of  the  body  may  contribute  power 
for  this  drive,  and  the  whole  body  swings  through,  the 
weight  passing  from  the  back  foot  to  the  front  foot. 
One  follows  the  ball  with  the  racket,  letting  the  ball  fly 
forwards  in  front  of  it  into  the  air. 

The  racket  should  swing,  not  across  to  the  left,  but 
out  and  away  t©  the  right ;  the  body  turns  round  to  the 
left,  and  then  the  feet  change  to  the  forward  or  waiting 
position. 

One  repeats  this  stroke  till  one  begins  to  feel  tired ; 
then  one  can  rest,  or  else  practise  another  exercise. 

Now  pass  into  the  Backhand  position,  as  in  Photo- 
graph XI.  Make  chalk  marks  for  the  places  where  the 
feet  should  go.  The  right  foot  should  be  nearly  in  a 
line  with  the  ball,  but  somewhat  behind  the  line  ;  the 
ball  should  be,  as  before,  about  i8  inches  from  the  toes, 
and  about  12  to  18  inches  from  the  floor. 

The  movements  of  the  Backhand  stroke  can  now  be 
repeated,  as  in  Chapter  XI. 

After  one  has  practised  the  Backhand  stroke  of  the 
ordinary  kind,  and  after  it  has  become  so  easy  that  one 


CH.  xiii]       PRACTICE   WITH  APPARATUS  8i 

can  make  it  with  all  the  different  movements  combined, 
and  yet  not  lose  one's  balance,  then  one  may  practise 
getting  into  the  Forehand  and  Backhand  positions.  Let 
us  take  the  Forehand  first. 

Stand  behind  the  ball,  somewhat  to  the  left,  facing 
forwards  in  the  waiting  position,  and  with  your  eye  on 
the  ball.  Now  step  into  a  Forehand  position  (see 
Diagram  3,  Chapter  IX),  and  then  move  sideways  into 
the  position  for  hitting  the  ball  with  a  Forehand  stroke. 
As  we  have  pointed  out,  Burke,  the  Lawn  Tennis 
Champion,  moves  into  position  by  strides ;  Latham,  by 
short  steps.  After  you  have  moved  into  position  with- 
out ever  taking  your  eye  off  the  ball,  then  look  down  to 
see  if  your  feet  are  on  the  chalk  marks.  If  not,  note 
how  far  off  they  are,  and  in  what  direction,  and  practise 
until  you  can  get  them  every  time  over  the  marks. 
When  you  can  do  this,  then  make  the  movements  of  the 
actual  stroke. 

Now  stand  behind  the  ball,  rather  to  its  right,  and 
again  facing  forwards  and  on  the  alert  with  your  eye 
on  the  ball.  Try  to  step  similarly  into  the  Backhand 
position.  Then  correct  your  mistakes,  if  necessary. 
Next,  when  you  can  step  into  the  position  easily  time 
after  time,  let  the  Backhand  stroke  itself  follow. 

This  should  make  the  two  ordinary  strokes,  with  the 
movements  which  lead  up  to  them,  and  the  movements 
which  follow  them,  an  inalienable  part  of  your  play  and 
of  yourself  The  drudgery  may  seem  not  nearly  worth 
while  until  you  have  been  through  it,  and  then  you  will 
never  regret  a  minute  spent  on  the  practice.  For  the 
art  of  being  always  in  position  is  one  of  the 
greatest  in  life. 

It  took  me  a  very  long  time  before  I  could  make 
these  movements  easy  and  half-automatic  and  sub- 
8 


82  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

conscious.  I  used  to  be  always  in  the  wrong  position  : 
indeed,  some  years  ago,  most  people  despaired  of  my 
ever  getting  any  right  position  or  stroke  or  style  at  all. 
But  while  I  was  in  America  I  was  often  told  that  I  was 
always  in  the  right  position  with  my  feet  and  body,  and 
that  this  was  the  secret  of  my  success.  If  it  was,  then 
my  success  was  almost  entirely  due  to  careful  practice 
outside  the  Court,  partly  without  Apparatus  and  partly 
with  it. 

The  Apparatus  can  be  set  up  in  any  space  where  there 
are  a  few  yards  to  spare,  and  where  there  is  a  beam  into 
which  the  top  screw-hook  may  be  put.  When  it  is  once 
ready,  then  the  stroke  of  any  expert  may  be  clearly  seen 
and  correctly  analysed  and  afterwards  practised,  part-by- 
part,  at  odd  moments  in  the  early  morning  or  during  the 
day-time  (before  one's  lunch)  or  late  at  night.  The 
practice  will  enable  a  beginner  to  acquire  the  "  in- 
dispensable mechanism"  of  any  given  stroke  outside 
the  Court,  and  therefore  with  less  trouble  and  time  and 
expense. 

Let  us  take  an  example.  One  wishes  to  imitate 
Latham's  Backhand  stroke  at  Racquets,  or  Pettitt's 
Force  at  Tennis.  One  asks  the  expert  to  fix  the  ball 
right  for  his  ideal  stroke,  and  then  to  make  that  stroke 
a  few  times.  One  marks  where  his  feet  are,  and  the 
positions  and  movements  of  other  parts  of  his  body. 

Then,  allowing  for  differences  of  height,  build,  etc., 
one  forms  one's  own  position,  undersupervision  of  Latham 
or  Pettitt.  One  tries  to  make  the  stroke.  One  is 
corrected,  and  tries  again.  Eventually  one  gets  the 
machinery  into  correct  order.  Then  one  can  repeat  the 
stroke  at  leisure  by  oneself,  with  only  an  occasional  refer- 
ence to  the  expert. 

Or,  again,  one  sees  a  useful  tour  de  force  during  a 


CH.  XIII]        PRACTICE    WITH  APPARATUS  83 

game.  When  one  comes  home,  one  reproduces  it  and 
repeats  it  with  the  Apparatus,  and  thus  one  adds  another 
item  to  one's  repertoire. 

With  the  Apparatus  one  can  vary  not  only  the  height 
of  the  ball  from  the  ground,  and  one's  distance  from  it, 
but  also  the  direction  in  which  and  the  height  to  which 
one  will  hit  it.  One  can  practise  the  useful  art  of 
masking  the  direction  of  one's  stroke. 

But  in  this  book  I  have  avoided  elaborate  instructions 
as  to  minutiae.  Such  are  best  left  to  the  care  and 
discretion  of  the  individual  Marker,  and  to  Latham's 
description  in  the  forthcoming  hand-book  about  the 
Apparatus. 

The  practice  with  Apparatus  is  not  the  game  itself, 
nor  even  the  stroke  itself  It  is  apprenticeship  for  the 
stroke.  It  trains  the  muscles  to  work  together  in 
harmonious  co-ordination.  It  bears  to  the  game  almost 
the  same  relation  that  certain  (American)  Football 
practice  bears  to  American  Football,  or  Punch-ball 
practice  to  Boxing.  It  will  be  time  enough  to  have 
opponents  when  one  has  learnt  how  to  hit. 

Among  other  Apparatus  one  may  mention  the  Punch- 
ball  itself,  the  skipping-rope,  and — last  but  not  least — 
the  peg-top.  This  should  be  invaluable  in  giving  the 
quick  shoulder-jerk  and  wrist-flick  such  as  Pettitt  loves. 


CHAPTER   XIV 

PRACTICE  AGAINST  A  WALL  AND  IN  A  SQUASH-COURT 

The  player  who  has  been  through  the  drudgeries 
suggested  in  the  previous  Chapters  now  finds  it  com- 
paratively easy  to  pass  at  will  from  the  waiting  position 
to  the  Forehand  or  Backhand  positions  ;  then  to  move 
to  any  place,  keeping  the  position  all  the  time ;  and, 
after  that,  to  make  a  correct  average  stroke.  When  he 
has  finished  this,  whether  it  be  Forehand  or  Backhand, 
he  should  be  left  with  his  balance  preserved,  in  the 
waiting  position  (or  nearly  so),  and  ready  for  a  similar 
performance. 

So  far,  however,  the  ball  has  been  stationary.  We 
now  come  to  play  with  a  moving  ball,  which  is  a  very 
different  matter. 

Any  ball  or  any  racket  will  do  for  practice,  though  a 
Lawn  Tennis  ball  and  a  Lawn  Tennis  or  Squash  Tennis 
racket  will  probably  be  the  easiest  to  get.  Any  wall 
may  be  used,  for  instance,  the  wall  of  a  room.  A 
dado  or  a  chalk-line  or  an  imaginary  line  will  represent 
the  play-line  or  the  net. 

Such  practice  may  be  compared  to  practice  by 
means  of  the  Apparatus.  It  is  better  than  ordinary 
practice  with  the  Marker  in  the  Court  in  so  far  as  it  is 
cheaper,  takes  up  less  time,  is  possible  at  odd  moments 

84 


CH.  XIV]         PRACTICE  AGAINST  A    WALL 


85 


and  in  odd  places,  and  enables  one  to  go  through  the 
movements  so  many  more  times  in  a  given  number  of 
minutes.  And  one  finds  less  to  distract  one's  attention 
under  such  conditions.  Only  at  first  the  movements 
should  be  superintended,  if  possible,  by  the  Marker  or 
by  some  other  expert. 

TOP  BOUNDARY  LINE 


LINE  ABOVE  WHICH 

SERVICE  MUST  GO 

(6  ft.  from  Floor) 

TOP  OF  TELL-TALE 

(2  ft.  from  Floor) 
LEVEL  OF  FLOOR 

/    BrcadtK  of  COURT    '\ 

leftSirxS.  \ 

Diagram  9. — Front-wall  of  a  Squash-Tennis  Court. 

The  disadvantage  of  ordinary  practice  with  a  Marker 
is  that  no  Marker,  however  skilful,  can  send  many 
strokes  exactly  alike.  Hence  the  player  must  be  think- 
ing not  only  of  the  position  of  his  body  and  of  the  cor- 
rect movements  for  the  stroke,  but  also  of  the  position 
of  his  feet  before  the  stroke.  His  mind  is,  like  that  of 
Achilles,  "divided   hither   and   thither."      He  has   too 


86  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  II 

many  points  to  attend  to  at  once.  Play  against  a  wall 
or  in  a  Squash-Court  (for  the  Front-wall  of  a  Court,  see 
Diagram  9)  has  been  found  very  useful  for  Lawn  Tennis. 
The  Allen  brothers  keep  up  their  Lawn  Tennis  practice 
by  this  means  through  the  winter  months ;  and  I  find 
practice  with  a  Tennis  racket  and  a  Lawn  Tennis  ball 
in  a  Squash-Court  by  far  the  best  preparation  for  a 
Tennis  match.  It  especially  encourages  activity.  And 
ten  minutes  of  it  is  ample  exercise  for  a  day. 

Let  us  first  take  the  Forehand  stroke.  Stand  in  the 
waiting  position.  Hit  the  ball  up  onto  the  wall  so  that 
it  will  return  to  your  right  side.  Do  not  try  to  hit  the 
ball  back  yet,  but  notice  where  it  goes  just  before  it  hits 
the  floor  for  the  second  time.  In  fact,  notice  where  it 
would  be  if  it  were  in  that  ideal  spot  which  you  see 
when  you  practise  with  the  Apparatus  (Photograph 
XIII).  You  ought  to  be  in  your  old  ideal  position, 
ready  to  hit  the  ball  there. 

Now  send  the  ball  up  again,  as  nearly  as  you  can  in 
the  same  way  as  before,  and  this  time  move  so  that  you 
will  be  in  the  ideal  position.  Do  not  make  the  stroke 
yet,  only  prepare  to  make  it.  Concentrate  your  mind 
on  the  correct  position.  Notice  whether  you  are  too 
far  forward  or  behind,  too  much  to  one  side  or  to  the 
other. 

This  seems  a  tedious  method,  but  I  have  found  that  it 
repays  trouble.  When  you  can  move  into  position 
easily,  then  try  to  return  the  ball  up  against  the  wall, 
not  across  to  your  left,  but  back  to  your  right  side. 

If  in  trying  to  do  this  you  hit  the  ball  across  to  your 
left  side,  what  was  wrong  ?  Either  your  feet  were  facing 
forwards  too  much  (for  remember  that  the  tendency  of 
the  arm  is  to  move  across  the  body,  like  a  pendulum, 
and  not  straight  forward),  or  else  your  swing  with  your 


^ 


fe 


Fig.  17. — Wrong  Pcsitiox. 


(See  page  109.) 


CH.  XIV]        PRACTICE  AGAINST  A    WALL  87 

arm  was  not  carried  through  after  the  ball,  as  at  Golf  or 
Cricket. 

If  the  ball  was  hit  too  much  to  the  right,  what  was 
wrong  ?  Your  feet  may  have  been  facing  too  much  away 
from  the  ball,  or  your  swing  was  carried  too  far  outwards. 

If  the  ball  was  hit  too  high,  then  your  feet  were  too 
much  behind  the  ball,  and  thus  you  took  the  ball  while 
your  racket  was  swinging  upwards. 

If  the  ball  was  hit  too  low,  then  perhaps  your  feet 
were  too  much  in  front  of  the  ball,  and  thus  you  took 
the  ball  while  your  racket  was  swinging  downwards. 

So  far,  it  has  seemed  to  be  almost  entirely  a  matter 
of  the  feet  and  of  a  good  full  swing  outwards.  Apart 
from  these  two  faults  you  ought  to  be  able  to  keep  up  the 
ball  again  and  again,  returning  it  always  to  your  own 
right  side.  Do  not  avoid  Volleys  and  Half-volleys : 
keep  the  ball  going ;  but  try  to  get  into  the  position  for 
an  ordinary  stroke. 

Go  through  the  same  practice  with  a  Backhand  stroke, 
returning  it  down  your  left  side,  and  not  across  to  your 
right  side.  Practise  until  you  can  keep  this  up  again 
and  again. 

It  is  very  easy  to  add  the  cross-stroke,  both  Forehand 
and  Backhand.  But  I  think  it  is  a  pity  to  try  this  until 
you  can  return  the  ball  down  the  same  side. 

Now  for  the  Back-wall  play,  and  the  Side-wall  play, 
for  which  the  Squash-Court  gives  the  best  practice. 

The  measurements  of  a  Squash-Court  are  seen  in 
Diagram  10.  Probably  the  cheapest  kind  of  Squash- 
Court  will  be  the  American,  which  is  made  of  wood. 
Examples  of  it  are  to  be  seen  at  Tuxedo,  at  Boston,  at 
Newport,  and  at  the  Merion  Club  (near  Philadelphia). 
The  Cambridge  Cement  Courts  are  nearer  to  the  size  of 


RACQUETS,    TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH       [pt.  ii 


the  American.  The  Lord's  Court  is  much  larger,  being 
42  ft.  by  24  ft.  I  in.  ;  its  Back-wall  is  8  ft.  8  in.  high  ;  its 
Service-line  8  ft.  9  in. ;  its  Play-line  or  Tell-tale  2  ft.  4  in. 
The  Cross-Court  line  is  23  ft.  \  in.  from  the  Front- wall. 


Jo 

-I    ^ 

4- 
•^ 

CNJ 


FRONT-WALL 
I6f»  from  Floor 

^r»ice  llf*.  6ft  fromfloor 


VtNT)L»TION 


Crws -Court 


(2lHattifrDrr 


»o 


o 
Line 


Frxm«A»<ill). 


EreaiHi<rf  Floor  16 f)3ln 


:vvvvvYvv/vW 


-*» 
J  S 

^  m 
5  r 

o 


Diagram  10. — Plan  of  a  Squash-Tennis  Court  (American). 

For  further  details,  and  for  hints  on  the  building  and 
lighting  of  Squash-Courts,  see  *  The  Game  of  Squash ' 
(J.  F.  Taylor  and  Co.,  New  York,  and  George  Bell  and 
Sons,  All-England  Library),  from  which  the  design  and 
specification,  so  kindly  planned  for  me  by  Mr.  James  B. 
Lord,  are  quoted  below. 


CH.  XIV]        PRACTICE  AGAINST  A    WALL  89 

The  cost  of  a  Squash-Court  varies  according  to  the 
material,  which  may  be  a  cheap  single  layer  of  wood, 
without  anything  much  except  the  floor  and  the  four 
walls.  Or  it  may  be  a  double  layer  of  cheap  wood  or  of 
expensive  wood  ;  or  it  may  be  concrete,  or  Bickley 
cement,  with  or  without  bath-room,  gallery,  etc.  The 
Bickley  cement  obviously  gives  the  best  practice.  I 
suppose  that  a  very  cheap  kind  of  Court  in  England 
would  not  exceed  ;i^50  in  price,  unless  electric  light  were 
added.  Electric  light  should  not  be  directed  so  as  to 
shine  in  the  player's  eyes,  but  should  be  thrown  onto 
the  Front-wall  by  reflectors,  or  onto  a  white  sheet  on 
the  ceiling,  so  that  it  may  reach  one's  eyes  indirectly. 

Now  let  us  take  the  Back-wall  play,  the  general  rule 
being  to  strike  the  ball  in  the  same  ordinary  position  as 
before,  but,  while  one  is  waiting  and  getting  ready  for 
the  ball,  to  face  not  towards  the  Front-wall,  but  rather 
towards  the  Back-wall. 

Face  the  Back-wall,  and  throw  the  ball  onto  it,  rather 
to  your  left.  Watch  where  the  ball  would  fall  just 
before  its  second  bounce.  Then  throw  it  up  again  as 
before,  and  get  into  the  ideal  position.  Do  not  hit  the 
ball  at  all  until  you  can  easily  get  into  the  ideal  position. 
Keep  your  eye  on  the  ball  all  the  time.  You  will  soon 
find  that  you  will  move  instinctively  into  the  right 
position  without  effort.  You  will  now  be  in  the 
Forehand  position,  with  the  ball  just  as  it  was  on  the 
Apparatus.     See  the  Photograph  in  Chapter  XXIII. 

Then  repeat  this  and  afterwards  make  the  Forehand 
stroke,  hitting  the  ball  so  that  it  returns  to  your  right- 
hand  side.  When  you  can  do  this  easily,  then  throw 
the  ball  onto  the  floor  first,  and  thence  onto  the  Back- 
wall.  It  is  harder  to  return  this  ball,  because  it  will 
give  you  less  time  to  wait ;  for  now  you  have  to  hit  the 


9o  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  il 

ball  before  it  shall  have  touched  the  floor  again.  But 
the  same  process  may  be  employed.  First  see  where 
the  ball  falls  ;  then  get  into  position  ;  and  then  add  the 
Forehand  stroke. 

Do  this  also  for  the  Backhand  stroke;  this  time  of 
course  you  throw  the  ball  rather  to  your  right  side  as 
you  face  the  Back-wall. 

This  Back-wall  practice  is  possible  in  some  kinds  of 
spare-rooms,  but  Side-wall  play  is  possible  in  very  few. 

For  Side-wall  play  make  the  simple  strokes  which  are 
explained  at  the  beginning  of  this  Chapter ;  try  to  keep 
the  ball  between  yourself  and  the  same  Side-wall. 

Take  the  Forehanders  first.  The  ball  will  sometimes 
hit  the  Side-wall.  In  that  case,  return  it  onto  the 
Front-wall  without  smashing  your  racket  against  that 
wall.    Drag  it  along  as  near  to  the  Side-wall  as  you  can. 

Then  try  the  Backhanders  on  the  same  plan. 

Next  try  strokes  thrown  in  different  ways,  e.  g.  to  the 
place  where  the  Side-wall  meets  the  Back-wall,  and 
adopt  the  same  method  as  for  the  Back-wall  strokes. 
First  throw  up  the  ball,  and  watch  where  it  bounces  for 
the  second  time  ;  then  do  the  same  and  get  into  position; 
then  do  the  same  and  add  the  stroke  itself 

Let  us  repeat.  This  is  drudgery,  but  it  is  not  un- 
healthy exercise.  It  may  give  firm  foundations  for 
style  and  for  improvement  of  style,  as  well  as  for  enjoy- 
ment ;  and  it  may  give  a  good  method  for  the  learning 
of  any  game.  The  principle  is  to  split  up  a  complex 
whole  into  simple  parts,  and  to  practise  part  by  part, 
and  to  make  each  part  as  nearly  as  possible  automatic 
and  sub-conscious,  under  easy  and  cheap  conditions,  and 
at  odd  moments. 

By  this  practice  outside  the  Racquet-Court  or  Tennis- 
Court  one  can  get  ever  so  many  more  strokes  at  much 


[JSmSMMSl 


\ 


.J<//.j»i.J 


ifflfflffl 


^>U^/tS 


s5iJe/Elevi>Noa 


-♦4  7" 


(oorp' 


^ 


fla^r 


Fig.  16. — Sketch  li 
Scale  J  i 


B 


j^~ 


JL 


2>res3ijfa 


—  sc — 


& 


i.  Squash-Court. 
:  1  foot. 


jC^^?^  V1\.  J'^^^V" -**-  -  -  -  - 


u. 


^n.^y'r, 


_  _  n'-^ba  . 


Zn<d  E-lcve^fion    - 


to  efie/t 


(See  page  91.) 


CH.  xiv]        PRACTICE  AGAINST  A    WALL  91 

less  expense.  Such  exercise  in  one's  room  is  quite  easy, 
both  in  the  early  morning  before  the  bath,  and  in  the 
evening  after  business  and  before  dinner,  and  it  is 
valuable  for  the  mind  as  well  as  the  body. 

The  Rules  of  Squash  are  very  like  the  Rules  of  Rac- 
quets. In  fact,  as  we  have  said  elsewhere,  Squash  may 
be  called  Baby-Racquets ;  and  it  is  the  childhood  that 
best  prepares  for  the  later  life. 

The  advantages  of  Squash  have  been  explained  in 
the  special  book  on  that  game.  It  enables  one  to  get 
through  more  exercise  and  more  practice  in  less  time 
with  less  trouble  in  fetching  the  balls,  and  with  less  dis- 
appointment. Besides  this,  as  it  does  not  require  so 
much  accuracy  as  either  Racquets  or  Tennis,  it  can  be 
played  satisfactorily  by  artificial  light,  which  hitherto 
(quite  apart  from  its  cost)  has  never  yet  been  satis- 
factorily applied  to  either  of  the  two  greater  games. 

In  order  that  those  who  have  the  money,  or  else  the 
energy  to  form  a  co-operative  Club  of  Members,  may  be 
enabled  to  build  a  Court,  I  append  the  Design  and 
Specification  so  kindly  planned  for  me  by  Mr.  James  B. 
Lord,  of  New  York. 


CHAPTER  XV 

HINTS  ON   MATCH-PLAY 

Most  players  seem  to  prefer  hard  practice  at  their 
game  till  a  day  or  two  before  the  Match.  Then  either 
they  rest,  or  they  change  their  form  of  exercise.  All 
seem  to  be  the  better  for  a  good  night's  sleep  before- 
hand. Many  take  light  food  the  day  before,  though 
perhaps  rather  more  food  than  usual  on  the  day  before 
that. 

As  to  the  meal  that  precedes  the  Match  itself,  it  is  a 
question  how  long  an  interval  should  be  allowed  if  the 
food  be  stimulating,  as  flesh-foods  are ;  for  it  seems  a 
pity  not  to  play  until  the  stimulating  effect  has  begun  to 
pass  off  or  has  already  passed  off.  This  is  a  matter  for 
individual  experience. 

And  so  is  the  question  of  exercise  before  the  Match. 
An  early  morning  alternate  walk  and  run  before  break- 
fast may  give  great  energy  for  the  play,  or,  on  the  other 
hand,  it  may  tire  the  player. 

But,  in  any  case,  there  is  need  of  a  good  wind  and  a 
cool  head,  and  hence  the  deep-breathing  exercise  of 
Chapter  I  is  to  be  recommended.  It  should  be  followed 
by  the  muscular  relaxing.  Not  only  is  nervousness 
encouraged,  but  muscular   and  nervous  energy  is  lost, 

by  tight  contraction  of  the  face  and  hands. 

92 


CH.  XV]  HINTS  ON  MATCH-PLAY  93 

It  is  a  mistake  to  have  much  fat  on  the  body.  In 
Racquets  above  all  games  it  is  found  to  hinder  the 
strokes.  The  quick  turn  of  the  body  is  rendered  much 
more  difficult  by  obesity.  The  litheness  of  the  neck  is 
also  prevented. 

The  shoes  or  boots  should  grip  the  ground  ;  therefore, 
unless  the  india-rubber  be  of  the  very  best  quality,  it 
may  be  well  to  have  holes  punctured  in  it.  The  cloth- 
ing should  be  free.  Into  the  pocket  of  the  trousers  a 
piece  of  chalk  may  be  put,  in  case  the  hand  shall  be- 
come slippery.  And  some  adhesive  plaster  may  be  kept 
near,  so  that  one  may  bind  it  round  the  hand  or  a  finger 
and  prevent  friction  if  a  blister  or  sore  place  should 
form.  I  have  lost  more  than  one  Match  because  of  a 
painful  blister. 

It  is  a  mistake  to  economise  in  rackets.  I  have  lost 
several  Matches  through  having  too  few  of  them  ready. 
It  is  far  better  to  have  too  many  than  too  few.  Whether 
they  should  all  be  quite  new  or  not  it  is  hard  to  say. 
It  may  be  well  to  use  them,  if  only  for  a  few  minutes, 
before  the  Match.  Anyhow  they  should,  I  think,  be  as 
uniform  as  possible ;  the  strings  should  be  carefully 
attended  to  in  advance ;  and  strings  which  break  during 
the  Match  should  be  mended  at  once. 

Before  the  Match,  one  should  think  out  the  tactics  of 
oneself  and  one's  opponent,  though  not  to  the  same 
morbid  extent  to  which  this  art  is  carried  in  American 
University  Football.  But  do  not  tie  yourself  down  to 
any  one  plan.  I  remember  an  instructive  incident  in  an 
Amateur  Championship  Match  at  Boston.  My  Ameri- 
can opponent  had  noticed  that  I  had  usually  come  up 
to  volley  the  Service  in  my  practice-games.  He  also 
found  that  it  paid  him  to  come  up  and  volley  a  hard 
Service.      When    the   Match    began,    he    served    such 


94  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

Services  as  would  have  been  very  hard  for  me  to 
volley.  Naturally  I  waited  for  them,  and  in  turn  I  sent 
him  Services  which  he  could  not  volley  easily.  He  had 
fixed  his  scheme  of  play,  and  did  not  change  it  after  I 
had  changed  mine. 

When  you  come  into  the  Court,  after  a  few  free 
swings  (which  may  be  done  outside  the  Court,  to  make 
the  joints  and  muscles  limber),  have  a  knock-up,  so  that 
you  may  get  used  to  the  light,  the  Court,  etc.  It  may 
be  even  advisable  to  get  some  one  to  rub  over  your 
muscles  first.  Mr.  H.  K.  Foster  never  seems  to  warm 
up  during  the  first  game  of  any  Match.  The  American 
Track-Athletes  are  particular  to  be  rubbed  before  a  race. 
In  the  knock-up,  begin  with  a  few  gentle  strokes,  then 
notice  your  faults,  and  correct  them  by  exaggerating 
the  opposite  fault.  On  each  day  one  is  prone  to  a 
particular  kind  of  fault  One  player  will  hit  just  too 
low,  another  will  hit  too  much  across  the  Court. 
Correct  these  faults  while  you  are  still  warming  up. 

As  a  general  rule,  begin  gradually.  I  have  often 
been  amazed  at  the  methodless  method  of  the  boys  in 
the  Public  School  Competitions.  They  start  at  full 
speed,  as  if  the  game  were  only  to  last  a  minute.  If 
you  make  a  gentle  beginning,  you  will  be  able  to  notice 
and  to  correct  your  several  faults.  It  is  much  easier  to 
do  this  while  you  are  still  cool  and  calm.  Of  course 
there  are  occasions  when  it  is  essential  to  win  at  the 
start ;  for  some  opponents  cannot  stand  being  beaten. 
Against  them,  the  greatest  effort  must  be  made  right  at 
the  outset.  And  if  you  are  in  bad  condition  you  may 
be  driven  to  win  at  once  or  not  at  all.  But  usually  you 
should  increase  the  pace  and  severity  and  activity  by 
slow  degrees.  And  keep  something  up  your  sleeve.  If 
you  are  winning  easily,  rather  than  slack  off — a  most 


CH.  XV]  HINTS  ON  MATCH-PLAY  95 

undesirable  plan — you  can  voluntarily  deprive  your- 
self of  certain  types  of  strokes  :  for  example,  the  Volley 
and  the  Half- Volley. 

One  of  the  most  diplomatic  Match-players  of  whom  I 
know  was  wont  to  try  a  needless  variety  of  strokes 
during  the  first  minutes  of  the  play,  so  that  he  might 
understand  his  opponent's  strong  and  weak  features 
on  that  particular  day.  To  lose  a  dozen  points  or  so 
by  this  tentative  method  was  no  cause  of  anxiety  to 
him. 

He  was  also  an  adept  at  masking  his  stroke — at 
convincing  you  that  he  was  going  to  make  the  stroke 
which  he  never  made. 

These  two  items  of  cool-headed  calculation  are  not  to 
be  tried  with  impunity  by  any  and  every  Match-player. 
Few  can  stand  the  ordeal.  Indeed,  scarcely  any  one 
may  dare  to  be  negligent  even  for  a  few  moments. 

Never  be  lazy  and  careless  during  any  Match.  Only 
a  few  of  the  most  experienced  and  self-possessed  Pro- 
fessionals can  manage  to  do  this  without  dropping  their 
game  altogether.  I  once  saw  two  young  Professionals 
playing  a  Match  for  a  sum  of  money.  The  weaker  of 
the  two  refused  to  receive  odds ;  and  the  stronger  of 
the  two  was  advised  to  treat  his  opponent  leniently.  He 
began  by  doing  so,  and  the  opponent  took  heart,  and 
played  magnificently,  while  the  stronger  player  could 
not  recover  the  standard  which  he  had  voluntarily 
dropped. 

More  fatal  even  than  slacking  is  bad  temper.  Never 
dispute  the  Marker's  word,  unless  an  appeal  to  the 
referee  or  the  Gallery  is  allowed.  Never  be  annoyed 
or  angry  except  with  yourself;  and  even  that  is  a 
mistake. 


96  RACQUETS,    TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH       [PT.  il 

As  Mr.  Lukin  says,  Match-play  demands  "  patience, 
perseverance,  and  good  temper.  The  head  never  loses 
any  portion  of  its  judgment  without  detracting  in  an 
equal  degree  from  the  accuracy  of  the  hand." 

While  on  the  one  hand  one  should  never  baulk  his 
opponent  by  dawdling  or  by  feigning  unreadiness,  or 
by  standing  so  close  to  a  ball  that  he  cannot  quite 
claim  a  let  (fortunately  all  these  "  tricks "  are  rare),  on 
the  other  hand  one  should  demand  one's  due.  If  one 
is  not  prepared  to  take  a  Service,  or  if  one  has  not  free 
scope  for  a  drive  at  Racquets,  one  should  unhesitatingly 
claim  a  let.     False  modesty  is  utterly  out  of  place. 

After  the  play  take  care  not  to  catch  cold.  The 
warm  bath  should  be  followed  by  the  cool  or  cold 
water,  and  then  by  rubbings. 

As  to  stimulants,  the  ideal  is,  of  course,  not  to  need 
them  ;  to  be  quite  fresh  at  the  end  of  the  Match.  This 
means  to  have  avoided  before  the  Match  whatever  may 
render  the  blood  clogged  and  weak,  so  as  to  start  the 
Match  with  the  blood  pure  and  strong.  It  may  be 
altogether  unadvisable  to  give  up  stimulants  only  for 
the  day  or  few  days  or  week  before  the  competition. 
I  have  made  many  experiments  ;  and  the  result  in  my 
own  case  is  that  my  need  for  stimulants  depends  on 
my  diet  more  than  on  any  other  factor.  With  sufficient 
Proteid  from  fleshless  foods,  and  with  no  stimulants  for 
some  time  beforehand  (stimulants  include  tea  etc.),  I 
feel  no  need  for  stimulants,  even  after  hours  of  play. 
But  with  insufficient  Proteid,  or  when  I  have  been  using 
stimulants  beforehand,  then  stimulants  have  enabled  me 
to  keep  on  playing.  On  one  occasion  I  remember  that, 
when  I  began  to  fail  altogether,  tea  kept  me  going  for 
another  hour.     But,  given  a  large  amount  of  exertion, 


CH.  XV]  HINTS  ON  MATCH-PLAY  97 

enough  Proteid  having  been  taken,  and  other  things 
being  equal,  the  amount  of  my  fatigue  depends  on  the 
amount  of  stimulants  which  I  have  taken  recently.  In 
case  of  exhaustion,  however,  players  who  will  not  give 
up  may  find  it  better  to  resort  to  stimulants  rather  than 
work  themselves  to  death. 


CHAPTER  XVI 

GENERAL   HINTS  AND  WARNINGS 

The  first  piece  of  advice  of  a  general  kind  is,  Begin 
early.  Begin  as  young  as  you  can,  and  keep  constantly  in 
training,  whether  you  get  regular  play  or  not.  Then  you 
will  enjoy  your  game  when  you  play  it,  and  you  will  play 
it  till  quite  late  in  life.  You  need  never  fall  out  of 
practice  if  you  keep  up  the  exercises  and  the  general 
physical  condition.  While  others  are  foolish  enough  to 
drop  their  play,  you  will  continue  yours,  and  will  improve 
your  standard. 

Then  looking  backward  you  will  find  it  well  worth 
while  to  have  attended  carefully  to  food  and  feeding  (even 
if  some  experiments  may  have  been  unsuccessful),  and  to 
air  and  breathing  also.  If  you  have  much  bad  air  during 
the  day,  there  is  all  the  more  need  to  have  much  good 
air  at  other  times.  You  will  have  practised  exercises, 
especially  the  relaxing  exercises  by  which  you  may 
economise  energy  ;  you  will  have  tried  some  water-treat- 
ments and  massage.  And  you  will  conclude  that  infinite 
carefulness  has  repaid  itself  a  thousandfold.  For  you 
will  have  helped  your  work  and  your  rest,  as  well  as 
your  skill  in  play,  and  your  enjoyment  of  play.     Do  not 

grudge  the  time  for  training  and  for  practice,  even  if  at 

98 


CH.  XVI]    GENERAL  HINTS  AND    WARNINGS  99 

first  the  process  be  somewhat  dull  and  somewhat  slow  to 
bear  fruit.  For — we  cannot  repeat  it  too  often — these  are 
games  for  life,  and  not,  like  Football  and  Track-Athletics 
and  Rowing,  forms  of  exercise  generally  given  up  before 
the  age  of  thirty-five. 

So  lay  your  foundations  of  health  and  training  and 
play  carefully,  and  build  them  without  the  actual  games 
(as  well  as  by  means  of  the  actual  games),  with  little 
expenditure  of  time  and  money.  Build  them  at  home 
and  at  odd  moments,  for  example  when  you  are  walk- 
ing with  a  stick  in  your  hand ;  build  them  inside 
the  Court,  by  yourself  or  with  a  Marker.  Learn  the 
elements  of  play  as  you  would  learn  a  few  sentences  in 
a  foreign  language  thoroughly  well  before  you  tried  to 
talk  or  to  read  that  language.  And  lay  these  foundation- 
stones  one  at  a  time. 

Practise  part  by  part,  and  concentrate  your  whole 
attention  on  each  part  at  the  beginning.  Let  the  rudi- 
ments of  style  and  play  be  one  of  the  great  aims  in  early 
years  ;  then  let  improvement  be  one  of  the  great  aims  in 
later  years.  While  you  practise  or  play,  practise  or  play 
with  all  the  mind,  as  if,  for  the  time  being,  God  had  made 
you  for  absolutely  no  other  purpose  than  to  practise  or 
play. 

But  there  is  no  need,  except  at  the  actual  moment  of 
play,  to  set  these  games  first  and  foremost  among  our 
ambitions.  They  are  only  means  to  an  end,  namely  the 
making  of  health  and  of  character.  To  sacrifice  brain- 
work  for  them  lowers  manhood.  Racquets  and  Tennis 
and  Squash  should  be  pre-eminently  the  games  to  help 
brain-workers.  One  may  keep  the  final  aims  of  life  well 
in  view,  and  practise  Racquets  and  Tennis  and  Squash, 
and  cultivate  them,  only  in  so  far  as  they  contribute  to 
these  ends — no  more,  no  less. 


loo  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

So  much  for  vague  generalities.  Now  for  more 
detailed  advice. 

The  right  order  of  learning  seems  to  be,  first  to  get  an 
idea  of  the  whole  play;  then  to  analyse  it  into  many 
parts  ;  then  to  acquire  each  part  by  itself ;  then  to  com- 
bine these  parts  correctly  ;  then  to  practise  with  the 
Ball-Game  Exerciser,  so  that  the  technique  of  each 
stroke  may  have  become  a  veritable  part  of  you,  under 
quite  easy  conditions  ;  then  to  practise  the  strokes  them- 
selves up  against  a  wall  or  in  a  Squash-Court ;  then  to 
play  Squash  ;  then  to  practise  and  play  in  a  Racquet- 
Court  ;  and,  last  of  all,  to  practise  and  play  in  a  Tennis- 
Court. 

Begin,  then,  by  getting  a  comprehensive  notion  of  the 
stroke  as  a  whole.  Make  the  stroke  which  we  have 
described  elsewhere ;  and,  if  possible,  get  some  player 
to  supervise  your  position  and  movements,  or,  better 
still,  get  him  to  show  you  a  sample  stroke  slowly  before 
you,  with  the  Ball-Game  Apparatus. 

Analyse  the  different  characteristics  of  the  stroke,  and 
analyse  the  strokes  and  tactics  of  the  best  players,  in  the 
Court.  Watch  Latham's  foot-movements,  if  you  really 
want  to  learn  something  worth  learning.  This  itself  will 
be  a  sufficient  study  for  one  time.  Then  watch  Punch 
Fairs'  Service,  or  Pettitt's  wrist-movements.  Find  out 
what  you  should  look  out  for.  A  knowledge  of  human 
anatomy  is  of  service  here.  This  will  tell  you  about  the 
muscles  of  the  wrist,  shoulder,  trunk,  etc. 

Do  not  always  be  making  strokes  when  you  come  into 
the  Court  to  practise.  It  is  possible  to  watch  as  well  as 
to  play.  For  example,  before  a  stroke  off  the  Back-wall, 
you  should  watch  the  place  where  the  ball  falls  at  its 
second  bounce,  even  before  you  try  to  get  into  position 
for  a  stroke.     And,  in  general,  watch  the  various  angles. 


CH.  XVI]    GENERAL  HINTS  AND    WARNINGS  loi 

Spectators  of  the  game  are  usually  so  interested  in  the 
players  that  they  fail  to  study- the.  ball-  as  a  perfoimer. 
It  is  a  good  plan  to  regard  the  ball  as  an  actual  person, 
moving  about  in  the  Court,  and  to  ask' onos.»lf  why  he 
moves  in  this  way  or  in  that ;  what  ar^e  the  influences 
that  have  made  him  do  so. 

Having  divided  up  the  correct  stroke  into  its  parts, 
and  having  mastered  each  part  carefully,  under  the 
easiest  conditions,  you  will  have  formed  foundations 
before  the  building  itself  be  added,  and  certainly  before 
the  paper  be  put  on  the  walls  of  the  rooms.  The  founda- 
tions will  not  appear  when  once  the  building  is  complete, 
but  they  must  be  there  if  the  building  is  to  stand.  There 
are  some  who  start  in  life  with  the  foundations  ready- 
made,  like  the  man  who  built  his  house  upon  rock  ;  but 
these  are  few  and  far  between.  Personally,  I  was  not 
one  of  them.  I  had  to  adopt  and  adapt  every  means 
that  I  could  devise.  I  had  to  practise  with  racket- 
handles  and  walking-sticks  and  the  Ball-Game  Exerciser. 
Otherwise  my  strokes  would  always  have  been  very 
poor. 

Those  who  have  not  the  patience  to  do  as  I  did,  will 
not  grudge  time  spent  in  a  Squash-Court.  Squash  is 
cheaper  than  the  two  other  games,  and  enables  one  to 
make  more  strokes  in  a  given  time  ;  and  not  only  this, 
but  it  enables  one  to  make  the  ordinary  strokes  again  and 
again  ;  and  that  is  what  we  need — constant  repetition  of 
ordinary  strokes  of  a  similar  kind.  In  a  Tennis-Court 
there  is  excessive  variety  ;  in  a  Squash-Court  we  can 
master  the  Forehand  and  Backhand  positions,  and  can 
learn  how  to  run  backwards  and  forwards  and  to  either 
side  while  still  retaining  those  positions.  We  can  learn 
the  ordinary  angles,  and  the  ordinary  ways  of  cutting 
the  ball. 


I02  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

Then,  and  not  till  then,  it  will  be  time  for  Racquets. 
And- not  till  after  Racquets  will  Tennis  come. 

With  regard  to  the  choice  of  Courts,  it  has  been  well 
said,.  "  Learri'in'a  sldwCouvt,  and  afterwards  enjoy  your- 
self in  a'  fast  'Courts'* 

Throughout  the  practice,  economise  your  movements 
keeping  still  and  relaxing  those  many  muscles  which  you 
ought  not  to  be  using  during  any  given  stroke.  They 
are  more  numerous  than  those  which  you  ought  to  be 
using.  To  clench  the  left  hand  tightly,  and  to  frown 
and  look  unutterable  things  with  the  face-muscles,  is  an 
ugly  waste  of  good  power  and  force. 

This  does  not  mean  an  inattentive  and  listless  position. 
You  should  always  be  alert,  especially  with  the  eye  and 
the  feet  and  legs.  They  are  among  the  best  criteria  of 
alertness.     The  eye  should  usually  be  on  the  ball. 

It  is  a  good  plan  first  to  get  the  Court  fairly  into  one's 
imagination.  How  valuable  this  picture  is  while  the 
stroke  is  being  made,  very  few  players  have  realised. 
He  who  has  clear  in  his  mind's  eye  the  whole  Court, 
with  a  good  notion  of  distances,  and  who  then  keeps  his 
head  as  still  as  a  golfer  does  even  while  he  moves  his 
body,  can  rivet  his  eye  on  the  ball  and  make  a  singularly 
effective  stroke.  Every  player  should  cultivate  this 
power  of  picture-forming  and  picture-keeping  in  the 
mind's  eye.  Of  course  the  opponent  himself  has  to  be 
watched  until  he  has  hit  the  ball,  and  then  the  ball 
itself  has  to  be  watched  until  one  has  hit  it — or  almost 
till  then. 

Another  useful  employment  of  the  imagination  is  with 
the  imaginary  play-line.  An  inch  or  two  above  the  net 
in  Tennis,  and  an  inch  or  two  above  the  board  in 
Racquets  or  Squash,  one  should  imagine  a  line  over 
which  one  has  to  play.     How  many  strokes  are  missed 


CH.  XVI]    GENERAL  HINTS  AND    WARNINGS  103 

because  people  have  the  actual  play-line  in  view  !  A  few 
inches  too  high  does  not  make  the  stroke  much  worse, 
but  it  makes  it  much  safer. 

It  must  not  be  supposed  that  I  am  urging  all  players 
to  play  in  the  same  way  ;  it  is  indeed  more  than  doubtful 
whether  they  should  all  have  even  the  same  foundations 
of  play.  For  instance,  one  could  hardly  advise  Pettitt 
to  pay  attention  to  the  position  of  his  feet  and  body  : 
he  does  such  marvels  with  his  great  wrist  and  shoulder. 
But  some  foundations  must  be  laid  by  most  people,  who, 
having  laid  them,  can  then  become  original  in  their  own 
special  lines  and  according  to  \ki€\x  forte. 

Having  grasped  and  assimilated  the  elements  of  play, 
then  develop  according  to  your  build  and  character ; 
for  example,  it  would  be  a  mistake  for  a  clever  player, 
without  much  activity,  to  adopt  the  same  game  as  a 
stupid  player  with  much  activity. 

First  get  the  strokes  themselves,  then  study  tactics — 
i.  e.  the  occasions  on  which  each  stroke  had  best  be  used. 
Here,  also,  watch  as  well  as  play.  Observe,  for  instance, 
the  best  Service  for  some  special  Court  or  light  or 
opponent  or  stage  in  the  game,  or  for  some  special  day 
on  which  one  is  at  one's  best,  or  at  one's  worst. 

While  you  are  watching  your  opponent,  or  two  other 
players,  speculate  as  to  what  will  happen,  and  criticise 
freely  (to  yourself). 

Be  ready  to  alter  any  part  of  your  play,  even  to  the 
position  of  your  little  finger.  In  altering  your  play, 
you  will  find  Handicaps  invaluable :  if  you  have  a 
weak  Backhand  stroke,  then  let  some  one  give  you  Half- 
the-Court.  If  you  are  even  players,  you  can  give  him 
Half-Thirty  in  exchange.  These  Handicaps  will  be  a 
help  against  staleness,  of  which  habitual  players  so  often 
complain. 


I04  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

Do  not  be  nervous.  In  case  of  nervousness  re- 
member what  we  have  said  already :  take  deep  full 
breaths  upward  through  the  nose,  and,  as  you  let  them 
ooze  out,  relax  the  muscles,  especially  those  of  the  arm, 
and  smile  and  hum  to  yourself  Siny  tune  that  might  make 
you  feel  contented.  I  must  confess  that  my  favourite 
is  still  Tararaboomdeay ! 

Do  not  be  annoyed,  or,  at  any  rate,  do  not  show  your 
annoyance.  To  do  so  may  pay  at  Football,  but  it  does 
not  pay  at  these  games.  It  affects  the  blood  unfavour- 
ably, and  therefore  the  eye  also.  In  particular,  do  not 
be  annoyed  with  your  partner  or  your  opponent.  As 
we  have  noted  above,  you  yourself  are  the  least  im- 
proper person  to  be  annoyed  with. 

Never  give  up  a  stroke  as  hopeless  if  you  are  in  good 
training.  Never  be  discouraged,  especially  if  you  have 
been  wrongly  taught.  During  the  game  never  lose 
heart. 

Give  yourself  time  to  think  quietly  even  during  the 
most  exciting  game. 

Invite  criticisms  from  all  sides.  Do  not  accept  them 
all,  but  recollect  that  sometimes  the  habitual  watcher 
knows  more  than  the  expert  player.  Ask  questions  of 
veterans  and  discuss  difficulties  with  them.  "Ask  and 
ye  shall  receive  "  is  especially  true  of  information  about 
play.  Think  over  the  problems  afterwards,  not  in  a 
morbid  way,  but  in  a  sensible  way,  and  make  notes  as  to 
your  games  and  your  standard  of  play ;  for  it  should  be 
a  real  hobby,  and  to  take  interest  in  it  need  be  no  cause 
for  false  shame.  Keep  memoranda  as  to  hints,  and 
correct  my  views  where  they  are  wrong.  I  shall  be  glad 
to  hear  of  the  many  mistakes  from  which  a  book  on 
new  lines  cannot  possibly  be  free. 

Analyse  the  strokes  and  the  tactics  of  your  own  play, 


CH.  XVI]    GENERAL  HINTS  AND   WARNINGS  105 

and  imagine  yourself  going  through  the  right  positions 
and  movements ;  for  thus  to  imagine  is  a  mild  repetition 
of  the  actual  movements  themselves.  It  is  practice  of  a 
gentle  kind. 

Try  to  teach  the  game  to  some  one  else ;  that  is  the 
most  neglected  principle  of  learning — to  endeavour  to 
explain  a  thing  to  others.     How  hard ! 

Do  not  neglect  Handicaps,  If  necessary,  exchange 
a  Handicap  with  another  player,  and  be  sure  to  play 
occasionally  left-handed.  Among  all  these  suggestions 
I  should  like  to  lay  special  stress  on  the  system  of 
left-handed  play  for  right-handed  players.  For  the 
development  of  the  body  and  therefore  of  the  brain,  for 
change,  for  the  new  interest  which  it  lends  to  the  game, 
for  practice  in  getting  into  position  quickly,  and  for 
many  other  reasons,  left-handed  play  is  to  be  heartily 
recommended.  Among  other  things,  it  would  at  once 
bring  the  best  player  down  near  the  level  of  the  be- 
ginner, and  stop  that  which  often  does  so  much  to  ruin 
a  good  player's  play — the  necessity  of  playing  badly 
with  beginners. 

Do  not  neglect  the  other  parts  of  your  body.  While 
you  try  to  secure  varied  experience,  for  example,  by 
travel  and  play  in  other  countries,  and  by  Matches  with 
all  sorts  of  opponents,  and  with  all  sorts  of  Handicaps, 
and  while  you  vary  your  Tennis  with  Racquets  and 
Squash,  and  your  Racquets  with  Tennis  and  Squash 
— all  the  time  keep  up  your  other  exercises,  such  as 
Singlestick,  Boxing,  Fencing,  "  Bartitsu,"  Walking,  and 
Running. 

Do  not  play  every  day.  Do  not  overstrain.  It  is 
hard  to  stop  when  one  feels  tired  ;  and  few  players  have 
the  strength  of  mind  to  stop  till  the  hour  is  over.  If, 
however,  one  takes  trouble  with  one's  health,  and  begins 


lo6  RACQUETS,    TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH       [pt.  ii 

one's  play  quietly,  and  leads  up  to  the  hard  game 
gradually,  there  is  no  reason  why  one  should  strain 
oneself  here.  All  sorts  of  little  helps  may  be  employed. 
For  example,  one  may  find  it  less  tiring  to  wear  two 
pairs  of  socks.  If  a  blister  is  forming,  one  may  put 
adhesive  plaster  round  it  to  prevent  friction.  To  play 
while  one  is  in  pain  is  extremely  tiring ;  every  stroke 
jars,  and  wastes  valuable  energy. 

Do  not  despise  the  drill  for  these  games.  It  has  as 
much  claim  to  recognition  as  the  old  military  drill,  for  it 
is  not  merely  a  drill  for  these  games  alone :  it  is  useful 
for  many  kinds  of  exercise — for  Swimming,  and  indeed 
for  most  branches  of  sport — ,  especially  if  we  include 
left-handed  drill. 

It  is  very  advisable  not  to  bet  indiscriminately.  If 
any  games  are  good  enough  to  be  played  for  their  own 
sakes,  these  are.  Yet,  if  an  opponent  refuse  a  Handi- 
cap, although  you  can  beat  him  easily,  then  it  may  be 
useful  to  convince  him  of  the  truth  by  a  beating  and  its 
penalty.  There  are  some  to  whom  the  only  avenue  of 
appeal  must  be  money. 

Much  money  is  thrown  away  on  rackets.  One  can 
use  broken  rackets,  or  at  least  their  handles,  for  practice 
outside  the  Court.  An  old  racket  will  often  last  a 
longer  time  if  it  be  kept  in  a  good  press.  The  press 
is  to  the  racket  what  the  stable  is  to  the  horse  in 
winter. 

Use  your  strongest  points  in  Matches ;  use  your 
strong  and  less  weak  points  in  practice-games ;  develop 
your  weaker  points  in  practice  inside  the  Court,  and 
your  weakest  points  in  practice  outside  the  Court. 
That  rule  will  stand  a  good  deal  of  repetition.  For 
we  too  frequently  find  a  player  perpetually  using  his 
strongest  points   even   in   a   friendly  game,  where  his 


CH.  xvi]    GENERAL  HINTS  AND    WARNINGS  107 

object  should  be  not  merely  to  win,  but  rather,  among 
other  things,  to  fill  in  the  gaps  in  his  style  of  play. 

Let  this  Chapter  end  with  a  few  gleanings  from  the 
most  essential  factors  of  success  for  ordinary  players. 

1.  Keep  alert  on  the  balls  of  your  feet,  with  your  legs 
slightly  bent,  both  before  and  after  the  strokes ;  and 
keep  your  racket  up,  prepared  either  to  protect  your- 
self, or  to  take  a  Volley,  or  to  sweep  downwards  for  the 
ordinary  stroke. 

2.  Move,  or,  rather,  have  moved  into  position  with 
your  feet  directly  you  see  to  which  side  the  ball  is 
coming. 

3.  Then  keep  your  eye  on  the  ball. 

4.  If  necessary,  move  towards  the  right  place  at 
which  to  take  the  ball,  not  in  the  ordinary  way  but  in 
the  ready-made  appropriate  position,  Forehand  or  Back- 
hand. It  is  well  worth  while  to  watch  a  first-class 
player's  feet  during  a  game. 

5.  Draw  back  the  whole  side  of  your  body  in  order 
to  get  a  full  swing.  But  do  not  move  your  head  more 
than  you  cannot  help. 

6.  Make  the  stroke  if  possible  with  the  ball  nearly 
opposite  to  your  forward  foot,  as  your  body  faces  side- 
ways, and  not  with  the  ball  too  far  in  front  of  you  or 
too  far  behind  you  or  too  far  from  you  or  too  close  to 
you.  As  a  rule,  the  ball  should  be  somewhat  closer  to 
you  in  Racquets  and  in  Squash  than  in  Tennis,  unless 
you  use  the  Latham  stroke. 

7.  Swing  through  with  the  shoulder,  and  with  the 
whole  weight  of  the  body,  especially  in  Tennis ;  and 
carry  the  racket  through,  and  be  ready  for  the  next 
stroke.  Recover  your  balance  and  alertness  and  (as  a 
rule)  your  forward-facing  position  immediately  after  you 


lo8  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

have  followed  through  the  stroke ;  but  do  not  let  the 
desire  to  recover  your  balance  make  you  jerk  your 
stroke  ;  do  not  commit  the  common  fault  of  the  would- 
be  golfer  who  looks  up  the  moment  he  has  made  his 
stroke,  instead  of  following  it  through  with  his  club  as 
far  as  his  club  will  go. 


CHAPTER   XVII 

THE  COMMONEST  FAULTS  AND  FALLACIES 

The  greatest  fault  both  of  players  and  of  teachers  is 
probably  not  to  know  what  the  greatest  faults  are,  and 
therefore  not  to  know  how  to  correct  them. 

This,  at  any  rate,  was  my  own  greatest  fault  some 
years  ago.  I  played  the  game  almost  altogether  wrongly, 
and  I  did  not  know  how  and  why  I  played  it  wrongly. 
I  only  had  a  vague  sense  that  I  ought  to  be  playing  far 
better,  since  I  was  energetic  and  quick  (when  once  I  had 
started),  and  lasted  well  and  possessed  good  eyesight. 

My  own  faults  in  those  days  were  legion.  I  gripped 
my  racket  wrongly,  and  held  it  with  its  head  down 
before  and  after  the  strokes,  at  which  times  I  used  also 
to  wait  on  my  heels  as  in  Photograph  XVII  rather  than 
on  the  balls  of  my  feet.  I  used  not  to  form  the  correct 
position  either  for  the  Forehand  or  for  the  Backhand 
stroke  :  my  body  used  to  face  forwards  rather  than  to 
one  side  or  to  the  other.  It  never  occurred  to  me  to 
form  the  correct  position  before  I  began  the  stroke :  and 
I  seldom  formed  the  correct  position  at  all.  When  it 
came  to  the  stroke  itself,  I  did  not  turn  my  body  so 
as  to  get  the  powerful  swing ;  I  held  my  shoulders 
wrongly,  my  head  as  well  as  my  shoulders  being  kept 
too  far  forward,  so  that  I  did  not  come  down  upon  the 

109 


no  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

ball  with  much  weight.  My  Service  was  weak,  and  also 
monotonous,  I  wanted  to  play  the  full  game  at  once, 
without  having  mastered  the  elements — though,  at  the 
time,  I  did  not  know  what  the  elements  were  ! 

The  words  which  I  used  in  '  The  Game  of  Squash,' 
with  reference  to  the  commonest  mistakes  of  beginners 
and  others,  will  apply  here  with  very  little  change  : — 

"  Have  you  ever  realised  all  that  is  needed  in  order  that  one 
simple  stroke  may  be  a  real  and  certain  success  ?  I  grant  that  the 
stroke  looks  simple,  and  looks  as  if  it  were  an  indivisible  unity  ; 
but  have  you  ever  realised  how  many  things  you  may  be  doing 
wrongly  ? 

"  Take  that  first  virtue,  correctness  :  what  things  may  be 
incorrect  ?  The  incorrect  grip  of  the  racket  may  account  for 
much  ;  thus  you  may  be  cramping  yourself  by  having  the  thumb 
along  the  handle  instead  of  across  it,  or  vice  versa. 

"You  may  be  holding  your  racket  with  its  head  down  before 
you  make  the  stroke  :  if  you  are  doing  this,  the  stroke  is  likely  to 
be  an  upward  jerk  or  wrist-flick  rather  than  a  free  downward 
swing.  You  may  also  be  holding  your  wrist  wrongly  ;  your  feet 
may  be  in  the  unfavourable  position,  facing  forwards  instead  of 
facing  the  Side-wall. 

"  Even  if  they  are  in  the  right  position  with  respect  to  the  Side- 
wall,  they  may  yet  be  too  far  from  the  ball  or  too  near  it,  too  much 
in  front  of  it  or  too  much  behind  it.  Or  else  you  may  be  moving 
backwards  while  you  make  the  stroke,  instead  of  being  already  in 
position. 

"  This  again  may  be  due  to  a  want  of  readiness,  and  is  an 
especially  common  fault  with  those  who  wait  "  slugged "  on  their 
heels  instead  of  alert  on  the  balls  of  their  feet.  For  ladies  this 
latter  position  is  extremely  hard. 

"  Or  you  may  be  in  the  right  position  so  far  as  your  feet  are 
concerned,  and  yet  fail  to  use  your  left  shoulder  properly  :  you 
may  have  it  toj  far  forward  before  you  begin  the  Backhand  stroke, 
and  too  far  back  before  you  begin  the  Forehand  stroke.  Thus  you 
will  be  losing  much  of  the  body-swing. 

"Or  you  may  hit  the  ball  when  it  is  too  high,  or  you  may  fail  to 
carry  through  the  stroke,  or  you  may  slice  the  ball  instead  of 
meeting  it  with  the  full  face  of  the  racket,  or  you  may  not  be 
keeping  your  eye  on  the  ball. 

"  But,  even  if  you  are  doing  all  such  things  correctly,  you  may 
yet  fail  because  you  have  to  think  about  the  corrections,  instead 
of  thinking  about  tactics  etc.  There  is  only  one  way  to  get  over 
this  consciousness,  viz.  to  practise  and  practise  until  these  things 


CH.  xvii]  FAULTS  AND  FALLACIES  iii 

which  should  be  the  '  indispensable  mechanism '  of  the  stroke, 
have  become  habitual,  familiar,  and  sub-conscious,  as  the  Psycho- 
logists would  say." 

In  view  of  the  common  impatience  to  play  actual 
games  and  Matches,  which  impatience  is  only  human, 
it  might  be  well  for  the  player  to  play  a  few  ordinary 
games  at  the  start,  if  only  in  order  that  he  convince 
himself  of  the  hopelessness  of  this  way  of  learning  ;  and 
if  only  in  order  that  he  may  convince  himself  of  this — 
that  the  ABC  must  be  mastered  early  in  the  athlete's 
career. 

Those  players  who  are  not  impatient,  and  who  are 
only  careless,  fail  to  analyse  the  strokes  of  the  play,  and 
then  to  practise  each  part  by  itself  and  to  correct  the 
wrong  parts  one  at  a  time. 

Too  many  have  acquired  a  wrong  mechanism  or 
series  of  mechanisms,  which  become  habit  and  second 
nature.  Bad  habits  are  extremely  hard  to  get  rid  of. 
Those  who  teach  military  riding  say  that  they  would 
rather  teach  a  novice  than  an  ordinary  rider,  since  it  is 
easier  to  form  a  new  habit  than  to  un-form  an  old 
habit. 

Among  the  bad  habits  are  the  wrong  grip  and  posi- 
tion pf  the  racket,  and  the  wrong  positions  and  move- 
ments of  the  feet  and  legs  before  and  during  and  after 
strokes.  Before  the  strokes,  most  players  are  found 
resting  their  weight  upon  their  heels,  instead  of  being 
alert  on  the  balls  of  their  feet.  They  are  slow  to  start 
in  good  time.  They  have  the  deliberation  of  the  Golf- 
player,  without  his  successful  stroke  as  the  result  of  this 
deliberation  !  Often  their  legs  are  stiff  rather  than 
loose  and  bent.  Even  when  they  do  run  for  a  ball,  they 
run  facing  forwards,  and  not  already  (and  all  ready)  in 
the   right   Forehand   or    Backhand    position.     Few    of 


:ii2  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

them,  indeed,  can  run  easily  in  such  a  position,  either 
forwards,  or  backwards,  or  anywhither. 

Many  of  them  fail  to  keep  their  eye  on  the  ball  ;  and 
they  take  the  ball  when  it  is  too  much  in  front  of  them. 
The  racket  hits  the  ball  too  late,  while  the  stroke  is 
going  upwards,  and  thus  hits  the  ball  too  high.  If  the 
ball  be  too  near,  then  the  result  is  a  cramped  stroke  ; 
if  the  ball  be  too  far  off,  then  the  result  is  a  sprawling 
stroke.     Each  of  these  strokes  lacks  power. 

During  the  stroke,  also,  most  players  face  too  much 
towards  the  front ;  they  apparently  have  not  the  power 
of  looking  forwards  with  their  head  while  they  face 
sideways  with  their  feet  and  body.  Very  few  of  them 
know  how  to  use  their  body-swing :  they  rely  too  much 
upon  the  smaller  motor-powers,  and  especially  the  wrist, 
which  gives  a  very  unsafe  curve  ;  the  slightest  error  in 
timing  the  ball  (see  Diagram  8)  is  apt  to  be  fatal ; 
whereas,  when  the  basis  of  the  stroke  is  the  leg-  and 
shoulder-  and  hip-movement,  then  even  a  great  in- 
accuracy scarcely  produces  any  marked  error  in  the 
stroke.  In  order  to  get  this  swing,  the  legs  should  not 
be  too  close  together,  nor  too  far  apart. 

It  is  chiefly  impatience,  and  (when  we  come  to 
examine  the  case)  want  of  confidence,  that  makes  the 
player  take  the  ball  too  soon  or  when  it  is  too  near  to 
him,  or  makes  him  volley  an  easy  ball,  instead  of 
stepping  back  and  thus  either  turning  it  into  an  ordinary 
stroke  or  else  getting  it  off  the  Back-wall.  Lawn  Tennis 
players,  in  particular,  fail  to  use  the  Back-wall.  Their 
Volley  is  apt  to  be  safe,  but  lacking  in  severity.  They 
use  their  wrist  far  too  much,  and  generally  in  the  wrong 
way.  It  is  want  of  confidence  that  makes  the  beginner 
hit  the  ball  too  snatchily  as  well  as  too  soon  ;  he  dares 
not  let  it  drop  nearly  to  the  floor. 


CH.  XVII]  FAULTS  AND  FALLACIES  113 

On  the  other  hand,  it  is  excessive  confidence,  among 
several  reasons,  that  leads  a  player  to  smash  at  a  ball 
which  he  should  be  content  merely  to  get  up  somehow. 
Instead  of  meeting  the  ball  in  its  own  direction,  he  tries 
to  make  a  stroke  of  such  a  nature  that  the  slightest 
error  of  judgment  would  prove  fatal.  He  wishes  to  be 
severe  before  he  has  learnt  to  be  safe. 

It  is  a  fault  to  forget  that  a  main  object  of  the  game 
is  to  send  the  ball  over  the  net :  one  should  send  it 
over  as  well  as  one  can  but — to  use  the  old  phrase 
— one  should  not  try  to  run  and  jump  before  one 
can  walk  or  even  stand.  Many  teachers  try  to  teach 
their  pupils  how  to  "  kill "  the  ball  before  they  teach 
them  how  to  get  it  up  :  the  result  is  that,  among  the 
pupils  of  some  teachers,  I  have  seen  those  who  had  no 
notion  of  getting  over  the  simplest  Backhand  strokes, 
and  who  yet  "  shaped  "  as  if  they  were  going  to  punish 
in  a  very  deadly  manner  a  ball  which  even  an  expert 
would  be  very  pleased  to  return  by  hook  or  crook. 

I  do  not  altogether  blame  the  beginner ;  I  think  the 
fault  is  a  fault  of  thoughtlessness :  the  fallacy  of  intro- 
ducing the  learner  to  the  elegancies  and  luxuries  of  the 
game  before  the  necessities  have  been  secured  is  of  course 
due  to  want  of  reason,  want  of  exercise  of  the  reasoning 
powers,  rather  than  to  any  really  ardent  desire  to  keep 
the  learner  back !  I  feel  sure  that  Racquet  and  Tennis 
teachers  are  very  anxious  that  their  pupils  should 
improve,  and  I  can  only  recommend  them  to  pay 
attention  to  the  foundations  before  they  begin  papering 
the  walls  of  the  rooms :  in  other  words,  to  teach  the 
pupils  to  stand  in  the  right  positions,  and  to  hold  their 
rackets  right,  as  a  matter  of  course  and  without  conscious 
effort,  and  to  teach  them  how  to  get  the  balls  over,  before 
they  teach  them  how  to  finish  them  and  to  punish  them : 
10 


114  RACQUETS,    TENNIS,   AND  SQUASH       [PT.  II 

the  pupils  must  learn  how  to  keep  the  ball  alive  before 
they  learn  how  to  kill  it. 

The  Volley  is  the  ordinary  player's  especially  weak 
feature  :  when  we  hear  the  so-called  "  correct  "  players 
complaining  that  their  young  opponent  forces  too  much 
and  hits  too  hard,  it  usually  means  that  they  themselves 
are  not  extra  good  at  volleying. 

The  great  faults  in  volleying  seem  to  be — 

{a)  The  wrong  position  of  the  body,  which  is  usually 
far  too  near  to  the  ball,  too  directly  behind  it,  and  also 
fronts  the  net  or  play-line  too  much  :  this  is  more  notice- 
able with  the  Volley  than  with  the  ordinary  stroke, 
because  the  Volley  requires  a  more  rapid  getting 
into  position — it  gives  you  less  time  to  judge  and 
decide  ; 

{b)  The  wrong  position  of  the  racket.  Apart  from 
the  wrong  grip,  the  beginner  often  holds  his  racket's 
head  down  to  the  ground  before  and  after  his  strokes  : 
hence  for  the  Volley  it  has  to  be  lifted  with  a  sudden 
jerk  to  the  place  near  which  it  ought  always  to  be  kept 
A  familiar  sight  at  Lawn  Tennis  is  the  attempt  of  the 
second-rate  player  to  "  smash"  a  high  ball :  he  suddenly 
jerks  his  racket  up  and  smacks  at  the  ball,  and  often 
sends  it  into  the  net.  One  of  the  best  amateurs  told  me 
that  he  always  kept  his  racket  up  for  these  "  smashers  " 
long  before  the  ball  came  to  him  :  he  was  thus  quietly 
waiting  for  it  when  it  did  come.  Closely  connected  with 
this  fault  is  the  fault  of 

{c)  Moving  the  racket  too  much.  Many  Volleys 
should  be  made  with  the  racket  almost  still  or  only 
just  meeting  the  ball :  quite  enough  pace  is  on  the  ball 
already.  But  how  often  one  sees  the  player  hit  hard  at 
the  ball,  and  so  misjudge  it,  and  perhaps  break  a  string 
into  the  bargain.     It  is  a  general  rule,  though  not  with- 


CH.  XVII]  FAULTS  AND  FALLACIES  115 

out  important  exceptions,  that  the  more  pace  you  put 
on  your  Volley,  the  greater  risk  you  run. 

{d)  Some  Volleys  are  missed  owing  to  the  insecure 
grip  of  the  racket,  or  else  owing  to  the  weakness  of  the 
wrist :  but,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  if  one  holds  the  racket 
right  and  tight,  one  will  not  need  so  very  strong  a  wrist 

Stiffness,  which  is  a  common  hindrance  to  those  who 
have  had  little  training  at  school,  is  of  course  partly  due 
to  bad  physical  condition.  The  "  chalky  deposits  "  and 
waste-products  of  the  body  may  be  clogging  the  joints. 
And  analogous  to  this  is  mental  stiffness,  the  failure  to 
anticipate  the  opponent's  design,  and  forgetfulness  of  the 
things  which  regularly  and  constantly  happen  in  the 
Court — for  example,  forgetfulness  of  the  ordinary  angles 
at  which  a  ball  will  come  off  the  walls  when  it  is  hit  in 
the  ordinary  way,  or  when  it  is  hit  with  a  cut,  or  when  it 
is  hit  with  a  twist.  This  is  due  to  want  of  observation 
and  want  of  concentration.  The  player  has  probably 
not  been  thinking  of  the  game  only ;  something  else  has 
been  passing  through  his  mind. 

A  branch  of  this  forgetfulness  is  the  forgetfulness  of 
the  strokes  which  are  usually  made  from  certain  posi- 
tions. Barre,  as  we  have  already  said,  is  supposed  to 
have  known  precisely  the  return  which  was  almost  bound 
to  be  sent  to  him  from  most  of  his  own  strokes,  and  he 
used  to  be  ready  for  this  return  long  beforehand,  so  that 
he  never  seemed  to  hurry,  and  the  ball  appeared  per- 
petually to  follow  him  over  the  Court.  The  real  reason 
was  that  he  had  observed  the  commonest  things  that 
happen,  and  had  registered  them  in  his  memory.  (It 
may  be  remarked  that  Barre  never  played  against  Tom 
Pettitt !) 

Even  after  a  correct  stroke,  the  ordinary  player  loses 
his  balance  and  poise.     This  is  especially  the  case  either 


ii6  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

after  a  severe  stroke  or  after  a  stroke  which  has  only 
just  been  got  up  with  great  difficulty.  In  both  instances 
it  is  but  natural  that  one  should  be  unprepared  for  the 
ball  when  it  is  returned.  In  the  case  of  an  ordinary 
stroke  there  is  less  excuse.  This  is  a  safe  general  rule : 
Take  it  for  granted  that  every  stroke  will  be  returned  if 
it  can  be  returned.  That  involves  some  waste  of  energy, 
but  not  much,  and  the  feeling  of  readiness  produces  a 
great  moral  effect  upon  one's  opponent.  You  have  the 
advantage  over  him  if  you  can  convince  him  that  you 
will  not  be  taken  off  your  equilibrium. 

Having  considered  the  chief  faults  of  players,  we  may 
now  consider  the  chief  fallacies  of  players  and  others. 

The  first  is  that  the  duffer  will  always  remain  a  duffer; 
that,  if  a  man  be  not  a  player  by  nature,  he  will  never 
become  a  player  by  art.  Here  everything  depends  upon 
the  meaning  of  the  word  "art."  If  the  teacher  tells  the 
learner  to  "  acquire  a  good  style,"  and  to  "  play  in  the 
best  form,"  there  is  little  likelihood  of  improvement ; 
but,  if  he  tells  him  how  to  use  the  different  parts  of  his 
body,  there  is  no  reason  why  the  veriest  duffer  should 
not  re-make  his  style  and  form,  from  the  foundation  of 
the  building  right  to  the  very  rooms  and  ornaments  of 
it,  as  I  am  gradually  re-making  mine.  For  it  is  a  mis- 
take to  suppose  that  it  is  ever  too  late  to  advance.  I  do 
not  see  why  any  one  who  can  move  his  limbs  should 
not,  if  he  take  the  trouble,  move  them  better  and  better, 
if  not  more  and  more  quickly,  every  week. 

Elsewhere  I  have  exposed  the  strange  notion  that 
practice  makes  perfect.  Only  the  right  kind  of  practice 
can  improve.  One  can  mention  hundreds  of  players  at 
various  games,  who  have  practised  persistently,  but  have 
scarcely  improved  at  all.     This  is  because  they  have 


CH.  xvii]  FAULTS  AND  FALLACIES  117 

practised  in  the  wrong  way :  they  have  tried  too  much 
at  a  time.  There  is  a  practice  which  does  not  consist 
merely  in  playing  games :  there  is  a  practice  outside 
the  Court.  Here  we  may  learn  the  body-swing,  in  fact 
the  whole  mechanism  of  the  stroke,  especially  if  we  use 
Apparatus.  We  can  learn  the  stroke  itself,  and  the 
positions  before  it  and  after  it,  in  the  Squash-Court  first 
and  in  the  Racquet-  and  Tennis-Courts  afterwards.  And 
quite  apart  from  actual  games  we  may  acquire  many 
other  qualities  that  we  want. 

And  those  who  rely  entirely  on  games  for  their  prac- 
tice are  often  under  the  false  impression  that  they  should 
play  as  often  as  possible  with  a  player  stronger  than 
themselves,  and  that  they  must  necessarily  weaken  their 
play  if  they  play  with  an  inferior.  The  contrary  is  the 
case.  If  you  get  an  inferior  opponent,  and  give  him  the 
right  kind  of  Handicap,  one  which  shall  cramp  your 
game,  and  shall  make  you  practise  a  certain  stroke  or 
else  exercise  a  certain  quality  again  and  again,  then 
you  will  actually  strengthen  your  game  far  more  than  if 
you  were  playing  against  a  superior.  As  Pettitt  pointed 
out  to  me,  it  is  easy  enough  to  kill  a  ball  at  Tennis,  but 
it  is  extremely  hard  to  send  a  ball  so  accurately — it 
requires  enormous  accuracy — that  your  opponent  shall 
be  almost  bound  to  return  it.  One  might  venture  to 
say  that  the  player  who  could  send  ten  balls  running 
which  a  duffer  shall  be  bound  to  return,  has  almost 
acquired  control  of  the  ordinary  stroke.  There  cannot 
be  anything  far  wrong  with  his  general  positions  or 
movements.  If  he  can  regularly  send  such  a  ball,  it 
probably  will  not  take  him  long  to  learn  how  to  send  a 
ball  which  even  the  very  best  player  could  not  return. 

Tennis  especially  is  a  hot-bed  for  popular  fallacies. 
One  of  them  is   that   it   is  necessary   to   stoop.     For 


ii8  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  II 

difficult  strokes,  which  one  should  be  pleased  to  return 
anyhow,  it  may  be  quite  unnecessary  to  stoop  ;  and 
certainly  to  get  into  the  position  shown  in  one  of  the 
Illustrations  in  Chapter  XXXIII,  would  be  an  egregious 
error  for  the  ordinary  player.  Though  it  may  be  of 
advantage  to  stoop  occasionally,  yet  the  best  players 
to-day  do  not  often  sprawl  down  and  "  nose  "  the  ground. 

The  stoop  is  not  necessary  to  the  cut.  It  is  quite 
easy  to  give  the  very  severest  cut^ — as  during  the 
Racquet  Service — with  an  almost  upright  position  of 
the  body  ;  and,  besides,  Tennis  does  not  consist  entirely 
of  cut-strokes,  any  more  than  Racquets  consists  entirely 
of  strokes  without  cut.  In  Tennis  there  should  be  many 
plain  hard  drives,  though  we  need  not  carry  our  hard 
driving  to  the  excess  which  is  found  in  Boston.  In 
Racquets,  apart  from  the  Service,  which  in  modem  times 
is  nothing  but  cut,  an  occasional  cut-stroke,  especially 
the  Back-hand  across  the  Court,  is  singul'arly  effective. 

The  drive  has  come  into  Tennis  to  stay,  nor  has  it 
degraded  Tennis  by  its  entry.  The  mere  fact  that 
people  hit  much  harder  than  they  used  to,  and  that 
they  return  many  more  balls  than  they  used  to,  has  not 
marred  the  sport  at  all.  I  have  carefully  watched  the 
play  in  Boston,  and  I  have  never  seen  a  man  who  did 
not  thoroughly  enjoy  his  game,  and  who  did  not  give 
an  interesting  game  for  the  spectators  to  watch.  The 
players  seemed  to  develop  their  individuality,  to  get 
more  exercise  and  more  fun  out  of  their  play,  and  to 
use  a  greater  variety  of  strokes,  than  in  any  other  Court 
I  have  ever  visited.  Such  play  will  not  be  so  graceful 
as  the  old  style,  but  it  seems  to  me  a  better  preparation 
for  active  life.  The  player  becomes  quick  and  resource- 
ful, and  yet  does  not  altogether  sacrifice  accuracy,  and 
certainly  does  not  sacrifice  courtesy.     The  whole  game 


CH.  xvii]  FAULTS  AND  FALLACIES  119 

becomes  jolly  and  good-natured  rather  than  stately  and 
slow. 

To  play  Racquets  need  not  spoil  one's  Tennis  stroke 
in  the  least ;  in  fact,  it  should  improve  one's  Tennis 
stroke  by  making  one  quicker  upon  the  feet.  The 
converse  is  rather  the  case,  that  Tennis  spoils  Racquets 
by  giving  one  a  stiff,  dragging  stroke  and  slowness  upon 
one's  feet. 

I  have  tried  in  a  special  Chapter  to  show  that  it  does 
not  take  years  to  learn  the  scoring  of  Tennis.  A  game 
or  two  in  the  Court  should  teach  all  that  is  necessary 
for  a  beginner  or  spectator  to  know.  Of  course  it  is 
hard  to  understand  the  intricacies  of  the  play. 

Nor  does  it  take  years  to  learn  the  intricacies  of  the 
play.  If  only  one  began  with  a  game  of  Squash  or 
Racquets  or  Long  Fives,  one  would  very  soon  see  the 
meaning  of  the  Chases  and  the  Galleries  and  the  Open- 
ings. To  start  with  a  full  game  is  needlessly  perplexing. 
Few  players  have  learnt  Tennis  well  simply  by  playing 
in  a  Tennis-Court.  I  should  not  advise  any  ordinary 
person  to  attempt  this  plan.  I  should  advise  him  to 
learn  the  game  especially  in  a  Squash-Court,  or  in  some 
room.  Here  he  can  master  the  elements  far  more  easily 
than  in  the  Tennis-Court  itself 

For,  though  it  is  wrong  to  imagine  that  there  are  only 
a  few  Courts  in  the  world,  still  there  are  not  so  very 
many  neighbourhoods  which  have  Courts.  And,  though  it 
is  wrong  to  imagine  that  the  game  is  terribly  expensive, 
still  it  is  expensive.  I  consider  the  estimate  in  the 
Badminton  Library,  of  £2^  to  ;^30  a  year,  to  be  far  too 
low  for  modern  play.  To  play  fairly  frequently  in  the 
best  Court  requires,  I  should  imagine,  a  sum  nearer  to 
;^ioo  than  to  £20.  But  some  sort  of  game  need  not  be 
so  expensive.     If  we  could  build  a  wooden  Court  of  a 


I20  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  ii 

less  elaborate  kind,  and  could  use  soft  balls,  the  cost 
could  be  minimised.  There  would  be  less  of  the  refined 
intricacy  of  Tennis,  but  then,  on  the  other  hand,  there 
would  be  smaller  need  for  a  perfect  light;  a  simpler 
form  of  the  game  we  could  play  sufficiently  well  by 
artificial  light  in  the  evenings. 

Such  a  game,  too,  would  be  suitable  for  boys  and 
ladies,  and  would  be  less  dangerous,  though  neither 
Racquets  nor  Tennis  are  really  dangerous.  They  are 
far  less  dangerous  than  eating  and  drinking  in  the  way 
in  which  we  eat  and  drink  at  present.  They  are  even 
less  dangerous  than  sitting  and  doing  nothing  but  smoke 
and  talk  "  what  not "  inside  a  stuffy  room. 


CHAPTER  XVIII 

RACQUETS  AND   TENNIS  CONTRASTED 

As  we  have  seen,  the  two  games  were  once  regarded 
as  utterly  distinct  from  and  opposed  to  one  another  ; 
especially  was  the  dragging  cut  of  Tennis  contrasted 
with  the  fast  drive  of  Racquets,  though  the  spinning 
drive  of  Lawn  Tennis  is  really  the  opposite  pole  to  the 
cut-stroke.  The  differences,  however,  have  been  very 
much  over-estimated,  for  the  Racquet  Service  has  the 
dragging  cut,  and  the  Tennis  "  Force  "  may  have  the  fast 
drive.  Both  games  require  a  great  deal  of  Side- wall 
play  and  Back-wall  play.  It  is  true  that  Tennis  used  to 
be  steady  and  courteous,  in  fact  somewhat  like  the 
minuet ;  but  with  George  Lambert,  Peter  Latham,  and 
Sir  Edward  Grey,  hard  hitting  has  been  the  rule  ;  the 
desire  to  win  and  joy  of  quickness  have  won  the  day. 
As  we  said  before,  the  hard  drive,  the  Volley,  and  the 
Half-volley  have  entered  Tennis,  probably  never  again 
to  depart.     Why  should  they  depart? 

The  Courts  also  are  somewhat  alike  in  modern  times, 
in  being  fast,  well-lighted,  and  accurate ;  the  balls  are 
hard  and  true  ;  the  rackets  are  tightly  strung.  Though 
the  rackets  differ,  yet  the  difference  is  not  so  great  as 
would  appear  at  first  sight.  While  the  face  of  the 
Tennis-racket  is   larger  absolutely,  yet  the  part  of  it 


122  kACQUETSy    TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH       [pt.  II 

which  strikes  the  ball  may  be  smaller,  owing  to  the  cut ; 
in  fact,  when  the  racket  meets  the  ball  for  the  ordinary 
stroke,  less  of  the  face  may  be  actually  exposed  to  it  at 
Tennis  than  at  Racquets.  The  Racquet-Court  is  in 
measurement  smaller  than  the  Tennis-Court,  but  larger 
in  the  sense  that  a  player  has  more  space  to  cover.  The 
low  play-line  allows  a  ball  to  drop  near  to  the  Front- 
wall  and  compels  the  opponent  to  run  up  ;  a  stroke  near 
to  the  net  at  Tennis  is  a  rarity :  the  player  is  nearly 
always  within  a  reasonable  distance  of  the  Back-wall. 

As  to  the  amount  of  exercise  in  the  two  games,  I 
should  calculate  that  now  one  hour  of  a  hard  Single 
at  Racquets  was  equivalent  to  two  (or  two  and  a  half) 
hours  of  a  hard  Single  at  Tennis,  and  to — one  would  be 
afraid  to  say  how  many — hoursof  the  old-fashioned  Single 
at  Tennis.  When  I  played  against  American  players  of 
the  old  school,  I  found  that  some  who  could  stand  one 
and  a  half  or  two  hours  at  the  sedentary  game  were 
tired  after  half-an-hour  of  the  new  game. 

Of  the  expense  it  is  hard  to  speak  definitely.  But 
one  may  say  that  the  expense  of  Tennis  is  more  constant, 
whereas  at  Racquets  we  may  use  twenty  balls  or  fifty ; 
and  the  balls  cost  about  twopence  each. 

The  more  general  differences  between  the  two  games 
are  very  striking. 

First  of  all,  as  to  the  Court.  The  Racquet- Court  has 
four  simple  walls.  Inside  it  the  opponents  do  not  face 
one  another,  but  are  on  the  same  side  of  the  play-line, 
and  therefore  are  apt  to  get  in  one  another's  way.  The 
Tennis-Court  is  complex,  with  its  Penthouses  on  three 
sides,  its  Galleries  on  parts  of  two  sides,  its  Grille,  and 
its  Tambour.  The  Racquet-line  for  play  is  lower  than 
the  Tennis-line,  and  it  is  also  uniform,  whereas  the  Tennis- 
net  is  very  much  higher  at  the  sides  than  in  the  middle. 


CH.  xviii]  RACQUETS  AND  TENNIS  123 

As  to  the  implements,  Racquets  has  a  long  light  bat 
and  a  small  ball ;  and  so  a  mere  flick  of  the  wrist  is 
effective  here.  In  Racquets  the  typical  stroke  is  a  hard 
low  drive,  not  across  the  Court,  but  down  one  side 
or  down  the  other,  close  to  the  Side-wall.  The  stroke 
across  the  Court  is  effective  occasionally.  Besides  this, 
in  Racquets,  the  ball  is  generally  nearer  to  the  player, 
when  he  strikes  it,  than  it  is  at  Tennis,  in  which  game 
the  player  often  stoops  more,  and  draws  his  wrist  away 
from  the  ball  at  the  moment  of  contact,  or  at  any  rate 
holds  the  racket  at  an  angle  so  as  to  slice  the  ball. 

Racquets  is  a  game  more  unalterably  "set"  than 
Tennis  is.  Even  Tom  Pettitt  invents  no  new  stroke ! 
It  has  at  present  a  monotonous  Service,  which  is  always 
from  one  of  two  places.  Comparatively  few  players 
vary  their  Service,  at  least  intentionally.  Of  course 
there  is  a  certain  amount  of  compulsory  variety.  Tennis 
has  a  most  varied  Service,  which  can  be  given  from  any 
place  on  one  side  of  the  Court  onto  the  Penthouse  on 
the  other  side.  Of  Pettitt's  two  Services,  one  is  quite 
distinct  from  the  other,  of  which  Mr.  Stockton  and  Mr. 
Crane,  in  America,  are  among  the  best  exponents. 
Latham's  Service,  again,  is  altogether  different  from 
these,  and  Punch  Fairs'  Service  from  these.  The  Giraffe 
Service,  once  more,  stands  by  itself  Mr.  Ross  has  a 
very  effective  slow  Service,  entirely  different  from  all 
the  others.  At  Racquets  hardly  any  players  vary  the 
hard,  heavily-cut  Service  from  the  beginning  to  the  end 
of  their  play.  The  general  rule  of  Racquets-play,  "  Safety 
during  one's  own  Service,  risk  during  one's  opponent's 
Service,"  does  not  apply  to  Tennis,  where  every  point 
counts  equally  whether  one  be  serving  or  not. 

In  Racquets  the  scoring  is  simple,  the  Match  being 
divided  up  into  large  divisions  consisting  of  games  of 


124  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  i! 

fifteen  points  each.  In  Tennis  the  scoring  is  complex, 
the  Match  being  divided  into  large  sets,  which  again  are 
subdivided,  as  in  Lawn  Tennis,  into  small  games  that 
have  more  variety  than  Lawn  Tennis  games,  because  of 
the  Chases,  The  deuce  and  vantage  of  the  Tennis  games 
have  no  parallel  in  Racquets,  which  cannot  be  prolonged 
indefinitely  (at  least,  not  in  the  same  way).  Racquets 
is  played  continuously,  without  the  breaks  during  which 
the  players  change  sides  to  play  out  the  Chases  (i.  e. 
certain  balls  which  they  have  left  alone).  Tennis  has 
its  little  intervals  of  rest.  In  Tennis  one  is  able  to  leave 
certain  balls  alone,  and  then  to  fight  the  points  out  over 
again,  at  a  disadvantage. 

Racquets  encourages,  in  particular,  the  qualities  of 
enduring  activity,  agility  (seen  in  the  quick  recovery 
needed  after  one's  Service),  and  fine  accuracy.  Tennis 
is  coming  to  encourage  these  qualities  more  and  more, 
though  some  hold  that  it  needs  less  fine  accuracy  than 
of  old.  But  Tennis  gives  larger  scope — or  rather  it  may 
give  larger  scope — for  head-play  and  subtlety  and  ex- 
perience, and  therefore  the  less  vigorous  have  a  chance  of 
keeping  up  their  standard  of  excellence.  In  Tennis 
there  is  more  choice :  for  example,  when  you  are  stand- 
ing on  the  Service-side  and  an  easy  ball  comes  to  you, 
you  first  of  all  may  have  your  choice  between  volleying 
or  half-volleying  it,  or  leaving  it  to  strike  the  Back- 
wall  first.  So  far.  Tennis  and  Racquets  are  alike.  But 
in  Racquets  you  would  probably  hit  this  ball  low  down 
the  side  of  the  Court.  In  Tennis  you  might  make  this 
same  stroke,  or  hit  it  a  little  higher  into  the  Grille, 
which  would  be  a  winning  stroke,  or  across  the  Court, 
over  the  lowest  part  of  the  net,  down  into  the  corner, 
or  high  into  the  Last  Gallery,  which  would  also  be  a 
winning  stroke.     Both   Racquets  and  Tennis  allow  of 


CH.  xviii]  RACQUETS  AND   TENNIS  125 

varied  length,  pace,  and  placing,  but  in  Tennis  there  are 
more  good  things  to  be  done  with  a  weak  stroke  from 
the  opponent. 

Tennis  also  has  more  Handicaps  than  Racquets, 
though  not  nearly  enough  of  them  are  used  to-day. 
In  Tennis,  for  example,  the  better  player  may  be  com- 
pelled to  give  easy  Services,  or  to  hit  no  ball  full  onto 
any  wall ;  or  indeed  he  may  be  obliged  to  hit  each  of 
his  strokes  so  that  it  shall  not  touch  any  wall  at  all 
while  it  is  still  in  play.  By  these  and  other  means,  quite 
the  best  expert  can  be  put  on  a  level  with  the  veriest 
duffer.  The  duffer  will  get  plenty  of  play  ;  the  expert 
will  acquire  a  more  complete  control  of  the  ball,  while 
he  has  to  exert  every  effort  in  order  to  win.  In  Racquets, 
on  the  other  hand,  it  demands  an  extremely  tactful  and 
gentle  Marker  to  keep  the  game  going.  At  almost  any 
time  if  George  Standing  had  wanted  to  win  a  game  in 
New  York,  or  even  a  series  of  games,  without  his 
opponent  scoring  at  all,  I  believe  he  could  have  done 
so.  In  fact  there  are  many  Markers  who  could  make 
certain  of  winning  twenty-nine  strokes  out  of  every 
thirty  against  an  ordinary  player.  Thus  the  Racquet- 
Marker  usually  finds  that  it  is  bad  practice  to  play 
with  beginners.  If  the  Tennis-Marker  finds  this,  it  is 
absolutely  and  entirely  his  own  fault ;  he  has  no  one 
to  blame  but  himself  For  by  carefully  selected  Handi- 
caps he  can  improve  the  correctness  of  his  position,  his 
knowledge  of  the  angles  of  the  Court,  and  his  control 
of  the  ball. 

Tennis  can  be  played  till  later  in  life  than  Racquets, 
partly  because  of  the  intervals  (during  which  the  players 
change  sides  to  play  out  the  Chases),  and  partly  because 
the  game  is  somewhat  slower,and  partly  because  experi- 
ence goes  such  a  long  way  ;  although  there  is  this  to  be 


126  RACQUETS,   TENNIS,  AND  SQUASH      [pt.  Ii 

said,  that  a  Four-handed  game  of  Tennis  is  inferior  to  a 
Double  at  Racquets  in  the  opinion  of  most  players  ;  and 
one  can  continue  to  play  Fours  at  Racquets  for  as  long 
as  one  is  able  to  play  Singles  at  Tennis.  This  book, 
however,  will  deal  almost  entirely  with  Single  play. 

It  would  be  easy  to  write  at  length  on  the  differences 
which  would  appear  if  one  analysed  the  play  minutely. 
For  example,  in  ordinary  play — one  may  here  leave 
Latham  and  a  few  others  out  of  sight — the  Racquet-ball 
is  taken  when  it  is  nearer  to  the  player  and  nearer  to  the 
floor  than  the  Tennis-ball  would  be ;  the  Drop-stroke  is 
common  at  Racquets,  but  rare  at  Tennis.  The  Racquet 
stroke  is,  owing  to  the  height  of  the  play-line,  naturally 
lower  than  the  Tennis  stroke,  and  allows  less  time  to  the 
opponent.  Besides  this,  the  Winning  Openings  en- 
courage a  high  drive  which  would  be  a  most  unsuccessful 
stroke  in  a  Racquet-Court.  It  is  partly  owing  to  the 
greater  height  of  the  play-line  that  so  many  Tennis 
experts,  especially  at  Boston,  play  for  the  nick  of  the 
Back-wall.  This  is  seldom  worth  while  at  Racquets.  Nor 
in  Racquets  do  we  often  see  the  sideway  twist  put  on  the 
ball,  whereas  in  Tennis  it  is  most  useful,  as  is  also  the 
"  Boast "  (or  stroke  which  hits  the  Side-wall  before  it 
goes  over  the  play-line). 

We  must  not  discuss  the  differences  further  here,  ex- 
cept to  end  with  one  of  the  most  striking.  For  the  typic-al 
Tennis  stroke,  the  whole  arm  and  racket  almost  form  one 
stiff  piece  of  mechanism.  For  the  typical  Racquet  stroke, 
the  joints  must  be  lithe  and  lissom,  and  especially  the 
joints  of  the  shoulder,  elbow,  and  wrist.  The  one  limb  of 
Tennis  must  be  subdivided  into  the  several  limbs  of 
Racquets.  After  a  long  spell  of  Tennis  this  subdivision 
may  become  extremely  difficult,  especially  as  one  grows 
older  and  stiffen 


Part  III 
RACQUETS 


CHAPTER   XIX 

MERITS  OF  RACQUETS 

There  is  no  game  worse  than  Racquets  if  a  good 
server  is  serving  against  a  poor  player ;  for  many  points 
may  follow  in  quick  succession  without  the  poor  player 
being  able  to  return  a  single  one.  The  rally  then  con- 
sists of  a  solitary  bang  up  against  the  Front-wall  ;  the 
grievously-cut  ball  will  die  in  unapproachable  sadness 
within  its  corner.  One  marvels  to  see  certain  people 
come  into  the  Court,  week  after  week,  and  continue  this 
kind  of  nonsense.  Why  do  not  they  change  the  method 
of  scoring?  It  is  so  utterly  senseless  to  look  on  while 
one's  opponent  hits  ball  after  ball  into  the  corner.  It  is 
expensive  idleness  and  annoyance. 

Besides  this,  few  games  produce  more  horrible  accidents 
than  Racquets,  though  these  accidents  are  extremely  rare. 
As  we  have  remarked  elsewhere,  the  Racquet  ball  just 
fits  into  the  human  eye,  in  which  case  there  ceases  to  be 
any  room  for  the  eye.  But,  to  encourage  players,  and  to 
make  them  quite  easy  about  the  risk  of  play,  one  may 
say  that  if  the  racket  be  held  up  to  protect  the  head  (as 
in  the  Illustration  in  Chapter  XXVI),  there  is  next  to  no 
danger ;  and  that  more  than  one  player  who  has  lost  his 
eye  has  continued  to  play  Racquets  or  Tennis.  The  case 
II  129 


13©  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

of  Mr.  Walter  Rogers  Furness,  of  Philadelphia,  iS  worth 
quoting.  One  day,  from  an  accident  in  the  Court,  he  lost 
an  eye.  But,  lest  young  players  should  be  frightened  from 
taking  up  or  continuing  the  game,  he  still  plays  with  one 
eye,  and  plays  keenly  and  successfully.  It  is  partly  owing 
to  his  plucky  persistence  that  Philadelphia  has  the  most 
flourishing  Racquet-Club  in  America.  Mr.  Ross  plays 
Tennis,  though  he  also  has  lost  the  sight  of  one  eye.  He 
is  still  one  of  the  most  enthusiastic  and  most  interesting 
and  clever  of  all  the  players  of  to-day,  and  often  laments 
that  people  are  using  their  heads  less  and  less  in  the  two 
games,  especially  in  the  Service. 

Having  said  this  by  way  of  showing  that  Racquets  is 
not  perfection,  we  may  pass  to  the  brighter  side.  We 
need  not  repeat  the  many  merits  common  to  Racquets 
and  to  Tennis ;  for  instance,  their  physical  and  hygienic, 
their  social,  their  intellectual,  their  moral,  their  aesthetic, 
and  their  economical  values.  We  may  proceed  to  the 
merits  of  Racquets  as  contrasted  with  Tennis. 

First  of  all,  there  is  the  simplicity  of  the  game  ;  the 
hard  heavily-cut  Service,  the  hard  low  drives,  mostly 
down  the  sides — these  are  the  essentials  of  the  game, 
which  is  marked  particularly  by  the  Anglo-Saxon  quality 
of  directness  and  straightforwardness. 

But  then  there  is  the  rapidity  of  it,  which  is  not  an 
Anglo-Saxon — at  least  not  an  English — quality.  One 
has  to  move  into  position  rapidly,  to  hit  rapidly,  and  to 
recover  rapidly.  Racquets  takes  far  less  time  than 
Tennis,  and  generally  gives  a  far  better  sweat.  It  serves 
as  a  nerve-tonic,  and  it  also  gives  practice  in  the  main- 
taining of  self-control  on  occasions  of  vast  hurry.  The 
decision  has  to  be  made  in  a  moment.  Nothing  is  easier 
than  to  lose- one's  head,  and  with  it  one's  game.  In 
business-life,  especially  while  we   are   competing  with 


CH.  XIX]  MERITS  OF  RACQUETS  131 

foreigners,  we  need  not  only  the  all-round  versatility  of 
the  Tennis  player,  but  also  the  instantaneous  decision  of 
the  Racquet  player. 

And  Racquets  seems  to  me  to  be  a  game  requiring 
more  accuracy  than  Tennis  does.  During  the  first  half- 
hour  of  play,  after  a  long  interval  of  rest,  it  feels  almost 
impossible  to  hit  that  tiny  lightning-speeding  ball  with 
that  tiny  slim  racket.  Hence  one  has  to  be  extremely 
careful  of  oneself  till  one  has  made  one's  play  habitual, 
as  it  were,  up  to  a  certain  level.  George  Standing  has 
gained  this  habitual  level  of  play  perhaps  more  markedly 
than  any  other  player.  In  his  own  Court,  at  New  York, 
he  gives  one  the  sense  of  complete  mastery  over  the 
ordinary  opponent.  But,  for  the  average  player,  great 
care  is  necessary,  and  very  sensible  training,  unless  the 
standard  of  play  is  to  be  lowered  considerably. 

Racquets  has  more  Courts  than  Tennis,  since  most  of 
the  Public  Schools,  and  many  Army  Institutions  in 
England  and  elsewhere,  and  many  towns  in  India,  are 
provided  with  Racquet-Courts.  It  stands  to  reason, 
therefore,  that  Racquets  is  a  game  with  a  larger  public 
than  Tennis. 

It  is,  I  think,  superior  to  Tennis  in  the  Doubles  ;  that 
is  to  say,  if  one  can  get  four  good  and  even  and  energetic 
players  who  understand  the  game.  But,  alas,  this  is 
rare.  The  Four  at  Racquets  appears  to  me  a  distinct 
variety  of  the  game,  having  comparatively  little  connec- 
tion with  the  Single.  I  may  be  wrong,  but,  in  propor- 
tion to  their  standard,  the  Americans  play  the  Four 
better  than  we  do.  The  Three-handed  game  is  even 
better  sport,  though  unfortunately  this  is  seldom  tried. 
It  combines  the  advantages  of  the  Single  with  the  ad- 
vantages of  the  Four,  being  less  severe  than  the  Single 
and  more  severe  than  the  Four.     There  is  scarcely  any 


132  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

kind   of  exercise  more  pleasant  than  an  even  Three- 
handed  Match,  "  all  against  all." 

But  Racquets  sadly  tends  to  become  mechanical  and 
automatic.     Scarcely  any  even  of  the  best  players  to-day 
(with  the  exception  of  a  few  at  the  top  of  the  tree)  vary 
their  game  in  the  least.     One  cannot  help  thinking  of 
the  case  of  the  Lawn  Tennis  player  who  had  a  touch  of 
sun-stroke  and  became  practically  unconscious,  and  then 
went  out  and  won  his  round  in  a  tournament  without 
being  aware  that  he  had  played  at  all.     This  seems  to 
imply  an  advanced  stage  of  mechanism.     And  one  can- 
not avoid  the  theory  that  a  large  number  of  Racquet 
players  might  have  important  portions  of  their  conscious 
thinking   powers   removed   without    their   game   being 
appreciably  affected.     The  player  goes  automatically  to 
the  Service-box,  serves  his  severe  Cut- Service  automatic- 
ally, scarcely  ever  varying  it  of  his  own  free-will.     He 
tries  to  return  nearly  every  ball  as  low  as  he  can  down 
the  Side-wall,  and  nearly  as  hard  as  he  can.     If  he  does 
not  return  it  always  in  precisely  the  same  way,  that  is 
not  because  he  is  not  mechanical,  but  rather  because  he 
is  out  of  position.     The  Drop-stroke  is  dying  out,  and 
indeed  with  most  players  has  died  out,  though  Colonel 
Spens  and   Mr.  H.  K.  Foster  do  use  it  still.     George 
Standing  and  Bob  Moore  employ  it  with  fatal  effect.    But 
I  have  heard  it  abused  virulently  by  orthodox  players 
who  have  not  realised  the  risk  one  runs  when  one  makes 
it,  nor  the  prettiness  of  the  stroke  and  the  variety  which 
it    introduces.      As  Sir  William    Hart-Dyke  has   ably 
remarked  in  the  Badminton  volume — 


"  The  temper,  skill,  and  patience  required  in  all  the  heat  and 
excitement  of  a  contest  to  be  able  to  drop  a  Volley  just  in  the  one 
corner  of  the  Court  where  your  opponent  is  not,  I  trust  may  long  be 
recognised  as  worthy  of  cultivation  by  our  young  players." 


CR  XiX]  MERITS  OF  RACQUETS  133 

Nevertheless  good  Racquets  is  a  splendid  game  to 
watch  as  well  as  to  play.  If  only  sensible  Handicaps 
were  introduced,  together  with  a  sensible  method  of  learn- 
ing the  alphabet  of  play,  it  would  become  once  again  as 
popular  as  ever  it  has  been.  For  I  believe  that  the  real 
obstacle  is  less  the  expense  of  the  game  than  the  want 
of  pleasure  in  the  game,  for  the  duffer.  This  is  not  so 
much  because  of  any  fault  of  Racquets  itself:  it  is  rather 
because  the  player  has  never  been  properly  grounded  in 
the  elements  of  success. 

Now  there  is  no  reason  why  he  should  not  be  so 
grounded.  Even  if  he  will  not  take  the  trouble  to  go 
through  the  various  positions  and  movements  before  and 
after  strokes,  with  or  without  the  Ball-Game  Apparatus 
(Chapter  XIII),  and  even  if  he  will  not  consent  to  learn 
Squash  before  he  attempt  Racquets,  yet  with  a  bag  of 
old  balls  he  can  get  good  exercise  and  good  practice  in 
the  Racquet-Court  all  by  himself,  when  once  he  has  had 
a  few  lessons  from  the  Marker.  Though  I  cannot  agree 
with  the  writer  in  the  Badminton  volume,  when  he  says 
that  one  can  play  by  oneself  at  Racquets  but  not  at 
Tennis, — I  do  not  object  to  half-an-hour's  practice  all 
by  myself  at  Tennis — ,  yet  at  any  rate  one  can  keep  the 
ball  going  and  get  some  quick  motion  without  an 
opponent.  And  this  is  more  than  can  be  said  for  Lawn 
Tennis. 


CHAPTER   XX 

THE  COURT  AND   IMPLEMENTS 
THE  COURT 

The  Court  is  generally  made  of  slabs  of  stone,  or  else 
of  cement,  Bickley's  cement  being  by  far  the  best.  It 
may  be  mentioned  that,  when  Bickley  makes  a  Court, 
he  guarantees  that  it  shall  be  of  the  best  kind.  And 
eventually  he  always  succeeds.  One  Court  in  America, 
namely  that  at  St.  Paul's  School,  is  of  wood,  which  of 
course  takes  less  cut,  but  still  gives  a  good  game,  and  is 
far  cheaper  to  build.  The  Courts  have  plain  walls,  and 
nearly  all  have  a  roof.  Uncovered  Courts  give  more 
air  and  light,  but  are  exposed  to  inclement  weather, 
with  its  rain  and  dirt.  In  certain  windy  places  they  are 
hardly  safe.  And  open  Courts  are  usually  too  slow  to 
suit  the  taste  of  modern  players.  Experiments  should 
be  made  with  a  movable  roof  The  idea  was  suggested 
long  ago. 

As  to  the  size  of  the  Court,  very  roughly  speaking  we 
may  say  that,  whereas  an  American  Squash-Court  is  a 
little  over  30  feet  in  length,  an  English  Squash-Court 
from  30  to  40  feet,  a  Racquet-Court  is  about  60  feet, 
a  Tennis-Court  about  90  feet.  At  Cambridge,  two 
Racquet-Courts  have  in  turn  been  changed  into  Squash- 
Courts,  one  Racquet-Court  being  divided  up  into  three 

134 


CH.  XX]        THE  COURT  AND  IMPLEMENTS  135 

Squash-Courts.  This  has  proved  successful  with  regard 
to  the  amount  of  play,  Squash  being  a  cheaper  and 
easier  and  more  popular  game  than  Racquets.  The  size 
of  the  Racquet-Court  entails  vast  expense,  an  expense 
slightly  increased  when  the  Court  is  over  63  feet  long 
(as  in  Boston  and  New  York),  or  still  longer  than  this 
(as  in  Philadelphia).  For  one  has  to  build  a  great  high 
Front-wall,  great  high  Side-walls,  and  a  high  Back-wall. 
The  foundations  must  be  very  carefully  laid.  The 
expense  need  not  be  quite  so  great  as  it  is  at  present 
(see  the  suggestions  in  Part  VI),  and  the  outside  of 
the  walls  can  be  used  as  walls  for  Squash-Courts  and 
Fives-Courts,  Nor  is  the  Racquet-Court  so  expensive 
as  the  elaborately  fitted-up  Tennis-Court,  with  its  Gal- 
leries and  Tambour  etc.  The  old  Racquet-Court  was 
still  cheaper.  It  had  only  one  wall,  and  a  somewhat 
rough  floor.  But  the  initial  cost  of  a  Court  generally 
has  to  be  contributed  gradually  by  the  players,  and  the 
constant  cost  of  the  balls  and  rackets  and  Markers  is 
considerable. 

In  the  old  game  the  player  used  to  serve  from  a  place 
in  the  middle  of  the  Court,  but  now  he  serves  from  the 
two  sides  alternately. 

The  Diagram  shows  the  Racquet-Court,  A  and  B 
denoting  the  Service-boxes,  C  and  D  denoting  the  portions 
of  the  Court  into  which  the  servers  must  serve  the  ball. 
The  player  serving  from  A  has  to  hit  the  ball  above  the 
Service-line  into  D,  and  from  B  into  C.  A  sample  game 
will  be  described  in  the  following  Chapter. 

THE   IMPLEMENTS 

"  Flannels  "  are  of  course  a  sine  qua  non,  even  for  a 
ten  minutes'  practice.  But  we  cannot  yet  say  which  is 
the  best  material  for  the  shirt  or  vest.     With  wool  one 


136 


RACQUETS 


[PT.  Ill 


SIDE -WALL 


FRONT- WALL 


Servfce-Lfnc.over  8f^ 


from  Hnc  Floor 
Pt&yUne  2ft2m  from  tKe 


Floor. 


o  *• 


to 


o  — 

CO   <V> 

>  <^ 

UJ 


Shorfr  Cross 
39  ft  from 


»  ^ 


B 


Courf  Line 
Front-Wall 


D 


BACK-WALL 

witK  OALLERY  above 


Floor-I&vcl 


SIDE-WALL 


Diagram  ii. — Ground-plan  of  a  Racquet-Court  and  plan  of  the  Front- Wall. 


CH.  XX]         THE  COURT  AND  IMPLEMENTS  137 

seems  less  likely  to  catch  a  chill ;  but  otherwise  either 
cotton  or  linen  or  a  mixture  of  cotton  (or  linen)  and 
wool  may  be  preferable  for  many  of  us.  India  gauze 
is  excellent. 

It  is  important  to  have  flannels  which  are  "  easy,"  espe- 
cially about  the  shoulders.  Perhaps  a  broad  belt  round 
the  waist  is  with  our  ordinary  clothes  better  for  many 
of  us  than  braces  over  the  shoulders.  And  certainly  in 
a  Racquet-Court  I  find  such  a  belt  most  comfortable. 
Anyhow  there  should  not  be  a  thin  belt  or  tight  sash. 
The  ideal  may  be  to  have  trousers  which  fit  so  well  that 
they  do  not  need  to  be  supported.  But,  as  trousers 
shrink  in  the  wash,  a  belt  may  prove  cheaper.  And, 
for  my  part,  I  like  the  support  of  a  fairly  broad  belt. 
Even  with  ordinary  clothes  I  prefer  a  belt  to  braces, 
which  now  feel  extremely  uncomfortable  to  me. 

The  boots  or  shoes  should  allow  of  a  good  grip  on 
the  floor.  We  have  lost  much  of  our  ape-power  to  grip 
with  our  feet — a  power  which  the  Japanese  "  Bartitsu  " 
wrestlers  possess,  and  which  the  peasants  of  Central 
Europe  possess  also.  The  ordinary  thick-soled  boot  or 
shoe  deadens  the  fine  sensations  of  the  various  parts  of 
the  feet,  which  should  be  able  to  feel  the  ground 
independently.  The  cushions  or  "  pads "  of  the  toes 
ought  to  be  hardly  if  at  all  less  sensitive  to  touch  than 
the  fingers  of  our  hands.  Besides  this,  the  ordinary 
shoe  distorts  the  big  toe,  turning  it  outwards  and 
away  from  the  straight  line  (Meyer's  Line).  Hence  we 
lose  much  of  the  leverage  of  the  big  toe.  Altogether 
we  bully  our  poor  feet  scandalously.  We  do  sadly 
need,  at  least  in  games,  a  sensibly-shaped  shoe — of 
course  a  boot  supports  a  weak  ankle  better — and  a  shoe 
which  shall  have  a  sole  not  all  in  one  separate-part- 
deadening  piece. 


138  RACQUETS  [pt.  in 

Scarcely  less  necessary  than  proper  flannels  and  proper 
shoes  are  the  means  of  washing  and  rubbing  oneself 
over  after  the  game,  or,  at  any  rate,  the  means  of 
wrapping  oneself  up  until  one  has  reached  the  washing- 
place. 

With  regard  to  the  racket,  the  actual  weight  is  of  less 
importance  than  the  feeling ;  a  heavy  racket  may  suit 
one  better  than  a  light  racket.  It  depends  upon  the 
individual,  and  his  style  of  play,  and — his  funds.  It  is 
possible  that  some  players  should  not  use  the  ordinary 
covering  for  the  handle ;  either  india-rubber  or  wash- 
leather  or  some  other  material  may  suit  them  better. 
The  gut  of  course  should  be  tight,  tighter  for  Match- 
play  than  for  practice.  The  black  gut  is  often  the  best, 
but  much  depends  upon  the  particular  lot  from  which 
one's  gut  has  been  taken.  This,  again,  depends  on  the 
time  of  year  etc.  A  fortune  awaits  the  maker  who  can 
produce  a  uniformly  good  gut.  The  racket  itself  should 
be  free  from  knots  and  flaws.  Many  prefer  to  have 
much  of  the  weight  in  the  handle,  which  is  now  far 
thicker  than  it  used  to  be,  though  not  so  thick  as  the 
Lawn  Tennis  handle. 

A  press  for  rackets  is  almost  essential  to  economy  as 
well  as  to  enjoyment.  When  once  a  bat  is  warped,  it 
can  seldom  do  itself  justice  again. 

The  Racquet  ball  is  illustrated  in  Photograph  XVIII, 
side  by  side  with  the  Fives  and  Squash  balls.  The  size 
of  the  Racquet  balls  is  uniform,  but  their  hardness  varies. 
They  are  made  of  cloth  inside,  the  cloth  being  very 
tightly  packed ;  round  this  is  wound  fine  thread ;  then 
comes  the  covering.  New  insides  seldom  provide  good 
balls  ;  play  improves  the  insides. 

According  to  the  softness  or  the  hardness,  we  have 
two  different  games  of  Racquets :  the  soft  balls  giving 


M 


Ph 


P4 


W 


w 


fe. 


Fig.  19. — The  Grip.     (Not  unlike  Latham's.) 

(See  page  154.) 


CH.  XX]        THE  COURT  AND  IMPLEMENTS  139 

the  better  practice  for  beginners,  because  the  rallies  are 
longer,  and  the  killing  strokes  are  fewer,  and  the  killing 
Services  are  fewer ;  a  soft  ball  takes  less  cut,  and  cut 
drives  the  ball  quickly  down  off  the  Back-walls  and 
Side-walls.  The  balls  should  be  regularly  dried  and 
warmed  before  play. 

They  are  not  satisfactory  in  modern  times,  perhaps 
because  few  will  take  the  trouble  to  make  and  re-make 
them  carefully.  I  do  not  think  that  those  who  make 
them  are  underpaid,  but  the  drudgery  is  said  to  be 
extreme,  and  probably  a  great  deal  of  the  work  is  care- 
lessly done.  It  certainly  seems  to  me  that  the  balls 
to-day  are  far  more  carelessly  sewn  than  they  have  ever 
been  before.  I  never  played  so  many  games  in  which 
so  large  a  proportion  of  the  balls  have  been  discarded  not 
because  they  have  lost  their  shape,  but  because  they  have 
come  unsewn.  Here  there  is  urgent  need  of  a  practical 
invention  to  take  the  ball-work  out  of  the  hands  of  care- 
less workers,  and  to  give  it  to  the  mechanism  of  some 
machine.  Or  let  us  hope  that  Mr.  Prosser's  new  ball, 
which  is  likely  to  be  practicably  imperishable,  will  prove 
a  success.  So  far  as  I  can  judge,  it  is  uniform  and 
reliable,  and  it  certainly  is  of  regulation  weight  and  size 
and  colour.  But  the  fact  that  it  has  no  equivalent  to 
the  seams  may  render  it  too  unlike  the  actual  ball  to 
satisfy  an  expert. 


CHAPTER  XXI 

PLAY  AND  THE  RULES  OF  PLAY 

The  scoring  of  Racquets  is  not  nearly  so  complicated 
as  the  scoring  of  Tennis,  but  still  it  may  be  as  well  to 
illustrate  it  by  a  concrete  instance,  by  the  scoring  of 
an  imaginary  game,  for  the  purpose  of  defining  the 
various  features  of  the  marking. 

The  game  is  a  Single  for  15,  and  the  Marker  gives 
Jones  13.  Diagram  11  (in  Chapter  XX)  should  be 
studied  in  connection  with  the  following  paragraphs. 

The  Marker  spins  his  racket ;  Jones  calls  "  rough  "  ; 
it  falls  "  rough  "  (i.  e.  the  rougher  side  of  the  strung  gut 
falls  uppermost) ;  so  Jones  goes  "  in  "  and  serves. 

I.  Jones  stands  in  the  Service-box  A,  and  hits  the  ball 
up  against  the  Front-wall,  below  the  top  or  Service-line 
(which  should  be  a  red  line).  The  Marker  calls  "  Cut," 
which  scores  exactly  as  a  Lav/n  Tennis  "  Fault." 

Jones'  next  Service  is  above  the  red  Service-line  but 
short  of  the  line  across  the  Court.  The  Marker  calls 
*'  Short,"  which  also  scores  the  same  as  a  "  Fault "  : 
Jones  has  now  served  two  "  Faults,"  and  so  loses  the 
point,  and  the  Marker  goes  in  :  he  can  serve  from  which- 
ever side  he  likes — from  A  or  from  B. 
2.  He  serves  from  A,  and  sends  the  ball  above  the 

140 


CH.  XXI]   PLAV  AND   THE  RULES  OF  PLAY  141 

Service-line,  and  beyond  the  Cross-Court  line,  but  into 
his  own  half  of  the  Court  (C) ;  so  "Fault"  is  called. 

His  next  Serve  goes  above  the  Service-line,  beyond 
the  Cross-Court  line,  and  into  the  other  Court  (D),  which 
is  all  right.  Jones  fails  to  return  it,  so  the  Marker  scores 
his  first  point  (1-13). 

3.  He  had  served  from  A  into  D,  so  now  he  has  to 
cross  over  and  serve  from  B  into  C,  from  right  to  left 
(hence  called  "  Serve  Left ") :  Jones  returns  the  ball 
onto  the  board,  and  so  loses  another  point  (2-13). 

4.  The  next  Serve  Jones  returns  above  the  board,  but 
he  only  hits  it  at  its  second  bounce,  and  so  loses  the 
point  (3-13)- 

5.  The  next  Serve  he  hits  above  the  board,  but  it  then 
goes  into  the  Gallery  (above  the  Back-wall),  and  loses 
another  point  (4-13). 

6.  The  next  Serve  Jones  also  hits  above  the  board, 
but  the  ball  comes  back  and  hits  Jones  while  it  is  still  in 
play  :  this  also  counts  against  Jones  (5-13). 

And  so  the  game  goes  on,  till  the  Marker  has  reached 
13  :  once  or  twice  Jones  has  put  him  out,  but  Jones  has 
not  won  any  points  while  serving  :  it  is  only  the  Server 
who  can  score  points,  and  the  Server's  score  is  always 
called  cut  first. 

At  13-all  the  Marker,  having  won  the  last  point,  asks 
Jones  whether  he  will  play  the  game  straight  out  or 
whether  he  will  "  set  "  :  that  is,  whether  he  will  make  the 
score  love-all,  and  then  whoever  first  gets  either  3  or  5 
points  will  win  the  game. 

Jones  knows  that,  the  more  points  he  has  to  get,  the 
less  chance  he  has  of  winning  the  game,  so  he  decides  to 
play  the  game  straight  out  and  not  to  "  set." 

The  Marker  serves,  Jones  volleys  the  ball,  and  the 
Marker  fails  to  return  it,  so  Jones  goes  in. 


142  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

Jones  serves  a  ball,  hitting  the  Front-wall  first,  then 
the  Side-wall,  and  then  the  Back-wall,  the  ball  coming 
finally  to  a  place  just  behind  Jones  himself,  so  that,  if 
the  Marker  had  a  fair  hit  at  the  ball,  he  would  probably 
hit  it  onto  Jones,  who  has  his  racket  up  (Chapter 
XXVI)  in  order  to  protect  his  head.  The  Marker 
leaves  the  ball  alone,  and,  in  some  Courts,  would  not 
be  allowed  to  have  a  "  let " — a  very  weird  and  dangerous 
rule.  Here  he  does  not  claim  a  "  let,"  so  Jones  scores 
the  point  (14-13). 

The  next  Serve  Jones  stupidly  sends  on  to  the  board, 
which  puts  him  out  altogether,  counting  as  two  Faults. 

The  Marker  goes  in  and  wins  one  point,  making  the 
score  14-all.  Again  Jones  has  to  decide  whether  a  single 
point  shall  decide  the  game,  or  whether  whoever  gets  3 
points  first  shall  win  (this  is  called  "  Set  three  ").  Jones 
decides,  for  the  same  reason  as  before,  that  one  point 
shall  win  the  game,  and  so  the  Marker  serves,  with  the 
score  at  14-all.  Jones  takes  the  Service,  the  Marker 
returns  Jones'  stroke,  and  then  Jones  tries  to  get  at  the 
ball,  but  the  Marker  is  in  the  way;  Jones  stupidly 
strikes  at  the  ball  and  misses  it,  and  so  he  cannot  claim 
a  let.  It  is  an  excellent  feature  at  Racquets,  as  opposed 
to  Fives  especially,  that,  when  a  player  tries  at  a  ball, 
he  cannot  claim  a  let  for  it  in  case  he  misses  it :  he  must 
either  run  the  risk,  or  else  claim  the  let,  unless  his  racket 
actually  hits  against  the  Marker,  or  unless  he  hits  onto 
the  Marker  a  ball  which  would  otherwise  have  gone  up. 

The  Marker  thus  wins  the  game  (15-14). 

We  shall  see  below  that  a  far  better  arrangement  than 
this  for  beginners  and  ordinary  players,  apart  from 
Matches,  is  what  I  have  called  Reverse-scoring.  If  F, 
the  Server,  wins,  he  shall  not  score  a  point,  but  S  shall 
go  in  to  serve.     If  F  then  wins,  he  shall  score  a  point ; 


CH.  XXI]   PLA  Y  AND  THE  RULES  OF  PLA  V  143 

in  fact,  according  to  the  Reverse-plan,  F  serves  not  until 
he  /oses  a  rally  but  until  he  wins  one.  This  method 
prevents  those  monotonously  long  runs  of  Service  which 
are  too  unfortunately  usual  when  experts  are  playing,  or 
when  duffers  are  playing.  It  gives  longer  rallies,  and 
therefore  more  exercise  and  practice  and  enjoyment. 

Another  method  is  the  Lawn  Tennis  Scoring,  when 
each  player  serves  for  one  game,  the  score  being  15,  30, 
and  so  on.     Six  games  go  to  a  set. 

Another  way,  which  I  think  is  my  own  invention,  is 
that  each  player  should  serve  twice,  once  from  each 
Court. 

But  to  return  to  the  games  as  they  are  usually  scored 
in  England  and  America. 

F's  Service  is  all  right  if  he  has  one  foot  in  the 
Service-box,  and  if  his  ball  hits  the  Front-wall  above 
the  Service-line,  and  bounces  into  C  or  D  (according  to 
whether  he  has  served  from  B  or  A),  or  if  S  takes  a  ball 
that  would  have  bounced  a  Fault,  or  that  did  bounce  a 
Fault.  For  one  has  a  right  to  take  a  Fault ;  one  cannot 
take  a  Fault  at  Lawn  Tennis  or  Tennis. 

Faults  are  of  three  kinds. 

First  there  is  the  "  Cut,"  when  the  ball  hits  the  Front- 
wall  below  the  Service-line.  It  is  hard  for  a  Marker  to 
see  certain  balls  in  time,  and  still  harder  for  him  to  call 
out  in  time,  if  he  is  up  in  the  Gallery.  I  suggest  below 
that  a  Marker  should  call  nothing  at  all  if  the  Service 
be  all  right,  and  should  call  "  Cut,"  if  it  be  Cut,  or 
"  Fault,"  if  it  be  Fault. 

The  second  kind  of  Fault  is  called  "  Short."  A  short 
ball  pitches  in  front  of  the  line  across  the  Court.  Here 
it  is  still  harder  for  the  Marker  to  see  in  time.  Racquets 
is  not  like  Lawn  Tennis,  where  the  receiver  of  the 
Service  takes  the  Service  whether  it  be  a  Fault  or  not, 


144  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

if  there  is  any  doubt.  For  in  Racquets  if  he  tries  to 
take  the  Service  he  annuls  the  Fault.  As  it  is,  the 
Marker  calls  "  Play  "  when  the  ball  hits  the  Front-wall 
above  the  Play-line.  There  is  absolutely  no  need  for 
him  to  call  anything  at  all.  If  the  ball  then  falls  short, 
he  has  to  call  "  Short "  during  that  tiny  interval  after  he 
has  called  "  Play  "  and  before  the  ball  shall  have  reached 
the  player's  racket.  There  is  scarcely  a  Marker  in 
England  who  can  work  this  satisfactorily.  And  at 
present  there  seems  to  be  no  appeal  when  the  Marker 
calls  wrongly,  as  he  often  does.  The  obvious  remedy  is 
that  the  taker  of  the  Service  should  be  allowed  to  leave 
the  ball  alone,  if  he  thinks  that  it  is  Short,  and  then  to 
appeal  to  the  Gallery.  And  certainly  the  Marker  should 
not  be  allowed  to  call  "  Play  "  at  all.  The  only  apparent 
use  of  calling  "  Play  "  is  to  wake  up  slack  beginners.  It 
is  so  easy  for  the  Marker  merely  to  call  "  Out,"  "  Cut," 
"  Short,"  "  Fault,"  "  Double,"  "  Not  up."  Otherwise  let 
the  players  always  take  it  for  granted  that  the  Services 
and  strokes  are  all  right. 

The  third  kind  of  Fault,  besides  the  ball  that  goes  too 
low  or  too  short,  is  when  the  ball  goes  into  the  wrong 
Court.    This  is  called  a  "  Fault "  proper. 

Two  Faults  count  as  a  stroke  against  the  Server. 

So  does  a  Service  which  is  hit  out  of  Court,  or  up 
against  the  Side-wall  first,  or  below  the  lower  Play-line. 

This  much  for  Service.     Now  for  ordinary  strokes. 

A  player  misses  a  stroke,  and  loses  the  rally,  if  the  ball 
has  hit  the  ground  twice,  or  if  he  hits  the  ball  below  the 
Play-line,  or  if  he  hits  the  ball  out  of  Court,  or  if  he 
lets  it  hit  him  before  he  has  hit  it,  or  if  he  lets  it  hit  him 
after  he  has  hit  it  and  while  it  is  still  in  play. 

Should  one  player  get  in  the  way  of  the  other,  that 
other  player  has  the  right  to  claim  a  let,  i.  e.  to  claim  to 


CH.  xxi]   PLAY  AND  THE  RULES  OF  PLAY  145 

play  the  rally  over  again.  A  great  deal  is  left  to  the 
honour  of  both  players.  One  or  two  players  unfortun- 
ately persist  in  obscuring  the  sight  of  the  ball,  or  they 
stand  so  that  their  opponent  cannot  make  free  strokes 
and  yet  cannot  quite  claim  a  let,  or  they  stand  where 
their  opponent,  if  he  made  a  free  stroke,  would  run  the 
risk  of  injuring  them.  All  these  three  tricks  are  un- 
desirable if  they  are  intentional.  Fortunately  they  are 
extremely  rare,  as  is  the  trick  of  keeping  the  opponent 
waiting. 

With  regard  to  rests,  it  is  generally  agreed  that  there 
shall  be  practically  no  rests  during  the  games  or  between 
games,  except  for  the  purpose  of  fetching  a  new  racket, 
of  chalking  the  racket-handle,  of  binding  up  a  blister,  or 
taking  a  sip  of  drink,  and  so  on. 

And  certainly  it  is  etiquette  not  to  baulk  the  opponent. 
To  baulk  the  opponent  is  quite  distinct  from  head-play, 
and  is  a  sight  all  the  more  disgusting  because  it  is 
happily  so  unfamiliar. 

Scarcely  less  unpleasant,  though  in  a  different  way,  is 
the  look  of  the  player  who  does  not  put  up  his  racket  to 
protect  his  head,  as  he  should  do,  and  as  the  player  is 
doing  in  the  Illustration  in  Chapter  XXVI. 


LAWS   OF   RACQUETS 

The  following  Laws  of  Racquets  are  those  which  are  generally 
accepted  in  England  to-day  ;  I  am  very  much  obliged  for  kind 
permission  to  quote  them  here.  Where  the  work  of  framing  the 
Laws  has  been  so  excellently  done  it  would  be  ridiculous  to  attempt 
to  frame  a  new  set  of  Laws. 

12 


146  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

DEFINITIONS  AND   LAWS 

DEFINITIONS 

Ace. — A  stroke  won  and  scored. 

Board. — The  wooden  planks  which  cover  the  lower  part  of  the 
Front-wall  to  the  height  of  2  ft.  2  in.  from  the  floor. 

Box. — See  Service-box. 

Cotcrt. — The  whole  building  in  which  the  game  is  played  :  or 
one  half  of  the  floor,  between  the  Short-line  and  the  Back-wall,  as 
divided  by  the  Half-Court-line,  and  called  the  right  (or  Forehand) 
Court,  or  the  left  (or  Backhand)  Court. 

Cut. — A  ball  served  so  that  it  strikes  upon  or  below  the  Cut-line 
is  called  a  Cut. 

Cut-line  (sometimes  called  the  Service-line). — A  line  painted 
on  the  Front-wall,  formerly  about  the  height  of  8  ft.  from  the  floor, 
but  now  somewhat  higher. 

Double.— A  ball  struck  after  it  has  touched  the  floor  a  second 
time  is  called  a  Double. 

Fault. —  It  is  a  Fault  : 

{a)  if  the   Server,  in   serving,  fail  to  stand  as   provided  in 

Law  2  ;  or 
{b)  if  he  strike  the  ball  more  than  once  in  serving  ;  or 
{c)  if  the  ball  served  by  him  strike  upon  or  below  the  Cut- 
line  ;  or 
{d)  if  it  fail  to  drop  in  the  proper  Court  (see  Law  4). 

Good. — A  service  delivered,  or  a  return  made,  in  conformity  with 
the  Laws,  is  called  good. 

Half-Court-lhie. — The  line  on  the  floor,  drawn  from  the  Short- 
line  to  the  Back-wall,  and  dividing  that  portion  of  the  floor  into 
two  equal  spaces. 

Hand-jti. — The  player  who  has  the  right  of  serving  the  ball. 

Hand-out. — The  player  who  has  to  receive  the  Service. 

In-play. — The  ball,  after  being  served,  is  said  to  be  in-play  until 
it  has  touched  the  floor  twice,  or  a  player,  or  the  board,  or  has 
gone  out-of-court. 

Out-of-court. — A  ball  served,  or  in-play,  is  said  to  go  out-of-court 
when  it  touches  the  roof,  posts,  or  cushions,  or  is  driven  into  the 
Gallery. 

Rally.— The  repeated  return  of  the  ball  in-play  :  it  used  some- 
times to  be  called  a  bully. 

Rubber. — A  set  of  3,  5,  7,  or  any  other  uneven  number  of  games. 
The  winner  of  the  majority  of  the  games  wins  the  rubber. 

Note. — The  usual  number  is  five  for  a  Single,  and  seven  for  a 
Double  Match. 


CH.  XXI]    PLAV  AIVD  THE  RULES  OF  PLAY  147 

Serve-to. — To  start  the  ball  in-play  by  striking  it  with  the  racket. 

Service. — The  ball  served. 

Service-box. — The  square  (marked  out  on  each  side  of  the  floor) 
from  which  the  Service  must  be  delivered. 

Service-li7ie. — See  Cut-line. 

Short-line. — The  line  on  the  floor  at  the  distance  of  about  39  ft. 
from  the  Front-wall  and  parallel  to  it. 

Note. —  The  distance  is  different  ifi  so7ne  Courts. 

Volley. — A  ball  which  is  struck  before  it  has  touched  the  floor, 
is  said  to  be  struck  at,  or  on,  the  Volley  :  the  stroke  is  called  a 
Volley. 


LAWS 
THE   SINGLE   GAME 

1.  The  right  to  serve  first  shall  be  determined  by  the  spin  of 
a  racket.  The  player  who  wins  the  spin  shall  have  the  right  to 
serve  first. 

2.  The  Server,  in  serving,  must  stand  with  at  least  one  foot 
within  the  Service-box,  and  not  touching  any  of  the  lines  which 
bound  it. 

3.  The  Server  may  begin  serving  from  the  right  or  from  the  left 
Service-box,  as  he  pleases  ;  but,  after  serving  from  the  right,  he 
must  next  serve  from  the  left,  or  vice  vcrsd;  and  so  on,  alternately, 
as  long  as  he  remains  hand-in. 

4.  The  ball  served  must  strike  the  Front-wall  before  touching 
any  other  part  of  the  Court,  and  must  strike  it  above  the  Cut-line, 
and  must  drop  within  the  lines  ^  which  bound  the  Court  on  the  side 
opposite  to  the  box  from  which  the  ball  was  served,  and  must  not 
touch  either  of  such  lines. 

5.  Hand- out  may  declare  that  he  was  not  ready  for  the  Service  ; 
and,  if  the  Marker  decide  in  favour  of  his  claim,  the  Service  shall 
count  for  nothing,  and  the  Server  shall  serve  again  from  the  same 
box ;  but,  if  he  decide  otherwise,  the  Server  shall  score  an  Ace. 
If  hand-out  make  any  attempt  to  take  the  Service,  he  cannot  claim 
that  he  was  not  ready. 

6.  Hand-out  may  take  a  Fault  ;  but,  if  he  do  so,  the  rally  must 
be  played  as  if  the  Service  had  been  good. 

7.  Aces  are  scored  by  hand-in  only. 

8.  Hand-in  wins  and  scores  an  Ace, 

{a)  if  hand-out  fail  to  return  the  ball  served  or  in-play  to  the 
Front-wall,  above  the  Board,  before  the  ball  has  touched 
the  floor  twice,  except  in  case  of  a  Let  (see  Law  10) ;  or 

1  That  is,  the  Short-line  and  the  Half-Court-line. 


148  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

ip)  if  hand-out  return  the  ball  served  or  in-play  so  that  it  goes 

out-of-court  ;  or 
{c)  if  the   ball   in-play  touch  hand-out,  or  anything  that  he 

wears  or  carries,  except  his  racket  in  the  act  of  striking. 

9.  Hand-in  becomes  ha7id-oiit, 

(a)  if  he  serve  the  ball  so  that  it  touches  him  before  dropping 

in  the  proper  Court,  as  provided  in  Law  4  ;  or 
(i)  if  he  serve  tlie  ball  on  the  Board  or  out-of-court  ;  or 

(c)  if  the  ball  served  touch  any  part  of  the  Court  before  striking 

the  Front-wall ;  or 

(d)  if  he  serve  two  consecutive  Faults  ;  or 

(e)  if  he  fail  to  return  the  ball  in-play  to  the  Front-wall,  above 
the  Board,  except  in  case  of  a  Let  (see  Law  10)  ;  or 

if  he  return  the  ball  in-play  so  that  it  goes  out-of-court ;  or 
f)  if  the  ball  in-play  touch  him,  or  anything  that  he  wears  or 
carries,  except  his  racket  in  the  act  of  striking. 
Then,  in  any  of  these  cases,  hand-out  becomes  hand-in,  and 
serves  in  his  turn. 

10.  It  shall  be  a  Let,  and  the  Service  or  rally  shall  count  for 
nothing,  and  the  Server  shall  serve  again  from  the  same  box, 

(a)  if  the  ball  in-play  touch  the  striker's  opponent  on  or  above 
the  knee,  and  if  (in  the  Marker's  opinion)  it  be  thereby 
prevented  from  reaching  the  Front-wall,  above  the  Board ; 
or 

U))  if  either  player  (in  the  Marker's  opinion)  undesignedly 
prevent  his  opponent  from  returning  the  ball  served  or 
in-play. 

11.  The  ball  served  or  in-play  may  be  returned  by  the  strikei^s 
opponent  at  the  Volley,  or  after  it  has  touched  the  floor  once,  but 
not  after  it  has  touched  the  floor  a  second  time. 

12.  Each  player  must  get  out  of  his  opponenfs  way  as  much  as 
possible.  If  either  player  claim  that  his  opponent  prevented  him 
from  returning  the  ball  served  or  in-play,  the  Marker  shall  decide 
whether  it  shall  be  a  Let,  or  not  (subject  to  provisions  of  Law  14). 

13.  The  game  is  15-up  ;  that  is,  the  player  who  first  scores  15 
aces  wins  the  game,  provided  that, 

{a)  at  the  score  of  13-all,  hand-out  may  "set"  the  game  to  5, 

or  to  3  ;  and 
{b)  at  the  score  of  14-all,  hand-out  may  "set "  the  game  to  3  ; 
that  is,  in  the  first  case, 

(a)  the  player  who  first  scores  5  (or  3)  Aces,  according  as 

the  game  was  "  set,"  wins  the  game ;   and,  in  the 

second  case, 

(/3)  the  player  who  first  scores  3  Aces  wins  the  game. 

Note. — In  either  case,  the  claim  to  "set"  the  game  must  be 

made  by  hand-out  before  the  next  Service  shall  have  been  delivered. 

14.  In  all  cases  the  Marker's  decision  shall  be  final j  but,  if  he 


CH.  XXI]    PLAY  AND   THE  RULES  OF  PLAY  149 

doubt  which  way  to  decide,  he  shall  direct  that  the  Ace  be  played 
over  again.  In  Matches,  when  there  are  Umpires  and  a  Referee 
appointed,  the  Marker's  decision  shall  be  final  on  all  questions 
relating  to  the  Service  ;  but  (when  in  doubt)  he  shall  refer  all  other 
questions  to  the  Umpires  and  Referee  ;  and  either  player  may 
appeal  to  them  from  any  decision  of  the  Marker,  except  as  to  any 
Service  ;  and  they  shall  decide  each  case  by  a  majority  of  votes. 
All  appeals  must  be  made  before  another  Service  shall  have  been 
delivered. 

THE  DOUBLE,  OR  FOUR-HANDED  GAME 

1.  The  Laws  of  the  Single  Game  (as  above)  shall  apply  to  the 
Double,  or  Four-handed,  Game,  except  as  set  forth  in  the  following 
Laws. 

2.  Only  one  of  the  side  which  has  won  the  spin  shall  serve  at  the 
first  time  of  being  hand-in,  in  any  game  :  at  all  subsequent  times, 
the  players  on  each  side  shall  serve  in  the  same  order  in  which 
they  began  serving. 

3.  One  player  on  the  hand-out  side  may  stand  where  he  pleases, 
to  receive  the  Service  ;  but  his  partner  and  the  Server's  partner 
must  stand  behind  the  Server  until  the  Service  has  been  delivered. 

4.  If  the  ball  served  touch  the  Server's  partner  before  touching 
the  floor  twice,  whether  it  was,  or  would  have  been,  a  Fault  or  not, 
the  Server  shall  lose  his  right  of  Service,  and  the  next  hand-in 
shall  serve. 

5.  The  players  on  the  hand-out  side  may  choose  the  order  in 
which  they  shall  receive  the  Service,  and  they  shall  adhere  to  that 
order,  and  shall  only  change  it  once  in  any  game,  or  at  the  end  of 
any  game,  of  a  rubber. 

6.  If  the  ball  in-play  touch  the  striker's  partner,  it  shall  count 
against  them  ;  that  is,  if  the  striker  was  hand-out,  the  other  side 
shall  score  an  Ace  ;  if  he  was  hand-in,  his  side  shall  lose  one 
hand-in  : — 

Except  in  case  the  ball  in-play  touch  the  striker's  partner  after  it 
has  been  hit  at  and  missed  by  one  of  their  opponents,  when  it  shall 
count  against  such  opponents  ;  that  is,  if  they  were  hand-out,  the 
other  side  shall  score  an  Ace  ;  if  they  were  hand- in,  they  shall  lose 
one  hand-in. 


CHAPTER  XXII 
HANDICAPS 

I.  It  is  very  rarely  that  we  see  a  game  played  with 
other  Handicaps  than  those  of  points  or  "  Hands."  The 
game  is  for  1 5  points.  F,^  the  better  player,  may  give  S 
any  number  of  points  up  to  14,  or  he  may  "owe"  a 
certain  number  of  points,  as  at  Lawn  Tennis,  or  he  may 
allow  S  to  serve  twice  (to  have  two  "  Hands  "),  or  even 
to  have  three  "  Hands." 

There  is  real  need  of  other  Handicaps.  The  present 
system  is  hard  upon  the  Markers.  However  many  points 
they  give,  they  cannot  get  a  reasonable  game.  They 
cannot  get  a  game  which  does  not  lower  their  standard 
of  play,  unless  they  be  extraordinarily  clever.  Only  a 
few  of  them  are.  Pettitt  has  the  art  of  playing  with 
beginners  without  appreciably  lowering  his  level  of  skill ; 
but  then  he  is  a  genius. 

The  rest  of  us  need  systems  by  which  any  two  players 
can  meet,  not  merely  on  equal  terms,  but  so  that  each 
will  have  to  play  up  his  hardest  and  may  be  able  to 
improve  his  game,  especially  where  it  is  weak.  It  is 
therefore  worth  while  to  recommend  a  few  such  Handi- 
caps to  Markers  and  others.  Let  us  consider  F  to  be 
the  stronger  player,  and  S  the  weaker  player.     Let  us 

*  F  standing  for  First,  and  S  for  Second. 
150 


CH.  XXII]  HANDICAPS  151 

remember  that  the  Handicap  of  points  or  "  Hands  "  can 
be  added  to,  or  exchanged  for,  those  which  are  men- 
tioned below, 

2.  We  have  already  noticed  the  different  methods  of 
Scoring ;  namely,  the  Reverse-method,  the  Lawn  Tennis 
method,  and  the  method  with  two  Services  each.  F 
generally  wins  his  games  chiefly  by  Service.  Any  one 
of  these  three  methods  prevents  him  from  doing  this, 
although  the  Service  is  still  an  important  factor  in  the 
game. 

3.  Handicap  by  Implements.  F  may  play  with  a 
Cricket-bat.  By  this  means,  to  his  activity  and  agility 
he  adds  some  strength,  though  he  must  beware  of  strain- 
ing himself.  To  play  well  with  a  Cricket-bat  implies 
a  very  accurate  timing  of  the  ball.  The  body-swing 
must  come  just  at  the  right  moment. 

Instead  of  the  Cricket-bat,  there  may  be  a  piece  of 
wood  of  the  size  of  a  racket,  but  with  a  smallfer  head — such 
as  one  uses  at  Bat-Fives.  A  walking-stick  is  too  difficult 
to  play  with,  but,  as  at  Cricket,  something  of  this  kind 
does  increase  the  correctness  of  one's  style.  It  almost 
forces  one  to  meet  the  ball  in  its  own  line  for  as  long  as 
possible,  to  get  into  position  with  great  care,  and  to  risk 
little  or  nothing. 

F  may  be  obliged  to  catch  the  ball  with  one  hand,  and 
to  throw  it  from  the  place  where  he  stops.  He  should 
be  obliged  to  throw  it  with  his  left  hand.  This  is  good 
for  the  purpose  of  exercising  one's  judgment,  and  it 
employs  the  muscles  of  the  left  side  also. 

4.  F  may  have  his  Volley  forbidden  ;  he  loses  any 
stroke  which  he  volleys.  This  gives  his  opponent's 
Service  a  chance  to  be  more  effective,  especially  if  it  be 
a  Cut-Service.  It  gives  F  more  Back-wall  play,  and  gives 
S  more  practice  and  a  larger  number  of  ordinary  strokes. 


152  RA6QUETS  [pt.  hi 

5.  Or  his  Half-volley  may  be  forbidden,  by  itself,  or 
in  addition  to  his  Volley. 

6.  Or  his  Cut  or  Twist-Service  may  be  forbidden. 
In  this  case,  he  takes  more  pains  in  placing  his  Service. 
The  ball  is  then  fairly  started  in  a  rally ;  the  rally  does 
not  so  often  consist  merely  of  a  single  Service. 

7.  Or  any  stroke  of  his  which  falls  full  onto  any  wall 
may  count  against  him,  or  any  stroke  which  falls  full 
onto  any  Side-wall,  or  onto  either  one  Side-wall,  or  onto 
the  Back-wall. 

8.  Or  any  stroke  may  count  against  him  which 
hits  any  wall,  or  the  Side-wall,  or  the  Back-wall,  while 
still  in  play.  In  Tennis  this  is  an  excellent  Handi- 
cap. "  Touch-no-walls  "  forces  the  very  best  player  to 
move  about  rapidly,  and  to  get  complete  control  of  each 
stroke. 

9.  Or  F's  strokes  may  be  confined  to  half  the  Court ; 
if  they  pitch  in  the  wrong  half,  they  count  against  him. 
This  improves  his  power  of  placing  the  ball  either  down 
the  sides  or  across  the  Court.  In  Tennis  and  Lawn 
Tennis  it  gives  admirable  practice.  The  halves  of  the 
Court  may  be  taken  alternately,  either  in  alternate  games 
or  in  alternate  rallies. 

10.  Another  Handicap  is  that  F  should  not  be 
allowed  to  hit  any  ball  above  the  Service-line. 

I  think  it  will  be  found  that  none  of  these  Handicaps 
will  tend  to  weaken  the  play  of  F :  indeed,  if  they  be 
properly  chosen,  they  will  tend  to  strengthen  his  play. 
They  will  certainly  give  him  more  control  of  the  various 
strokes,  and  they  will  give  S  more  balls  to  return,  and 
therefore  more  practice,  and  they  will  help  to  ^icourage 
S  as  well  as  to  improve  him. 

11.  Last,  but  not  least,  F  should  sometimes  play  left- 
handed.   How  very  few  of  us  are  ambidextrous.  Probably 


CH.  xxii]  HANDICAPS  153 

it  would  not  be  desirable  that  our  left  hand  should  be  as 
skilful  at  all  things  as  our  right.  The  sides  of  the  body  are 
differently  formed,  and  are  differently  supplied  with  blood. 
But  some  sort  of  skill  with  the  left  side  is  pre-eminently 
important,  if  only  because  some  day  we  may  lose  the 
use  of  our  right  side.  But,  apart  from  this.  Racquets 
becomes  almost  a  new  game  when  it  is  played  left-handed. 
It  is  this  Handicap  particularly  that  can  be  recommended 
to  the  attention  of  Markers,  not  with  an  absolute 
beginner,  because  with  the  left  hand  they  would  have 
less  chance  of  hitting  balls  to  such  a  player ;  but  with 
him  who  has  advanced  to  a  certain  point  of  skill. 

He  who  receives  a  Handicap  should  risk  more  than 
he  who  gives  one.  The  former  player  should  never 
"set"  when   13-all  or  14-all  is  reached. 

12.  Handicaps  can  be  exchanged  ;  they  can  be  used 
voluntarily  and  tacitly  by  the  stronger  player  (who  may 
dock  off,  for  example,  his  best  Service)  ;  they  can  be 
made  to  rise  or  fall  (one  point  at  a  time)  according  to 
the  result  of  the  previous  game  or  day's  play.  This  is 
a  decidedly  satisfactory  arrangement,  and  should  be 
adopted  by  all  people  who  play  frequently  with  one 
another  and  who  are  not  nearly  level. 


CHAPTER   XXIII 

THE  GRIP  AND   THE  STROKES 

The  general  rules  already  given  for  ordinary  strokes 
— see  Part  II. — apply  here  :  namely  that  the  feet  shall 
already  be  in  the  right  direction,  facing  sideways,  before 
the  stroke  is  made ;  that  the  racket  shall  be  up  and 
back  ;  that  the  trunk,  shoulder,  upper  arm,  forearm,  and 
(we  may  now  add)  the  wrist  also  should  contribute  some- 
thing to  the  stroke.  Let  us  note  a  few  details  which 
apply  specially  to  the  strokes  at  Racquets,  as  distin- 
guished from  the  ordinary  strokes  at  other  ball-games 
and  from  the  strokes  at  Tennis. 

The  Grip  of  the  Racket. — There  are  some  players  who 
never  change  the  grip  of  their  racket  at  all,  whether 
they  be  serving,  or  taking  an  ordinary  Forehand  or 
Backhand  stroke,  or  a  Volley,  or  a  Half-volley.  Among 
these  players  Peter  Latham  and  Mr.  Percy  Ashworth 
may  be  cited  as  examples  of  beautiful  style.  Their  way 
of  holding  the  racket  for  all  occasions  is  illustrated  in 
Photograph  XIX,  which  explains  itself.  The  flat  of 
the  handle  crosses  the  middle  section  of  the  pointing 
finger,  the  knob  of  the  handle  is  in  the  palm,  and  the 
handle  itself  is  supported  by  the  thumb  along  it,  and  not 
athwart  it.     This  grip   is  extremely  uncomfortable   at 

154 


CH.  xxiii]      THE  GRIP  AND   THE  STROKES  155 

first,  and  may  create  a  sore  place  in  the  palm  of  the 
hand.  But  after  a  little  familiarity  it  will  probably  be 
preferred  to  any  other,  especially  if  one  decide  to  adopt 
the  Latham  stroke. 

Others,  however,  prefer  to  hold  the  handle  an  inch  or 
two  nearer  the  head  and  further  away  from  the  knob. 
And  they  hold  their  thumb  across  the  handle  (though 
they  may  move  it  along  the  handle  for  Backhand 
strokes).  And  not  a  few  of  them  change  their  grip  in 
this  way  also,  that  the  flat  of  the  handle  crosses  the 
middle  section  of  the  pointing  finger  for  Backhand 
stokes,  but  crosses  the  thicker  section  (the  section 
nearer  the  thumb)  for  Forehand  strokes. 

Each  player  must  decide  for  himself  after  fair  trial. 
Personally,  I  have  changed  lately  to  the  Latham  grip, 
which  I  have  now  come  to  like  best,  though  I  do  not 
use  it  during  Service. 

The  Forehand  Stroke. — At  Racquets  the  ball  is,  for 
ordinary  players,  nearer  to  the  feet  than  at  Tennis,  and 
it  is  somewhat  lower  than  at  Tennis.  In  Tennis  many 
strokes  are  taken  while  the  ball  is  high  in  the  air,  so  that 
one  may  get  "  on  the  top  of  the  ball  "  and  slice  it  down. 
And  certainly  in  the  Tennis  stroke  the  player  stands  at 
a  considerable  distance  from  the  ball.  "  Keep  away 
from  it,"  is  one  of  the  cries  of  the  Tennis  teacher. 

The  player  stands  with  his  right  side  up  and  away 
from  the  Front-wall.  His  trunk,  shoulder,  upper  arm, 
forearm,  wrist,  and  fingers  may  all  be  back.  His  weight 
is  also  on  the  back  foot.  His  left  shoulder,  however,  is 
forward. 

Now  he  sweeps  downwards,  forwards,  out  and  away 
to  the  right,  through,  and  upwards — a  lot  to  remember ! 
His  weight  passes  onto  the  forward  left  foot ;  indeed, 


156  RACQUETS  [pt.  in 

the  trunk  movement  itself  almost  effects  this.  The  left 
shoulder  follows  the  swing,  moving  round  and  away 
towards  the  left. 

The  greatest  pace  of  all  the  movements,  including 
those  of  the  wrist  and  fingers,  comes  just  at  the  instant 
before  the  racket  strikes  the  ball,  i.  e.  very  nearly  at  the 
bottom  of  the  swing.  In  Racquets  the  ball  is  generally 
taken  lower  down  than  at  the  other  two  games.  The 
ball  need  not  necessarily  be  falling — it  may  be  rising ; 
but  at  any  rate  it  is  usually  low  down  and  near  to  the 
player. 

This  stroke  may  end  up  in  a  position  very  like  the 
ordinary  waiting  position  (Photograph  VII). 

It  should  be  practised  until  the  player  gets  an  easy 
swing  of  all  the  parts  together,  the  movements  culmin- 
ating just  before  the  bottom  of  the  swing,  and  thence 
passing  onwards  and  upwards  without  loss  of  balance. 
No  amount  of  time  spent  in  mastering  this  can  be 
considered  wasted. 

So  far  we  have  a  stroke  which  we  practically  never 
use  in  actual  play.  Some  part  of  the  mechanism  almost 
always  fails  to  work.  And  it  is  well  to  acquire  the 
habit  of  mastering  any  given  part,  for,  needless  to  say, 
there  are  many  combinations.  Pettitt  sometimes  uses 
his  wrist  and  fingers  only.  I  myself  sometimes  use  my 
trunk  only.  It  is  possible  to  combine  the  movements  of 
any  two  parts,  or  of  any  three  parts.  As  to  the  other 
parts,  they  can  be  kept  stiff,  or  they  can  even  be  made 
to  move  in  the  opposite  direction.  Thus  one  can  vary 
the  pace  and  deceive  one's  opponent. 

The  Latham  stroke  is  utterly  different.  Starting  with 
the  head  of  the  racket  held  not  nearly  so  high,  and  with 
the  body  drawn  not  nearly  so  far  back  and  away  (the 
shoulder  is  drawn  back),  Latham  brings  the  head  of  the 


Fig.  22. — The  Forehaxd  Stroke.     Illustrated  by  Incomplete 
Apparatus.     No  Stop-Strings. 

(See  page  157.; 


GH.  xxiii]        THE  GRIP  AND   THE  STROKES  157 

racket  down  and  out  and  away  from  him  to  the  spot 
which  is  shown  in  the  Illustration,  with  a  snap  and  a 
flick,  as  if  he  were  whipping  a  peg-top.  The  stroke  is 
not  carried  right  through,  but  stops  short  soon  after  the 
head  of  the  racket  has  begun  to  move  upwards.  This 
sharp  upward  movement  gives  the  ball  that  spin  which 
will  bring  it  down  smartly  off  the  Front-wall.  I 
remember  wondering  how  Joe  Gray  managed  to  do 
this  with  the  ball.  It  was  only  in  January  1902  (some- 
what late  in  life !)  that  I  learnt  the  secret  from  Latham 
himself 

The  strokes  which  we  have  described  are  strokes  out- 
wards, away  from  the  body,  and  not  across  the  body. 
The  stroke  across  the  body,  the  stroke  across  the  Court, 
from  side  to  side,  is  easy  to  acquire  ;  it  is,  indeed,  what 
is  known  as  the  "  pull "  in  Cricket,  that  stroke  which 
beginners  are  so  apt  to  make.  If  the  ball  is  to  be  hit 
across  Court,  one  swings  not  downwards  and  for\vards, 
but  athwart  and  round,  and  then  through  and 
upwards. 

The  position  while  one  is  waiting  for  Service  (in  the 
Forehand  Court)  is  shown  in  Photograph  XXIII,  which 
explains  itself  The  player  can  be  somewhat  more  on 
his  toes,  more  alert  than  Moore  is,  Moore  having  had 
so  much  experience  that  he  needs  less  of  the  prompt 
readiness.  The  beginner  should  be  prepared,  perhaps  to 
move  forwards  and  to  the  right,  in  order  that  he  may 
volley  or  half-volley  the  stroke  ;  or  perhaps  to  move 
backwards  and  to  the  left,  so  that  he  may  take  the 
stroke  off  the  Back-wall.  If  the  Service  be  heavily  cut, 
he  probably  will  not  dare  to  leave  it  till  it  has  hit  the 
Back-wall,  unless  he  has  Latham's  capacity  for  flicking 
these  impossibilities  up. 

Part  of  the  play  off  the  Back-wall  can  be  made  safer 


158  .  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

if  the  grip  be  changed,  if  the  racket  be  as  it  were 
clubbed,  held  nearer  to  its  face  and  further  from  the 
end  of  its  handle.  I  have  noticed  with  interest  how 
experts  occasionally  hold  their  racket  there  for  some  of 
the  most  marvellous  "  gets  "  off  the  Back-wall. 

For  the  Cut-stroke,  see  under  the  heading  of  "  Ser- 
vice." The  Cut-stroke  is  especially  useful  across  the 
Court,  to  bring  the  ball  down  sharply  off  the  Back-  and 
Side-walls.  I  think  Latham  introduced  this  into 
Racquets.  But,  as  a  rule,  the  Cut-stroke  involves  more 
risk,  less  surface  of  the  racket  being  exposed  to  the  ball. 
Certainly  it  takes  off  pace,  as  it  does  at  Lawn  Tennis, 
and  thus  it  enables  the  opponent  to  reach  the  ball  more 
easily.  The  same  will  apply  to  the  Back-hand  Cut, 
which,  however,  is  used  more  commonly  and  more 
effectively  than  the  Forehand  Cut. 

Self-Protection  is  shown  in  Photograph  XXIV. 

The  Backhand  Stroke. — The  Backhand  strokes  are 
similar  to  the  P'orehand. 

Photograph  XXV  shows  Crosby  ready  to  take  a 
Backhander.  The  right  side  of  the  body  goes  across  to 
the  left  and  then  actually  back  and  away  from  the  Front- 
wall  ;  the  trunk  and  shoulder  and  upper  arm  go  away 
back  and  towards  the  left.  The  lower  arm  and  the 
wrist  and  the  fingers  may  be  bent  forwards  rather  than 
backwards.  This  makes  the  Backhand  stroke  some- 
what different  from  the  Forehand  stroke,  for  the  right 
arm  is  here  flexed  at  the  elbow.  But  in  both  cases  the 
weight  is  on  the  back  foot.  The  left  shoulder  is  pushed 
backwards  and  not  forwards. 

Now  one  takes  the  swing  downwards,  forwards,  and 
away  to  the  left,  through,  and  then  upwards — again  a 
lot  to   remember !      The  weight  passes  onto  the  front 


Fig.  33. — Moore  waiting  for  Forehand  Service. 

(See  page  157.) 


Fig,  24. — Self-Protection. 


(See  page  158.) 


CH.  xxiii]         THE   GRIP  AND   THE  STROKES  159 

(right)  foot.  Here,  also,  the  trunk  movement  does 
much  of  the  work,  and  the  left  shoulder  follows  the 
swing. 

Here,  as  with  the  Forehand  stroke,  the  greatest  pace 
of  all  is  just  before  the  racket  strikes  the  ball,  very  near 
the  bottom  of  the  swing.  It  is  at  this  moment  that  the 
wrist  and  fingers  lend  their  little  or  great  contribution  to 
the  pace. 

The  above  description  may  be  somewhat  confusing, 
and  it  can  be  simplified  as  follows.  For  the  full  stroke, 
one  may  have  all  the  parts  of  the  striking  apparatus 
arranged  so  that  they  will  be  moving  in  the  opposite 
direction  to  the  ball  at  the  moment  when  they 
meet  it. 

This  stroke  may  end  up  very  nearly  in  the  waiting 
position. 

It  must  be  practised  till  a  full  easy  swing  of  all  the 
parts  shall  culminate  just  before  the  racket  strikes  the 
ball,  without  loss  of  balance. 

Having  acquired  the  full  swing  (which,  again,  one 
seldom  uses  in  actual  play),  one  may  practise  the 
arresting  of  various  parts  in  turn,  whether  it  be  of  the 
wrist-movement,  or  of  the  trunk-movement,  or  of  one 
part  of  the  arm-movement. 

The  stroke  across  the  Court  may  next  be  tried.  It  is 
quite  easy.  One  swings  downwards,  forwards,  across 
and  round,  through,  and  the'n  upwards. 

Latham's  Backhander  is  of  the  same  nature  as  his 
Forehander,  except  that  in  the  former  the  ball  is  taken 
when  it  is  somewhat  more  in  front  of  the  body.  But  in 
both  strokes  there  is  the  movement  of  whipping  the  top, 
the  flick  which  imparts  to  the  ball  the  spin  that  shall 
bring  it  down  nicely  from  the  Front-wall. 

While  one  is  waiting  for  the  Service,  one  may  adopt 


i6o  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

the  attitude  in  Photograph  XXVII,  which  again  explains 
itself.  Here,  also,  the  beginner  may  stand  more  on  his 
toes,  more  alert,  for  the  same  reason  as  in  the  case  of  the 
Forehand  waiting  position. 

For  Back-wall  play,  once  more,  the  racket  may  be  held 
shorter,  especially  if  the  ball  has  been  at  all  heavily  cut. 
It  is  obvious  that  it  is  easier  for  most  of  us  to  make 
a  slight  flick  movement  with  only  a  small  sweep  by 
means  of  a  short  racket  than  by  means  of  a  long  racket. 

The  Half-volley. — The  Half-volley  is  a  risky  stroke  for 
beginners ;  but  it  may  save  the  exertion  of  running ;  it 
may  save  time ;  it  may  take  the  opponent  by  surprise. 
Besides  this,  it  is  generally  a  pleasant  stroke  to  make, 
and  a  pretty  stroke  to  watch.  It  may  also  be  considered 
as  a  "  sporting  "  stroke,  if  only  because  it  risks  something. 
Last,  but  not  least,  it  is  good  practice  in  that  it  needs  a 
very  accurate  judgment  of  pace  and  place.  Photograph 
XXIII  shows  Bob  Moore  giving  one  of  his  famous  drop 
Half-volleys,  which  hit  the  Front-wall  just  above  the 
play-line,  and  then  come  down  almost  dead.  He  moves 
into  position  with  many  short  little  steps.  For  the  Half- 
volley  one  must  hit  the  ball  as  it  is  just  rising  from  the 
floor.  Here,  also,  one  may  swing  through  the  stroke, 
though  not  so  fully  as  before.  Nor  need  one  hit  so  hard, 
since  the  ball  has  more  pace.  It  is  not  just  falling  to 
the  ground  for  the  second  time  and  therefore  almost 
dead  ;  it  is,  as  it  were,  in  its  prime  of  vigour.  The  stroke 
nearly  "  makes  itself"  It  is  important  for  the  beginner  to 
remember  this,  because  he  is  apt  to  slash  at  Half-volleys, 
and,  among  other  disasters,  to  break  the  strings  of  his 
racket. 

The  Volley. — The  same  remarks  will  apply  more  or 


Fig.  2o. — Backhand  Stroke  by  Crosby. 

(See  page  158.) 


Fig.  26. — During  Backhaxd  Stroke  with  Ixcomplete 
Apparatus.     Xo  Stop-Strings. 

(See  page  159.) 


CH.  xxiii]        THE  GRIP  AND  THE  STROKES  i6i 

less  to  the  Volley.  It  is  seldom  like  the  high  smash- 
Volley  at  Lawn  Tennis,  for  that  stroke  is  made  while  the 
ball  is  dropping,  and  sometimes  almost  dead  so  far  as 
forward  movement  is  concerned.  Nor  is  it  like  that 
Tennis  Volley  which  needs  some  cut.  The  ball  often 
wants  only  to  be  met  gently.  The  stroke  may  be 
followed  through,  though  a  snap-stroke  is  at  times 
excellent;  and  a  high  Volley  can  be  effectively  done 
with  the  wrist,  as  while  one  is  taking  a  Service.  But 
for  ordinary  Volleys  one  must  remember  that  the  ball 
has  more  pace  than  it  has  for  ordinary  strokes.  One 
must  leave  it  to  do  its  own  movement.  One  must  let 
the  racket  come  along  the  line  of  the  approaching  ball 
as  far  as  possible.  One  must  let  it  meet  the  ball  in 
its  own  direction. 

Drop-strokes. — The  Drop-stroke  is  one  of  the  most 
beautiful,  and  of  all  Drop-strokes  the  Volley  or  Half- 
volley  Drop  is  the  best :  into  these  you  do  not  put  the 
whole  of  your  force,  but,  while  apparently  about  to  use 
the  whole  of  your  force,  you  keep  back  some  part  of  it. 
We  have  seen  that  the  greatest  force  is  given  by  the 
combination  of  the  leg-  and  hip-movement,  the  shoulder- 
movement,  the  arm-movement,  the  forearm-movement, 
and  the  wrist-movement,  all  working  together  at  the 
same  instant.  Now,  if  one  practises  sedulously,  one  can 
get  into  the  way  of  keeping  one  or  two  or  three  or  even 
four  of  these  forces  in  abeyance  without  the  opponent 
detecting  the  difference  :  this  will  enable  one  to  "  drop  " 
the  ball,  that  is,  to  hit  it  so  that  it  only  just  reaches 
the  Front-wall. 

Obviously,  if  one  lets  him  see  that  one  is  going  to  hit 
slowly,  he  will  have  time  to  get  nearer  the  Front-wall 
and  will  probably  "  kill  "  the  ball.  The  best  way,  then, 
13 


i62  RACQUETS  [PT.  ill 

to  mask  your  Drop-stroke  will  be  to  practise  outside  the 
Court,  or  in  the  Court,  between  games :  for  instance, 
stand  in  the  Forehand  position,  and  then  strike  a  real  or 
imaginary  ball  not  with  all  the  force  but  only  with  the 
stiff-arm  :  in  fact,  practise  using  any  two  or  three  of  the 
movements  together,  apart  from  the  rest. 

Boasted  Strokes. — We  have  said  that  the  typical 
Racquet  stroke  is  a  hard  drive  down  one  side  or  down 
the  other,  a  drive  which  shall  cling  as  nearly  as  possible 
to  the  Side-wall ;  occasionally  we  get  a  cross-Court 
stroke,  and,  comparatively  rarely  to-day,  a  Drop-stroke, 
which  is  truly  one  of  the  prettiest.  A  variety  is  the 
stroke  which  hits  the  Side-wall  before  it  hits  the  Front- 
wall  :  this  is  called  a  Boasted  stroke. 

The  reason  why  you  make  it  may  be  either  that  you 
cannot  get  up  a  ball  at  all  in  the  ordinary  way,  or  that 
you  cannot  get  it  up  easily  thus ;  or  that  you  can  kill 
the  ball  better  by  such  means.  Perhaps  you  hit  the  ball 
so  that  it  strikes  one  Side-wall  and  then  just  fails  to 
reach  the  other  Side-wall.  In  that  case  the  Side-wall 
serves  the  same  purpose  as  a  Drop-stroke.  Or,  as  a 
third  reason,  you  may  wish  to  place  the  ball :  the  Side- 
wall  absolutely  alters  its  direction.  There  are  not  a  few 
players  who  use  this  stroke  with  great  effect.  Imagine 
yourself  to  be  standing  at  the  right-hand  side  of  the 
Court.  Your  opponent  (in  the  middle  of  the  Court)  has 
the  ball  well  under  control  on  his  Forehand  side.  He 
may  hit  the  ball  down  the  Side-wall  where  you  are,  or 
he  may  hit  it  onto  the  right-hand  corner  of  the  Front- 
wall.  In  either  case  it  may  reach  you.  But,  if  he  hits  it 
against  the  right  Side-wall  first,  it  will  come  out  into  the 
middle  of  the  Court,  and  you  will  have  to  alter  your 
position.     Thus  by  varying  the  direction  of  his  stroke 


Fig.  27. — Moore  w.mting  for  Service  ix  Backhand  Court. 

(See  pase  100.) 


Pie   28.— Half -Volley  Drop-Stroke  by  Moore. 

(See  page  160.) 


CH.  XXIII]      THE  GRIP  AND   THE  STROKES  163 

only  a  few  feet  he  varies  the  destination  of  his  stroke 
by  almost  the  whole  breadth  of  the  Court. 

The  angles  which  a  Boasted  ball  makes  with  the  Side- 
wall  and  Back-wall  are  well  worth  studying.  I  have 
seen  players  who  were  puzzled  by  these  angles  time  after 
time,  although  the  angles  are,  with  a  few  exceptions, 
quite  easy  to  understand.  Mr.  Julian  Marshall  gives  in- 
teresting diagrams  of  these  angles  for  Tennis.  The  spin 
imparted  by  the  Side-wall  must  be  taken  into  account, 
and  one  must  get  oneself  into  position  with  this  different 
condition  in  mind.  As  usual,  one  can  best  learn  these 
angles  not  by  trying  to  take  balls,  but  by  watching  them 
first,  when  they  have  been  hit.  This  is  a  golden  rule  of 
practice  inside  the  Court.  First  watch  where  the  ball 
falls  at  its  second  bounce,  then  get  into  position  for  a 
similar  ball,  then,  when  you  can  do  this  easily,  try  to 
make  a  stroke. 

Do  not  use  the  Boasted  stroke  too  frequently.  Apart 
from  its  ugliness — though  it  is  not  always  ugly — the 
Side-wall  takes  some  pace  off  the  ball,  and,  in  Racquets, 
pace  is  of  the  greatest  moment.  Besides,  it  is  a  pity  to 
rely  on  this  stroke,  or  indeed  to  use  it  much  until  the 
plain,  straightforward  drives  have  been  mastered.  He 
who  relies  on  the  Boasted  stroke  will  seldom  acquire  the 
straightforward  stroke  at  all ;  and  it  is  the  latter  stroke 
which  pays. 

Back-wall  play. — In  modern  times  there  is  a  marked 
tendency  to  volley,  not  only  because  the  game  is  so  fast 
that  one  has  not  the  activity  nor  the  time  to  get  into 
position  for  a  simple  stroke  off  the  floor,  but  also  because 
the  Service  is  usually  so  heavily  cut  that  it  drops  down 
almost  dead  off  the  Back-wall.  So  the  player  who  has 
not  the  wrist  of  a  Latham  or  Pettitt  will  fTnd  that  he  has 
either  to  take  the  Service  on  the  Volley,  or  else  to  look 


i64  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

on  while  it  constantly  falls  down  like  a  bullet  from  the 
Back-wall. 

Useful  as  the  Volley  is,  however,  and  essential  as  it  is 
to  all-round  play,  still  one  must  first  learn  to  do  without 
it,  and,  for  this  purpose,  one  should  impose  upon  oneself 
the  form  of  Handicap  in  which  no  Volleys  are  allowed. 
This  Handicap  is  useful  at  Lawn  Tennis  also. 

The  general  instructions  for  the  stroke  off  the  Back- 
wall  have  already  been  given.  The  main  principle  is  to 
face  towards  the  Back-wall  while  you  are  waiting  for  the 
stroke,  to  be  alert  on  your  toes,  and  to  learn  to  get  into 
position  instinctively. 

I  may  be  forgiven  for  repeating,  since  its  importance 
cannot  be  over-estimated,  that  it  is  a  mistake  for  a 
beginner  to  try  to  hit  the  ball  at  once.  As  we  have 
already  seen,  he  should  first  throw  the  ball  onto  the 
Back-wall,  and  watch  where  it  falls  at  its  second  bounce; 
then  do  this  again,  and  get  into  position ;  then  do  this 
and  make  a  few  strokes  with  no  ball  at  all ;  then  throw 
the  ball  up  once  more,  get  into  position,  and  make 
a  stroke ;  and  then  correct  it  according  as  he  fails 
or  errs. 

The  varieties  of  the  Back-wall  stroke  are  that  the  ball 
may  hit  the  Back-wall  first,  and  then  the  floor,  or  the 
floor  first,  and  then  the  Back-wall  and  the  Side-wall,  and 
so  on. 

By  far  the  best  stroke  off  the  Back-wall  is  the  stroke 
low  down  into  one  corner  or  the  other.  It  is  off  the 
Back-wall  that  the  Drop-stroke  is  most  in  place. 

Suppose  the  ball  is  hard  to  get  up — "  to  pick  up  "  as 
they  say — off  the  Back-wall — suppose  it  is  a  good- 
length  stroke,  or  has  a  severe  cut  upon  it,  then  shorten 
the  grip  of  your  racket,  and,  if  your  wrist  feels  stiff, 
practise  the  wrist-exercise  recommended  above,  first 
with  the  full  movement,  then  with  the  arrested  movement. 


CHAPTER  XXIV 

SERVICE 

Although  a  good  Service  may  win  many  games  and 
Matches,  most  beginners  make  a  great  mistake  in  start- 
ing with  the  Cut-Service.  The  right  order  of  learning 
seems  to  be  as  follows.  First  of  all,  the  plain  stroke, 
with  the  full  swing,  in  the  right  direction  ;  then  the  plain 
stroke,  with  the  full  swing,  in  the  right  direction,  and  at 
the  right  height  Pace  and  length  should  be  acquired 
next ;  and,  last  of  all,  cut.  The  player  should  be  able 
to  hit  any  spot  on  the  Front-wall,  either  by  altering  the 
position  of  his  body,  and  especially  of  his  feet,  or  by 
moving  some  other  part  of  his  body,  say  his  arm,  or  by 
throwing  the  ball  to  a  different  place.  It  is  essential  to 
be  able  to  place  the  Service,  since  so  many  modern 
players  come  up  to  volley.  It  does  not  pay  to  rely 
entirely  upon  the  cut. 

I.  Swing  and  direction. 

Get  into  position  for  the  Forehand  stroke,  as  in  Photo- 
graph XXIX.  This  is  very  like  the  position  for  an 
ordinary  Forehand  stroke.  Now  aim  at  an  imaginary 
line  up  and  down  the  Front-wall,  not  across  it — a  line 
near  to  the  middle  of  the  Court,  but  rather  closer  to  you. 
You  must  throw  the  ball  well  out  and  away,  follow 
through  with  a  full  swing,  and  end  up  alert  and  without 

165 


i66  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

losing  your  balance.  Then  you  should  step  back  as  if 
your  opponent  were  going  to  return  the  Service.  This 
is  an  extremely  hard  task,  but  one  cannot  begin  to  learn 
it  too  soon. 

Look  to  the  place  to  which  you  are  going  to  hit  the 
ball.  Get  that  place  firmly  fixed  in  your  imagination, 
then,  keeping  your  eye  on  the  ball  (as  in  the  Lawn  Tennis 
Service),  and  keeping  your  head  as  still  as  possible  (as 
in  a  Golf-drive),  try  to  hit  the  ball  onto  the  right  place. 

If  the  ball  hits  the  Front-wall  too  much  to  the  right, 
then  turn  your  body  (your  left  leg)  more  round  to  the 
left,  or  swing  more  across  to  the  left ;  but,  if  it  hits  the 
wall  too  much  to  the  left,  then  turn  your  body  (your 
left  leg)  more  round  to  the  right  in  front  of  you,  or  swing 
further  out  and  away  to  the  right.  Or  you  may  alter 
the  place  at  which  you  drop  the  ball  with  your  left  hand. 

Do  not  step  back  too  soon  after  the  swing ;  do  not 
cut  short  the  "  follow  through."  This  is  less  important 
at  Racquets  than  at  Golf  The  golfer  need  not  be 
prepared  for  any  ball  to  be  returned  by  his  opponent. 
The  Racquet  player  usually  makes  this  mistake  when  he 
begins  Golf,  that  he  fails  to  follow  his  swing  through : 
he  is  so  anxious  to  see  where  the  ball  has  gone.  And  of 
course  the  same  applies  to  Tennis,  Lawn  Tennis,  and 
Cricket,  as  to  Racquets. 

When  you  can  hit  the  ball  every  time  onto  this 
imaginary  line,  then  aim  at  other  imaginary  lines  by 
altering  your  shoulder  and  arm,  or  by  altering  the  place 
at  which  you  drop  the  ball  with  your  left  hand  ;  and 
later  on,  by  altering  your  wrist-movement,  acquire  the 
power  of  hitting  any  line  on  the  Front-wall  at  will,  either 
by  altering  the  position  of  your  feet,  or  by  altering  the 
position  and  movements  of  one  or  more  of  the  other 
parts  of  your  body. 


CH.  xxiv]  SERVICE  167 

Now  for  the  practice  of  height.  During  this  practice 
we  may  for  the  present  neglect  the  direction. 

2.  Height. 

A  similar  method  maybe  adopted  here.  Look  at  the 
required  height,  which  may  be  just  above  the  Service- 
line  ;  get  it  into  your  imagination  ;  then  keep  your  eye 
on  the  ball ;  do  not  move  your  head  more  than  you  are 
obliged  ;  and  swing  through,  end  up  alert,  and  step  back 
as  if  the  ball  would  be  returned  by  an  opponent.  But, 
once  again,  do  not  step  back  till  the  full  swing  be  ended. 

Correct  your  mistakes  as  follows.  If  you  are  hitting 
too  high,  then  next  time  take  the  ball  sooner — before 
the  head  of  the  racket  has  begun  to  rise.  If  you  are 
hitting  too  low,  then  take  the  ball  later — after  the 
head  of  the  racket  has  begun  to  rise. 

It  is  as  well  to  practise  a  very  high  Service  of  good 
length.  Such  a  Service,  though  seldom  seen  except  as 
second  Service,  may  be  most  effective,  since  the  striker 
has  to  put  on  all  the  pace. 

When  you  can  quite  easily  get  the  height  which  you 
need,  then  combine  the  height  which  you  need  with  the 
direction  which  you  need. 

3.  Pace  and  length. 

Now,  without  neglecting  the  direction  and  height, 
vary  the  pace  and  length  of  your  Service  in  one  or  more 
of  many  ways. 

We  have  observed  that  the  whole  striking  apparatus 
consists  of  the  trunk  with  the  body-weight,  the  shoulder 
with  a  movement  of  its  own,  the  upper  arm,  the  forearm, 
the  wrist,  and  the  fingers.  If  you  keep  one  or  two  or 
more  of  these  parts  still,  or  if  you  move  them  in  the 
opposite  direction,  you  will  vary  the  pace  and  length  of 
your  Services.  The  best  way  to  acquire  control  of  all 
these  parts  independently  is  to  practise  the  Fast  Full 


i68  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

Movement  Exercises,  and  the  Fast  Arrested  Movement 
Exercises. 

4.  Cut,  etc. 

The  right  place  on  the  Front-wall  for  a  plain  Service 
is  not  the  right  place  for  a  Cut-Service,  for  a  Cut  alters 
the  direction  which  the  ball  will  take  after  it  has  struck 
the  Front-wall. 

There  are  two  ways  of  cutting  the  ball.  With  the 
first,  the  racket  moves  all  the  time  in  a  slanting  direction, 
at  an  angle  ;  with  the  second,  the  racket  only  slants  and 
turns  at  an  angle  just  at  the  moment  before  it  strikes  the 
ball.  It  is  needless  to  say  that  the  latter  Cut  is  more 
severe  than  the  former. 

In  cutting  the  ball  in  either  of  these  ways,  one  should 
not  let  it  come  too  near  to  one's  body.  The  Cut  needs 
considerable  distance. 

The  easiest  Cut  is  like  an  ordinary  Racquet  stroke,  the 
head  of  the  racket  being  down.  Raise  the  racket  a  little 
way,  to  between  this  and  the  shoulder  level,  and  you 
get  a  second  Service.  A  third  has  the  racket  level  with 
the  shoulder.  A  fourth  has  the  racket  above  this  level. 
The  fifth  has  the  racket  very  low  again  ;  the  knees  may 
be  bent,  and  the  back  of  the  hand  facing  the  Front-wall. 
Such  a  Service  is  awkward  at  first,  but  it  has  far  the 
severest  cut  or  twist.  Such  a  cut  or  twist  from  the  right- 
hand  Court  is  very  valuable  in  play.  It  tends  to  send 
the  ball  sharply  onto  the  left  Side-wall.  The  Service  can 
be  altered  by  a  slight  alteration  of  the  grip. 

An  underhand  Twist-Service,  either  low  or  high,  is 
generally  objected  to  (by  the  player  who  has  to  take  it). 
It  does,  indeed,  tend  to  get  the  Server  out  of  the  habit  of 
the  hard  low  drive.  It  is  not  easy  for  him  to  return 
immediately  to  a  stroke  in  good  style.  But  why  it 
should  be  considered  bad  form  to  serve  such  a  Service, 


CH.  xxiv]  SERVICE  169 

or  to  send  a  Drop-stroke,  or  to  send  a  hard-drive-Service 
without  cut,  I  cannot  say.  It  certainly  gives  variety  to 
a  game  which  is  apt  to  be  singularly  monotonous  ;  and 
it  certainly  pays.  There  was  a  similar  objection  to  the 
Reverse-Twist-Service  by  Ward  and  Davis  and  other 
Americans.  The  chief  objection  really  is  that  the  ordin- 
ary stereotyped  player  is  not  used  to  the  Service,  and 
does  not  know  how  to  deal  with  it.  For  every  Service 
there  is  a  right  method  of  defence  which  may  soon 
become  a  method  of  attack.  In  Tennis  the  overhand 
Railroad  Service  at  times  seems  untakable.  It  remained 
for  Latham  to  show  how  easily  it  could  be  disposed  of. 
The  same  changes  of  attack  and  defence  have  been  going 
on  for  a  long  time  in  the  sphere  of  naval  warfare. 

The  Backhand  Service  must  be  learnt  by  a  similar 
process.  The  position  for  an  ordinary  Backhand  Service 
is  shown  in  Photograph  XXX.  An  advantage  of  this 
Service  is  that  it  hides  the  ball  from  the  opponent :  one 
may  stand  between  him  and  it.  One  may  also  get  a 
heavy  Cut  across  the  Court.  Needless  to  say,  one  can- 
not strike  the  ball  so  well  down  the  side-line  ;  but  this 
is  decidedly  made  up  for  by  the  fact  that,  for  most 
players,  the  Backhand  stroke  should  be  easier  and  freer 
than  the  Forehand.  For  both  Forehand  and  Backhand 
strokes  the  order  of  learning  is : — first  control,  then 
severity,  then  variety.  Do  not  aim  at  pace  or  cut  until 
you  can  hit  the  ball  just  where  you  want  it  to  go. 

A  great  deal  may  be  done  by  judicious  placing  of  the 
Service.  If  your  opponent  comes  forward  to  volley,  you 
can  send  your  ball  so  that  it  hits  the  Side-wall  very 
short,  or  else  you  can  send  it  almost  down  the  middle  of 
the  Court.  You  can  place  the  Service  less  obviously  by 
throwing  the  ball  further  to  the  right  or  further  to  the 
left. 


CHAPTER  XXV 

PRACTICE  OUTSIDE  THE  COURT 

We  have  already  considered  the  subject  of  training 
in  general.  We  may  now  proceed  to  give  some  special 
hints  for  regular  practice  outside  the  Court, 

If  there  are  any  general  laws  of  practice  in  exercise, 
they  seem  to  include  the  following.  (For  others  we 
must  refer  to  the  Chapter  in  Part  VI.) 

First,  there  should  be  correctness.  This  may  necessi- 
tate the  dividing  up  of  a  complex  whole  into  simple 
parts,  and  the  acquiring  of  these  simple  parts  one  by 
one.  Then  there  should  be  pace  and  promptitude,  and 
endurance  by  means  of  repetition.  All  the  time  there 
should  be  concentration  of  the  attention.  Next  there 
should  be  various  combinations  and  rapid  changes. 
The  increase  in  pace,  endurance,  promptitude,  and 
complexity  may  be  gradual.  Conditions  such  as  fresh 
air  and  free  clothing  and  moderation  should  be  carefully 
attended  to. 

For  Racquets  one  needs  much  freedom  of  movement ; 
for  Tennis  stiffness  is  somewhat  less  fatal.  In  order  to  get 
the  freedom  of  movement  for  the  various  parts  of  the 
striking  apparatus,  one  may  choose  between  two  orders  : 
one  may  start  with  the  large  muscles,  and  work  from 
them  to  the  small,  or  vice  versd. 

170 


w 

o 

> 

(d 

H 

rji 

a 

;?; 

,^ — , 

■< 

S3 

s 

25 

-fl^ 

MS* 

CO 

<1 

M 

a 

g 

P< 

,— ' 

© 

i) 

^ 

Vi 

M 

>-i 

^ 

73 

D 

-^ 

'^ 

i; 

to 

3 

S 

^ 


o 

I 


p^ 


p^ 


^ 


CH.  xxv]      PRACTICE  OUTSIDE   THE  COURT  171 

If  one  start  with  the  large  muscles,  one  gets  the 
movements  of  the  legs  and  trunk  (the  swing  has  been 
described  already) ;  then  the  free  movements  of  the 
whole  arm  and  shoulder ;  then  the  free  movement  of  the 
forearm  ;  then  the  free  movement  of  the  wrist ;  then  the 
free  movement  of  the  fingers. 

The  reverse  process  may  be  preferred.  Let  the  right 
arm  hang  down  limp.  Now  let  the  fingers  be  shaken 
about  as  if  they  were  weights  tied  to  pieces  of  string. 
For  this,  the  whole  arm  above  the  fingers  must  be  limp. 
Now,  while  you  still  move  the  fingers  limply  (by  no 
means  an  easy  task),  move  the  wrist  limply  also.  Next 
add  to  these  two  movements  the  free  movement  of  the 
forearm  ;  to  this  the  free  movement  of  the  upper  arm, 
so  that  the  whole  apparatus  swings  easily,  each  part 
being,  as  it  were,  suspended  from  the  part  above. 
Hang  the  fingers  from  the  wrist,  the  wrist  from  the 
forearm,  the  forearm  from  the  upper  arm. 

The  free  movements  must  precede  the  movements 
with  any  apparatus.  The  first  apparatus  may  be  the 
racket-handle,  I  am  quite  sure  that,  for  most  of  us,  it 
is  useless  to  start  with  the  average  "  Physical  Culture " 
Exerciser;  for  this  is  apt  to  cramp  the  fingers,  and 
therefore,  by  a  kind  of  contagion,  to  cramp  the  wrist 
and  the  arm  above  the  wrist. 

The  movements  with  the  racket-handle  have  been 
already  described. 

Next,  if  you  have  a  large  room  or  large  open  space, 
may  come  movements  with  the  actual  racket.  Do  not 
grip  it  too  tightly ;  rather  let  it  hang  loose  in  your  hand 
for  the  ordinary  stroke.  There  are  exceptions,  as  when 
you  take  a  heavily-cut  ball  off  the  Back-wall.  As  a 
rule,  however,  the  racket-handle  should  move  freely 
within  the  hand,  so  that  the  fingers  may  do  their  work. 


T72  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

A  good  exercise  is  given  in  Photographs  XXXI  and 
XXXII.  It  is  invaluable  for  the  Latham  strokes,  and 
should  be  done  briskly  in  both  directions. 

Then  you  may  practise  with  the  Apparatus  (see 
Chapter  XIII).  The  ball  is  placed,  let  us  say,  12  inches 
from  the  floor.  Practise  first  the  Forehand  drive,  then 
the  Backhand  drive,  then  the  Service,  and  so  on.  Keep 
your  eye  and  your  head  steady.  If  you  find  any 
difficulty  in  doing  this,  practise  the  neck-exercises, 
turning  your  head  first  to  one  side  and  then  to  the  other. 

Outside  the  Court  you  must  practise  corrective  exer- 
cises. When  you  have  found  where  your  faults  lie,  do 
whatever  you  can  to  improve  the  parts  that  are  weak. 
Thus,  for  example,  if  your  wrist  be  stiff,  you  must  prac- 
tise the  right  exercises  for  limbering  it.  Shake  your 
wrist  and  hand  about,  as  if  they  were  a  dead  leaden 
weight  fixed  loosely  to  your  arm. 

Imaginary  exercises  can  be  practised  outside  the 
Court.  Picture  yourself,  feel  yourself,  doing  the  correct 
positions  and  movements.  There  is  no  doubt  that  this 
employs  the  muscles  to  a  certain  extent.  Merely  to 
watch  a  correct  player  has  its  effect,  because  we  almost 
instinctively  imitate  whatever  we  see. 

Practice  in  the  Squash-Court  has  been  already  spoken 
of  for  Racquets ;  but  for  Racquets  it  is  best  to  play 
with  a  hard  ball,  or  at  any  rate  with  a  little  ball.  And, 
to  make  the  practice  still  more  effective,  it  may  be  well 
to  play  with  something  smaller  than  an  actual  racket : 
for  instance,  with  a  racket-handle  having  a  thin  strip  of 
wood  at  the  end  of  it,  or  with  the  bat  of  Bat-Fives. 
This  obstacle-practice  encourages  correctness  ;  since  the 
slightest  error  shows  itself  at  once. 


CHAPTER  XXVI 

PRACTICE  INSIDE  THE  COURT 

One  or  two  general  rules  will  be  found  useful,  and  the 
first  is  that  steady  safety  must  come  before  killing 
severity.  Learn  to  get  up  the  ball  (of  course  in  as 
good  a  style  as  you  can)  before  you  attempt  to  kill  it. 
Imagine  a  line  a  few  inches  above  the  play-line.  There 
are  many  experts  at  Lawn  Tennis  who  not  only  (as  we 
have  said)  imagine  the  net  to  be  several  inches  higher 
than  it  is,  but  also  imagine  the  Courts  to  be  several 
inches  narrower  and  shorter  than  they  are.  By  this 
means  they  find  that  they  risk  less.  Their  strokes  may 
not  be  quite  so  brilliant,  but  they  are  more  reliable. 

Repeat  similar  strokes  again  and  again.  This  is  far 
better  at  the  first  than  to  try  a  large  number  of  different 
strokes  ;  for  with  this  latter  plan  you  will  not  learn  any 
one  of  the  different  strokes  thoroughly.  In  order  that 
you  may  repeat  similar  strokes,  you  must  get  a  bag  of 
old  balls.  They  are  quite  good  enough  to  practise  with. 
Each  Court  should  make  a  regular  but  moderate  charge 
for  such  practice  with  old  balls. 

The  beginner  should  practise  inside  the  Court  at  first 
with  a  Marker,  who  should  show  him  the  different  strokes, 
letting  the  beginner  see  him  from  behind  rather  than 
from  in  front.      It  is  easier  to  imitate  a  person  from 

173 


174  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

behind  than  from  in  front,  for,  when  seen  face  to  face, 
the  player  and  his  legs  and  arms  are  "  the  wrong  way 
round."  Then  the  player  should  practise  by  himself, 
with  the  Marker  occasionally  looking  on  and  making 
suggestions.  Then  once  more  the  player  should  practise 
with  the  Marker. 

Let  us  take  an  ordinary  Forehand  stroke  first.  Let 
the  ball  be  hit  against  the  Front-wall,  so  that  it  will 
return  to  the  player's  right-hand  side.  The  Marker  had 
better  hit  the  ball,  since  he  is  more  likely  to  hit  it  nearly 
to  the  same  place  twice  running. 

First  let  the  player  notice  where  the  ball  falls  at  its 
second  bounce.  Then,  when  the  ball  has  been  hit  up 
again,  let  him  get  into  position. 

Then,  without  any  ball  at  all,  let  him  make  a  few 
imaginary  strokes  with  his  racket.  Next,  when  the  ball 
is  hit  up  again,  let  him  get  into  position  and  make  a 
stroke.  The  Marker  should  now  point  out  the  mistakes  ; 
thus,  he  should  tell  the  player  that  he  has  stood  too  near, 
too  far  off,  too  much  in  front,  too  much  behind  ;  that  he 
has  failed  to  lift  his  racket  before  or  after  the  stroke ; 
that  he  has  jerked  it  round  instead  of  carrying  it  through; 
and  so  on.  The  stroke  should  be  correctly  practised 
now  without  the  ball.  Then  the  stroke  with  the  ball 
should  be  tried  again. 

Others  find  it  far  easier,  as  at  Tennis,  to  begin  with 
balls  thrown  onto  the  Side-wall. 

A  common  fault  is  that  too  little  power  and  pace  are 
imparted.  Either  the  player  does  not  use  certain  parts 
of  his  striking  apparatus,  or  he  puts  a  drag  on  the  ball  ; 
he  does  not  strike  it  with  the  full  force  of  the  racket  and 
arm  and  body. 

Another  common  fault  is  that  the  player  loses  his 
balance.     Perhaps  he  ends  up  all  right,  but  he  does  not 


CH.  XXVI]       PRACTICE  INSIDE   THE  COURT  175 

end  up  alert  and  waiting  to  return  the  next  ball.  This 
is  an  art  which  has  to  be  practised  quite  apart  from  any 
actual  "  next  ball  " — which  is  apt  to  distract  the  player. 
Let  the  player  learn  to  make  the  stroke,  and  to  keep  his 
balance,  without  bothering  about  whether  he  has  hit  the 
ball  rightly  or  not.  Then  let  him  put  this  into  use  with 
the  ball.  He  will  soon  find  it  easy  to  keep  "  on  his  toes  " 
till  he  has  begun  to  make  the  stroke,  and  again  after  he 
has  made  the  stroke. 

The  Backhand  stroke  will  come  next,  the  position 
being  as  in  the  Photographs  in  Chapter  XXIII. 

In  practising  either  the  Forehand  or  the  Backhand 
strokes,  one  must  learn  to  move  about  in  the  proper 
Sideways  positions,  such  as  were  suggested  in  Chapter  X. 

Then  may  come  the  Volley,  of  which  we  have  spoken 
already.  The  player  must  not  give  the  ball  a  smash, 
since  the  ball  as  a  rule  has  enough  pace  of  its  own 
already.  He  must  rather  meet  it  on  its  way.  The 
chief  fault  in  volleying  is  impatience :  the  player  tries  to 
take  the  ball  too  soon.  He  should  let  it  come  first  to 
the  proper  position  for  an  ordinary  stroke. 

The  same  applies  to  the  Half-volley — an  excellent 
stroke  to  practise  since  it  insists  that  the  ball  shall  be 
low  down  and  near  to  the  ground. 

Then  comes  the  Back-wall  play,  as  described  above. 
One  of  the  waiting  positions  is  shown  in  Photograph 
XXXIII. 

The  strokes  throughout  should  be  hit  fair  and  square, 
with  the  full  face  of  the  racket,  and  without  cut.  The 
wrist-swing  should  come  at  the  instant  before  the  racket 
strikes  the  ball.  The  racket  should  strike  the  ball  when 
the  ball  is  very  near  the  ground.  After  the  stroke  the 
player  should  be  alert  and  ready. 

One  of  the  chief  difficulties  of  beginners  is  to  take  the 


176  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

Service.  The  Marker  should  get  a  bag  of  old  balls,  and 
should  send  them  to  the  beginner  so  that  he  may  take 
them  off  the  Back-wall.  Let  the  beginner  try  to  return 
them  not  across  the  Court — a  stroke  easily  acquired 
afterwards — ,  but  down  the  side. 

Then  let  the  Marker  stand  just  behind  the  line  that 
comes  across  the  Court,  and  thence  let  him  hit  hard 
drives  (of  course  I  mean  off  the  Front-wall !  )  to  the 
player,  who  should  come  up  and  volley  them  down 
the  side  and  not  across  the  Court. 

Then  let  the  player  practise  serving  in  the  way  which 
we  have  already  described.  So  much  of  the  modern 
game  depends  on  Service,  that  the  somewhat  tedious 
process  cannot  be  considered  as  really  a  w^aste  of  time. 

Thus  far  the  player  has  played  in  the  Court  either  by 
himself  with  the  Marker  looking  on,  or  by  himself  alone, 
or  with  the  Marker.  Now  let  him  try  some  practice- 
games,  during  which  he  will  find  out  and  afterwards  be 
able  to  correct  his  faults.  He  should  correct  his  faults 
outside  the  Court  in  the  manner  which  we  have  out- 
lined. 

The  general  hints  for  Match-play,  as  given  in  Chapter 
XV,  will  apply  to  Racquets,  without  the  need  for  repe- 
tition here. 


CHAPTER   XXVII 

DOUBLES 

The  chief  difficulty  of  Doubles,  especially  for  the 
player  who  is  used  to  Singles,  is  that  constant  alertness 
which  is  required,  besides  the  general  feeling  that  one  is 
cramped  for  space.  In  Lawn  Tennis  Doubles  one  can 
watch  one's  opponent  without  turning  one's  head  ;  in  all 
Singles  one  feels  that  the  ball  must  be  returned  to  oneself, 
if  it  is  to  be  returned  at  all.  But  in  Racquet  Doubles  it 
may  be  returned  to  one's  partner  again  and  again.  Field- 
ing at  Cricket  is  somewhat  different.  There  is  not  the 
same  need  for  constant  watchfulness,  for  there  are  many 
intervals.  A  good  plan,  in  order  to  keep  up  one's  interest 
and  attention,  is  to  make  the  various  strokes  in  imagina- 
tion— an  art  not  acquired  at  once,  but  deserving  to  be 
acquired  by  practice.  You  should  watch  good  players, 
and,  while  you  are  watching  them,  imagine  and  feel 
yourself  to  be  making  their  strokes.  As  it  is,  many 
people  play  the  Double  game  as  if  it  were  a  Single 
game  while  the  ball  is  coming  to  them,  but  as  if  it 
were  no  game  at  all  while  the  ball  is  coming  to  their 
partner. 

The  position  of  the  body  and  the  general  mechanism 
of  the  stroke  is  the  same  as  in  Singles.  But  in  Doubles 
there  is  need  of  more  play  close  down  the  Side-walls. 
14  ^11 


178  RACQUETS  [pt.  iii 

It  is  obviously  harder  to  send  a  stroke  outside  the  reach 
of  a  player  in  a  Double.  Besides  this,  there  is  more 
play  across  the  Court,  more  play  onto  the  Side-walls 
first  (boasting),  and  there  should  be  more  Drop-play, 
and,  as  at  Lawn  Tennis,  more  play  down  the  centre  line, 
between  the  opponents. 

The  best  position  in  the  Court  is  not  an  easy  matter  to 
decide.  It  does  not  depend  merely  on  where  the  ball  is  or 
is  likely  to  be,  but  also  on  where  one's  partner  is.  One 
must  not  leave  too  large  a  gap  between  oneself  and  him. 

Some  of  the  best  Single  players'  are  among  the  very 
worst  Double  players,  except  for  the  Service  and  the 
making  of  individual  strokes.  The  stronger  or  more 
experienced  player  should  call  when  the  ball  is  doubtful, 
but  should  not  always  call  "  Mine  "  except  when  the 
stroke  is  impossible  for  him  (in  which  case  he  loves  to 
cdl  "  Yours  "  !).  When  there  is  any  doubt,  the  stroke 
should  be  taken  either  by  the  stronger  player,  or  by  the 
player  who  took  the  previous  stroke.  One  of  the  most 
undesirable  features  in  a  friendly  game  is  poaching.  In 
a  Match  it  may  be  less  objectionable ;  but  I  have  often 
seen  a  Match  lost  because  the  weaker  player  was  left 
out  in  the  cold,  and  thus  never  came  into  the  swing  of 
his  stroke  :  hence,  when  a  ball  was  left  to  him  at  rare 
intervals,  he  fel't,  as  it  were,  out  of  practice. 

In  friendly  games  one  can  avoid  any  need  for  poach- 
ing by  a  careful  use  of  Handicaps.  Handicaps  are  very 
seldom  patronised.  Pairs  should  regularly  play  to- 
gether, so  as  to  learn  one  another's  game.  (Perhaps 
this  is  more  conspicuously  the  case  at  Lawn  Tennis.) 
As  it  is,  generally  the  two  stronger  players  have  to  play 
against  each  other,  so  as  to  make  an  even  Match.  Why 
should  they  not  play  together,  and  give  odds  to  the  two 
weaker  players? 


CH.  xxvii]  DOUBLES  179 

After  the  rule  of  constant  alertness,  the  rule  most 
frequently  neglected  in  Doubles  is  this :  though  of 
course  it  has  only  a  general  and  not  a  universal  applies 
tion.  While  you  are  in,  or  your  partner  is  in,  play  for 
safety,  return  everything,  do  not  risk  brilliant  shots. 
While  your  opponents  are  in,  do  not  grudge  brilliant 
shots.  To  lose  a  point  here  is  less  vital  than  to  lose  a 
point  during  your  own  Services.  It  is  especially  im- 
portant to  hazard  something  in  order  to  stop  a  long  run 
of  aces  served  by  your  opponents. 

With  regard  to  Match-tactics,  it  may  be  well  to 
"  pepper  "  one  player  until  his  partner  shall  have  become 
listless ;  and  then  to  send  that  partner  an  unexpected 
treat.  This  you  may  vary  by  a  heavily-cut  stroke  right 
down  the  middle  of  the  Court,  out  of  reach  of  both 
opponents. 

Some  partners  need  abuse  ;  others  need  encourage- 
ment ;  others  need  diplomacy.  One  may  work  so  that 
one's  partner  may  be  sent  an  easy  stroke  to  kill. 

The  word  "  kill "  reminds  me  that  it  is  always  better 
to  claim  a  let  than  to  take  a  life.  Never  run  the  risk 
of  maiming  a  man  :  the  winning  of  one  stroke  is  not 
worth  that. 

When  13-all  or  14-all  are  reached,  do  not  make  it  an 
invariable  rule  to  "set."  At  13-all,  with  one  opponent 
out,  it  may  be  far  more  advisable  to  play  straight  on. 
But  few  pairs  have  the  courage  to  do  this.  The  "  set " 
feels  so  like  a  respite. 

Never  let  a  slack  player  play  to  make  up  your  Four. 
This  is  a  fatal  error.  While  a  keen  player  may  wake 
up  the  three  others,  it  is  far  commoner  for  a  slack  player 
to  slacken  the  three  others.  A  Three-handed  game, 
each  having  his  own  Handicaps,  would  be  far  better 
practice  and  far  better  sport  than  such  a  Four. 


i8o  RACQUETS  [pt.  hi 

But,  personally,  I  think  that  the  Single  game  is  the 
game.  Of  course  a  Four  teaches  co-operation  and 
patience  combined  with  readiness :  this  is  excellent 
discipline.  And  a  Four  may  have  social  advantages. 
But  I  prefer  to  get  all  the  credit  if  I  lead  up  to  or  make 
a  killing  stroke,  or  if  I  pull  a  game  out  of  the  fire  ;  and 
I  deserve  all  the  blame  if  I  lose  an  easy  stroke,  or  if  I 
am  slack. 

Besides  this,  only  on  a  very  few  occasions  have  I  felt 
as  if  I  had  had  enough  exercise  after  a  Double.  It  is 
not  so  refreshing  as  a  Single.  Nor  does  it  seem  to  me 
so  satisfactory.  Among  other  reasons,  if  the  Court  is 
the  right  size  for  a  Single  (as  I  believe  that  a  Racquet- 
Court  is),  then  it  seems  hardly  likely  to  be  also  the  right 
size  for  a  Double.  It  is  interesting  here  to  note  that 
the  most  enjoyable  Double  I  have  ever  played  was  at 
the  Philadelphia  Court,  which  is  exceptionally  large. 
It  is  the  best  Court  that  I  have  yet  seen,  for  Doubles. 


Part   IV 
TENNIS 


CHAPTER  XXVIII 

MERITS  OF  TENNIS 

The  merits  of  Tennis  are  appreciated  only  by  a  very 
small  number  of  those  players  who  begin  with  Tennis  as 
their  first  ball-game.  In  order  to  love  the  game,  one 
needs  apprenticeship  at  any  rate  in  a  Squash-Court,  and 
if  possible  in  a  Squash-Court  with  a  Back-wall.  If  one 
is  unable  to  get  this,.one  may  practise  up  against  the 
main  Side-wall  of  the  Tennis-Court,  treating  it  as  the 
Front-wall  of  a  Squash-Court.  It  is  here,  rather  than 
over  the  Net,  that  one  should  get  the  habit  of  the  ordin- 
ary Forehand  and  Backhand  strokes.  One  should  be 
able  to  keep  the  ball  time  after  time  within  two  of  the 
Chase-lines.  Very  few  players  can  ever  reach  their  best 
possible  game,  if  they  begin  with  Tennis ;  for  from 
Tennis  alone,  however  many  lessons  they  may  have  had 
from  the  best  teachers,  they  are  hardly  likely  to  learn 
that  agility  which  the  modern  game  demands.  I  noticed 
that  many  beginners  in  America,  even  those  who  played 
Lawn  Tennis,  took  a  long  while  to  master  some  of  the 
very  commonest  strokes.  Those  who  began  with  Tennis 
alone  were  almost  invariably  slow  upon  their  feet.  I 
used  to  urge  them  to  practise  in  the  Squash-Court,  but 
most  of  them  said  that  they  wanted  to  play  Tennis 
itself.    Therefore  they  failed  to  master  the  quite  ele- 

183 


1 84  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

mentary  positions  and  movements.  The  few  who  did 
try  Squash  (with  a  Tennis-racket  and  a  Lawn  Tennis 
ball)  improved  quickly,  especially  in  their  Backhand 
strokes.  Here  I  shall  consider  the  advantages  of  Tennis, 
especially  when  the  mechanism  of  the  play  has  been 
acquired  before  the  play  itself  is  taken  up  regularly. 

We  need  not  consider  here,  over  again,  the  advantages 
common  to  both  Tennis  and  Racquets — the  physical, 
aesthetic,  intellectual,  moral,  social,  and  economical 
values.  We  need  only  consider  the  advantages  of 
Tennis  as  contrasted  with  Racquets. 

First  of  all,  there  is  the  great  variety  which  is  possible. 
The  number  of  angles  at  which  balls  may  reach  the 
player  is  enormous.  Of  one  Hazard  alone,  Scaino 
(quoted  in  *  Asinals  of  Tennis ')  says  : — 

"The  main  wall  is  plain,  but  thicker  in  one  part,  where  it  begins 
to  project  further  over  the  floor,  forming  a  figure  called  by  the 
French  tambour  {tambiirind);  and  this  coming  out  obliquely,  is  the 
occasion  of  a  variety  of  bounds  which  the  ball,  encountering  it, 
makes  with  many  and  various  effects,  at  the  hands  of  good  players, 
and  very  beautiful  to  see." 

A  Lawn  Tennis  veteran,  who  has  recently  taken  up 
Tennis,  told  me  that  he  could  spend  an  hour  in  the 
Court  by  himself  with  interest  and  pleasure  ;  he  could 
practise  the  hard  drive  as  well  as  the  heavy  cut,  and 
in  the  ordinary  stroke  he  could  gain  a  great  variety  of 
length  and  direction  and  elevation.  He  could  practise 
many  different  kinds  of  Services,  each  of  which  would  be 
effective  in  its  proper  place.  When  he  came  to  play 
with  the  Marker,  he  could  use  first  one  Handicap,  and 
then  another. 

Handicaps  should  be  the  most  conspicuous  feature  of 
Tennis,  at  least  for  beginners.  No  two  players  are  so 
unequal  that  they  cannot  meet  on  equal  terms  in  a  game 
in  which  neither  need  spoil  his  play  in  the  very  least. 


CH.  xxviii]  MERITS  OF  TENNIS  185 

A  study  of  the  many  varieties  of  Handicaps  will  not  be 
waste  of  time. 

Besides  this  feature  of  Tennis,  this  wealth  of  Handi- 
caps, which  enable  any  two  friends  to  meet,  Tennis 
(partly  owing  to  its  old-fashioned  Hazards,  and  its 
general  associations)  is  the  game  which  seems  most  aloof 
from  the  rush  of  commercial  life.  In  the  Court  is  to  be 
found  something  of  the  ancient  world,  as  in  a  cathedral 
town,  the  Tennis-Court  being  considerably  more  cheerful 
and  healthy. 

In  the  game  there  is  always  something  new  to  learn. 
Thus  it  appeals  to  Americans  as  well  as  to  Englishmen. 
Americans  have  practically  invented  in  recent  years  a 
new  Service,  and  the  hard  Drive  that  pitches  right  in 
the  Nick.  They  have  revived  that  straight  yet  artfully 
masked  Force  for  the  Dedans,  which  the  old  school  of 
players  used  to  make  so  correctly. 

In  this  game  originality  and  observation  pay,  as  well 
as  sheer  experience.  The  game  can  be  continued  almost 
up  to  any  age.  Not  so  long  ago,  the  Provost  of  King's 
College,  Cambridge,  played  a  game  with  Mr.  J.  M. 
Heathcote  in  the  morning,  and  Jim  Harradine  (he  was 
then  over  fifty)  played  a  vigorous  Exhibition  Match  in 
the  afternoon.  The  older  player,  if  he  has  used  his 
years  well,  will  know  how  to  keep  on  the  Service-side ; 
will  know  which  Service  to  use  on  any  given  occasion  ; 
will  know  what  balls  to  leave  alone  ;  will  know  where  to 
expect  returns.  The  steady  exercise  with  its  welcome 
breaks  will  not  exhaust  him.  Besides,  Tennis  is  pre- 
eminently a  game  for  older  men  because,  at  their  age  of 
life,  they  should  be  able  to  afford  the  time  and  the 
money.  They  may  preserve  some  part  of  their  vigour, 
and  may  keep  up  some  of  their  old  friendships,  and  may 
form  new  friendships  in  the  Tennis-Court. 


i86  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

It  must  not  be  thought  for  one  moment  that  the  game 
is  merely  an  old  man's  game.  Long  ago  Rousseau  wrote 
(in  his  famous  Emile) : — "  To  spring  from  one  end  to 
another  of  a  Tennis-Court ;  to  judge  the  bound  of  a  ball 
which  is  still  in  mid-air ;  to  return  it  with  a  strong  and 
certain  hand  ;  such  games  become  a  man ;  they  tend  to 
form  him."  And,  though  players  do  not  exactly  "  spring 
from  one  end  to  another,"  yet  rapid  movement  is  almost 
essential  to  complete  success  against  a  modern  opponent. 

But  complete  success  is  also  impossible  without  nerve, 
resource,  observation,  memory,  accuracy,  and  many  other 
"elderly"  qualities.  Mr.  Lukin  is  very  much  to  the 
point  when  he  says : — "  Besides  the  score  of  the  game, 
for  the  accuracy  of  which  no  good  player  will  be  wholly 
dependent  upon  the  Marker,  the  character  of  the  Chases 
in  relation  to  the  position  of  the  game  or  the  set,  the 
Bisques,  if  any  are  to  be  taken,  and  the  choice  of  sides 
in  taking  them,  are  matters  which  call  for  particular 
attention,  and  require  great  discrimination  and  judgment." 

The  social  value  of  Tennis  is  in  some  ways  superior  to 
that  of  Racquets,  since  not  a  little  of  it  is  connected 
with  the  life  in  English  country-houses.  Unfortunately, 
Tennis  house-parties  are  not  so  frequent  as  they  were ; 
but  they  are  still  given  occasionally. 


CHAPTER  XXIX 

THE  COURT  AND  IMPLEMENTS  AND  PLAY 

Note. — Some  parts  of  the  following  Chapter  have  already  appeared 
in  Articles  by  the  author,  in  the  ' Badminton  Magazine'  and  in  the 
•Windsor  Magazine.' 

It  is  a  common  belief  that  there  are  only  two  or  three 
Tennis  Courts  in  the  world.  As  a  matter  of  fact  there 
are  over  thirty  in  England  alone,  there  are  six  in  France, 
several  in  America — let  us  hope  that  we  may  soon  be 
able  to  say  ten  at  the  very  least — and  a  few  elsewhere 
(e.  g.  in  Vienna,  in  Melbourne,  and  in  Hobart  Town). 

As  to  the  idea  that  the  scoring  of  Tennis  cannot 
possibly  be  learnt,  one  is  prepared  to  admit  that  it  has 
been  found  hard  to  learn  ;  but  that  is  surely  the  fault 
of  the  teaching.  What  single  subject  would  be  easy 
to  understand  if  the  teacher  used  a  large  number  of 
technical  terms  to  b'egin  with,  sjuch  as  "  Tambour," 
"  Grille,"  "  Hazard-side,"  "  Chase  worse  than  2  " — yes, 
of  course  they  are  not  easy  to  understand  or  learn,  ii 
we  begin  with  them.  As  the  lady  said,  after  a  (Scotch) 
Professional  had  tried  to  explain  Golf  to  her  :  "  I  still 
don't  know  the  difference  between  the  masher  and  the 
putty." 

A  third  fallacy  is  that  Tennis  is  the  same  as  Lawn 

187 


i88  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

Tennis.    This  may  be  christened  "the  ladies'  fallacy," 
and  may  be  illustrated  by  the  following  conversation. 

She.  I  hear  you  are  going  to  play  Tennis  this  morn- 
ing ;  won't  it  be  rather  wet  ? 

He.  I  am  going  to  play  real  Tennis,  not  Lawn  Tennis. 
Real  Tennis  is  played  in  a  covered  court. 

She.  Oh,  indeed  !  quite  a  new  game  then  ? 

Tennis  is  the  mother  of  Lawn  Tennis,  and  if  so  many 
more  people  know  and  admire  the  daughter,  it  is  partly 
because  they  have  not  been  properly  introduced  to  the 
mother.  In  fact,  many  of  the  best-known  (past  and 
present)  Lawn  Tennis  players  have  of  late  years  shown 
great  keenness  for  Tennis.  I  need  only  mention  Messrs. 
Renshaw,  Chapman,  Winkworth,  Briscoe,  Mahony, 
Nesbit,  and  R.  F.  Doherty  in  England,  and  O.  S. 
Campbell  in  America. 

Once  again,  it  is  often  asserted  that  Tennis  is  very 
expensive.  I  answer  that  over-work  and  ill-health  are 
far  more  expensive,  with  all  the  unpleasantness  thrown 
in.  For  really  bad  work,  in  whatever  line  it  may  be, 
and  for  really  bad  health,  with  its  constant  drugs  and 
tonics  and  doctors'  bills  and  holidays,  commend  me  to 
certain  men  who  take  no  exercise  ;  and,  of  all  exer- 
cises, games  are  best,  partly  because  they  are  a  pleasure 
and  an  interest ;  and  of  all  games  Tennis  is  among  the 
very  grandest,  because  it  is  a  fine  all-round  exercise,  in 
a  quiet,  uncommercial,  old-world  atmosphere — alas  !  how 
seldom  we  can  breathe  it  now ;  an  exercise  possible  at 
all  seasons  of  the  year  and  in  all  weathers  ;  an  exercise 
demanding  and  enchaining  the  whole  attention,  which 
dares  not  wander ;  an  exercise  vigorous  and  yet  not 
exhausting.  But  of  these  advantages  I  have  already 
said  enough.     Let  me  come  to  the  Court  itself. 

I  shall  try  to  explain  the  Game  in  a  new  way.    I  shall 


Fig.  :J4. — Texnis  Uall. 


(See  page  189.) 


CH.  XXIX]     COURT,  IMPLEMENTS,  AND  PLAY         189 

take  it  for  granted  that  the  reader  understands  Lawn 
Tennis  already  :  this  will  simplify  matters.  And  I  shall 
only  speak  of  the  Single  Game,  as  the  Four-handed 
Game  is  rarely  played  to-day. 

We  have,  as  a  starting-point,  two  players,  each  with  a 
large-headed  and  large-handled  racket,  a  ball  of  a  certain 
size,  a  net  over  which  the  ball  has  to  be  hit  before  it  has 
bounced  twice,  and  the  ordinary  scoring  :  e.  g.  1 5-love, 
15-all,  30-15,  30-all,  40-30,  deuce,  vantage,  deuce,  vant- 
age, game.  The  Set  consists  of  six  Games,  though 
"  deuce  and  vantage  Games  "  can  be  played.  "  Faults  " 
and  "  double  Faults  "  score  as  in  Lawn  Tennis. 

And  now  for  just  a  few  of  the  differences.  A  great 
many  must  be  left  out  for  the  present,  the  reader  being 
referred  to  the  Rules  of  the  Game,  in  Chapter  XXXI. 

Of  the  Implements  of  Tennis,  the  racket  has  a  smaller 
face  and  is  heavier  than  the  Lawn  Tennis  racket,  because 
the  Tennis  ball,  though  of  about  the  same  size,  is  heavier 
than  the  Lawn  Tennis  ball.  The  former  has  an  inside 
of  cloth  etc.,  and  not  of  "  nothing  "  ;  in  fact  it  is  about 
as  hard  as  the  ball  used  at  Racquets  or  Cricket  or 
Base-ball. 

Photograph  XXXIV  shows  a  Tennis-ball  life-size;  it 
must  be  between  2\  and  2f  inches  in  diameter,  and 
between  2|  and  2f  ounces  in  weight.  The  American 
and  French  and  English  balls  all  differ,  much  of  the 
difference  being  due  to  the  covering.  We  shall  speak 
of  this  again  elsewhere. 

In  the  Court,  the  Tennis-net  is  far  higher  at  the  ends 
than  in  the  middle.  The  Court  itself  has  walls  on  all 
its  four  sides,  and  a  Penthouse  along  three  sides.  The 
best  way  to  describe  the  Court  will  be  to  put  the  reader 
at  one  end,  safely  behind  the  netting,  where  the  spec- 
tators  usually  sit,  i.e.  in  the  Dedans  (the  French  for 


190 


TENNIS 


[PT.  IV 


"within").  This  word  is 
usually  pronounced  "  Dead- 
on  "(!),  though  I  have  heard 
a  more  refined  Marker  call 
it  "diddong,"  and  three 
less  refined  Markers  call  it 
"dedduns,"  "deddang,"  and 
"  diddans,"  respectively.  A 
ball  which  is  played  over 
the  Net  into  this  Dedans 
counts  as  a  winning  stroke 
to  the  striker. 

Now  look  in  front  of 
you,  over  the  Net,  and 
down  the  right-hand  wall 
(which  is  called  the  Main- 
wall).  It  does  not  go 
straight  all  the  way  along, 
for  there  is  a  buttress 
sticking  out,  and  this  is 
called  the  Tambour.  A 
ball  hit  against  it  will  come 
off  at  an  angle  which  con- 
siderably puzzles  begin- 
ners. Diagram  12  will 
give  some  idea  of  this 
Tambour. 

Past  the  Tambour,  in  the 
wall  facing  you  at  the 
opposite  end  of  the  Court, 
is  a  little  "  cupboard  with- 
out a  door  "  ;  it  is  called  the  Grille  ;  a  ball  which  is  played 
over  the  Net  into  this  Grille  makes  a  winning  stroke. 
Lawn   Tennis   has    no   winning  strokes   of  this   kind, 


CH.  xxix]    COURT,  IMPLEMENTS,  AND  PLA  V         191 

though  they  could  be  arranged  if  the  players  agreed 
that  whoever  managed  to  hit  a  certain  chair  or  lady's 
parasol  (just  outside  the  Court)  should  score  a  point. 

Look  down  the  left-hand  Side-wall,  and  you  will  see 
many  openings,  with  nettings — the  old  Courts  had  none 
— to  protect  the  spectators.  These  openings  are  called 
the  Galleries,  and  that  one  which  is  furthest  away  from 
you  (the  Last  Gallery)  is  called  the  Winnitig  Gallery, 
since  a  ball  played  over  the  Net  into  it  counts  as  a 
winning  stroke. 

Thus  there  are  three  "  Winning  "  Openings — oh  the 
joy  of  them  ! 

To  good  Markers  the  Openings  are  worth  half  their  salary — 
The  Dedans^  the  Grille,  and  the  Last  ( Winning)  Gallery. 

(But  the  days  when  Markers  could  win  vast  sums  by 
betting  on  their  play  are  of  the  past.) 

All  the  way  down  the  left-hand  side  of  the  Court 
(Diagram  13)  runs  the  Penthouse,  abovQ  the  Galleries. 
You  will  notice  the  Penthouse  along  the  Back-wall, 
facing  you  as  you  sit  in  the  Dedans.  And  above  your 
head  there  is  a  Penthouse  also,  though  you  cannot  see 
the  business- side  of  it.  These  Penthouses  help  to  give 
the  play  much  of  its  essential  merit,  its  variety. 

Truly  Mr.  H,  S.  Mahony  was  justified  in  saying  that 
the  Court  was  too  full  of  furniture :  though  he  need  not 
have  insulted  the  Tambour  by  calling  it  the  "  Hump  "  ! 

Across  the  floor  are  many  lines,  and  there  are  myste- 
rious numbers  low  down  on  the  Side-walls.  The  mystery 
will  be  unfolded  presently,  and  the  designer  of  Courts 
will  be  defended  from  the  charge  of  lunacy  :  he  will  be 
shown  to  be  a  most  prudent  man,  and  the  benefactor  of 
those  especially  who  are  out  of  breath. 

With  regard  to  the  size  etc.  of  the  ideal  Court,  the 


192  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

reader  must  be  referred  to  Mr.  Julian  Marshall's  'Annals 
of  Tennis.'  We  may  add,  to  his  suggestions,  that  the 
Bickley  cement  is  by  far  the  best  material  for  floor  and 
walls,  and  that  the  Bickley  stain  is  superior  to  paint, 
which  tends  to  close  the  pores  of  the  Court's  skin.  Mr. 
Marshall's  words  may  be  quoted  : — 

"  Our  Tennis-court  is  enclobed  by  four  walls,  30  feet  in  height, 
within  which,  again,  are  built  three  lower  walls,  one  on  one  side  of 
the  Court,  and  one  at  each  end.  The  space  between  these  outer 
and  inner  walls,  7  feet  in  width  (including  the  thickness  of  the 
latter),  is  covered  with  a  sloping  wooden  roof,  called  the  pent- 
house. The  extreme  length  of  the  Court,  from  one  outer  wall  to 
the  other,  is  108  feet  6  inches;  the  length,  therefore,  from  the 
mner  wall  at  one  end  to  that  at  the  other  is  94  feet  6  inches.  The 
width  between  the  two  outer  side-walls  is  38  feet  6  inches  ;  and  the 
width,  therefore,  from  the  inner  to  the  opposite  side- wall  is  31  feet 

6  inches.  The  latter  is  called  the  main-wall  :  its  face  projects  into 
the  Court  at  the  point  E  at  an  angle  of  about  38°. 

"  Enclosed,  therefore,  by  this  main-wall  and  the  three  lower 
walls,  there  is  an  area,  the  floor  of  the  Court,  which  is  narrower  at 
one  end  than  at  the  other,  on  account  of  the  thickening  of  the 
main-wall  between  the  tambour  and  the  end-wall,  where  the  floor 
is  only  30  feet  in  width.  Parts  of  the  inner  walls  are  7  feet  in 
height  ;  in  the  rest  of  their  extent  they  are  only  3  feet  8  inches 
high,  and  are  there  called  the  batteries.  The  walls  are  each  1 5  feet 
9  inches  in  length.  Resting  on  the  tops  of  the  walls  is  the  plate 
which  bears  the  pent-house,  supported  also  by  the  posts,  fixed  in 
the  batteries.  From  the  height  of  7  feet  2  inches  the  pent-house 
slopes  up  to  the  outer  walls,  which  it  meets  at  the  height  of  10  feet 

7  inches  from  the  floor.  Each  last  galler}^  is  9  feet  6  inches  in 
length  ;  each  second  gallery,  9  feet  6  inches  ;  each  door,  3  feet 
3  inches  ;  each  first  gallery,  5  feet  6  inches  ;  and  the  central  open- 
ing between  the  line-posts,  called  the  line-opening,  is  7  feet  6  inches 
in  width. 

"  There  is  a  longer  opening  than  any  of  these,  called  the  dedans. 
The  low  wall,  or  dedans-battery,  below  this  opening,  is  the  same 
height  as  the  other  batteries  ;  the  height  of  the  openmg  is  the  same 
as  that  of  the  galleries  ;  and  its  length  is  21  feet  6  inches.  One 
wall  is  5  feet  6  inches  in  length  ;  and  the  other  wall,  4  feet  6  inches. 
At  the  other  end  of  the  Court,  in  the  wall,  there  is  a  square  opening 
called  the  grille,  and  measuring  3  feet  2  inches  each  way." 

We  need  not  here  enter  into  details,  except  to  note 
that  the  floor  of  the  French  Courts  slopes  down  towards 


CH.  XXIX]    COURT,  IMPLEMENTS,  AND  PLAY         193 


BACK-WALL 

AND 


H.(last 

WINNIN 
H.$ECON 


or) 
G 


H.DOO 
H.FIRS 

THE  (NET  or)uNE 

FIRS 
DOO 

SECON 
tAS 


a 


4  IS 


NICK 

No 
^  CKases 

Si     Here 

z 


UJ 

.0. 


D 
Z' 

4-1. 

h 
u. 

Ul 


lU 


■-0- 


z 

»-- 
\- 
4-0- 


Lini  X5n  0^  te'yond  which 
'  ♦he  Service  musfr  pit'ch. 

■^        (H) 

•  Second  GAllei'y 

-DooK 

(H) 
■First  G2illcry 


imii    THE  (NET.  or)  LINE 


M 

5 


First  Gallery 
Door 

.Second  Gallery 

Y*rd  worse  than 
LjkSt  GAllcry 

-6 
-5 
.4- 
■3 
-2 
-  I 


^ 

^ 


I 


BACK-WALL 
AND  NICK 

Diagram  13. — Plan  of  the  Left-hand  Side-wall  as  one  looks  down  along 
it  from  the  Dedans. 

15 


194  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

the  Net,  and  that  some  old  Courts  used  to  have  other 
hazards : — 

1.  "  The  hole  "  {le  trou\  an  opening  of  i6  inches  square,  facing 
the  Grille. 

2.  An  upright  board  in  the  other  comer,  opposite  the  Grille,  and 
called  Pats. 

3.  La  liine^  a  small  opening  on  both  sides  of  the  Court,  very 
high  up.     This  was  soon  done  away  with. 

And  now  for  the  game,  which,  however,  can  be  under- 
stood best  of  all  by  an  hour  or  two  of  play  in  the  Court 
with  the  Marker. 

We  have  already  seen  that  it  differs  from  Lawn  Tennis 
in  two  or  three  respects,  namely,  that — 

1.  It  has  certain  Openings  into  which  it  is  a  winning 
stroke  to  play  the  ball. 

2.  It  has  Side-walls  and  Back-walls.  Many  strokes 
which  would  go  "  out "  in  Lawn  Tennis,  either  at  the 
back  or  at  the  side,  are  good  in  Tennis,  because  they  hit 
the  wall  and  come  back  into  the  Court.  This  makes  an 
enormous  difference  to  the  play,  and  is  indeed  one  of  its 
greatest  charms — for  the  player  as  well  as  for  the  spec- 
tator. Peter  Latham's  "  returns  "  off  the  Back-wall  are 
simply  marvellous  :  some  of  them  are  quite  preposterous. 
When  I  attempt  Lawn  Tennis  after  Tennis,  I  feel  as  if 
the  Court  "  leaked  " — so  many  balls  find  their  way  out 
which  in  Tennis  would  drip  back  onto  the  floor  from 
the  Penthouse,  or  be  hurled  in  again  by  the  kindly  Side- 
walls  and  Back-walls. 

Again,  it  is  a  common  stroke  in  Tennis  to  hit  a  ball 
not  directly  over  the  Net,  as  in  Lawn  Tennis,  but  up 
against  the  Side-wall  first  and  thence  over  the  Net. 
This  is  called  "  boasting"  and  it  gives  the  ball  a  power- 
ful twist.  I  remember  once  playing  Lawn  Tennis  with 
Mr.   E.    F.    Benson,   just   after   we   had   been    playing 


CH.  xxix]    COURT,  IMPLEMENTS,  AND  PLAY  195 

Tennis  :  he  forgot  that  the  Lawn  Tennis  Court  had  no 
Side-wall,  and  tried  to  "  boast."  His  ball  found  its  nest 
about  six  Courts  off. 

3.  Another  difference  is  in  the  Service.  For  not  only 
can  the  Server  stand  anywhere  in  the  Court,  but  he 
always  serves  from  the  same  half  of  the  Court — from 
the  Dedans  half,  the  side  on  which  you  are  sitting. 
And  he  must  serve  the  ball  onto  the  Penthouse  that 
runs  down  the  left-hand  side  of  the  Court. 

This  is  a  great  contrast  to  Lawn  Tennis,  where  the 
Service  may  be  from  either  half  of  the  Court,  and  is 
nearly  always  of  the  over-hand  kind.  In  spite  of  the 
clever  American  variation,  the  Service  is  most  monoton- 
ous for  the  spectator.  In  Tennis  there  is  far  more 
choice  :  for  instance,  Charles  Saunders  (the  late  English 
Champion),  Peter  Latham  (Champion  of  the  World), 
Tom  Pettitt  (American  Champion),  all  have  different 
special  Services.  Indeed,  Pettitt  has  had  two  :  he  was 
of  opinion  that  two  of  his  Amateur  pupils  did  his  later 
Service  better  than  any  one  else. 

And,  again,  the  opponent  is  allowed  to  volley  the 
Service,  as  at  Racquets. 

4.  The  stroke  also  is  as  a  rule  very  different,  though 
the  Lawn  Tennis  Backhander  (of  Messrs.  Doherty, 
Mahony,  T.  P.  Burke,  and  many  others)  is  far  nearer 
to  the  old-fashioned  Tennis  Backhander  than  it  used 
to  be. 

We  may  notice  two  peculiar  Tennis  strokes  (apart 
from  the  "  boasted  "  stroke  mentioned  above) : — 

{a)  The  hard  straight  Drive,  especially  the  drive  for 
the  Winning  Openings :  this  would  go  flying  past  the 
opponent's  head  and  out-of-court  at  Lawn  Tennis. 

(Jj)  The  Cut-stroke.  Instead  of  meeting  the  ball  with 
the  full  face  of  the  racket,  the  player  often  "  slices "  the 


196  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

ball,  or  "  chops  down  onto  it " :  the  ball  is  struck,  not 
with  the  full  face  of  the  racket,  but  with  the  face  of  it 
slanting  at  an  angle. 

One  result  is  that  the  balls  travel  more  slowly,  rise  a 
little,  and  get  a  back-spin  on  them,  and,  when  they 
reach  the  Back-wall,  tend  to  drop  down  suddenly.  How 
suddenly  do  they  perish  and  come  to  a  fearful  end. 

One  can  generally  recognise  the  Tennis  player,  in  the 
Lawn  Tennis  Court,  by  this  same  Cut :  his  balls  will 
hang  in  the  air,  and  the  opponent  will  have  to  hold  his 
racket  firmer,  and  to  hit  harder  when  he  wishes  to  get 
them  up.  Nevertheless  the  Cut-stroke  seldom  pays  at 
Lawn  Tennis,  at  any  rate  against  a  good  player. 

The  "  correct "  old  school  of  Tennis  players  used  to 
pride  themselves  on  holding  the  head  of  the  racket  up, 
well  above  the  level  of  the  wrist,  as  in  Illustration  XXXV. 
But  personally  I  seldom  do  this  :  I  know  that  instan- 
taneous Photographs  would  show  that  Pettitt  seldom  does 
this,  and  that  the  angle  of  his  racket  is  more  often  nearer 
to  that  of  most  of  the  Illustrations  in  this  book.  And  I 
am  nearly  sure  that  Latham  generally  has  the  head  of 
his  racket  below  the  level  of  his  wrist,  for  ordinary 
strokes  off  the  floor.  I  remember  noticing  how  often 
George  Lambert  (a  former  Champion)  used  to  hit  the 
floor  with  the  head  of  his  racket  in  some  of  his  most 
severely  cut  strokes. 

And  now  at  last  we  come  to  a  great  difference  between 
the  two  Games  :  we  come  to  the  very  bane  of  the 
uninitiated,  the  Chases.     What  are  Chases? 

5.  In  Lawn  Tennis,  when  a  ball  has  hit  the  ground 
twice,  the  round  is  over  and  the  point  is  scored.  But 
this  is  not  always  so  at  Tennis  ;  for  under  certain  condi- 
tions you  can  let  a  ball  bounce  twice,  and  yet  not  lose  the 
point. 


CH.  XXIX]    COURT,  IMPLEMENTS,  AND  PLAY         197 


Wall    above 
PENTHOUSE 


(LAST. OR) 

WINN1N&  — . 

GALLERY 

TKe  Service 
must  fill  on  ^he 
PENTHOUSE 
beyond  this 

Z   r 

S  o 

m     < 


PENTHOUSE    Above 
GRILLE  etc 


:ATheBML  w 
^served  m 
//pitch    her 

y////////////A 


'A 

hen 
ust/ 
e 


HAIARO- 
CHAS 

THE 


'  A\&rker"s 
Box 


SERVICE- 
CHAS 


SIDE 
E8 

NET 


ORILLE 


TAMBOUR 
^(  Buttress) 


SIDE 
ES 


yfl1TrT,Mi?^.tf ' 


PENTHOUSt    ABOVE    DEDANS 


lU 
<0 

O 

r 
z 

ni 
a 

lU 

> 
o 

CO 

< 

Ji 
-I 

% 


* 

t 


W&ll    above 
PENTHOUSE 


Diagram  i4.--Ground-plan  of  Tennis  Court.    The  Stippled  portions 

indicate  the  Winning  Openings. 


198  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

"  Why  should  you  be  allowed  to  leave  a  ball  alone  ? " 
is  the  very  natural  question.  Well,  sometimes  I  cannot 
reach  it  in  time  ;  sometimes  I  should  have  remarkably 
little  chance  of  getting  it  up  even  if  I  could  and  did 
reach  it. 

"  And  what  happens  then  ? "  Why,  when  I  have 
changed  sides  with  my  opponent,  then  every  stroke  of 
mine  has  to  be  a  better  stroke  than  the  stroke  which  I 
left  alone :  if  I  make  a  worse  stroke,  then  (unless  my 
opponent  hits  the  ball)  the  Marker  calls  ''Lost  it "  :  for  I 
have  lost  the  "  Chase,"  as  it  is  called,  and  my  opponent 
now  scores  the  point.  But,  if  I  go  on  making  better 
strokes  than  that  which  I  left  alone,  until  my  opponent 
misses  the  ball,  the  Marker  calls  "  Won  it "  :  for  I  have 
won  the  "  Chase,"  and  /  score  the  point. 

A  Chase  is  tJierefore  a  ball  which  has  bounced  twice 
without  my  having  hit  it :  when  we  change  sides  and 
play  the  "  Chase  "  over  again,  I  shall  be  handicapped  by 
having  to  make  better  strokes,  every  time,  tha.n  the  stroke 
which  I  failed  to  hit. 

"  But,"  you  will  ask,  "  what  is  a  better  or  worse  stroke 
or  Chase  ? " 

This  is  not  an  easy  matter  to  explain.  To  speak 
very  generally,  a  good  stroke  or  Chase  might  be 
described  as  "  a  good  length  stroker  The  nearer  the  ball 
falls  to  the  Back-wall  of  the  Court,  at  its  second  bounce, 
the  better  the  Chase  is.  So,  if  the  second  bounce  is  just 
close  to  the  Dedans,  it  will  be  a  very  good  stroke  or 
Chase,  whereas  if  the  second  bounce  is  just  close  to  the 
Net  (say  if  the  ball  hits  the  top  of  the  Net  and  just 
dribbles  over)  it  will  be  a  very  bad  Chase. 

Suppose,  for  example,  that  my  opponent  has  hit 
a  ball  over  the  Net,  and  that  its  second  bounce  was 
two  yards  from  the  Dedans-v^^SS. :  this  would  be  called 


CH.  xxix]     COURT,   IMPLEMENTS,   AND  PLAY  199 

"Chase  2."     The  Diagram  will  show  where   it   would 
fall. 

When  we  change  sides,  then  every  stroke  of  mine — 
unless  I  hit  the  ball  into  the  Dedans — will  have  to  be  a 
better  "length  "  than  the  stroke  which  I  left  alone  :  i.e. 
it  will  have  to  fall,  at  its  second  bounce,  less  than  two 
yards  from  the  Back- wall.     If  it  falls  viore   than  two 


i:  >*>  J 

■S  fc  '=0  »      1^     ,0^ 

-nigKt  of    B^LU       .      ^..,,^^--       __  o      ^  / 


T— r 


r 


MAZARO-SIOE  SERVICE-SIDE        5  2    I    '^.^    , 

GALLERIES  //^  :>     %• 

Diagram  15. — The  second  bounce  (or  fall)  of  the  ball  is  two  yards  from 
the  Back-wall,  so  the  Chase  is  called  "Chase  2." 

yards  from  the  Back-wall,  I  shall  lose  the  point.  If  it 
falls  exactly  two  yards  from  the  Back-wall,  then 
"Chase  Off"  will  be  called,  and  neither  my  opponent 
nor  I  will  score  anything. 

By  cutting  the  ball  I  can  make  it  come  down  slick  off 
the  Back-wall  ;  in  other  words  I  can  make  it  fall  near 
the  Back-wall,  at  its  second  bounce ;  I  can  make  a 
better  Chase  (if  my  opponent  leaves  the  ball  alone).     I 


300  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

shall    thus,  by   making   a   smaller    Chase,  cramp   my 
opponent  considerably  when  we  change  sides. 

It  is  as  well  to  remember  that  "  the  smaller  the  number^ 
the  better  the  Chase."  "  Chase  half-a-yard "  is  better 
than  "  Chase  a  yard,"  "  Chase  a  yard  "  (one  yard  from 
the  Back-wall)  is  better  than  "  Chase  2,"  or  "  Chase  2 
and  3 " ;  this  again  is  better  than  "  Chase  6."  Still 
worse  are  the  Last  Gallery,  the  Second  Gallery,  and  the 
Door.  "  Chase  better  than  2  "  will  therefore  be  nearer 
to  the  Back-wall  than  2  (yards),  and  "  Chase  worse  than 
2  "  will  be  further  from  the  Back-wall. 

The  Gallery  nearest  to  you  (as  you  sit  in  the  Dedans^ 
is  called  the  Last  Gallery ;  then  comes  the  Second  ; 
then  the  "  Door,"  then  the  First  Gallery  :  for  "  first's  the 
worse  in  all  the  game,"  except  the  open  Box  where  the 
Marker  stands,  nobly  risking  his  life  (as  ladies  some- 
times seem  to  imagine).  His  "  shooting-box  "  is  called 
the  "  Line." 

After  this — beyond  the  Net — begins  the  Hazard- 
side  of  the  Court :  a  Chase  here,  as  called  by  the 
Marker,  often  sounds  like  "  As  at  the  side."  Here  there 
are  fewer  Chases,  i.  e.  there  are  fewer  balls  than  I  can 
leave  alone  without  losing  the  point.  For  most  of  the 
strokes  at  the  end  of  the  Court  furthest  away  from  you 
are  like  Lawn  Tennis  strokes :  if  I  fail  to  hit  them,  I 
lose  the  point  straight  away. 

"  What  is  the  advantage  of  these  Chases  ? "  I  often 
hear  people  ask. 

In  the  first  place,  they  give  me  a  second  chance  when 
I  have  missed  a  ball  altogether ;  though  I  shall  be 
cramped  during  this  second  chance :  I  shall  have  to  take 
pains  with  every  stroke. 

Secondly,  as  we  change  sides,  my  opponent  and  I  will 
have  a  little  rest.     Lawn  Tennis  sadly  needs  more  of 


CH.  xxix]    COURT,  IMPLEMENTS,  AND  PLAY         201 

these  oases.  I  believe  that  they  prevent  Tennis  from 
having  that  effect  on  the  heart  which  Lawn  Tennis  has 
not  unfrequently  had  in  the  case  of  some  of  its  most 
brilHant  players :  among  the  recent  instances  I  need 
only  mention  Mr.  H.  L.  Doherty. 

Let  me  briefly  give  some  of  the  other  differences 
between  Tennis  and  Lawn  Tennis. 

6.  In  Tennis  one  cannot  stand  outside  the  Court  to 
take  a  stroke,  because  the  Back-walls  and  Side-walls 
are  in  the  way. 

7.  There  is  practically  none  of  that  volleying  up  at 
the  Net,  which  has  done  so  much  to  alter  the  game  of 
Lawn  Tennis  lately  ;  for,  if  one  came  up  to  the  Net, 
one's  opponent  could  "  lob  "  the  ball  over  one's  head  into 
a  Winning  Opening. 

And  now,  in  conclusion,  let  us  see  in  what  respects 
Lawn  Tennis  has  the  advantage  over  Tennis,  and  vice 
versd. 

Lawn  Tennis  (i)  has  a  far  larger  number  of  Courts, 
and  (2)  a  far  larger  number  of  players ;  (3)  it  is  in  the 
open  air ;  and  (4)  it  is  not  very  expensive,  though  the 
cheapness  of  Lawn  Tennis  under  the  very  best  condi- 
tions has  often  been  exaggerated  :  for  new  balls  are  not 
to  be  had  for  nothing,  and  good  Courts  are  not  made  in 
a  day,  nor  are  they  kept  in  order  for  nothing  a  year. 

There  are  these  two  additional  features  of  Lawn  Tennis 
which  many  people  consider  to  be  an  advantage  :  I  offer 
no  opinion  about  the  second  of  them. 

(5)  There  are  many  Lawn  Tennis  Tournaments. 
These  lend  great  interest  to  the  Game,  they  have  a 
splendid  influence  socially,  and  they  give  ladies  some- 
thing to  look  at  in  the  open  air,  and  something  not  un- 
healthy to  talk  about.  Undoubtedly  also  they  raise  the 
standard  of  play.     Many  of  these  and  other  merits  will 


202  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

come  to  Tennis  also,  when  we  get  into  the  habit  of 
organising  more  competitions.  But  Tournaments  have 
also  been  accused  of  breeding  a  large  class  of  idle  pot- 
hunters. 

(6)  Ladies  play  Lawn  Tennis,  and  this  is  most 
excellent  for  the  ladies  ;  it  must  improve  their  health, 
and  therefore  must  improve  the  health  of  the  nation. 
But,  as  some  one  said  not  long  ago,  "  I  like  ladies  to 
play  Lawn  Tennis  ;  but  not  with  me."  This  man  was  no 
misogynist,  nor  even  a  misosphairistikegynist,  but  rather 
a  misosphairistikemigdanthropogynist,  as  the  Germans 
would  probably  say. 

Tennis,  on  the  other  hand,  has  those  many  virtues 
which  we  have  already  discussed  in  the  previous 
Chapter. 

It  is  needless  to  say  that  both  Tennis  and  Racquets 
and  (to  some  extent)  Lawn  Tennis  have  suffered  terribly 
from  the  great  bi-mania,  Bicycling  and  Golf.  But  there 
is  every  sign  that  Tennis  and  Lawn  Tennis  are  now 
asserting  themselves  once  more.  Let  us  hope  that  they 
will  soon  arise  more  vigorous  than  ever,  as  after  a 
refreshing  sleep. 


CHAPTER   XXX 

A  SAMPLE  GAME  TO  ILLUSTRATE  THE  PLAY 

"As  to  the  Game  itself,  a  Person  that  has  never  seen  it  before 
can  make  but  little  out,  except  it  be  any  Curiosity  or  Diversion  to 
him  to  see  three  or  four  Persons  furiously  running  after  a  few  little 
Balls,  and  laboriously  bandying  and  tossing  them  about  from  one 
to  another.  If  this  were  all,  'twere  well  enough,  but  when  he  hears 
the  Marker  calling  Forty,  Love,  and  a  Chase,  and  sees  them 
changing  their  Sides,  and  hears  the  Players  wrangling  and  swear- 
ing about  the  taking  of  Bisks  and  Faults,  and  talking  of  Cuts, 
and  Twists,  and  Forces,  etc.,  he  presently  concludes  there  must  be 
some  wonderful  Secret  in  all  this  ;  and  so  is  resolved  to  satisfy 
himself  a  little  further." — From  '  The  Tricks  of  the  town  laid  open' 
(quoted  in  'Annals  of  Tennis'). 

The  reader  will  find  that  the  scoring  will  be  easier 
to  understand  if,  with  the  Diagram  before  him,  he 
follows  an  imaginary  game  between,  let  us  say,  Jones 
and  the  Professional,  whom  we  will  call  Jim,  in  honour 
of  the  present  Markers  at  Cambridge  and  at  Lord's. 

Jones  is  to  serve,  so  he  stands  on  the  Service-side  of 
the  Court  (the  side  nearer  to  the  Dedans,  where  you  are 
supposed  to  be  sitting).  He  serves  a  ball  over  the  Net, 
but  not  onto  the  side-Penthouse :  so  the  Marker  calls 
"  Fault."  He  now  serves  another  ball :  this  hits  the 
side-Penthouse  and  runs  onto  the  end  Penthouse  (which 
faces  you),  and  then  pitches  just  by  the  Grille.     This  is 

called  a  Pass,  and   does  not   count.      By  the  present 

203 


204  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

rules,  the  marker  still  calls  the  score  as  "One  Fault." 
Jones  now  carelessly  serves  onto  the  Penthouse,  but  the 
ball  pitches  short  of  the  red  line  across  the  Court.  This 
makes  two  Faults,  and  so  Jones  loses  the  first  point. 
The  score  is  "15-love":  Jim  leads. 

Notice  that  the  Marker  calls  first  the  score  of  the 
player  who  won  the  last  stroke,  and  not  (as  in  Lawn 
Tennis)  the  score  of  the  Server. 

Jones  serves  no  more  Faults  after  this. 

Next  he  serves,  and  Jim  returns  his  Service  into  the 
Dedans :  this  makes  a  point  for  Jim,  and  so  the  score 
is  "  30-love  "  :  Jim  leads. 

Then  Jones  serves,  and  Jim  hits  the  ball  into  the  Net 
and  so  loses  the  point.  "15-30"  (Jones'  score  comes 
first,  since  Jones  won  the  last  point). 

Jones'  next  Service  Jim  returns  into  the  corner  of  the 
Court :  Jones  cannot  reach  it,  and  the  ball,  at  its  second 
bounce,  falls  more  than  three  yards  from  the  Dedans. 
The  Marker  calls  "  Chase  worse  than  3."  The  score  is 
still  the  same,  only  now  the  later  score  (Jim's)  comes 
first,  and  we  have  "30-15."  (I  have  always  considered 
this  change  of  order  to  be  a  great  inconvenience  for  the 
spectators.) 

Jim  returns  the  next  service  onto  the  Side- wall  and 
then  over  the  Net :  Jones  hits  the  ball  high  onto  the 
buttress  or  Tambour :  off  the  ball  flies,  at  an  angle,  and 
then  hops  into  the  Gallery  furthest  from  you,  which  is 
a  Winning  Opening :  the  score  is  therefore  "  30-all." 
There  is  a  Chase  to  be  played  out  later  on. 

Jones'  next  Service  is  a  hard  one :  Jim  can  just 
smuggle  it  into  one  of  the  Galleries,  the  second  from  the 
Dedans.  This  will  be  "  Chase  the  Second  Gallery." 
There  are  now  two  Chases,  so  the  players  change  sides 
to  play  them  out.     But  the  score  is  still  "30-alL" 


CH.  XXX]  A   SAMPLE  GAME  205 

Now  it  is  Jim's  turn  to  serve.  After  one  Fault,  he 
serves  all  right,  and  Jones  returns  the  ball  into  the 
corner.  The  Chase  is  "  Worse  than  3  "  ;  and  Jones'  ball 
would  fall,  at  its  second  bounce,  about  5  yards  from  the 
Dedans  (i.  e.  Chase  5).  Jim  leaves  the  ball  alone,  and 
it  falls  at  Chase  5,  which  is  not  so  good  as  "  Chase  worse 
than  3  " :  thus  Jones  loses  the  point,  and  the  score  is 
"40-30":  Jim  leads. 

Next,  Jones  has  to  play  for  "  Chase  the  Second 
Gallery  "  :  he  returns  Jim's  Service  into  the  Last  Gallery, 
which  is  nearer  to  the  Dedans  than  the  Second  Gallery 
is,  and  therefore  a  better  Chase.  Thus  he  wins  the 
Chase,  and  the  score  is  "  Deuce." 

Jim's  next  Serve  Jones  tries  to  return  by  volleying  it 
into  the  Dedans:  Jim  volleys  the  ball,  and  gets  it  over 
the  Net,  but  it  hits  a  window  and  so  is  out-of-Court. 
Jim  loses  the  point,  and  the  score  is  "  Vantage " :  Mr. 
Jones  wins. 

Jim's  next  Service  pitches  just  in  the  very  Nick,  i.  e. 
where  the  Back -wall  meets  the  floor.  Jones  has  no 
chance  of  returning  it,  and  so  Jim  brings  the  score 
to  "Deuce." 

The  next  round  (or  "  rest,"  as  they  call  it)  Jim  finishes 
by  a  stroke  into  the  Grille.  This  gives  "  Vantage  "  to 
Jim. 

Jim  now  serves  another  point,  and  thus  gets  the  first 
game. 

He  follows  with  the  next  five  games,  and  thus  wins 
a  love-set,  and  claims  a  shilling  from  Jones ;  who 
for  the  next  Set  prefers  to  receive  Odds,  viz.  Half- 
fifteen  and  a  Bisque,  i.e.  Fifteen  (one  point)  in  every 
other  game,  and  an  extra  point  which  he  can  claim 
at  any  time  during  the  Set. 


CHAPTER  XXXI 

RULES   AND   ETIQUETTE 


THE   LAWS   OF   TENNIS 

(known   in  AMERICA  AS  COURT  TENNIS) 

The  following  Laws  differ  very  little,  except  in  their 
wording,  from  the  Laws  in  force  at  Lord's  Club  (the 
M.C.C.),  as  published  in  the  Encyclopaedia  of  Sport 
(Article  on  "  Tennis,"  by  Mr.  G.  E.  A.  Ross).  Extracts 
from  Mr.  Julian  Marshall's  Laws  are  given  in  small  type. 
For  suggestions  of  various  reforms,  see  Chapter  XLIV. 

It  is  requested  that  any  suggestions  as  to  alterations 
be  addressed  to  me  at  King's  College,  Cambridge. 


IMPLEMENTS   AND    CHOICE   OF    SIDES. 

1.  Balls  and  Rackets. — The  balls  shall  not  be  less  than  2\  inches, 
and  not  more  than  2|  inches,  in  diameter;  and  shall  not  be  less 
than  2\  oz.  and  not  more  than  2|  oz.,  in  weight. 

Note. — There  is  no  restriction  as  to  the  shape  or  size  of  the 
rackets. 

2.  Choice  of  Sides. — {a)  The  choice  of  sides  at  the  beginning  of 
the  first  Set  is  determined  by  spin  of  the  racket. 

{b)  In  subsequent  Sets  of  a  series,  the  players  shall  begin  each 
Set  on  the  sides  on  which  they  finished  the  Set  before  it. 

206 


CH.XXXI]  RULES  AND  ETIQUETTE  207 


THE   SCORING   OF   POINTS,    GAMES,    AND   SETS. 

In  Tennis  the  points,  games,  and  sets  are  scored  as  in 
Lawn  Tennis,  with  certain  exceptions  (see  above). 

The  game  is  won  by  that  player  who  first  wins  4 
points,  which  are  scored  as  "  1 5,"  "  30,"  "  40,"  and  "game." 
If  both  players  have  reached  40  (the  score  being  then 
called  "  deuce  "),  it  is  the  invariable  rule  to  play  "deuce 
and  vantage,"  as  in  Lawn  Tennis. 

The  set  is  won  by  that  player  who  first  wins  6  games. 
If,  however,  both  players  have  won  5  games  (the  score 
being  5  games  all),  then  it  is  rather  commoner  to  play 
"deuce  and  vantage  games,"  than  to  play  "sudden 
death,"  The  choice  between  the  longer  and  shorter 
ending  depends  on 

{a)  the  rule  or  custom  of  the  individual  Court  or  Club 
or  Competition  ;  or  on 

{b)  an  agreement  made  between  the  players  them- 
selves ;   or  on 

{c)  the  decision  of  the  player  who  has  lost  the  last 
game. 

If  a  player  wins  any  six  games  running  in  a  set,  he  is 
said  to  win  a  Love  Set,  and  his  opponent  should  pay  to 
the  Marker  a  fine  of  one  shilling  (twenty-five  cents). 

A  Match  may  be  for  the  best  2  out  of  3  Sets,  or — 
more  usually — for  the  best  3  out  of  5  Sets. 

In  contrast  to  the  scoring  of  Lawn  Tennis  the  follow- 
ing points  are  noticeable  : — 

(i)  The  score  called  first  (e.  g.  "15-30")  is  not  the 
Server's  score,  but  the  score  of  the  player  who  won  the 
last  stroke.  When,  however,  the  players  have  changed 
sides,  the  higher  score  (e.g.  "30-15")  is  always  called 
first. 


2o8  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

(ii)  For  the  "  Chases,"  which  are  unknown  in  Lawn 
Tennis,  see  above. 

(iii)  The  "  Pass  "  counts  as  a  let,  i.  e.  it  does  not  count 
at  all,  and  thus  corresponds  to  the  Lawn  Tennis  Service 
which  hits  the  top  of  the  Net  and  falls  in  the  right  Court. 
A  "  Pass  "  does  not  annul  a  previous  "  Fault,"  as  it  used 
to  do. 

SINGLE  POINTS. 

Either  player,  whether  serving  or  receiving  the  Service 
("  striking  out "),  always  wins  a  stroke,  and  scores  one 
point,  when  his  opponent — 

{a)  strikes  the  ball,  while  it  is  in  play,  with  any  part 
of  his  clothes  or  his  person,  including  his  hand  ;  or, 

(J?)  strikes  the  ball,  while  it  is  in  play,  with  his  racket, 
but  either  does  not  return  it  over  the  Net,  or 

{c)  returns  it  over  the  Net  but  "  out  of  Court,"  i.  e. 
above  the  Play-line  or  Tell-tale,  or 

{d)  returns  it  over  the  Net  so  hard  that  it  comes 
back  again  over  the  Net  into  his  own  Court  before  its  first 
bounce ;  or 

{e)  returns  it  after  having  hit  it  once  already,  or  flings 
it  after  holding  it  on  his  racket. 

The  Server  always  wins  a  stroke,  and  scores  one  point, 
when 

(a)  he  serves  a  ball  which  his  opponent  fails  to  return 
(unless  this  ball  falls  at  a  Chase  on  the  Hazard-side). 
This  will  include  a  Service  which  bounces  first  on  the 
right  portion  of  the  floor,  and  then  into  the  Grille  or  into 
the  Winning  Gallery ; 

(J?)  he  makes  a  stroke  which  his  opponent  fails  to 
return  (unless,  again,  this  stroke  falls  at  a  Chase  on  the 
Hazard-side) ;  this  will  include  a  stroke  which  enters  the 
Grille  or  the  Winning  Gallery  while  in  play ; 


CH.  xxxi]  RULES  AND  ETIQUETTE  209 

{c)  he  wins  a  Chase  ; 

{d)  his  opponent  loses  a  Chase. 

The  Server  always  loses  a  point  (which  is  scored  to 
the  "  striker  out  "),  when  he 

{a)  serves  two  faults  in  succession,  even  if  one  "  Pass  " 
or  more  should  intervene  ;  or 

[b)  allows  his  opponent  to  strike  a  ball  into  the 
Dedans ;  or 

ic)  allows  his  opponent  to  win  a  Chase  ;  or 

{d)  himself  loses  a  Chase. 

THE    SERVICE. 

The  ball  is  always  served  from  the  same  half  of  the 
Court  (the  Service  Side),  and  may  be  served  from  any 
spot  in  this  half. 

The  ball  must  be  served  either  directly  onto  the  roof 
of  the  (left)  side  Penthouse,  or  onto  the  wall  above  it ; 
but  it  must  strike  the  roof  of  this  Penthouse,  so  as  to  rise 
into  the  air,  some  authorities  say,  and  must  hit  it  on  the 
further  (or  Hazard)  half  of  the  Court.  It  must  then  pitch 
on  the  floor  within  the  proper  space,  i.  e.  in  the  corner 
bounded  by  the  Pass-line  and  the  Winning  Gallery  line. 
Otherwise,  it  is  a  Pass  or  else  a  Fault. 

A  Pass  is  a  Service  which  goes  on  the  Grille  side  of 
the  Pass-line.     A  Pass  does  not  cancel  a  previous  Fault. 

The  Striker-out  may  volley  a  Service  before  it  reaches 
the  floor,  unless  either 

{a)  "  Pass  "  has  already  been  called,  or 

{b)  the  ball  has  touched  any  part  of  the  Penthouse  on 
the  Grille  side  of  the  Pass-line,  or 

{c)  there  is  danger  of  injuring  the  unexpectant  Server. 

A  Pass  may  not  be  returned  ;  but  a  ball  served,  which  has  not 
gone  across  the  Pass-line  or  the  Penthouse,  may  be  volleyed, 
16 


2IO  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

although,  if  untouched,  it  might  have  dropped  in  the  Pass-Court. 
If  a  Pass  touch  the  Striker-out,  or  if  a  Service  (before  it  has  dropped) 
touch  him,  when  standing  with  both  feet  in  the  Pass-Court  and  not 
having  attempted  to  strike  the  ball,  it  is  still  counted  as  a  Pass. 

A  Fault  is  a  ball  which  does  not  strike  on  the  left 
Penthouse  on  the  Hazard-side,  or  which  does  not  pitch 
on  the  floor  within  the  proper  space.  Two  Faults  score 
a  point  against  the  Server. 

The  Server  must  not  serve  until  his  opponent  be  ready. 
Should  he  do  so,  then  his  opponent  may  claim  to  have 
the  Service  over  again  (i.  e.  may  claim  a  Let),  unless  he 
has  tried  to  take  the  Service.  A  Service  to  an  unready 
opponent  annuls  a  previous  Fault. 

If  the  Service  be  good,  and  fall,  at  its  second  bounce, 
nearer  to  the  Net  than  the  Winning  Gallery  line,  or  into 
any  Hazard-side  Gallery  except  the  Winning  Gallery,  a 
Chase  shall  be  called. 

In  Tennis,  as  in  Lawn  Tennis,  if  a  ball  pitches  or  falls 
actually  on  a  line  on  the  floor,  the  player  who  has  hit  that 
ball  has  the  benefit  of  the  doubt. 

Continuation  of  Service. — The  Server  continues  to  serve  until  two 
Chases  be  made,  or  one  Chase  when  the  score  of  either  player  is  at 
forty  or  vantage  :  the  players  then  change  sides,  the  Server  becomes 
Striker-out,  and  the  Striker-out  becomes  Server. 

CHASES. 

A  Chase  is  a  stroke  not  touched  by  the  racket  or 
person  of  the  player  on  whose  side  of  the  Net  it  is  made  : 
a  stroke  to  be  left  undecided  until  the  players  shall  have 
changed  sides. 

The  players  change  sides  when  two  Chases  have  been 
called,  or  when  one  Chase  has  been  called  and  the  game 
is  within  one  point  of  being  finished  {40-x,  or  vantage). 
No  Chase  can  be  carried  on  into  the  next  game. 

A  Chase  is  called  when  a  ball  in  play  either  enters  a 


CH.  XXXI]  RULES  AND  ETIQUETTE  211 

Gallery,  except  the  Winning  Gallery,  or  hits  a  Gallery- 
post,  untouched  by  the  player  on  that  side,  or  else,  under 
the  same  conditions,  falls  at  its  second  bounce  onto  the 
floor,  except  the  floor  beyond  the  Winning-Gallery  line 
on  the  Hazard-side. 

The  Chase  is  called  according  to  the  Gallery  or  the 
spot  where  it  falls  at  its  second  bounce. 

The  nearer  it  falls  to  the  Back-wall,  the  better  the 
Chase  is. 

If  the  ball  falls,  at  its  second  bounce,  on  any  spot 
between  the  lines  (which  mark  the  yards  etc.),  the  Chase 
is  called  better  or  worse  than  the  line  nearest  to  which 
the  ball  falls.  But,  except  for  "  better  than  Half-a-yard  " 
and  "  Hazard-side  better  than  Half-a-yard,"  Chases  are 
not  called  better  or  worse  than  the  half-lines. 

If  a  ball  pitches  upon  another  ball,  the  Chase  is  where 
that  other  ball  was  lying, 

A  player  wins  a  Chase  either  by  hitting  the  ball  into  a 
Winning  Opening,  or  by  making  a  better  Chase  than 
the  Chase  which  his  opponent  made. 

A  player  neither  wins  nor  loses  the  point,  and  "  Chase 
off"  is  called,  if  his  ball  falls  on  the  same  line  or  into  the 
same  Gallery  as  the  Chase  which  is  being  played  for. 
The  Chase  is  not  played  for  again  (in  England  and 
America.     In  France  it  is). 

If  a  player  strikes  a  ball  which  pitches  in  the  opposite 
half  of  the  Court  and  then  returns  over  the  Net,  "  Chase 
the  Line  "  is  called. 

Chases,  how  marked. — When  a  ball  in-play  (on  either  side  of  the 
Net,  not  being  that  on  which  the  Striker  is  standing) 

(a)  falls  on  any  part  of  the  floor,  except  on  or  beyond  the  Service- 

line  ;  or 

(b)  enters  any  Gallery  except  the  Winning  Gallery  ;  or 
{/)  touches  a  Gallery-post  ; 

it  is  marked  as  a  Chase, 


212  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

(a)  at  that  Line  on  the  floor  on  which  it  fell;  or 

(j8)  better  or  worse  than  that  Line  on  the  floor  which  is  nearest 
to  the  point  at  which  it  fell  ;  or 

(y)  at  that  Gallery  the  post  of  which  it  touched  ;  except  as  pro- 
vided in  the  following  Laws. 

Note  (a). — A  ball  in-play,  which  touches  the  Net-post  and  drops 
on  the  side  opposed  to  the  Striker,  is  marked  a  Chase  at  the  Line 
on  the  side  on  which  it  drops. 

No/e  {b). — A  ball  in-play  which  enters  a  Gallery  is  marked  a  Chase 
at  that  Gallery  which  it  enters,  notwithstanding  that  it  may  have 
touched  an  adjacent  Gallery-post  without  touching  the  floor  in  the 
interim. 

Note  (c). — The  Gallery-lines  on  the  floor  correspond  and  are 
equivalent  to  the  Galleries  of  which  they  bear  the  names. 

1 8.  A  ball  dropping  or  falling  in  the  Net,  or  bounding  over  the 
Net  after  dropping,  how  marked. — When  a  ball  in-play 

(a)  drops  or  falls  in  the  Net  on  the  side  opposed  to  the  Striker ; 
or 

(6)  drops  on  the  floor  on  the  side  opposed  to  the  Striker,  and, 

bounding  over  the  Net,  falls  on  that  side  of  it  from  which 

it  was  struck,  whether  it  touch  the  Net  in  its  bound  or  not; 

it  is  marked  a  Chase  at  the  Line  on  the  side  opposed  to  the  Striker. 

Chase  marked  in  error  is  annulled. — If  by  an  error  three  Chases 
have  been  marked,  or  two  Chases  when  the  score  of  either  player  is 
at  forty  or  advantage,  the  last  Chase  in  each  case  is  annulled. 

The  spectators  in  the  Dedans  have  the  right,  or  even 
the  duty,  to  correct  mistakes  either  in  the  Marker's  scor- 
ing of  points,  or  in  the  Marker's  re-calling  of  Chases ; 
but  not  to  correct  mistakes  in  the  Marker's  first  calHng 
of  Chases,  or  his  decision  as  to  whether  a  Chase  has 
been  won  or  lost. 


LONG   FIVES. 

There  are  no  Chases  in  Long  Fives. 

Long  Fives  is  either  for  8  points  a  game,  or  for  ii 
points  a  game,  according  as  the  players  decide  whether 
the  Match  shall  be  for  the  best  out  of  3  or  for  the  best 
out  of  5  games. 

The  players  decide  whether  a  ball  hit  into  any 
Gallery  or  Opening,  except  the  Winning  Openings,  and 


CH.  xxxi]  RULES  AND  ETIQUETTE  213 

a  ball  making  a  Chase  of  the  Last  Gallery  or  any  worse 
Chase,  and  a  ball  making  any  Chase  on  the  Hazard-side, 
shall  count 

{a)  as  a  Let,  or  else 

{b)  as  a  point  against  the  striker. 

The  players  change  sides  after  each  game.  It  is  usual 
for  the  player  on  the  Service-side  to  concede  4  or  even 
5  points  of  the  game  to  the  player  on  the  Hazard-side. 

GENERAL  RULES. 

A  ball  which  has  either  entered,  or  hit  the  post  of, 
or  hit  some  article  within,  the  Dedans,  or  the  Grille,  or 
any  of  the  Galleries,  is  counted  as  having  entered  that 
Gallery,  and  may  not  be  struck  afterwards.  The  settle- 
ment of  details  is  best  left  to  the  special  rules  of 
individual  Clubs. 

The  Marker  shall  call  Passes  and  Faults  as  soon  as 
possible  after  they  have  been  made,  and,  otherwise,  shall 
call  "  Play  "  if  there  is  likely  to  be  any  doubt ;  he  shall 
call  the  state  of  the  game  after  each  point ;  he  shall  call 
the  Chases  when  they  are  made,  tell  the  players  when 
they  are  to  change  sides,  then  repeat  the  Chase  before 
each  Service,  and  finally  decide  on  the  winning  or 
losing  of  each  Chase. 

His  decision  is  always  final,  unless  both  players,  before 
the  Match,  have  already  agreed  to  have  a  Referee,  or 
unless  one  player,  before  the  Match,  requires  an  appeal 
to  the  majority  in  the  Dedans,  The  Marker  himself 
may  ask  the  opinion  of  the  Dedans  ;  but  no  appeal  is 
allowed  after  the  play  has  begun  again. 

It  is  usual  for  players  to  correct  the  score  and  even 
the  Chases  by  mutual  agreement 


214  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 


DOUBLE   OR    FOUR-HANDED   MATCHES. 

The  Laws  are  the  same  as  for  Singles,  except  that — 

One  partner  of  one  pair  shall  be  Server  or  Striker-out 
against  one  partner  of  the  other  pair,  in  alternate  games; 
although  it  is  usual  to  allow  the  Striker-out  to  leave  any 
ball  to  his  partner. 

If  the  opposing  pairs  cannot  agree  as  to  which  player 
shall  be  Server  or  Striker-out  against  which  player,  then 
the  toss,  or  the  spin  of  the  racket,  decides  which  pair  is 
to  have  the  choice.  It  is  advisable  to  change  in  alternate 
sets. 

For  ODDS  OR  HANDICAPS,  see  Chapter  XXXII. 


ETIQUETTE. 

I.  //  is  etiquette  for  you,  as  a  player — 

Not  to  force  for  the  Dedans  when  you  are  between 
the  Net  and  the  Line  of  the  Last  Gallery  on  the  Hazard- 
side,  unless — 

(i)  you  either  send  a  Boasted  Force,  or 

(2)  are  taking  a  Service,  or 

(3)  are  absolutely  sure  that  you  will  not  hit  the  ball 

near  your  opponent. 

N.B. — The  modern  tendency  to  force  straight  from 
close  to  the  Net  is  despicable.  Some  Courts  have  a 
positive  rule  against  such  forcing. 

Not  to  serve  before  your  opponent  is  ready. 

Not  to  baulk  your  opponent  in  any  way:  for  example, 
by  dawdling  before  you  serve. 

Not  to  swear,  or  to  use  objectionable  language,  which 
will  include  any  expression  of  anger  at  the  decision  of 
the  Marker  or  Referee. 


CH.  XXXI]  RULES  AND  ETIQUETTE  215 

Not  to  refuse  to  take  proper  Odds.  The  Marker  is 
usually  the  best  judge. 

2.  It  is  etiquette  for  you,  as  a  spectator — 

(i)  To  refrain  from  any  noise  that  may  baulk  a  player 
just  before  he  serves  or  during  play  ;  and  especially  to 
refrain  from  making  audible  remarks,  from  shifting  your 
chair  or  feet,  from  striking  lights,  etc.  During  the  actual 
play  of  important  matches  there  should  be  silence,  except 
for  the  very  lowest  whisper. 

(2)  Not  to  give  either  player  any  advice  during  the 
Match. 

And,  possibly, 

(3)  To  correct  any  mistake  in  the  points,  or  in  the 
second  calling  of  the  Chases,  but  not  in  the  first  calling 
of  the  Chases,  nor  in  the  decision  as  to  the  winning  or 
losing  of  Chases. 


CHAPTER  XXXII 

HANDICAPS 

In  this  Chapter,  as  in  the  Chapter  on  Handicaps  in 
Racquets,  we  shall  call  the  stronger  player  F  (for  First), 
and  the  weaker  player  S  (for  Second).  S  should  be 
ready  to  take  his  proper  Handicap,  and  F  should  be 
ready  to  give  it.  Should  S  refuse  to  take  it,  then  F 
can  give  some  Handicap  voluntarily.  He  can  refrain 
from  one  of  his  strongest  strokes  :  for  example,  his 
severest  Service  or  his  Force.  But  it  should  be  an 
understood  thing  that  players  who  are  unequal  should 
equalise  their  standard  by  some  form  of  odds.  There  is 
no  reason  why  it  should  be  fixed  :  indeed,  it  is  more 
satisfactory  to  let  it  rise  or  fall  according  to  the  results 
of  the  last  Match.  If  this  plan  be  adopted,  a  player 
need  never  complain  that  he  is  receiving  too  much  or 
too  little.  Let  the  results  of  the  game  speak  for  them- 
selves and  work  their  own  reform. 

An  exchange  of  Handicaps  is  also  desirable.  Let  one 
player  give  the  other  "  All-the-Openings  "  ;  let  the  other 
give  a  certain  number  of  points  to  compensate  for  this. 
Exchanges  of  Handicaps  improve  one's  versatility  and 
resource.  Mr.  Julian  Marshall's  list  of  equivalents 
should  be  most  useful. 

"  Round  Services  =  Half-fifteen. 

216 


CH.  xxxii]  HANDICAPS  217 

Half-the-Court-Barred  =  Half-thirty  and  a  Bisque. 

All-the-walls  Barred  =  Forty. 

Side-walls  Barred  =  Half-thirty  and  a  Bisque. 

All  Opeyiings  Barred  =  Half-fifteen  and  a  Bisque. 

Winning  Openings  Barred  =  Half-fifteen  for  a  Bisque." 

1.  Points. 

S  may  receive 

Half-fifteen,  i.  e.  fifteen  (the  first  point)  in  every  second 
game  in  each  Set. 

Fifteen,  i.  e.  fifteen  (the  first  point)  in  every  game  in 
each  Set. 

Half-thirty,  i.e.  fifteen  (the  first  point)  in  every  odd 
game,  and  thirty  (the  first  two  points)  in  every  second 
or  even  game,  in  each  Set. 

Thirty,  i.  e.  thirty  (the  first  two  points)  in  every  game 
in  each  Set. 

Half-forty,  i.e.  thirty  (the  first  two  points)  in  every 
odd  game,  and  forty  (the  first  three  points)  in  every 
even  game,  in  each  Set. 

Forty,  i.  e.  forty  (the  first  three  points)  in  every  game 
in  each  Set. 

2.  Bisques. 

Either  F  or  S  is  allowed  to  claim  one  point  or  two 
points  during  a  Set.     These  points  are  called  Bisques. 

N.B. — A  Bisque  may  be  used  to  increase  odds,  as 
when  S  receives  1 5  and  a  Bisque,  or  to  diminish  Odds, 
as  when  S  receives  15  for  a  Bisque,  F  receiving  the 
Bisque. 

If  there  is  a  Chase,  then  the  Bisque  may  be  claimed 
either  before  or  after  the  changing  of  sides. 

The  Bisque  may  not  be  claimed  after  the  ball  has 
been  served,  nor  after  one  Fault  has  been  served. 

Handicaps  by  Points  are  simple.     They  have  not  yet 


2i8  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

been  brought  down  to  the  fineness  of  Lawn  Tennis 
Handicaps.  They  still  are  only — Half-fifteen  ;  Fifteen  ; 
Half-thirty ;  Thirty ;  and  so  on.  One  cannot  "  owe " 
Points :  the  system  of  Chases  makes  this  impossible. 
On  the  other  hand,  one  has  the  Bisque,  in  the  use  of 
which  considerable  skill  is  required.  Mr.  Marshall 
makes  some  excellent  remarks  about  the  taking  of  the 
Bisque.  It  is  a  point  that  can  be  claimed  by  the  player 
whenever  he  thinks  it  best  to  claim  it 

But  the  Handicap  by  Points  and  Bisques  is  not  always 
by  itself  enough  to  produce  a  good  game  between  two 
uneven  players ;  and  a  Marker  may  ruin  his  play  by 
always  sending  easy  balls  to  beginners.  Of  course  such 
practice  gives  him  control  in  placing  the  ball.  As  we 
have  seen,  it  is  harder  to  send  an  easy  ball  that  the 
beginner  must  return  than  a  hard  ball  that  the  beginner 
cannot  return.  In  the  former  case  the  Marker  has  to 
confine  his  stroke  to  a  very  narrow  space ;  he  must  have 
mastery  over  the  ball.  What  we  need  is  a  system  by 
which  two  players  can  meet,  not  merely  on  equal  terms, 
but  so  that  each  shall  play  up  his  hardest,  and  improve 
his  play  where  it  is  weakest. 

3.  Lo7ig  Fives  is  the  name  given  to  the  game  in  which 
the  Openings  (except  the  Winning  Openings)  are  dis- 
regarded. At  Long  Fives  one  gets  more  exercise,  and 
more  continuous  exercise  than  at  the  ordinary  game. 
The  rules  for  it  are  to  be  found  in  the  rules  of  play. 

4.  Handicap  by  Implements. 

This  form  of  Handicap  has  gone  out  of  fashion. 
Personally  I  find  a  Cricket  bat  to  be  the  best  practice. 
It  develops  the  wrist  and  the  arm,  though  it  may  strain 
them  also.  It  involves  a  very  accurate  timing  of  the 
ball,  and  a  very  accurate  position  of  the  body,  and  a 
very   full   swing.     Pettitt   is  an   adept    with    a    small 


CH.  xxxii]  HANDICAPS  219 

specially-shaped  piece  of  wood  :  I  believe  that  the 
original  piece  of  wood  was  part  of  a  chair.  Needless  to 
say,  such  an  implement  compels  one  to  be  extremely 
careful.  An  inch  or  two  of  misjudgment,  and  one's 
stroke  is  a  failure.  Older  players  played  with  some 
other  object,  as  a  soda-water  bottle.  We  hear  also  of 
a  player  who  undertook  to  jump  into  a  tub  between 
each  two  strokes.  Another  went  through  a  Match  with 
a  heavy  military  equipment.  Barre  walked  over  forty 
miles  before  a  Match  in  which  he  gave  very  heavy 
Odds. 

A  variety  of  play  is  that  one  of  the  players  should 
catch  the  ball  with  both  hands,  or  with  one  hand,  and 
throw  it  from  the  place  where  he  has  made  the  catch. 
If  he  is  obliged  to  throw  it  with  his  left  hand,  he  will 
not  only  improve  his  judgment,  but  will  also  exercise 
that  side  of  his  body. 

5.  The  stronger  player  may  be  cut  off  from  one  or  more 
of  his  strokes. 

F  may  be  forbidden  to  volley  the  Service,  or  may  be 
forbidden  to  volley  at  all,  except  when  defending  some 
Opening ;  or  he  may  be  forbidden  to  half-volley. 

F  may  be  forbidden  to  force  into  one  or  more  of  the 
Openings,  or  to  hit  the  ball  into  any  Opening.  Of 
course  the  ball  which  he  hits  into  any  Opening  must 
count  as  a  stroke  against  him. 

Or  he  may  be  forbidden  to  serve  severely.  Thus  the 
Service  must  hit  both  Penthouses :  this  is  called  the  all- 
round  Service.  Or  one  Fault  may  count  as  two  Faults. 
This  is  a  Handicap  which  Lawn  Tennis  players  should 
adopt  more  freely. 

Or  the  following  strokes  may  count  against  F: — 

(i)  If  he  hits  a  ball  full  onto  any  wall. 

(2)  If  he  hits  a  ball  full  onto  the  Back-wall ; 


220  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

(3)  Or  onto  the  Side-walls  ; 

(4)  Or  onto  one  Side-wall. 

Or  if  he  hits  the^ball  onto  any  of  the  above  while  the 
ball  is  still  in  play,  i.  e.  if  he  hits  the  ball  onto  any  of 
them  before  it  has  bounced  twice. 

"  Touch-no-walls  "  is  the  severest  of  the  Handicaps. 
If  any  of  F's  strokes  hit  any  wall  while  the  ball  is  still 
in  play,  i.  e.  before  the  second  bounce,  they  count  against 
F;  S  leaves  alone  a  ball  which  he  thinks  will  hit  a  wall. 
This  is  the  best  practice  for  Markers  in  their  play  with  a 
beginner ;  for  they  have  to  be  in  a  very  accurate  pose 
in  order  to  get  control  of  the  ball. 

Or  one  half  of  the  Court  may  be  forbidden  to  F. 
Either  the  first  bounce  counts,  or  else  the  second  bounce. 
This  gives  F  practice  in  placing  the  ball,  at  will,  down 
the  sides  or  across  the  Court.  First  he  may  have  one 
side  forbidden  him ;  and  then  the  other  side.  Or  the 
Court  may  be  divided  cross-wise,  at  the  Last  Gallery 
Chase-lines. 

6.  Or  it  may  be  agreed  that  all  Chases  which  he 
makes,  if  they  be  worse  than  a  certain  Chase  (the  Last 
Gallery  is  the  commonest),  shall  count  against  him.  If 
he  wishes  to  practise  cutting  the  ball  heavily,  and  getting 
the  length  of  the  Court,  he  should  agree  that  all  his 
strokes  that  fall  worse  than  Chase  3  shall  count  against 
him  ;  so  that  all  Chases  which  his  opponent  makes  shall 
count  as  Chase  3,  except  of  course  those  Chases  which 
of  themselves  are  better. 

7.  The  above  Handicaps  may  be  combined  in  various 
ways,  or  may  be  exchanged.  A  good  player  can  give  a 
very  bad  player  "  Touch-no- Walls,"  and  "  All-round 
Service,"  and  Thirty. 

8.  Last,  but  not  least,  left-handed  play  is  worth 
practising.    One  disadvantage  of  Tennis  is  that  it  exer- 


CH.  xxxii]  HANDICAPS  221 

cises  the  right  side  more  than  the  left.  It  is  true  that  it 
exercises  the  left  to  some  extent  if  the  strokes  be  made 
with  a  proper  swing.  But  certainly  it  should  be  supple- 
mented by  special  left-handed  play. 

With  regard  to  the  Scoring  of  15-0,  for  the  first  point 
(instead  of  i-o,  as  at  Racquets),  this  was  perhaps  because 
in  France  the  Chases  were  scored  up  to  14,  and  it  might 
have  been  confusing  to  have  the  Score  "  1-2  (  =  Fifteen- 
Thirty),  Chase  i  and  2."  Apparently  at  one  time  the 
Score  went  thus:  "15,  30,  45,  Game." 

No  Chase,  it  will  be  seen,  is  carried  on  from  one  game 
into  the  next.  The  players  change  sides  in  time  to 
prevent  this,  or  when  two  Chases  have  been  made. 

The  Chases  used  to  be  reckoned  not  where  the  ball 
fell  at  its  second  bounce,  but  where  it  stopped  rolling. 
In  the  modern  game  this  would  make  most  Chases 
"  Chase  the  Line  ! "  No  wonder  the  ancient  players  hit 
softly,  if  Chases  were  scored  in  this  way. 


CHAPTER   XXXIII 

THE  GRIP  AND  THE  STROKES 

The  Grip  of  the  Racket. — The  Tennis  racket  may  be 
held  nearly  in  the  same  way  as  the  Racquet  or  Squash 
racket.  The  Illustration  shows  a  good  average  grip. 
Here,  as  at  Racquets,  the  question  arises  :  Shall  one 
change  the  position  of  the  fingers  with  respect  to  the 
handle,  or  shall  one  maintain  a  constant  "  habit "  ? 

The  distance  of  the  hand  from  the  face  of  the  racket 
should  certainly  be  altered  according  to  circumstances. 
There  are  some  Services  (see  Chapter  XXXIV)  for 
which  the  right  place  of  the  fingers  is  quite  close  to  the 
racket's  face :  thus  "  Punch "  Fairs  brings  the  fingers 
near  to  its  face,  in  an  almost  "  Pingpongian  "  degree. 
Latham,  for  his  Side-wall  Service,  does  not  let  his  fingers 
come  anywhere  near  to  the  end  of  the  handle.  For 
some  strokes  sharp  off  the  Back-wall,  and  for  some 
severe  Volleys,  a  similar  "clubbing"  of  the  implement 
may  be  useful,  especially  if  one  has  a  weak  wrist. 

As  to  the  exact  pose  of  the  fingers,  they  should  not 
be  huddled  together,  but  should  be  (like  the  toes  of  the 
foot)  allowed  some  separate  action.  At  the  moment  of 
striking  the  ball,  or,  rather,  just  before  that  moment,  they 
should  hold  the  handle  firmly  (far  more  firmly  than  at 
Racquets).    This  is  certain.    But  shall  the  handle  always 

222 


Fig.  35. — A  Tennis  Grip. 


(See  page  222.) 


Fig.  36. — A  Correct  Backhand  Stroke.     (Seldom  seen  in  play.) 

(See  page  229.) 


CH.  xxxiii]      THE   GRIP  AND   THE  STROKES  223 

go  across  the  middle  section  of  the  first  finger  (as  in 
Photograph  VIII,  of  the  Squash-Tennis  grip)?  Or 
shall  it  go  thus  for  a  Backhand  stroke,  but,  for  a  Fore- 
hand stroke,  across  the  section  nearer  to  the  thumb  ?  Or 
shall  it  always  go  across  this  larger  section  ? 

If  one  decides  to  use  different  grips  for  Forehanders 
and  Backhanders,  one  should  make  the  change  easy  by 
practice  of  it  outside  the  Court.  One  should  change  the 
grip  by  supporting  the  handle  from  behind  with  the 
thumb,  when  one  takes  a  Backhand  Volley  high  in  the 
air.  We  have  seen  already  that  Burke  habitually  uses 
this  support  of  the  thumb  for  all  Lawn  Tennis  Back- 
handers, and  that  Latham  uses  it  for  all  strokes  and 
Services  at  Racquets, 

Before  and  after  strokes,  the  handle  need  not  be 
tightly  squeezed,  but  the  head  of  the  racket  should  not 
be  allowed  to  drop.  It  should  be  kept  at  or  above  the 
level  of  the  knee,  if  not  raised  to  the  hand-mirror  height. 

The  Strokes  in  general. — It  has  seemed  to  me  more 
and  more  certain  every  year  that  for  Tennis,  before  and 
after  Strokes,  one  needs  less  alertness  than  for  Racquets. 
Undoubtedly  one  stoops  further  down  during  many 
ordinary  strokes,  and  therefore  the  "recovery  "  might  well 
be  somewhat  later.  But  anyhow  there  appears  less 
necessity  for  a  rapid  regaining  of  weight-balance,  and  of 
position  in  the  Court,  during  the  rally.  And  while  one 
is  hitting  the  ball  one  need  not  possess  the  same  freedom 
and  litheness  and  snap.  There  is  more  tightness,  stiff- 
ness, set-ness.  The  whole  arm — nay  almost  the  whole 
side  of  the  body — seems  to  form  nearly  one  rigid  piece 
of  mechanism  together  with  the  heavy  racket  itself. 
Hence  when  one  returns  to  brisk  Singles  at  Racquets 
one  has  to  subdivide  one's  arm  and  wrist  into  more  inde- 


224  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

pendent  parts — a  task  which  recently  (February,  1902) 
Latham  was  finding  extremely  difficult,  in  view  of  his 
Championship  Match  with  Brown. 

But  this  rigidity  is  not  always  necessary.  Pettitt  is 
always  absolutely  free  from  it. 

Nor  need  one  imagine  that  one  should  slice  or  cut 
every  ball  that  comes  to  one.  With  many  of  the  hardest 
returns  one  must  be  only  too  pleased  to  get  the  ball 
back  somehow.  And  the  hard  Force  and  the  useful 
stroke  for  the  Nick  extort  no  cut. 

Nor  must  one  always  stoop.  The  modern  player  does, 
it  is  true,  come  down  with  his  weight  on  the  ball.  But 
often  and  often  to  stoop  would  not  be  to  conquer. 

Simple  Forehand  and  Backhand  Strokes. — The  general 
rules  for  positions  and  movements  before  and  during  and 
after  strokes  (see  Part  II)  will  apply  here,  except  that 
here  the  ball  frequently  is  further  off  from  the  player,  and 
the  player  will  not  be  so  erect.  But  the  sideway  position 
of  the  feet  (facing  the  direction  in  which  the  ball  will 
come)  must  be  already  formed  before  the  player  strikes 
the  ball,  and  must  be  preserved  while  he  runs  towards  it 
or  moves  away  from  it. 

Moreover,  the  body  and  arm  should  be  up  and  back 
before  the  stroke  be  made. 

Whether  the  stroke  should  be  followed  through  or  not 
will  depend,  as  at  Racquets,  upon  the  player's  personnel. 
If  he  have  quickness  and  a  good  eye  he  may  adopt 
Latham's  snap-stroke,  as  described  in  Chapter  XXIII. 

Cut. — In  the  Cut-stroke  the  racket  strikes  the  ball  not 
with  the  full  face  but  at  an  angle,  so  as  to  slice  the  ball.  It 
is  probably  better  to  master  the  full-faced  (simple)  stroke 
before  the  Cut-stroke  be  attempted.   Then  the  Cut-stroke 


CH.  xxxiii]     THE  GRIP  AND   THE  STROKES  jjj 

may  be  practised,  i.  e.  the  racket  may  meet  the  ball 
obliquely.  Last  of  all,  the  racket  may  actually  draw 
away  from  the  ball  the  instant  before  contact.  This  is 
the  exact  reverse  of  the  Lawn  Tennis  stroke,  which  aims 
not  at  Cut  but  at  pace.  Whereas  the  Lawn  Tennis  stroke 
makes  a  ball  fly  quickly,  the  Cut-stroke  makes  a  ball 
fly  slowly  and  come  down  sharp  off  the  Back-wall. 
Both,  however,  serve  the  same  purpose,  namely,  to  get 
the  ball  past  the  opponent  so  that  he  shall  not  be  able 
to  return  it. 

1.  First  of  all,  then,  the  Cut-stroke  tends  to  kill  the 
ball  by  bringing  it  down  with  a  snap  off  the  wall. 

2.  This  not  only  renders  the  ball  harder  to  "  pick  up," 
but  it  also  makes  it  fall  nearer  to  the  Back-wall  :  thus 
the  Chase  which  is  made  is  smaller  and  better. 

3.  About  the  stroke  there  is  some  added  grace,  es- 
pecially in  the  Backhand  position  (see  the  Illustration). 

4.  The  Cut  also  lifts  the  ball  somewhat,  by  means  of 
the  drag,  and  thus  helps  it  over  the  Net. 

Against  it,  however,  is  the  fact  that,  since  it  exposes 
less  surface  of  the  racket  to  the  approaching  ball,  it 
involves  greater  risk.  One  is  hitting  the  ball  with  a  surface 
almost  the  same  size  as  the  handle  of  the  racket. 
Besides  this,  with  the  Cut  there  is  less  pace.  The  Tennis 
player  notices  this  when  he  comes  into  the  Lawn  Tennis 
Court.  In  the  modern  game,  especially  when  one  plays 
for  the  Nick  or  for  the  Openings,  pace  is  all-essential, 
and  the  Cut-stroke  involves  a  greater  effort  and  more 
strain. 

At  what  height  should  one  take  the  ball  for  the  Cut- 
stroke  ? 

As  heavy  a  cut  as  any  can  be  given  with  the  head  of 
the  racket  actually  hitting  the  floor.  George  Lambert 
used  to  win  his  shortest  Chases  in  this  way  ;  and  many 
17 


226  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

others  find  such  a  position  best.  The  stroke  is  repre- 
sented in  the  Photograph,  where  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
ball  is  so  low  as  to  prevent  the  possibility  of  the  head  of 
the  racket  being  above  the  level  of  the  wrist.  Pettitt's 
stroke  almost  invariably  has  the  head  of  the  racket  far 
down,  though  he  uses  the  twist  rather  than  the  pure  Cut. 
By  waiting  till  the  ball  has  nearly  dropped,  he  admirably 
conceals  the  direction  of  his  drive.  And  perhaps  the 
majority  of  good  players  take  the  ball  not  much  higher 
than  eighteen  inches  from  the  ground,  while  it  is  falling. 

Others,  however,  find  that  such  a  falling  ball  has  lost 
much  of  its  pace ;  hence  the  pace  has  to  be  put  on  by 
the  player  rather  than,  as  it  were,  to  have  been  already 
put  on  by  the  opponent.  For  my  own  part,  I  prefer  to 
hit  a  rising  ball,  though  not  to  the  extent  to  which  one 
can  go  in  Ping  Pong.  This  rising  ball  stroke  requires 
more  judgment  and  therefore  more  risk.  On  the  other 
hand  it  takes  the  opponent  by  surprise.  Who  does  not 
know  the  feeling  of  hopelessness  when  he  plays  against 
a  quick  professional  ?  One  never  feels  that  one  is  up  to 
the  best  form,  and  one  cannot  imagine  why.  One  may 
be  perfectly  healthy  and  fresh.  The  best  explanation  is 
that  the  professional  is  nearly  always  hitting  the  ball  a 
little  sooner  than  one  expects  him  to,  Latham  told  me 
that  this  was  why  he  had  an  advantage  in  Racquets. 

And  the  risk  that  one  runs  in  hitting  the  rising  ball  is 
partly  compensated  for  by  the  need  of  less  pace :  the 
ball  having  most  pace  on  it  when  it  begins  to  rise  from 
the  floor. 

Moreover,  it  is  far  easier  to  cut  certain  balls  in  a  certain 
way  as  they  come  up.  Every  player  must  have  been 
astonished  at  the  amount  of  spin  which  he  has  put  on  a 
Half-volley  quite  unintentionally.  A  Half-volley  is  of 
course  always  a  rising  ball.     A  moment's  reflection  will 


Pig.  37. — A  Cut-Stop  Stroke,  Forehanded. 

(.See  page  230.) 


Fig.  38. — A  Correct  Forehand  Stroke.     (Seldom  seen  in  play.) 

(See  page  229.) 


CH.  xxxiii]     THE  GRIP  AND  THE  STROKES  227 

give  the  reason.  The  ball,  on  rising  and  meeting  the 
racket  as  it  does,  is  bound  to  receive  some  spin  without 
any  kind  of  effort  on  the  part  of  the  striker. 

Last,  but  not  least,  it  is  sometimes  impossible  to  avoid 
the  rising  ball,  unless  one  leaves  that  ball  for  the  Back- 
wall.  It  should  be  the  aim  of  the  opponent  often  to 
strike  so  that  the  ball  may  touch  the  floor  somewhat  in 
front  of  the  player's  feet,  and  so  that  the  player  shall  be 
forced  to  make  a  stroke  which  is  not  exactly  a  Half- 
volley,  and  is  not  exactly  what  one  would  call  in  Cricket 
a  "  long  hop."  In  fact,  one  is  actually  bowling  to  a 
batsman  when  one  is  hitting  to  a  Tennis  player.  Let 
such  a  stroke  be  with  plenty  of  cut,  and  the  opponent 
will  not  dare  to  leave  it  alone.  Should  he  do  so,  the 
ball  would  fall  dead  off  the  Back-wall.  And  so  he  is 
forced  to  take  the  ball  as  it  rises,  or  else  not  at  all. 

But  whether  he  hits  the  ball  as  it  falls,  or  whether  he 
hits  it  as  it  rises,  in  any  case  there  is  absolutely  no 
necessity  for  him  to  have  the  head  of  his  racket  above 
his  wrist. 

This  fallacy  must  be  exposed  once  for  all.  Many 
professionals  teach  the  awkward  stroke  as  a  matter  of 
course,  whether  they  practise  it  themselves  or  not.  Few 
of  them  realise  that  the  Backhand  stroke  of  Burke  and 
the  Dohertys  at  Lawn  Tennis  is  almost  the  only  ordinary 
stroke  in  the  two  games  in  which  the  racket  is  habitually 
above  the  wrist. 

We  are  not  here  denying  that  such  a  position  of  the 
racket  is  invaluable — first  of  all,  when  one  is  volleying, 
especially  off  the  Penthouse  and,  secondly,  when  one  is 
taking  a  ball  that  bounces  high.  To  get  on  the  top  of 
the  ball  is  a  help  towards  killing  it.  Nor  do  we  mean  to 
imply  that  the  wrist  should  not  support  the  racket — a 
somewhat  vague  phrase.     Nor  do  we  deny  that  certain 


228  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

players,  such  as  Mr.  Alfred  Lyttelton,  Charles  Saunders, 
and  Alfred  Tompkins,  have  actually  observed  this 
classical  law.  What  we  do  maintain  is  that  such  players 
as  Latham,  Pettitt,  "  Punch "  Fairs,  and  Fennell  very 
seldom  do.  If  you  would  put  this  statement  of  mine  to 
the  test,  watch  Latham's  racket  when  it  actually  touches 
the  ball.  This  position  does  not  differ  radically  from  the 
position  of  his  Racquet-stroke,  and  it  would  be  ridiculous 
to  pretend  that  in  this  the  head  is  above  the  wrist. 

The  Cut  can  be  imparted  to  the  ball  while  the  head  of 
the  racket  is  either  above  the  wrist  or  on  a  level  with  the 
wrist  or  below  the  wrist  (as  in  the  Racquet  Service). 
How  absurd  it  is  to  assume  that  a  severe  Cut  cannot  be 
imparted  from  this  third  position  !  Think  of  Mr.  Ash- 
worth's  Service  at  Racquets,  or  indeed  thinkoftheordinary 
Service  at  Racquets  ;  surely  one  would  not  wish  for  any- 
thing severer ;  and  from  the  Forehand  Court  such  a 
Service  frequently  has  the  head  of  the  racket  below  the 
wrist. 

With  regard  to  the  Cut,  then,  one  might  say  that  it 
can  be  given  with  the  racket  in  any  one  of  the  three 
positions,  and  that  it  need  not  be  given  as  a  matter  of 
course  at  every  stroke.  The  easier  the  ball  is  to  return, 
the  more  Cut  one  should  aim  at  adding.  "  Use  deter- 
mines all  things."  The  object  of  the  Cut  is  not  careful- 
ness nor  conformity  to  theory — an  old-fashioned  theory 
at  that.  It  is  to  give  the  ball  a  spin  which  shall  make  it 
rise  slightly  in  the  air,  and  then  come  down  quickly  off 
the  walls.  But  the  first  essential  of  success  is  the  hitting 
the  ball  over  the  Net.  A  magnificently  cut  ball  into  the 
Net  does  no  good  to  any  one. 

The  Twist-stroke  is  often  confused  with  the  Cut,  and 
indeed  the  two  may  be  found  in  combination.  The 
Pettitt  Service  gives  an  instance  of  an  almost  pure  Twist ; 


I 


Fig.  39.— Jim  Harradixe  Ready  for  Volley  off  Penthouse. 

(See  page  231.) 


Fig.  40.— Practice  of  Volley  off  Penthouse 
First  position. 


(See  page  231.) 


CH.  xxxiii]      THE  GRIP  AND   THE  STROKES  229 

the  racket  strikes  the  ball  at  its  side.  As  in  the  Photo- 
graph of  Latham  in  Chapter  XXXIV,  the  ball  will 
move  away  from  the  striker,  i.e.  towards  his  right,  when  it 
has  hit  the  floor.  This  is  the  commonest  kind  of  Twist, 
though  the  Twist  given  by  the  "  Punch "  Fairs  Service 
(Chapter  XXXIV)  will  make  the  ball  move  in  the 
opposite  direction  or  even  backwards  when  it  has  hit 
the  floor.  For  the  angles  off"  the  floor  and  off"  the  Side- 
walls  we  must  refer  to  Mr.  Julian  Marshall's  *  Annals  of 
Tennis.'     Some  useful  Diagrams  are  given  there. 

"  One  small  point  may  be  noticed.  Let  the  player  strike  a  ball 
with  a  Twist,  and  let  him  notice  what  happens  before  and  after  it 
reaches  the  Back-wall.  He  has  hit  a  Forehand  stroke  down  the 
middle  of  the  Court.  Directly  the  ball  has  touched  the  floor,  it 
begins  to  move  away  to  his  right.  But,  directly  it  has  hit  the 
Back-wall,  it  begins  to  move  back  towards  his  left.  The  total  and 
ultimate  effect,  for  the  player  who  is  waiting  for  it,  may  be  nearly 
that  of  an  ordinary  stroke  without  Twist  at  all." 

The  Stop-stroke  need  not  be  discussed  here.  It  is 
neither  a  slicing  of  the  ball,  nor  yet  a  twisting  of  the  ball. 
It  is  best  seen  in  the  Half-volley  of  which  we  have 
spoken  already.  Latham's  ordinary  Racquet-stroke  is 
neither  a  Cut  nor  a  Twist :  it  is  a  Stop-stroke. 

The  Forehand-stroke :  see  Photograph  XXXVII. 

For  the  Forehand  stroke  the  old  school  of  players  used 
to  hold  the  head  of  the  racket  as  in  Photograph  XXXVI 
or  XXXVIII ;  at  least  they  did  so  in  theory,  and  always 
urged  young  players  to  do  so.  And  they  occasionally 
illustrated  this  by  holding  their  own  rackets  thus  before 
the  learner.  Ask  one  of  these  players  at  what  height 
from  the  ground  he  takes  the  ball,  and  he  will  probably 
tell  you  twelve  to  eighteen  inches.  Now  ask  him  to  put 
himself  into  such  a  position  that,  with  the  ball  at  this 
height,  he  shall  still  have  the  head  of  his  racket  above 
the  level  of  his  wrist,  as  in  the  photograph  of  Latham 


230  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

(XXXVIII).  The  theorist  will  then  realise  how  seldom 
the  ball  is  actually  struck  in  this  way  in  a  real  game. 
Quite  apart  from  the  Volley  off  the  Penthouse  and  the 
ball  that  bounces  high  off  the  floor,  the  stroke  with  the 
head  of  the  racket  below  the  wrist,  or,  at  the  most,  level 
with  the  wrist,  is  usually  far  safer. 

In  practising  the  Forehand  Cut-stroke  one  should  first 
master  the  stroke  without  Cut,  then  the  stroke  which 
slices  the  ball,  and  then,  last  of  all,  the  stroke  which,  the 
moment  before  it  touches  the  ball,  moves  away  so  as  to 
make  the  ball  drag. 

We  have  already  seen  that  the  English  Lawn  Tennis 
Backhand  stroke  of  some  of  the  best  experts  is  made 
with  the  head  of  the  racket  high  ;  and  perhaps  the  ideal 
Backhand  will  be  of  such  a  kind.  Whether  this  also 
holds  good  for  the  Lawn  Tennis  Forehand  I  very  much 
doubt.  The  American  Forehand  stroke,  with  the  head 
of  the  racket  down,  seems  to  me  to  be  far  more  effective. 
It  is  the  stroke  which  few  Englishmen  do  well. 

An  illustration  of  the  Tennis  Backhand  Cut  of  the 
classical  kind  is  given  here  in  Photograph  XXXVI.  But, 
obviously,  very  few  players  will  run  the  risk  which  this 
position  involves,  especially  as  one  has  to  take  the  ball 
while  it  is  rising  from  the  floor.  It  is  hard  for  ordinary 
players  to  hit  such  a  ball  at  all  safely,  however  effectively 
the  stroke  may  be  made  by  the  expert.  But  to  ask  them 
to  do  this  with  such  a  contorted  attitude  is  too  much. 

For  the  ordinary  player  we  should  advise  the  stroke 
nearer  to  the  one  in  Photographs  XI  and  XII,  or  even 
XXXVIL 

The  severity  of  the  Cut  may  be  increased  or  decreased, 
till  eventually  the  player  can  safely  make  the  stroke  with 
the  racket's  face  moving  away  from  the  ball  at  the 
moment  of  contact. 


CH.  xxxiii]      THE   GRIP  AND   THE  STROKES  231 

The  Volley. — The  general  rules  for  the  use  of  the 
Volley  are,  first  of  all,  that  one  should  not  put  on  too 
much  pace ;  since  the  ball,  not  having  struck  the  floor  or 
the  Back-wall,  has  lost  no  pace  of  its  own.  Again,  I  say, 
one  should  aim  at  safety  before  one  attempts  to  kill ;  one 
should  be  certain  to  return  the  ball,  hitting  it  more  and 
more  severely  in  proportion  as  one  is  more  and  more  sure 
of  the  power  to  return.  One  should  follow  the  line  of  the 
ball  as  long  as  possible  before  and  after  one  expects  to 
touch  it.  The  racket  should  meet  the  ball  on  its  own 
curve,  either  advancing  slightly  towards  the  ball,  or  else 
remaining  almost  stationary,  or  else  actually  drawing 
back.  When  this  Volley  becomes  easy,  the  Cut-volley 
can  be  practised ;  the  wrist-flick  during  a  Volley  is 
scarcely  worth  the  danger.  Often  the  Volley  is  a  safer 
stroke  than  the  one  off  the  floor. 

Throughout  games  and  matches  we  have  to  choose 
between  the  ordinary  stroke  and  the  Volley.  For 
example,  a  ball  is  approaching  which  might  be  fairly 
easy  off  the  Back-wall,  but  we  have  to  settle  immediately 
whether  it  would  not  pay  better  to  volley  it,  and  get  it 
back  before  the  opponent  is  ready.  Similarly,  when  a 
ball  is  coming  off  the  Penthouse,  shall  we  volley  it,  and 
so  get  a  severe  Cut  from  above,  a  Cut  like  that  of  Mr. 
Dames  Longworth's  Racquet  Service,  or  shall  we  let  the 
ball  hit  the  floor,  and  then  take  it  in  the  usual  way  ? 

The  Volley  off  the  Penthouse  is  the  best  practice  for 
volleying.  Photograph  XXXIX  shows  Jim  Harradine 
preparing  for  such  a  Volley ;  and  the  Photographs  with 
the  Apparatus  (XL  and  XLI)  represent  the  ball  as  it 
will  be  when  the  racket  meets  it. 

The  Boasted  Volley,  the  Volley  hit  direct  onto  the 
Side-wall,  has  this  advantage  on  many  occasions,  that  it 
meets  the  ball  in  the  approaching  line.     In  Illustration 


332  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

XLII,  Latham  is  represented  as  taking  it  when  the  ball 
has  been  hit  up  against  the  main  Side-wall  and  will 
naturally  go  into  the  Dedans;  Latham  is  meeting  it 
along  its  own  curve,  and  is  returning  it  back  onto  the 
Main-wall.  Such  a  return  involves  less  risk  than  a 
slashing  Volley  across  the  Court. 

For  a  Volley  it  may  often  be  important  to  grip  the 
racket  somewhat  nearer  to  its  face,  and  it  is  almost 
always  important  to  stiffen  the  wrist.  For  the  Backhand 
Volley  one  first  draws  the  wrist  back  from  the  palm 
and  towards  the  upper  arm. 

The  Lob  is  useful.  Some  few  players  can  lob  well 
into  the  Dedans ;  and  a  Lob  which  shall  reach  that 
opening  after  it  has  bounced  once  is  occasionally  the 
stroke  to  which  one  is  compelled  to  resort. 

The  Half-volley  generally  puts  a  drag  upon  the  ball. 
One  must  be  able  to  use  both  the  Volley  and  the  Half- 
volley,  even  if  one  need  not  use  them  frequently.  While 
they  are  risky,  they  yet  have  this  advantage,  that  they 
get  hold  of  the  ball  while  it  still  has  much  pace  on  it. 

Boasted  Strokes. — Of  the  Boasted  Strokes  we  have 
already  spoken.  The  angles  at  which  they  will  come  off 
the  Side-walls  and  Back-wall  need  not  be  described  here 
in  detail,  since  Mr.  Julian  Marshall  has  done  the  task  so 
well  already.  But  one  example  may  be  taken,  viz. 
Diagram  i6.  Each  player  should  work  out  the  rest  for 
himself  by  drawings,  and  by  experiments  in  the  Court. 
The  example  is  copied  from  the  'Annals  of  Tennis.' 

Sometimes  the  Boast  is  the  only  possible  stroke  :  for 
instance,  it  is  hard  to  imagine  any  other  satisfactory  way 
of  dealing  with  many  American  Overhead  Services.   The 


Fig.  41.— Practice  of  A'olley  off  Pexthovse. 
Second  posilioii. 

iSee  page  231.) 


Fig.  42. — Latham  Returning  a  Boasted  Force. 

(See  page  232.) 


CH.  XXXili]     THE  GRIP  AND   THE  STROKES 


233 


ball  clings  so  closely  to  the  Side-wall  that  any  other 
attempt  to  get  it  up  would  be  next  to  useless. 

The  Boast  puts  on  a  twist,  and  thus  to  some  extent 
serves  the  purpose  of  an  actual  Twist  with  some  Cut. 
The  angles  which  this  Twist  will  give  to  the  ball  after  its 
contact  with  the  floor,  and  with  the  Back-  and  Side-walls, 
will  puzzle  beginners  and  others. 

Thirdly,  the  Boasted  stroke  helps  to  place  the  ball,  as 
we  have  seen  in  the  Chapter  on  Racquets. 

Fourthly,  the  Boast  may  meet  the  ball  in  its  own  line. 

SIDE -WALL 


2 

^■^ 

1 

^ 

^_ 

1 

• 

t; 

a 

^-' 

^ 

^'   . 

^^ 

< 

.  x^        »^ 

^1 

^ 

^^           Jy 

0 

4       .-"                        ^ 

z 

Ul 

r- 

^^ 

*  SIDE -WALL 

Diagram  16.— The  Angles  made  by  a  Boasted  Ball  {from  '  Annals  of  Tennis'). 


A  ball  coming  off  the  Side-wall  will  naturally  be  hit 
back  onto  that  Side-wall. 

For  these  reasons  the  Boasted  Stroke  is  invaluable;  but 
it  should  not  be  attempted  until  the  ordinary  strokes 
have  been  mastered. 

Forcing. — In  speaking  of  the  Force,  we  may  put  on 
one  side  the  Lob-force,  which  is  a  miserable  stroke  if  it 
misses  the  Opening.  The  Lob-force  will  come  into  the 
Opening  either  directly  or  after  its  first  bounce.  Such  a 
Force  is  seldom  practised. 

Nor  indeed  is  the  ordinary  Force  practised.     Pettitt 


234  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

could  time  after  time  hit  a  piece  of  paper,  held  up 
against  the  Dedans-Net,  from  the  opposite  end  of  the 
Court.  Scarcely  any  players,  however,  can  make  sure  of 
getting  within  a  foot  or  two  of  it.  Forcing  is  so  promi- 
nent a  feature  of  the  modern  game  that  it  is  worth 
practising  by  itself.  The  American  players  excel  the 
English  players  in  the  skill  with  which  they  mask  the 
direction  of  their  Force. 

The  force  may  be  a  hard  Drive,  with  or  without  Cut. 
The  ball  has  to  rise  above  the  Net  (unless  of  course  it  be 
taken  very  high),  and  then  it  has  to  fall  again  into  the 
Opening,  the  Dedans  or  the  Grille.  Therefore  too  great 
a  pace  may  involve  too  great  a  risk. 

The  Force  is  valuable  for  many  reasons.  More  pace 
may  be  given;  and,  as  many  beginners  at  Billiards  find, 
it  seems  easier  to  play  accurately  when  one  hits  hard 
than  when  one  hits  gently.  As  one  can  use  the  full  face 
of  the  racket,  less  risk  is  involved.  Besides  this,  the 
opponent  is  probably  weak  in  volleying,  or  else  he  does 
not  expect  the  Force ;  or  perhaps  you  yourself  have  no 
time  to  get  into  position  for  an  ordinary  stroke ;  or,  if 
you  leave  the  ball,  it  would  hit  the  Nick,  or  else  come 
down  owing  to  a  heavy  Cut.  You  therefore  volley  it, 
and,  not  caring  to  risk  a  Volleyed  Cut,  you  try  to  force 
the  ball. 

It  is  exceptionally  useful,  however,  when  there  is  a 
very  small  Chase  (or  a  very  long  Chase)  to  be  won.  In 
either  event,  if  you  get  the  ball  into  the  Openings  you 
win  a  point.  In  the  latter  event,  if  you  fail  to  get  the 
ball  into  the  Opening,  you  still  may  not  lose  the  long 
Chase. 

In  aiming  for  the  Dedans  it  is  better  to  aim  too  low 
than  too  high.  I  am  not  sure  that  a  number  of  Boston 
players  do  not  try  to  hit  the  ball  between  the  Dedans 


CH.  xxxiii]     THE  GRIP  AND   THE  STROKES  235 

Opening  and  the  Nick,  so  that  in  case  of  inaccuracy  the 
ball  may  strike  either  the  Opening  or  the  Nick. 

The  Force  should  be  concealed  as  far  as  possible. 
Pettitt  in  America  and  Fennell  in  England  are  among 
the  best  exponents  of  the  concealed  Force.  But  it  is 
not  worth  while  to  conceal  the  Force  at  the  expense  of 
accuracy. 

One  should  never  force  when  one  is  near  the  Net, 
except  in  taking  a  Service,  and  in  sending  a  Boasted 
Force. 

The  Boasted  Force  is  most  effective ;  very  few  can  stop 
it.  George  Lambert  employed  it  to  perfection.  When 
everything  else  seems  to  involve  too  much  danger,  when 
to  cut  the  ball  severely  would  mean  a  vast  risk,  then, 
time  after  time,  one  can  get  oneself  out  of  the  difficulty 
either  by  a  straight  Force,  or  by  a  Boasted  Force,  if  not 
by  an  ordinary  Boasted  Stroke. 

Nevertheless  it  is  good  at  times  to  bar  the  Side-walls. 
This  special  form  of  Handicap  prevents  one  from  relying 
habitually  upon  the  Boast.  Puns  are  too  obvious  to 
need  mention  here. 

As  I  said  elsewhere,  among  the  disadvantages  of  the 
Boast  are  its  ugliness  (there  are  exceptions),  and  the 
slowness  with  which  the  boasted  ball  is  apt  to  travel,  and 
also  the  fact  that  the  Boast  is  apt  to  bring  the  ball  into 
the  middle  of  the  Court,  instead  of  making  it  keep  close 
to  the  Side-wall.  Last,  but  not  least,  it  is  apt  to  spoil 
the  style  of  the  Boaster :  it  frequently  has  a  deleterious 
effect  upon  his  play  in  general. 


CHAPTER   XXXIV 

SERVICE 

"  The  Service  has  been  aptly  described  by  the  French  as  Pdme 
du  jeu,  for  upon  it  rests  the  issue  of  most  games  or  sets  that  are 
played.  '  No  one,'  says  Mr.  Lukin,  '  can  be  an  attentive  spectator, 
without  observing  its  influence  and  effect.  A  good  Service,  like 
a  good  opening  at  Chess,  generally  gains  the  attack  (no  small 
advantage). '  " — Julian  Marshall. 

In  Tennis-Services  there  is  enormous  variety,  and 
only  a  few  types  can  be  mentioned  here.  The  variety 
is  due  to  many  causes,  for  instance,  to 

(i)  the  place  where  one  stands,  whether  near  the  side 
Penthouse  or  not,  or  near  the  Dedans-wall  or  not ; 

(ii)  the  position  in  which  one  stands,  whether  with  the 
feet  parallel  to  the  Net,  or  at  right  angles  to  the  Net  and 
turning  either  towards  the  Penthouse  wall  or  towards 
the  Main  wall  on  the  right ; 

(iii)  the  way  in  which  one  holds  the  racket,  whether 
near  the  face  or  near  the  end  ; 

(iv)  the  way  in  which  one  strikes  the  ball,  simply,  or 
with  an  overhand  cut  or  twist,  or  with  an  underhand  cut 
or  twist ;  with  the  wrist-action  chiefly,  or  the  full  arm- 
action  alone,  and  so  on  ; 

(v)  the  height  of  the  ball,  the  number  of  times  it  hits 
the  Penthouse,  the  pace,  and  whether  it  hits  the  Side- 
wall  or  not. 

236 


CH.  xxxiv]  SERVICE  237 

The  Service  at  Tennis  is,  in  fact,  far  more  varied  than 
the  bowling  at  Cricket,  and,  though  seldom  studied  and 
seldom  attended  to,  it  ought  to  make  a  difference  of 
many  points  in  every  Set. 

Mr,  Ross  seems  to  think  that  it  is  in  Service  especially 
that  the  Professional  has  the  advantage  over  the 
Amateur :  and,  if  the  superiority  of  Professionals  over 
Amateurs  in  bowling  is  a  fair  analogy,  there  would  appear 
to  be  great  reason  in  this  view  :  anyhow  it  is,  like  all 
that  Mr.  Ross  says  on  the  subject,  of  very  great  interest 
and  worthy  of  serious  attention. 

It  is  the  Service  that  has  added  so  much  to  the  game 
of  Pettitt,  of  Saunders,  of  Latham,  and  of  "  Punch  " 
Fairs,  in  these  latter  days,  and  used  to  add  many  points 
to  the  game  of  the  old  French  players,  who  would  study 
and  cultivate  Service  as  one  of  the  most  important 
factors  in  success. 

He  who  would  excel  as  a  Tennis-player  must  learn  to 
serve.  They  do  not  serve  who  only  stand  and  hit.  We 
must  have  at  least  one  excellent  Service,  and  at  least  one 
Service  on  which  we  can  fall  back  in  case  the  first  should 
fail.  I  speak  from  experience,  as  it  was  only  quite 
recently  that  I  believed  those  who  told  me  that  I  must 
learn  this  art.  At  one  time  I  used  to  serve  anyhow,  and 
I  used  to  rely  on  my  power  of  returning  the  ball  some- 
how, and  of  starting  the  rally  going.  And,  indeed,  there 
was  more  to  be  said  for  this  policy  than  the  critics 
realised  ;  for  I  never  served  with  such  effort  as  to  throw 
myself  off  my  balance.  I  was  far  readier  to  receive  a 
return  than  I  am  now.  I  now  notice  that  those  who 
serve  best  are,  as  a  rule,  least  prepared  to  win  the  rally 
afterwards.  Latham  is  an  exception  to  this,  as  indeed 
to  most  statements  of  what  a  player  cannot  do. 

Service  is  hardly  ever  taught  as  it  should  be.     It  is 


238  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

hardly  ever  taught  or  learnt  in  successive  stages.  The 
stages  seem  to  be  as  follows.  I  cannot  imagine  any  way 
in  which  a  duffer  can  improve  his  Service  properly  with- 
out attention  to  these  stages. 

First,  he  should  get  the  right  direction,  then  the  right 
height,  then  the  right  pace  and  length  ;  then  he  should 
add  cut  or  twist,  and,  generally,  should  add  severity ; 
next,  he  should  be  able  to  recover  his  balance  and  his 
alertness  immediately  after  a  Service  :  last,  but  not  least, 
he  should  study  variety,  and  should  exercise  his  judg- 
ment as  to  which  of  the  varied  Services  he  had  better 
employ  on  any  given  occasion. 

For  in  Tennis  there  is  a  variety  of  Service  with  which, 
as  we  said,  even  the  variety  of  bowling  at  Cricket  cannot 
compare,  I  suppose  that  he  who  studied  nothing  but 
Service,  and  studied  it  in  an  original  and  independent 
spirit,  for  a  lifetime,  would  find  at  least  twenty  different 
kinds,  each  of  which  would  be  specially  suited  to  some 
special  occasion  or  to  some  special  Court  or  player. 
The  neglect  of  variety  in  Service  tends  to  make  modern 
play  somewhat  monotonous  to  watch. 

Thus  Pettitt  and  Latham,  throughout  their  famous 
Match  at  Brighton,  kept  to  practically  the  same  Service 
all  through.  "  Punch  "  Fairs  hardly  ever  varies  his  kind. 
Mr.  Ross  is  perhaps  the  ablest  exponent  of  the  varied 
Service  theory.  His  criticisms  in  the  '  Field '  are  always 
suggestive.  Here  we  need  only  touch  on  the  main  kinds 
which  are  in  vogue  to-day.  Fortunately,  what  we  may 
call  the  bash-bang  Service,  without  particular  cut  or 
twist,  has  disappeared,  let  us  hope  never  to  appear 
again. 

Latkatn's  Side-wall  Service. — Latham's  favourite  is  the 
Side-wall  Service,  which  on  some  days  he  does  not  often 


Fig.  43. — Jim  IIarradixe  Serving. 

(See  page  239.) 


Fig.  44.— Side- Wall  Service,  with  Apparatus. 
First  position. 

(See  page  239.) 


CH.  xxxiv]  SERVICE  239 

vary,  except  for  special  occasions.  A  gentle  form  of  the 
Service  is  shown  in  the  illustration  of  Harradine  (XLIII). 

The  advantage  of  this  style  over  the  style  adopted  by 
Pettitt  and  others,  is  that  it  gets  the  Server  into  the 
habit  of  a  good  cut  stroke.  The  Server  has  the  first 
practice,  as  it  were,  in  each  rally.  It  is  essential  that  the 
Service,  unless  it  is  to  be  absolutely  untakable,  should 
not  put  the  Server  off  the  best  possible  stroke  afterwards. 

To  practise  the  Service  somewhat  as  Latham  does  it, 
stand  under  the  Penthouse  at  about  Chase  3  and  4.  Let 
your  feet  and  body  face  the  angle  where  the  Back-wall 
meets  the  Main-wall,  i,  e.  near  the  right  corner  of  the 
Dedans.  The  feet  can  be  from  12  to  18  inches  apart. 
Hold  the  racket  rather  near  its  face,  not  near  the  end  of 
the  handle  (as  you  would  in  a  Pettitt  Service). 

Draw  your  hand  and  arm  up  and  back,  far  to  your 
right,  till  your  body  faces  the  other  corner  where  the  two 
Penthouses  meet.  Keep  your  eye  on  the  ball,  which  can 
be  held  nearly  at  arm's  length,  and  somewhat  above  the 
level  of  the  waist :  see  Photograph  XLIV. 

Now  comes  the  sweep  and  swing,  into  which  you 
should  put  the  whole  weight  of  your  shoulder  and  body. 
The  racket  should  end  up  near  your  left  shoulder  (Photo- 
graph XLVI),  which  during  the  swing  and  sweep  is 
moving  away  towards  the  left.  Your  body  should  end 
up  facing  that  place  where  the  ball  in  its  flight  will  hit 
the  Side-wall  above  the  Penthouse.  The  ball,  with  a 
severe  spin  upon  it,  should  touch  this  wall  under  the 
third  window  from  the  end  (in  a  good  many  Courts), 
and  hit  the  Penthouse  once,  and  then  hit  the  floor  once 
close  to  the  Back-wall,  and  should  then  hit  the  Back- 
wall  and  drop,  owing  to  the  cut. 

It  is  hard  to  return  this  Service  with  an  effective  first 
stroke.     Pettitt  often  forces  it  straight  to  the  opponent's 


240  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

right-hand  corner  of  the  Dedans.  This  is  a  favourite 
American  stroke,  of  which  the  chief  English  exponents 
have  been  Mr,  Walker  and  J.  Fennell. 

For  practice  of  this  Service,  of  which  one  of  the  main 
features  is  that  the  racket  should  move  outside  the  ball, 
see  the  Chapter  on  "  Practice  inside  the  Court."  The 
exercises  which  it  involves  are  among  the  healthiest 
possible.  The  movement  is,  in  some  respects,  not 
unlike  that  of  bowling  at  Cricket. 

The  Saunders  and  Fairs  Service. — This  is  very  similar 
in  some  respects  to  the  Latham  Service ;  but  for  it  one 
stands  at  Chase  5  and  6,  or  even  at  the  last  Gallery 
Chase,  and  close  to  the  Main-wall,  i.  e.  the  right-hand 
wall. 

Here,  as  before,  the  ball  is  held  in  the  left  hand  far 
away  from  the  body.  It  may  be  held  somewhat  higher 
or  somewhat  lower  than  in  the  Latham  Service,  and  the 
racket  may  be  gripped  somewhat  nearer  to  its  face,  and 
therefore  further  from  the  end  of  the  handle. 

One  draws  back  the  right  side  and  shoulder  and  arm 
as  before,  and  one  sweeps  round  as  before  with  one's 
whole  weight,  swinging  the  racket  so  that  it  shall  move 
outside  the  ball.  But  in  this  Service  it  seems  to  me  that 
the  ball  is  somewhat  nearer  to  the  body,  and  that  the 
racket  usually  ends  up,  not  at  the  left  shoulder,  but 
round  still  further,  and  near  to  the  right  shoulder,  as  in 
the  Illustration  (XLVII). 

If  we  start  with  this  position,  the  racket  being,  as  it 
were,  hunched  up  near  to  the  right  shoulder,  then  we 
shall  be  likely  also  to  finish  up  each  stroke  in  this 
position.  Here  we  have  an  important  principle — it 
would  be  hard  to  say  how  far  it  applies  to  the  majority 
of  strokes — viz.  to  begin  to  prepare  for  the  stroke  by 


Fig.  45. — Side-AVall  Service,  with  Apparatus. 

Second  position. 

(See  page  339.) 


mmuamsim 


smSttiMiiii^ 


Fig.  46. — Finish  of  Side-Wall  Service. 
(Exaggerated.) 


(See  page  239.) 


CH.  XXXI v]  SERVICE  241 

getting  into  that  position  in  which  you  wish  to  finish  up. 
The  tendency  will  be  (see  p.  25 1)  to  finish  up  as  we  began. 

When  the  simple  Service  has  been  mastered,  there 
can  be  added  to  it  a  sudden  turn  of  the  wrist  at  the 
moment  when  the  racket  is  touching  the  ball,  though  I 
believe  that  "  Punch  "  Fairs  does  not  employ  this  wrist- 
turn.  Ted  Johnson,  a  very  promising  young  Professional, 
uses  this  wrist-turn  effectively. 

The  disadvantage  of  this  Service  is  that  it  is  apt  to 
throw  the  Server  off  his  balance.  There  is  required  a 
prodigious  exercise  of  those  vast  muscles  under  the 
arms  and  at  the  back  of  the  body.  The  whole  weight 
of  the  trunk  seems  to  be  put  into  the  effort.  And 
so  it  may  be  well  to  practise  this  Service,  if  one 
is  going  to  use  it  at  all,  with  the  object  of  making 
any  return  impossible  or  next  to  impossible.  One  should 
rely  on  killing  the  first  stroke  by  it.  Try  to  leave  your 
opponent  no  space  in  which  to  return  the  ball  freely. 

The  ideal  Service  hits  the  side  Penthouse  only  once  ; 
and  then  goes  either  onto  the  floor  or  onto  the  back 
Penthouse,  but  anyhow  leaves  no  space  for  a  good  swing 
and  attack. 

It  is  easy  to  vary  the  direction  of  it,  by  making  one's 
feet  face  more  in  one  direction  or  in  the  other,  or  by 
throwing  the  ball  further  in  front  or  behind.  One  can 
vary  the  height  by  taking  the  ball  lower  down  or  higher 
up.  But  for  further  details  about  this  Service  we  must 
refer  to  the  Chapter  on  "  Practice  inside  the  Court." 

^^  Railroad"  Service. — The  next  Service  is  the  overhead 
Railroad  Service,  of  which  Messrs.  Stockton  and  Crane, 
of  Boston,  are  the  best  exponents.  They  serve  on  the 
same  general  principle.  They  make  an  overhead  stroke, 
not  unlike  the  American  Lawn  Tennis  Service  with  a 
z8 


242  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

reverse  twist.  But  I  imagine  that  they  have  a  somewhat 
looser  wrist  than  the  American  Lawn  Tennis  players. 
They  hold  their  racket  very  near  the  end  also,  and  not 
near  the  face.  I  have  not  seen  this  twist  clearly 
described  yet,  and  1  shall  not  attempt  to  describe  it 
here ;  it  must  be  seen  to  be  realised.  Many  English 
Markers  can  explain  it  to  beginners.  Some  idea  of  it  is 
given  in  Photographs  XLIX  and  L. 

The  best  type  of  overhead  Railroad  Service  or  under- 
hand Railroad  Service  hits  the  Penthouse  only  once. 
Then  it  may  hit  the  Back-wall  full,  driving  the  opponent 
up  towards  the  Net,  and  cramping  him,  since  the  Net 
here  is  very  high.  Mr.  Stockton's  Service  used  to  bring 
me  right  up  almost  as  far  as  the  Marker !  sometimes  it 
used  to  fall  at  its  second  bounce  nearly  at  the  Door.  It 
was  extremely  hard  to  follow,  and  all  that  one  could  do 
was  either  to  force  straight  for  the  Dedans,  or  to  hit  hard 
for  the  Nick,  or  to  hit  under  the  Galleries,  right  against 
the  Batteries  on  one's  own  side,  and  thence  either  into 
the  Dedans  or  into  one's  opponent's  right-hand  corner. 
The  ball  here  received  a  heavy  spin,  which  puzzled 
Pettitt  considerably  in  his  great  Match  with  Latham. 
This  Service  generally  clings  to  the  Side-wall,  and  is 
very  difficult  to  dispose  of,  and  almost  impossible  to 
cut ;  though  the  oftener  one  plays  against  it  the  easier 
it  becomes. 

Mr.  Crane,  as  distinct  from  Mr.  Stockton,  generally 
aims  at  getting  the  Nick  rather  than  at  driving  one  into 
the  front  of  the  Court.  This  policy  is  equally  effective. 
I  have  known  him  serve  many  Nick-Services  in  succes- 
sion, though  it  would  not  have  been  impossible  to  volley 
these.  When  the  Server  has  such  a  run  of  Services, 
one's  chief  aim  must  be  to  get  over  to  the  other  side  of 
the  Net  by  making  a  Chase  at  all  costs. 


Pig.  47. — The  Finish  of  a  "Punch"  Fair's  Service. 
(Exaggerated.) 

(See  page  240.) 


Fig.  48. — Charle.s  Sauxders  Serving. 

(See  page  240.) 


CH.  xxxiv]  SER  VICE  243 

If  such  a  Service  falls  short  of  the  Nick,  it  may  bounce 
into  the  Winning  Gallery.  Anyhow  it  will  return 
towards  the  Side-wall,  and  will  be  uncomfortable  to 
manage. 

This  sounds,  at  first,  rather  as  if  such  a  Service  were 
a  thing  to  be  cultivated ;  and  so  it  is  for  emergencies. 
But  against  it  one  must  plead  that  it  spoils  the  best  or  at 
least  the  most  typical  Tennis  stroke,  namely  the  heavy 
cut  into  the  corner.  It  spoils  this  stroke,  not  only  for 
the  receiver  of  the  Service,  but  also  for  the  Server  him- 
self It  encourages  the  hard  bang.  The  Server  is 
nearly  always  put  off  his  balance,  and  off  his  best 
return. 

Underhand  Railroad  or  Petiitt  Service. — Pettitt  and 
George  Lambert  have  been  among  the  ablest  exponents 
of  this  particular  type.  It  is  certainly  Latham's  weakest 
point ;  I  have  scarcely  ever  seen  him  send  this  kind 
effectively. 

For  it  one  stands  about  Chase  3  ;  the  two  feet  nearly 
face  the  Penthouse,  though  the  right  foot  may  be  some- 
what to  the  right  and  away  back  from  the  Penthouse. 
The  knees  may  be  bent  a  little,  and  the  right  shoulder 
may  be  far  down.  The  racket  is  brought  up  and  back- 
ward ;  then  in  its  flight  it  moves  not  on  the  outside  of 
the  ball  (as  in  the  Latham  Service),  but  on  the  inside  of 
the  ball.  Moreover  it  hits  the  ball  low  down  and  returns 
upwards  to  a  position  either  right  in  front  of  one's  own 
face  or  somewhat  to  one's  right,  i.  e.  near  one's  right 
shoulder.  In  this  Service  far  more  wrist  is  used  than 
in  the  Side- wall  Service. 

For  the  way  to  practise  it,  we  must  refer  to  the 
Chapter  on  "  Practice  inside  the  Court." 

The  Giraffe  Service  is  very  useful,  especially  if  there 


244  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

be  a  short  Chase.  The  ball  is  hit  while  it  is  far  higher 
in  the  air  than  during  any  other  Service  except  the 
Overhead.  This  Giraffe  Service  bears  almost  the  same 
relation  to  the  Underhand  Railroad  Service  as  the  Fairs 
or  Saunders  bears  to  the  Side-wall  Service.  It  goes  far 
higher  into  the  air,  and  aims  at  driving  the  opponent 
into  the  corner  towards  the  Grille. 

In  this  Service,  the  racket  ends  up  often  behind  the 
right  shoulder,  after  having  swung  opposite  the  left 
shoulder ;  and  therefore  for  this  Service  one  might  start 
with  the  racket  opposite  the  right  shoulder,  on  the 
principle  laid  down  above. 

If  the  taker  of  this  Service  does  not  volley  it,  he  may 
perhaps  find  that  the  most  useful  plan  is  to  force  it  straight 
for  the  Dedans,  especially  if  he  can  conceal  the  direction 
of  his  strokes  as  Pettitt  and  Fennell  do. 

The  slow  Drop-Service  is  useful,  because  it  takes  very 
little  out  of  the  Server. 

Stand  near  the  middle  of  the  Court,  at  about  Chase  5, 
and  hit  the  ball,  without  much  cut,  either  onto  the  Side- 
wall  first,  or  directly  onto  the  Penthouse,  and  (as  in  the 
corresponding  Racquet  Service)  aim  at  getting  the 
length  of  the  Court.  This  high  Drop-Service  is  useful 
when  you  have  small  Chases  to  defend. 

The  slow  good-length  Service  is  well  done  by  Mr.  Ross. 
He  stands  close  to  the  Penthouse,  at  about  Chase  3  and 
4.  He  hits  the  ball  slowly  onto  the  Penthouse,  using 
his  body-swing  rather  than  his  wrist.  The  ball  dribbles 
along  the  Penthouse,  and  often  hits  the  Nick.  The 
advantage  of  this  slow  Service  is  that  it  forces  the 
opponent  to  make  the  pace. 

Jim  Harradines  favourite  Service  is  somewhat  similar, 
but  he  puts  on  a  slight  cut.  The  ball  hits  the  Penthouse 
once,  over  the  Second  Gallery  on  the  Hazard  Side,  and 


p^ 


1  'S  m 


p^pq 


W     S  ."^  .2 


P^ 


fe 


^ 

5 

3 

o 

^ 

Eii 

3 

^ 

_t_i 

C 

3 

o 

,:3 

m 

«   ^ 


3  .1=    g 


W  -2 


K*         ? 


-^  ::-' 


■S,^  H 


.2  h5 


CH.  XXXI v]  SERVICE  24S 

then  clings  close  to  the  Side-wall.  This  is  a  good 
Service  when  there  is  a  Hazard  Chase,  since  it  is  hard 
to  return  the  ball  into  any  of  the  Galleries. 

Mr.  J.  B.  Gribble  has  a  Service  of  his  own.  He  stands 
about  the  middle  of  the  Court,  near  the  Last  Gallery 
Line,  and,  letting  the  ball  drop  quite  low  down,  he  sends 
a  slow  Twist-Service,  which  meanders  along  the  Pent- 
house, and  then,  if  it  does  not  get  the  Nick,  usually  hits 
the  floor  and  then  the  Back-wall,  and  finally  returns 
towards  the  Side-wall.  Here,  again,  the  opponent  has 
to  put  on  all  the  pace. 

The  Service  should  be  chosen  according  to  the  occa- 
sion, and  especially  according  to  the  Chase.  For  ex- 
ample, if  there  be  a  Hazard  Chase,  then  one  should  aim 
at  getting  the  length  of  the  Court,  and  one  should  send 
such  a  Service  that  the  opponent  cannot  easily  hit  it 
into  one's  Galleries.  If  one  wishes  to  stop  him  from 
forcing,  a  high  Drop-Service  may  be  the  best. 

One  cannot  do  better  than  watch  the  good  player,  or 
rather  the  veteran  player.  Perhaps  one  is  almost  com- 
pelled to  go  to  France  if  one  would  learn  what  Service 
to  send  for  any  given  purpose. 

Merely  to  vary  the  Service  is  ndf  nearly  the  whole  of 
the  art  of  serving  :  for  one  must  know  when  to  use  each 
special  variety ;  each  has  its  proper  place  and  time,  and 
on  the  use  of  the  right  Service  at  the  right  time  depends 
a  good  deal  of  the  Server's  success  and  enjoyment :  to 
take  every  advantage  of  the  particular  Court — for  Courts 
differ  from  one  another  very  appreciably — ,  to  take  every 
advantage  of  the  particular  light — for  here  again  Courts 
differ  from  one  another,  and  a  single  Court  will  differ  in 
its  light  at  one  spot  and  at  another — ,  to  take  every 
advantage  of  the  particular  state  of  the  game,  of  the 


246  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

particular  Chase,  and — last  but  not  least — of  the  par- 
ticular opponent  and  his  strong  and  weak  points :  all 
this  should  receive  careful  consideration. 

And,  as  I  have  suggested  already,  attention  can  be 
best  given  to  this,  and  to  many  other  subjects,  in  one's 
spare  moments — while  one  is  travelling,  while  one  is 
waiting,  while  one  is  trying  in  vain  to  get  to  sleep. 
Such  theorisings  and  imaginings  will  form  a  pleasant 
change  in  the  midst  of  work  or  worry. 

But  variety  of  Service,  and  the  use  of  the  right  Service 
at  the  right  time,  and  careful  study  spent  on  these  points 
are  not  enough.  What  more  can  be  demanded  of  a 
player } 

Each  player,  as  we  said  above,  should  have  his  own 
speciality :  we  must  learn  a  lesson  from  the  progress  of 
mankind,  and  specialise.  While  we  have  at  our  disposal 
every  variety,  or  at  any  rate  numerous  varieties,  yet  we 
should  have  some  one  or  two  which  we  can  call  our  very 
own.  Let  this  or  these  be  our  basis,  on  which  we  may 
always  fall  back.  Let  us  spend  a  quarter  of  an  hour 
over  it  or  them  in  the  Tennis-Court  once  every  now  and 
then.     We  shall  never  regret  it. 

In  taking  the  Service,  notice  the  opponent's  body, 
and  especially  his  wrist ;  listen  also  for  the  sound  which 
the  ball  makes  when  it  leaves  the  racket.  If  you  can 
observe  closely  what  happens  after  each  position  and 
movement,  and  after  each  different  sound,  you  will  soon 
instinctively  judge  what  will  happen  on  any  occasion. 
As  a  general  rule,  we  would  advise  the  receiver  of 
the  Service  to  stand  with  the  head  of  his  racket  sup- 
ported by  his  left  hand,  or  held  in  the  hand-mirror 
position,  with  his  knees  somewhat  bent,  and  with  his 
feet  not  upon  their  heels  but  upon  their  balls. 


CHAPTER   XXXV 

PRACTICE  OUTSIDE  THE  COURT 

It  is  only  human  to  go  frequently  into  the  Court 
and  play  a  game,  even  when  one  knows  that  success 
would  come  more  surely  from  practice  outside  the  Court, 
or  from  practice  inside  the  Court ;  but  success  is  not 
the  sole  object  in  life :  enjoyment  is  another  object. 
In  America,  where  I  had  the  opportunity  of  watching 
and  talking  with  beginners  at  the  game,  I  was  almost 
invariably  met  with  the  answer,  "  I  want  to  enjoy  myself; 
I  do  not  want  to  spend  my  time  in  learning  the  game." 
It  was  nearly  impossible  to  convince  beginners  that  they 
would  never  enjoy  the  game  properly  unless  they  spent 
time  in  learning  it.  I  tried  to  point  out  that  the  alphabet 
of  play,  the  words  which  made  up  the  sentences,  and 
the  sentences  which  made  up  the  paragraphs,  were  not 
the  paragraphs  themselves,  and  still  less  the  chapters, 
and  certainly  not  the  whole  book,  but  that  they  were  in- 
tegral parts  of  the  book  ;  that  he  who  would  fully  appre- 
ciate play  must  feel  that  he  was  improving  gradually; 
and  that  he  who  would  improve  gradually  must  pay 
attention  to  the  A  B  C,  to  the  individual  words,  to  the 
individual  sentences,  to  the  individual  paragraphs.  They 
were  not  play,  they  were  only  a  preparation  and  appren- 
ticeship for  successful  and  therefore  for  pleasant  play. 

247 


248  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

Without  them  I  should  not  have  appreciated  my  present 
recreations  a  quarter  as  much  as  I  do.  And  let  me  here 
advise  most  people  who  want  to  play  a  game  casually, 
"  for  the  fun  of  the  thing,"  and  without  apprenticeship,  to 
choose  some  other  game — perhaps  Squash,  certainly  not 
Tennis. 

The  remarks  in  this  Chapter,  and  in  the  corresponding 
Chapter  on  Racquets,  are  based  entirely  on  personal 
experience.  Whilst  I  do  still  practise  outside  the  Court, 
I  am  not  obliged  to  do  so  nearly  as  much  as  before, 
except  in  order  to  correct  small  faults.  At  one  time  I 
had  a  vast  number  of  mistakes  in  my  style ;  I  was  un- 
aware of  what  they  were ;  I  only  knew  that  I  was 
playing  badly,  very  badly ;  I  had  a  vague  glimmering 
of  ambition  to  play  better,  and  in  dreams  I  used  to 
imagine  myself  making  the  strokes  which  now  I  actually 
make  in  the  Court.  Then,  as  I  have  described  already, 
I  came  to  analyse  the  different  parts  of  play,  very  much 
as  I  might  take  a  watch  to  pieces.  Up  to  that  time  I 
had  only  seen  the  watch  of  others  as  a  watch ;  I  had 
seen  it  working  beautifully,  and  keeping  time  reliably, 
but  I  had  not  examined  its  mechanism.  Now  I  ex- 
amined the  mechanism  of  play,  and  took  the  watch  of 
play  to  bits,  and,  as  it  were,  re-made  my  own  watch, 
part  by  part,  manufacturing  and  correcting  each  little 
section  of  it  by  itself,  with  the  utmost  care  and  attention. 
I  offer  this  part  of  the  book  in  the  belief  that  most 
players  still  have  a  large  number  of  my  old  faults,  and 
are  unaware  of  them  even  as  I  was :  that  they  only 
know  that  somehow  they  are  playing  badly. 

First  and  foremost  come  the  various  exercises  which 
can  be  practised,  for  a  minute  or  two  at  a  time,  now  and 
then  during  the  day.  The  exercises  for  deep  and  full 
breathing  through  the  nose,  the  various  foot-movements, 


CH.  xxxv]     PRACTICE  OUTSIDE   THE  COURT  249 

the  sideways  running  with  the  head  facing  forwards 
(one  of  the  hardest  arts  to  acquire),  the  neck-exercises 
from  side  to  side,^  the  body-swing  with  weight-shifting, 
the  full-arm-swing,  the  fore-arm-swing,  the  finger-move- 
ments, and  the  wrist-shakings  to  get  litheness  and 
freedom — all  these  exercises  have  been  described  above. 
All  seem  to  be  essential  to  success  in  the  case  of  those 
who  have  not  such  parts  of  the  stroke  and  play  by 
nature,  and  who  therefore  have  to  acquire  them  by 
conscious  art. 

Let  these  movements  at  first  be  slow  and  full,  then 
let  them  gradually  become  faster  and  brisker ;  then  let 
them  be  varied  by  arrested  movements.  It  is  in  these 
additional  arrested  movements  that  my  system  differs 
from  Macdonald  Smith's,  which  consists  entirely  of  fast 
full  movements. 

In  the  exercises  it  is  necessary  to  repeat  similar 
movements  in  succession  ;  not  to  change  rapidly  from 
one  movement  to  another,  but  rather  to  acquire  each 
independently,  and  afterwards  to  combine  them,  two  by 
two  and  then  three  by  three.  The  Forehand  and  Back- 
hand movements  have  been  described  above. 

We  have  also  seen  how  a  player  can  practise  by 
himself  against  a  plain  wall  or  in  a  Squash  Court,  with 
a  Lawn  Tennis  ball,  and  how  he  can  use  the  Ball-Game 
Exerciser  for  the  various  strokes  and  Services. 

Let  us  in  this  Chapter  consider  this  Exerciser 
especially. 

For  the  Forehand  stroke,  put  the  ball  from  12  to 
18  inches  from  the  floor;  stand  facing  it  with  the 
feet  12  to  18  inches  apart.  Now  do  the  Tennis  stroke 
as  described   in  a  previous  Chapter :   and   see  Photo- 

*  It  is  obvious  that  dancing  would  be  excellent  practice  here. 
He  who  can  dance  well,  should  be  readier  to  acquire  these  arts. 


250  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

graphs  XI  and  XII.  First  hit  the  ball  full,  then 
gradually  increase  the  amount  of  cut — that  is  to  say,  hit 
the  ball  with  the  racket-face  turned  more  and  more 
away  from  it.  Carry  through  the  stroke,  and  give  the 
full  body-swing.  When  you  can  hit  the  ball  with  a 
severe  cut,  then  you  may  actually  turn  the  racket  away 
from  the  ball  at  the  moment  when  it  strikes  the  ball. 
This  will  give  a  still  more  marked  rotation  to  the  stroke, 
and  a  still  severer  cut  or  twist.  After  each  stroke  you 
should  end  up  alert. 

It  will  be  far  better  if  you  can  get  a  good  Marker  or 
player  to  show  you  how  he  would  stand  for  an  easy 
Forehand  cut- stroke;  then  mark  on  the  floor  where  his 
feet  are,  and  imitate  the  stroke  immediately  after  him, 
till  you  can  reproduce  what  he  does.  Afterwards  you 
may  have  to  modify  your  stroke,  for  yours  may  not  be 
exactly  like  his  ;  but,  for  practical  purposes,  you  may 
imitate  him  to  start  with. 

The  same  will  apply  to  the  Backhand  stroke  :  the 
position  of  the  feet  for  this  was  shown  in  Diagrams  2 
and  5,  and  the  general  position  in  Photographs  XI  and 
XII. 

When  you  have  mastered  the  ordinary  cut-strokes  for 
Forehand  and  Backhand,  then  you  can  stand  away  from 
the  Apparatus,  and  keep  your  eyes  on  the  ball ;  move 
into  position,  and  see  how  nearly  your  feet  coincide  with 
the  marks  which  you  have  put  upon  the  floor.  Practise 
moving  into  position  until  you  get  your  feet  into  these 
marks  every  time. 

Your  first  strokes  should  be  out  and  away  from  you. 
After  these  have  become  easy,  you  can  practise  the 
strokes  across  your  body,  such  strokes  as  you  would 
make  from  one  corner  of  the  Court  into  the  opposite 
corner  rather  than  down  the  sides. 


CH.  xxxv]     PRACTICE  OUTSIDE   THE  COURT  251 

Placing  the  ball  somewhat  lower,  you  can  practise  a 
Pettitt  Service ;  placing  it  somewhat  higher,  you  can 
practise  a  Latham  Service ;  placing  it  somewhat  higher 
again,  you  can  practise  a  "  Punch  "  Fairs  Service  ;  and, 
somewhat  higher  still,  a  Giraffe  Service.  See  Chapter 
XXXIV. 

But,  as  often  as  you  can,  get  some  competent  teacher 
to  supervise  your  various  strokes.  Let  him  point  out 
which  part  of  your  body  is  making  a  mistake.  Let  him 
show  you  how  any  given  stroke  should  end  up ;  then,  if 
you  start  with  the  finishing  pose,  you  will  have  a  natural 
inclination  to  come  back  to  it  after  the  stroke.  This 
principle  seems  to  be  of  especial  importance  in  Service, 
but  it  applies  to  some  extent  elsewhere,  at  any  rate  in 
practice  outside  and  inside  the  Court. 


CHAPTER  XXXVI 

PRACTICE  INSIDE  THE  COURT 

Hitherto,  with  the  Ball-Game  Apparatus,  one  has 
had  a  ball  ready  to  be  struck.  Now  it  is  necessary  to 
go  to  the  ball,  as  Mahomet  had  to  go  to  the  mountain. 
We  have  not  merely  to  see  the  ball,  but  to  time  its 
flight :  a  very  different  matter,  a  matter  which  does  not 
enter  into  a  course  of  instruction  as  given  by  ordinary 
"  Physical  Culturists."  It  is  in  thus  timing  the  flight 
of  the  ball,  and  adapting  themselves  to  the  right  position 
in  advance,  that  most  players  are  weak. 

For  practice  inside  the  Court,  as  for  Service,  there  are 
successive  stages.  First,  one  should  aim  at  the  right 
direction  of  the  stroke :  one  should  face  the  Main-wall 
on  the  Service  side,  and  hit  the  ball  up  against  this 
Main-wall,  trying  to  keep  it  between  two  of  the  Chase 
lines.  When  the  ball  goes  outside  either  of  the  two 
lines,  one  must  correct  the  position  of  the  body  or  the 
swing  of  the  racket. 

Having  got  the  direction  of  the  stroke  correctly,  one 
may  now  get  the  height  of  the  stroke,  which  is  an  easier 
matter.  You  will  find  that  it  will  depend  chiefly  upon 
where  you  take  the  ball ;  the  swing  of  the  racket  is  first 
downwards  and  then  upwards.     Take  the  ball  too  soon, 

and  you  will  hit  it  down  ;    take  the  ball  at  the  right 

252 


CH.  xxxvi]    PRACTICE  INSIDE   THE  COURT  253 

instant,  and  you  will  hit  it  to  the  right  height ;  take  the 
ball  too  late,  and  you  will  hit  it  too  high. 

Having  acquired  the  power  of  striking  the  ball  along 
a  certain  line,  and  to  a  certain  height,  you  may  next 
vary  the  pace  and  the  length  of  the  stroke. 

In  these  strokes  the  racket  is  supposed  to  meet  the 
ball  with  the  open  face,  and  I  should  recommend  that 
the  beginner  master  the  simple  stroke  before  he  proceeds 
to  the  cut :  I  have  seen  dozens  of  Tennis-players  who 
have  been  taught  to  cut  the  ball  in  a  most  elaborate 
manner,  and  in  a  manner  often  absolutely  at  variance 
with  the  practice  of  the  teacher,  long  before  they  knew 
how  to  get  the  ball  over.  I  have  seen  many  players, 
who  might  have  improved  rapidly,  kept  back  by  the 
fact  that  they  did  not  know  how  to  get  a  simple  Back- 
hander over  the  Net  in  a  simple  way. 

After  this,  you  may  add  the  cut :  first  the  plain  cut, 
growing  more  and  more  severe,  and  then  the  cut  during 
which  the  racket  moves  away  from  the  ball  at  the 
moment  of  striking  it.  This  is  not  altogether  to  be 
distinguished  from  the  twist.  The  severity  of  the  cut 
and  twist  should  be  increased  gradually. 

Having  acquired  all  these  essentials  of  a  good  stroke, 
you  must  next  see  to  your  recovery  after  the  stroke. 
At  first  you  will  be  thrown  off  your  balance,  and  indeed 
you  must  disregard  this :  you  will  have  to  give  your 
whole  attention  to  the  movements  themselves.  By 
degrees,  however,  they  will  become  easy,  and  you  will 
be  able  to  get  ready  for  a  new  stroke  the  moment  that 
the  old  stroke  is  over. 

Last  of  all,  you  can  give  attention  to  variety.  You 
may  pass  quickly  from  one  kind  of  stroke  to  another ; 
but  at  first  this  would  be  the  greatest  mistake  imagin- 
able.    Divide  et  impera :  take  the  things  to  be  mastered 


254  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

and  master  them  one  by  one.  When  you  have  mastered 
them  one  by  one,  then  practise  them  in  various  ways, 
and  notice  the  effect  of  each  particular  stroke,  so  that 
when  you  come  to  use  it  in  a  game  you  may  use  it  with 
judgment.  See,  for  example,  what  happens  to  a  ball 
when  you  have  cut  it,  as  distinct  from  what  happens  to 
a  ball  when  you  have  twisted  it  This  observation  of 
what  happens  to  any  given  stroke  is  sadly  neglected  by 
teachers.  They  teach  the  player  how  to  hit  the  ball, 
but  they  do  not  make  him  mark  the  effect  of  each 
particular  style  of  hit. 

In  learning  any  sort  of  stroke  you  should,  first  of  all, 
hit  or  throw  the  ball  several  times  onto  the  Side-wall, 
and  notice  where  it  falls  at  its  second  bounce ;  or,  better 
still,  get  another  to  do  this  for  you.  It  is  sounder  to 
begin  with  the  Side-wall  play  than  with  the  Penthouse 
play  :  that  should  come  second. 

Next  throw  the  ball  to  the  same  place,  and  get  into 
the  position  to  make  the  stroke.  Do  not  make  the  stroke 
yet,  but  simply  move  into  the  place  at  which  you  can 
easily  make  it.  Practise  this  until  it  becomes  a  matter 
of  instinct  to  move  rightly.  Notice  your  faults  and 
correct  them. 

Next,  not  only  throw  up  the  ball  to  the  same  place, 
and  move  into  position,  but  also  make  the  stroke  itself; 
at  first  gently,  then  with  more  and  more  pace  and 
severity. 

Then  notice  what  happens  to  the  ball  when  you  hit  it 
faster,  or  with  greater  cut. 

It  may  be  as  well  to  acquire  nearly  all  the  ordinary 
strokes  by  throwing  the  ball  onto  the  Side-wall.  This 
encourages  the  sideways  position  of  the  feet  and  body — 
that  position  which  will  give  you  the  full  swing  and 
power  as  at  Golf.    After  such  strokes,  you  may  learn  not 


CH.  xxxvi]    PRACTICE  INSIDE   THE  COURT  255 

only  how  to  hit  the  ball  over  the  Net,  at  first  with  and 
then  without  cut,  but  also  how  to  hit  the  Nick,  and  then 
how  to  hit  this  or  that  Opening,  the  Dedans,  the  Grille, 
the  Winning  Gallery.  Pettitt,  as  we  said,  used  to  practise 
hitting  a  piece  of  paper  put  up  in  the  Dedans,  I  am 
not  aware  that  any  player  takes  the  trouble  to  do  this 
to-day,  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  this  Forcing  for  the 
Dedans  becomes  commoner  and  commoner  every 
year. 

A  few  minutes  might  be  profitably  spent  every  now 
and  then  in  the  practice  of  Forcing :  throw  the  ball  onto 
the  Penthouse,  and  "  force "  it  either  when  it  has  hit 
the  ground  or  by  a  Volley :  then  throw  a  few  balls  onto 
the  Back-wall,  and  practise  forcing  them.  Do  not  hit  too 
hard,  for  this  is  not  good  work  for  the  racket. 

If  you  can  get  some  one  to  send  you  over  a  few  easy 
balls  to  force,  do  so  :  in  return  for  risking  his  life,  tell  him 
he  may  practise  forcing  while  you  practise  stopping. 
Players  very  seldom  think  of  practising  together 
systematically,  and  yet  they  could  help  one  another 
considerably. 

The  strokes  off  the  Penthouse  should  be  learnt 
according  to  the  same  plan.  Throw  the  ball  up  onto 
the  Penthouse,  and  notice  where  it  falls  at  its  second 
bounce ;  then  move  into  position ;  then  move  into 
position  and  make  the  stroke.  Afterwards  you  may 
practise  volleying  off  the  Penthouse.  This  is  an  ex- 
cellent feature  of  the  Tennis  Court,  that  it  gives  you 
something  to  throw  balls  to  you.  The  writer  in  the 
'  Badminton '  volume  says  that  one  can  play  Racquets 
against  oneself,  but  cannot  play  Tennis.  This  is  true ; 
but  at  least  one  can  practise  by  oneself.  One  can 
practise  strokes  off  the  Side-wall,  off  the  Penthouse 
(this  will  be  an  excellent  plan  to  teach  one  how  to 


256  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

take  the  Service),  and  then  off  the  End-wall.  The 
method  of  learning  strokes  off  the  End-wall  has  been 
considered  above. 

After  this,  strokes  off  the  Tambour  should  be  studied 
and  tried  again  on  the  same  system.  First  let  the  ball 
be  thrown  onto  the  Tambour  by  some  one  ;  notice  where 
it  falls  at  its  second  bounce.  Then  let  the  ball  be  thrown 
again,  and  this  time  get  into  position.  Then  let  the 
ball  be  thrown  again,  and  this  time  get  into  position  and 
make  the  stroke. 

The  Service  can  also  be  practised  inside  the  Court. 
Let  us  take  the  Latham  Service  as  an  example.  You 
stand  in  the  place  and  pose  described  in  a  previous 
Chapter.  You  can  do  a  few  swings  before  you  attempt 
to  hit  the  ball  at  all.  Swing  with  your  right  arm 
out  and  away  from  you,  and  let  it  end  up  opposite  your 
left  shoulder,  as  in  Photographs  XLVl,  XLVII,  and 
XLVIII. 

Now  make  a  stroke.  Do  not  trouble  about  how  high 
or  how  low  the  ball  goes;  simply  try  to  make  the 
stroke — to  hit  the  ball.  Next,  try  to  hit  the  ball  in  a 
certain  direction,  for  instance  towards  one  of  the  Gallery- 
posts  on  the  Hazard  Side.  Never  mind  yet  how  high  it 
goes,  or  how  low;  aim  simply  at  hitting  that  post.  If 
you  go  too  much  to  the  right,  then  let  your  feet  face 
more  to  the  left,  or  throw  the  ball  differently.  Go  on 
till  you  can  hit  the  ball  straight  in  any  direction.  First 
get  the  swing,  a  full  natural  swing  with  your  weight 
behind  it,  then  alter  the  position  of  your  feet  till  that 
swing  will  drive  the  ball  in  the  required  line.  You  can 
increase  the  severity  of  this  Service  by  degrees;  you 
will  find  it  admirable  exercise  for  the  larger  organs  of 
the  body. 

Next  you  can  consider  the  height.     You  will  see  that 


CH.  xxxvi]    PRACTICE  INSIDE   THE  COURT  257 

you  can  regulate  the  height  of  the  ball  by  taking  it 
when  it  is  further  in  front  of  you,  or  further  behind  you, 
i.e.  by  taking  it  sooner  or  later.  This  will  alter  the 
direction  of  the  ball  as  well  as  the  height. 

The  Fairs  Service  may  be  practised  similarly.  In 
this  Service,  the  right  arm  swings  out  and  beyond  the 
ball,  and  round  again,  ending  up  opposite  the  right 
shoulder,  as  in  Photograph  XLVII. 

First  make  the  stroke  itself,  thinking  of  nothing  but 
of  how  you  shall  get  the  ball  somehow  to  move  away 
from  you.  Do  not  think  for  a  moment  of  the  direction 
or  elevation. 

When  you  are  once  able  to  hit  the  ball,  and  to  hit  it 
over  the  Net,  then  practise  the  direction  ;  regulate  the 
direction  by  the  position  of  your  feet,  as  before,  and  by 
the  place  at  which  you  take  the  ball.  Your  racket  is 
moving  round  in  a  curve.  The  direction  of  the  ball, 
after  it  has  left  your  racket,  will  depend  largely  upon 
that  part  of  the  curve  at  which  your  racket  has  met  it. 
You  must,  above  all  things,  get  a  comfortable  full  swing  ; 
that  must  be  the  basis.  Do  not  alter  the  direction 
simply  by  your  wrist. 

Now,  having  the  direction  under  your  control,  pay 
attention  to  the  elevation.  You  should  soon  be  able  to 
hit  the  ball  onto  any  spot  upon  the  side  Penthouse. 
Your  aim  should  be,  however,  either  to  send  it  short,  so 
that  it  will  bounce  on  the  floor  just  beyond  the  Service 
line,  or  else  to  send  it  far  back,  so  that  it  will  leave  your 
opponent  no  room  for  a  swing :  the  Back-wall  shall  be 
in  his  way. 

A  test  of  the  correctness  of  this  Service  is  that  it 

should   hang.     If  your  racket   has  moved  outside  the 

ball,  then  the  Service  when  it  reaches  the  floor  bounces 

rather  towards  your  left  than  towards  the  right;  and  a 

19 


258  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

specially  severe  Service  will  actually  bounce  backwards 
as  well  as  towards  your  left. 

The  same  plan  may  be  applied  to  a  Pettitt  Service. 
Get  the  swing  first  and  then  the  direction,  so  that  you 
can  hit  the  ball  (let  us  say)  into  the  Second  Gallery  on 
the  Hazard  Side  ;  then  the  height,  so  that  you  can  hit 
the  Penthouse  just  above  this  Gallery. 

"Long-Fives" — see  Chapter  XXXI — is  among  the 
best  forms  of  practice  inside  the  Court.  It  gives  more 
play  in  a  given  space  of  time.  To  achieve  the  same  end, 
have  a  rule  that  one  Fault  (and  perhaps  one  Pass  also) 
shall  count  as  two  Faults. 

In  order  to  have  many  similar  strokes  in  succession — 
for  this  is  real  and  true  practice — arrange  such  Handi- 
caps as  Half-the-Court.  At  the  very  beginning  you 
may  find  it  even  better  to  ask  the  Marker  to  give  you 
"  Touch-No- Walls." 

As  you  advance  in  skill,  it  might  be  advisable  to  give 
the  Marker  practice.  Hit  over  balls  to  him  so  that,  for 
exartiple,  they  shall  pitch  about  Chase  3  and  4  on  the 
Service-side.  A  basket-full  of  balls  might  be  profitably 
used  for  this  purpose  ;  the  Marker  would  not  mind. 

The  advantage  of  practice  inside  the  Court  is  obvious. 
By  its  means  one  can  correct  faults  one  by  one,  and  can 
attend  to  that  which,  during  the  flurry  of  a  game  or 
Match,  one  cannot  notice  with  full  power  of  mind. 
Besides  this,  the  knock-up  which  should  precede  every 
game  or  Match  is  a  condensed  form  of  a  great  deal  of 
this  practice  inside  the  Court. 


*^ 


^ 


w 


CHAPTER   XXXVII 

FOUR-HANDED  GAMES 

Four-handed  or  Double  games  are  comparatively 
rare.  Against  them  is  the  fact  that  they  do  not  give 
much  exercise  ;  and,  besides  this,  as  we  remarked  about 
the  Double  game  at  Racquets,  if  the  Court  is  (and  I 
think  it  is)  of  the  right  size  for  a  Single  game,  it  is  of 
necessity  too  small  for  a  Double  game. 

Another  reason  against  it  is  that  players  so  seldom 
play  it  that  they  do  not  know  any  of  the  ordinary 
ABC  of  play.  On  one  historical  occasion,  when  four  of 
the  greatest  living  Single  players  met,  the  result  was 
lamentably  unsatisfactory.  A  player  like  Lord  Windsor 
is  more  useful  in  a  Four-game  than  many  who,  in  a 
Single,  could  perhaps  give  him  as  much  as  Thirty. 
Two  good  Single  players  (as  at  Lawn  Tennis)  do  not 
necessarily  make  a  good  combination. 

With  regard  to  the  position  of  the  two  players,  it  is  a 
question  whether  one  should  be  forward  and  the  other 
back,  or  whether  both  should  be  back.  If  one  be  for- 
ward, then  he  himself  is  useful  for  all  strokes  that  come 
within  his  reach ;  especially  can  he  defend  the  Galleries 
on  the  Service-side,  and  the  Tambour  and  Grille  on  the 
Hazard-side.  His  opponent  is  in  a  somewhat  uncom- 
fortable strait.     For  my  own  part,  I  am  afraid  of  hitting 

259 


26o  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

my  partner  when  he  is  in  front  of  me,  especially  as  I  am 
somewhat  fond  of  the  Side-wall  (Boasted)  stroke.  And 
when  my  partner  is  close  up  to  the  Net  on  the  Service- 
side  and  I  back  in  the  right-hand  corner,  the  Dedans  is 
left  exposed  to  our  opponents'  Forces.  To  return  these 
Forces  is  somewhat  dangerous. 

Obviously  it  would  be  out  of  the  question  for  both 
players  to  come  forward,  since  the  opponents  could 
then  lob  into  the  Dedans  or  Grille. 

If  both  stand  back,  then  on  the  Service-side  one  is 
at  a  great  disadvantage,  in  that  the  opponents  can 
return  the  ball  into  the  Galleries,  and  so  themselves 
gain  the  Service,  which  should  always  be  a  considerable 
profit. 

It  is  possible  that  both  players  should  stand  back  on 
the  Service-side,  however,  and  that  both  should  stand 
forward  on  the  Hazard-side,  the  one  to  defend  the 
Tambour  and  Grille  and  the  other  to  defend  the 
Winning  Gallery.  To  defend  the  Grille  when  one  is 
standing  near  it,  is  extremely  difficult. 

In  the  Four-handed  Game,  the  Boasted  stroke  is  of 
unusual  importance,  and  of  all  Boasted  strokes  the 
Boasted  Force  is  among  the  best. 

As  a  variation,  the  Three-handed  Game  is  good.  One 
of  the  best  Matches  I  have  ever  had  was  at  Boston, 
when  I  played  against  Messrs.  Fearing  and  Stockton. 
They  have  practised  together  as  a  pair  again  and 
again,  and  they  probably  form  the  best  working  pair 
and  combination  of  all  amateurs.  It  was  capital  exer- 
cise, and  I  cannot  imagine  anything  more  enjoyable. 
But  I  can  count  on  my  fingers  the  Four-handed  Games 
that  I  have  enjoyed. 


CHAPTER- XXXVIII 

HINTS   FOR  PLAY  AND  MATCH-PLAY 

Except  in  important  Matches  the  object  of  players 
should  be  practice  and  improvement  and  exercise  rather 
than  victory.  One  of  the  chief  aims  should  be  to  secure 
good  rallies  or  rests. 

Hence  the  game  of  Long  Fives  should  be  tried  at 
intervals.  No  beginner  should  attempt  more  than  one 
full  game  until  he  has  played  many  games  of  Long 
Fives.  In  this  game  all  Chases  that  are  worse  than  the 
Second  Gallery,  and  the  Second  Gallery  itself,  may 
count  against  the  striker,  though  it  is  the  rule  for  them 
to  count  as  let-strokes.  In  this  variety  of  play  there  is 
far  less  waiting  and  dawdling  ;  one  has  not  to  change 
sides  constantly. 

To  save  time,  one  may  also  (see  Chapter  XXXVI) 
have  the  rule  that  a  Fault  shall  count  against  the  Server, 
instead  of  two  Faults  counting  against  him.  A  Pass 
may  also  count  against  the  Server.  Nothing  wastes 
more  time  than  a  Pass. 

In  practice  one  should  leave  many  balls  for  the  Back- 
wall  which  in  a  Match  one  would  volley  or  half-volley. 
On  the  other  hand,  one  must  be  able  to  volley  and  half- 
volley  successfully. 

Besides  avoiding  these  two  strokes  to  excess,  at  the 
261 


262  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

beginning  one  must  also  avoid  the  Force,  and  especially 
the  Boasted  Force.  It  is  so  easy  to  add  these  two 
strokes  ;  but,  having  once  learnt  them,  having  once 
realised  their  value  in  difficulties,  it  is  extremely  hard 
to  resist  the  temptation  of  using  them  on  ordinary 
occasions.  They  should  be  rather  kept  for  a  stimulant 
than  used  as  a  regular  article  of  diet. 

In  Service,  again,  one  should  not  invariably  employ 
the  most  effective  kind.  In  such  a  case  one  will  get  few 
balls  returned,  whereas  what  one  wants  is  play  in  the 
rallies. 

In  general,  one  should  try  to  get  all  the  practice  one 
can  for  one's  weakest  points  whatever  they  may  be. 

And  one  must  train  the  mind  to  do  sub-consciously 
all  the  ordinary  mechanism  of  play.  This  can  only 
be  the  result  of  conscious  effort  continued  during  many 
weeks. 

After  a  certain  point  of  proficiency  has  been  reached, 
it  will  be  time  to  observe  the  niceties  of  the  game. 
Notice  the  opponent's  wrist  and  his  racket,  instead  of 
merely  watching  the  ball  ;  for  the  ball  itself  may  tell 
one  very  little  about  the  coming  stroke,  whereas  the 
opponent's  wrist  and  racket  may  tell  one  a  great 
deal. 

Between  games  of  Tennis  there  should  be  intervals  of 
Racquets,  to  freshen  up  one's  play  and  to  give  it  prompt- 
itude and  rapidity. 

For  Match-play  one  needs  to  be  in  training,  but  not 
in  the  ordinary  sense  of  the  word  ;  for  to  be  in  training 
should  mean  to  be  calm  and  collected,  master  of  one's 
head  as  well  as  of  one's  limbs. 

One  should  also  be  warm  before  the  game  starts.  A 
few  swings  and  a  little  rubbing  will  put  this  right,  if  the 
knock-up  is  not  sufficient  to  do  so. 


CH.  xxxviii]  HINTS  FOR  PLA  V  263 

Comfortable  flannels,  and  good  shoes  with  a  firm  grip, 
and  plenty  of  well-strung  rackets,  are  indispensable. 

During  the  Match,  begin  gradually,  and  perhaps  with 
a  needless  variety  of  strokes,  so  that  one  may  detect 
one's  own  faults  on  this  particular  day,  and  detect  one's 
opponent's  faults  also.  By  degrees  increase  the  pace 
and  the  severity.  In  Service,  for  example,  one  may  try 
five  or  six  kinds  before  one  decides  which  shall  be  the 
suitable  Service  for  that  particular  Match.  For  my  own 
part,  I  find  that  some  Services  are  practically  impossible 
on  some  days,  even  if  on  other  days  they  may  be 
singularly  effective  ;  and  the  same  applies  to  strokes. 
There  are  times  when  I  cannot  rely  on  the  Half-volley : 
there  are  other  times  when  the  Half-volley  seems  to  be 
t/ie  stroke  on  which  I  ifmst  rely. 

Try  to  keep  on  the  Service-side.  In  Long  Fives  the 
Server  has  to  concede  points  to  the  player  on  the 
Hazard-side  ;  and  I  always  consider  the  Service-side 
to  be  worth  at  least  Half-fifteen.  One  can  get  back  to 
the  Service-side  either  by  a  very  severe  stroke,  which 
will  make  a  Chase,  or  by  a  stroke  into  the  Nick,  or  by 
a  stroke  into  one  of  the  Galleries  ;  but  anyhow  one 
should  get  over  from  the  Hazard-side  whenever  the 
opponent  has  a  dangerous  run  of  Service,  even  if  this 
demands  the  sacrifice  of  one  or  two  points. 

If  you  are  not  playing  so  well  as  usual,  then  it  may 
be  advisable  to  shorten  the  grip  of  your  racket  for  safety, 
even  though  thereby  you  lose  some  power  and  speed 
and  some  snap. 

Safety  must  be  the  rule  before  severity. 

With  regard  to  Chases,  in  the  heat  of  the  game  one  is 
apt  to  forget  them.  Mr.  Ross's  words  from  an  article  in 
the  *  Encyclopaedia  of  Sport '  are  worth  reading  a  great 
many  times  by  Match-players. 


264  TENNIS  [PT.  IV 

"(i)  Remember  always  to  serve  carefully  with  reference  to  a 
Chase  which  is  being  played  for,  whether  it  be  a  Chase  on  the 
Service-side  which  you  are  defending,  or  on  the  Hazard-side  which 
you  are  attacking. 

"  (2)  Be  on  your  guard  against  forgetting  altogether,  in  the  excite- 
ment of  a  long  rest,  the  fact  that  you  are  defending  or  attacking 
a  Chase.  When  defending  Chases,  especially,  beginners  are  liable 
in  their  excitement  to  return  or  attempt  to  return  a  ball  which 
would  have  '  lost  the  Chase.' 

"  (3)  Remember  that  a  Chase  on  the  Service-side  is  successfully 
defended  by  striking  the  ball  into  any  of  the  Openings  on  the 
Hazard-side,  and  that  a  Chase  on  the  Hazard-side  is  successfully 
defended  by  striking  the  ball  into  any  of  the  Openings  on  the 
Service-side." 

We  may  add  that  when  there  is  a  Hazard  Chase, 
and  you  are  on  the  Hazard-side,  it  is  not  always  best 
to  aim  for  one  of  the  Galleries  in  the  orthodox  manner. 
A  hard  Force,  or  a  hard  drive  for  the  Nick,  such  as  Mr. 
H.  E.  Crawley  frequently  gives,  may  be  far  more 
effective. 

If  you  are  having  a  run  of  bad  luck,  then  say  to 
yourself  what  Latham  told  me  he  said  to  himself: 
"  Here  is  your  chance  ;  this  is  the  occasion  which  will 
put  you  on  your  mettle  ;  this  is  just  the  moment  that 
you  have  been  wanting.  Now  you  can  show  yourself  at 
your  very  best." 

If  a  player  has  the  opportunity,  he  should  consult 
some  authority  like  Mr.  Alfred  Lyttelton  or  Mr.  Heath- 
cote  or  Mr.  Ross  (I  mention  a  few  out  of  the  many) ; 
they  will  give  him  valuable  advice  as  to  Tennis  Match- 
play.  Mr.  Ross,  for  example,  will  point  out  the  vital 
importance  of  a  good  Service  and  an  appropriate  Service. 
There  is  no  game,  except  perhaps  American  Football, 
in  which  more  can  be  learnt  from  the  advice  of  those 
who  have  studied  the  refinements  of  skill  and  head-work. 


Part  V 
HISTORICAL  AND   PERSONAL 


CHAPTER   XXXIX 

BALL-GAMES   IN   GENERAL 

There  is  no  need  to  quote  here  the  early  mentions  of 
the  games  of  ball.  Homer  tells  us  of  Nausicaa  and  her 
maidens ;  Herodotus  describes  the  ball-games  of  the 
Lydians.  Nor  can  there  be  any  doubt  that  ball-games 
were  considered  to  be  not  beneath  the  dignity  of  the 
noblest  and  richest.  We  hear  of  bishops  playing  them 
as  early  as  450  A.D. — foreshadowings  of  the  present 
Bishop  of  London.  But  we  must  be  content  to  leave 
details  of  the  history  to  specialists  like  Mr.  Julian 
Marshall ;  for  this  book  is  practical  rather  than  his- 
torical.    A  bare  outline  must  suffice. 

As  we  have  said  elsewhere,  there  are  two  great  classes 
of  Ball-Games :  in  the  first  the  ball  is  stationary  when 
one  hits  it,  whereas  in  the  second  it  is  moving.  The 
stationary  Ball-Games  might  have  originated  partly  in 
a  desire  to  hit,  and  especially  to  hit  a  stone  with  a  stick ; 
but,  where  the  ball  is  moving,  the  desire  might  also 
have  been  to  defend  oneself  or  one's  property  from 
attack,  as  in  batting  at  Cricket.  The  change  from  the 
stone  to  the  ball  is  small  and  natural. 

It  seems  that,  in  early  times,  in  some  primitive  forms 

of  the  latter  class  of  game,  to  which  Tennis  and  Racquets 

and  Squash   belong,  the  players  did  not  hit  the  ball, 

267 


268  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  v 

but  rather  caught  it  and  then  threw  it  This  at  least 
appears  to  be  the  case  in  some  of  the  ancient  Ball- 
Games.     Mr.  Marshall  says  : — 

"  Herodotus  depicts  a  dance,  combined  with  ball-play,  between 
Halius  and  Laodamas,  two  excellent  performers,  which  seems, 
however,  to  have  approached  more  nearly  to  the  nature  of  apnaarSv 
than  to  any  other  form  of  a<patpt(TrtKy}.  In  the  former,  the  players 
caught  or  snatched  the  ball  from  each  other ;  in  the  latter,  they 
passed  it  to  each  other,  endeavouring  always  themselves  to  return 
it,  but  to  cause  their  opponents  to  fail  to  do  so.  Here  we  recognise 
the  first  principles  of  Tennis  dimly  shadowed  forth." 

Hitting  the  ball  with  the  hand  is  near  to  a  combination 
of  catching  and  throwing,  and  hitting  the  ball  with  some- 
thing held  in  the  hand  is  almost  as  natural  as  hitting  it 
with  the  hand.  But  we  can  actually  trace  the  develop- 
ment from  the  hand  to  the  gloved  hand,  which  we  still 
find  in  Fives,  and  thence  to  the  gloved  hand  with  strings 
stretched  across  the  palm.  (Pelota — see  the  end  of  this 
book — uses  a  scoop,  which  is  not  unlike  a  long  extra 
hand,  attached  to  the  wrist.)  Then  we  have  the  bat  with 
strings  across  it.  A  wooden  implement,  however,  such 
as  we  find  in  Bat-Fives,  must  have  been  tried  in  certain 
places  at  very  early  periods.  The  present  elaborate 
Tennis  and  Racquet  bats  may  not  yet  have  reached 
perfection,  but  they  are  an  enormous  advance  upon  the 
early  use  of  the  hand,  and  they  have  done  a  great  deal 
to  alter  the  conditions  of  the  play.  They  are  of  a  far 
better  shape — see  Photograph  LIT — and  are  far  more 
tightly  strung,  than  were  the  primitive  implements. 

The  ball  also  has  become  better  and  truer.  Tennis- 
players  of  the  old  school  tell  us  about  the  different  sizes 
and  weights  of  the  old  balls,  and  their  general  shape- 
lessness.  They  also  tell  us  about  the  inaccuracy  of  the 
Courts  themselves. 


CH.  xxxix]       BALL-GAMES  IN  GENERAL  269 

The  Courts  and  the  balls  have  grown  more  and  more 
true  and  uniform,  more  and  more  reliable. 

Besides  this,  there  has  been  a  differentiation.  The 
chief  distinction  between  Tennis  and  Racquets  is  that  in 
Tennis  the  ball  is  hit  beyond  something.  It  may  have  been 
at  first  a  line  marked  on  the  ground,  or  a  mound  ;  then 
it  is  found  as  a  cord  with  or  without  a  fringe  ;  and  lastly 
as  a  net.  In  Racquets,  however,  the  ball  is  hit  against 
a  surface,  especially  a  wall.    In  Pelota  the  wall  is  curved. 

There  is  no  need  to  derive  the  game  against  the  wall 
from  the  old  game  of  Tennis.  I  am  glad  to  find  that 
the  writer  in  the  Badminton  Library  holds  this  view 
also.  His  words  are  quoted  in  Chapter  XLI.  And 
Mr.  Julian  Marshall's  words  about  Tennis  will  surely 
apply  to  Racquets  also : — 

"  It  seems  after  all  most  natural  to  suppose  the  existence  of  an 
aboriginal  game  of  Hand-ball  in  this,  such  as  we  find  to  have 
existed  in  almost  every  other  country  from  China  to  Peru,  played 
by  parties  of  one  or  two  or  more  on  each  side  opposed  to  each 
other,  and  perhaps  separated  by  some  rude  line,  over  which  the 
ball  must  pass  ;  and  upon  this,  as  the  rose  on  the  briar,  the  French 
game,  with  its  finesse  and  subtleties,  came  to  be  grafted,  when  our 
Kings  took  and  brought  over  to  England  so  many  things  that  were 
French." 

The  chief  changes  of  a  general  kind  common  to 
Tennis  and  Racquets,  besides  that  the  Courts  with  their 
four  walls  have  become  more  accurate,  are  that  the  four 
walls  have  been  roofed  in,  and  are  now  well-lighted  ; 
that  the  balls  are  better,  being  truer  and  harder ;  that 
the  rackets  are  better,  being  of  better  shape,  and 
more  tightly  strung ;  that  the  play  is  faster,  and  more 
violent ;  that  the  Volley  and  the  Half-volley  are  com- 
moner ;  and  last,  but  not  least,  that  the  games  may  have 
lost  something  of  their  grace  and  dignity  and  minute- 
like courtesy. 


CHAPTER  XL 

TENNIS 

Note  on  the  name  "  Tennis.^'' — In  Tasmania  the  game  is  called 
Royal  Tennis  ;  in  England  it  is  occasionally  called  Real  Tennis  ; 
and  in  America  it  is  always  called  Court-Tennis.  This  last  name 
is  one  of  the  best,  especially  in  a  country  where  Lawn  Tennis  is 
called  Tennis.  It  describes  the  prominent  feature  of  the  game, 
i.  e.  the  Court  (on  which  so  many  of  the  characteristics  of  the  play 
depend),  and  it  has  a  soupgon  of  the  name  Courte  Paume,  as 
distinct  from  La  Longue  Paume. 

Tennis  is  not  a  French  name  at  all,  even  if  the  game 
did  originally  come  chiefly  from  France.  France  called 
the  game  Jen  de  Paume,  Paume  being  derived  from 
palma,  the  hand  ;  for  at  first  the  game  was  played 
with  the  two  hands,  as  Fives  is  played  in  England 
to-day. 

In  early  English  the  word  is  spelt  in  various  ways. 
Its  derivation  is  extremely  obscure.  The  following 
suggestions  have  been  offered  : — 

Johnson  derives  it  from  Tenois  or  Senois  (a  place  in 
France);   which  is  perhaps  the  worst  derivation. 

The  game  of  Tamis,  played  with  a  glove  formed  oi 
curved  hide,  is  hardly  likely  to  have  given  birth  to  the 
word  Tennis. 

Nor  is  tentorium^  a  tent ;  for  this  ball-game  was  not 
played  in  a  tent. 

270 


CH.  XL]  TENNIS  271 

Nor  is  the  connection  with  the  Latin  tentus  (stretched) 
a  good  derivation  either,  for  the  game  was  apparently 
called  Tennis  before  the  racket  was  used  at  all. 

In  England  we  have  the  word  oyez  changed  into 
"  Oh  yes ! "  by  the  criers  in  villages  and  small  towns. 
It  is  possible  that  tenez,  the  French  for  "  Catch  it,"  was 
the  origin  of  our  word  Tennis.  The  early  game  might 
have  been  nearer  to  the  old  Greek  and  Latin  game  in 
some  of  its  forms,  for  here  the  catching  was  an  important 
feature.  The  ball  was  not  hit  back  immediately :  it  was 
caught  and  then  either  thrown  or  hit  back  afterwards. 
Indeed,  in  1603,  we  have  an  allusion  to  caitche  or  tennise, 
and  the  word  chase  was  etymologically  connected  with 
the  word  "  catch." 

Others,  however,  prefer  to  derive  the  word  "  Tennis  " 
from  the  number  of  fingers  which  were  used  before  the 
racket  was  invented.  In  Boxing  we  hear  of  people 
using  their  "  fives,"  i.  e.  tlieir  five  fingers.  And  this 
origin  seems  very  reasonable  ;  for  the  word  Fives  itself 
is  played  with  the  hands  of  five  fingers  each.  But 
others  say  that  the  game  of  Long  Fives,  a  simple  form 
of  Tennis,  was  the  name  given  to  it  because  of  the 
number  of  players.  There  is  no  doubt  that  in  early 
times  the  Four-handed  game  was  far  commoner  than 
it  is  to-day.  In  an  early  print  we  find  three  little  dots 
in  each  Court.  These  may  represent  the  places  of  the 
three  players,  and  it  is  possible  that,  in  still  earlier 
times,  there  were  five  a  side.  It  is  hard  to  carry  oneself 
back  to  those  days,  for  now  the  active  player  of  the 
Single  can  scarcely  tolerate  one  partner  in  the  Court :  the 
place  seems  at  times  too  small  even  for  himself  alone. 

But  anyhow  the  word  "  Tennis  "  is  very  old.  Caxton 
speaks  of  Tenyse  in  1482 ;  and  the  word  and  the 
different  features  of  the  game  were  often  used  in  com- 


272  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  v 

parisons,  as  by  Sir  K.  Digby,  John  Locke,  and 
Comenius.  There  is  an  allusion  to  chases  and  hazards 
in  the  time  of  Henry  V.,  in  whose  reign  rackets  were 
certainly  used. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  Tennis  was  introduced  into 
England  from  abroad,  and  in  particular  from  France, 
even  if  the  racket  came  from  Italy.  The  stringed  glove 
still  survives  in  one  form  of  play.  Let  us  consider  the 
evolution  of  the  racket  somewhat  more  carefully. 

The  Hand,  Glove,  and  Racket. — The  first  advance 
towards  the  use  of  the  racket  was  the  plain  glove,  which 
was  perhaps  invented  among  the  Italians ;  then  across 
this  glove  was  arranged  the  elastic  net-work  of  strings. 
This  device  was  found  both  in  Italy  and  in  France. 
The  racket  itself  was  an  obvious  improvement  upon 
such  a  clumsy  plan,  for  now  the  hand  gave  place,  as  it 
were,  to  the  face  of  the  racket ;  the  handle  of  the  racket 
added  leverage  and  extra  pace.  The  early  implement 
was  called  the  battoir,  and  was  sometimes  made  of  wood. 
The  French  tambour  is  the  weapon  used  in  the  Jeu  de 
Paume  as  played  in  the  Tuilleries  Gardens ;  it  has  no 
handle,  and  is  a  sort  of  tambourine.  It  follows  from 
the  nature  of  the  surface,  whether  that  surface  was  of 
wood  or  of  parchment  or  of  loose  gut,  that  little  pace 
was  in  the  stroke  but  much  sheer  force,  until  catgut 
was  introduced.  With  catgut  came  the  increased  power 
of  driving  and  cutting  the  ball.  The  racket  itself  is 
noticed  as  early  as  1 380,  being  mentioned  in  Chaucer's 
'  Troylus  and  Chryseyde ' ;  and  the  small  racket  existed 
in  1641.  We  have  actual  traces  of  the  transition-time 
when  one  player  might  use  his  hands,  and  the  other 
playing  a  racket,  the  player  with  the  racket  having  the 
advantage.  Thus  Mr.  Julian  Marshall  cites  an  old  MS., 
to  the  effect  that — 


CH.  XL]  TENNIS  273 

"After  the  horse  was  Bayted  Bothe  Kyngs  wente  to  the  Tennys 
playe,  &  in  the  upper  gallery  theare  was  Layd  ij  Cushenes  Oi 
Clothe  of  gold  for  the  ij  Kyngs  &  the  Rome  was  honestely  hanged 
w'  {blank  in  MS.)  wheare  played  my  Lord  marques  (of  Dorset)  the 
Lord  Howard  &  two  other  Knights  togethere,  &  after  the  Kynge  ot 
Casteele  had  seene  them  play  a  whyle,  he  made  partye  w"'  the 
Lord  Marques,  &  then  played  the  Kynge  of  Casteele  w'"  the  Lord 
Marques  of  Dorset  the  Kynge  lookynge  one  them,  but  the  Kynge 
of  Casteele  played  w"'  the  Rackete,  &  gave  the  Lord  Marques  xv. 
&  after  that  he  had  pled  his  pleasure  and  arrayed  him  selfe  agene 
it  was  almost  nighte,  &  so  bothe  Kyngs  Retorned  agayne  to  the.r 
Lodgings." 

Mr.  Marshall  also  tells  us  that — 

"A  writer  of  161 5  ,Gervase  Markham,  the  author  of  'Country 
Contentments,'  after  singing  the  praises  of  archery  and  bowls,  con- 
tinues to  the  following  effect :  '  Not  inferior  to  these  sports,  either 
for  health  or  action,  are  the  Tenish  and  Baloone,  the  first  being 
a  pastime  in  close  or  open  Courts,  striking  little  round  balls  to 
and  fro,  either  with  the  palm  of  the  hand,  or  with  racket.'  " 

A  brief  history  of  Tennis  is  all  that  we  can  offer  here. 
As  to  its  connection  with  certain  other  games,  we  must 
agree  with  the  author  of  the  '  Annals '  when  he  says  : — 

"  The  conclusion  seems  irresistible  that  the  recent  form  of  Tennis 
is  a  direct  descendant  of  some  game  of  classic  times,  just  as  much 
as  the  Italian  forms  of  Pallone  da  Scano,  which  we  now  know  to 
have  been  developed  about  the  same  time  with  it,  but  that  it  is  in 
no  way  derived  from  any  of  these  later  games." 

Tennis  was  at  an  early  date  akin  to  Polo  and  La 
Crosse  (a  form  of  La  Crosse  was  played  by  the  North 
American  Indians) ;  and  also  to  Pelota,  which  is  still 
keenly  played  in  every  village  of  the  Basque  Provinces, 
and  is  not  unlike  enlarged  Racquets,  and  to  Pallone, 
which  is  somewhat  like  Tennis.  It  is  played  in  a 
longer  Court  that — so  I  have  been  told — sometimes  has 
a  goal,  and  therefore  has  a  point  in  common  with  Foot- 
ball. In  the  North  of  France,  and  in  Belgium,  again, 
20 


274  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  v 

there  is  to  be  found  a  play  called  Tamis,  in  which  (see 
above)  a  glove  made  of  curved  hide  is  used. 

In  the  Middle  Ages  a  game  of  Hand-ball  was  enjoyed 
in  uncovered  spaces  in  various  parts  of  Italy  and  France. 
As  early  as  1316  we  hear  of  Louis  X  playing  La  Paume. 
Chaucer  alludes  to  the  game  (1374-1384);  and  in  1399 
we  know  that  it  was  played  in  ditches  of  chateaus. 

Later  on  it  was  to  be  found  in  towns  also,  the  French 
Tennis  Court  in  a  town  being  called  a  tripot.  The 
Court  was  still  uncovered  ;  the  game  was  still  called  Jeu 
de  Paume ;  indeed,  the  word  Tennis  is  not  to  be  found 
in  France.  As  early  as  1555  there  existed  a  Tennis 
Court  something  like  our  modern  Court,  but  larger, 
being  93  to  96  feet  in  length. 

It  appears  that  at  this  time  there  were  four  different 
kinds  of  Courts,  one  being  used  for  a  game  resembling 
Fives  and  Squash. 

It  is  certain  that  in  Paris  Tennis  was  universally 
popular.  About  the  end  of  the  i6th  century  there  are 
said  to  have  existed  1800  Courts  in  the  town  alone, 
though  most  of  these  Courts  could  not  have  been 
elaborate.  The  more  elaborate  Courts  were  used  for 
other  purposes  besides  Tennis  (just  as  the  Court  at 
Holyrood  was  in  the  reign  of  James  VI) :  for  ballets 
and  acting,  for  betting  and  gambling.  Some  of  these 
Courts  were  covered  in  before  the  year  16 14. 

We  can  gather  not  a  few  details  about  the  Courts  and 
the  play.  First  of  all,  there  were  more  Openings  than 
our  present  Court  includes.  We  have  (see  Chapter 
XXIX)  le  iron,  la  lune,  I'ais,  and  the  rabat,  which 
Mr.  Julian  Marshall  would  like  to  see  re-introduced  into 
our  modern  Courts.  The  four-handed  game  was  far 
commoner  than  it  is  to-day.  We  hear  of  Markers  or 
paumierSy  among  them  Becquet,  and  Pierre  le  Gentil. 


CH.  XL]  TENNIS  275 

The  cost  of  the  Court  before  1700  was  about  £2000 — in 
fact,  about  what  it  is  to-day. 

In  1657  there  were  114  Courts  (tripots)  in  Paris. 
The  game  declined  under  Louis  XIV;  but  it  was  still 
reckoned  among  the  Arts,  and  was  considered  to  have 
no  small  military  value. 

Later,  there  were  only  ten  Courts  in  Paris.  Now 
there  are  only  six  in  France ;  two  in  the  Tuilleries — 
these  are  constantly  in  use — ,  one  at  Fontainebleau,  one 
at  Versailles,  one  at  Cannes,  and  one  at  Deauville.  Of 
these  Courts  the  most  famous  historically  was  the  one 
at  Versailles,  where  in  1789  the  Tiers  Etat  assumed  the 
name  of  the  National  Assembly.  The  scene  in  the 
Court  is  represented  in  a  famous  print.  Later  on,  this 
Court  was  used  as  a  storehouse,  as  a  workshop,  as  a 
studio,  till  it  was  again  opened  with  an  Exhibition-Match 
between  Barre  and  Biboche. 

Courts  are  to  be  found  not  only  in  France  and  the 
Basque  region  but  also  in  Vienna,  Melbourne,  and 
Hobart  Town. 

History  tells  us  that  in  early  times  most  of  the  rich 
men  were  landholders,  and  many  were  nobles ;  that 
there  gradually  arose  a  new  class  of  rich  men,  who 
were  not  primarily  landholders,  but  who  were  rather 
commercial  magnates,  some  of  whom  became  enrolled 
among  the  nobles.  Tennis,  one  of  the  oldest  of  all 
games,  has  always  been  played,  at  least  in  its  elaborate 
form,  by  the  rich  or  comparatively  well-to-do.  The  rich 
and  well-to-do  were,  at  first,  the  King  and  the  nobles, 
especially  the  landholders.  Then  the  commercially 
rich  also  played  the  game. 

But  it  was  especially  famous  as  a  game  for  King  and 
nobles.  Among  the  Kings  of  France  who  played  it  we 
must  reckon  Louis  XI,  Louis  XII,  Henri  II,  Henri  IV 


276  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  v 

(who  once  kept  at  it  all  day  long),  Charles  IX,  Louis 
XIII,  and  Louis  XIV  in  his  youth.  Philip  III  of  Spain 
was  another  devotee. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  game  was  frequently  forbidden 
to  the  common  people  by  special  edicts,  among  which 
are  those  of  1369  and  1530.  The  common  people  were 
allowed  to  watch  the  play  in  1427,  at  the  time  when 
Margot  flourished,  the  first  lady-professional. 

Among  the  nobles  are  the  names  of  the  Due  de 
Guiche,  the  Due  and  Comte  de  la  Rochefoucauld,  and 
Cardinal  Bembo.  Rousseau  mentions  the  game  in  his 
'  Emile' ;  and  Michael  Angelo  played  it.  But  it  had  no 
real  literature  till  1632,  when  Hulpeau's  celebrated  book 
('  Le  Jeu  royale  de  Paume ')  was  first  published. 

In  England,  also,  the  game  was  royal  and  aristocratic. 
Pepys  describes  how  the  King  lost  four  and  a  half 
pounds  of  weight  in  a  single  day.  Henry  IV  and  Henry 
VIII  both  loved  to  play.  Prince  Henry  was  fond  of 
this  sport.     We  are  told  that 

"His  other  exercises  were  dancing,  leaping,  and,  in  times  of 
yeare  fit  for  it,  learning  to  svvimme,  at  sometimes  walking  fast  and 
farre,  to  accustome  and  enable  himself  to  make  a  long  march  when 
time  should  require  it  ;  but  most  of  all  at  Tennis  play,  wherein,  to 
speak  the  truth,  which  in  all  things  I  especially  affect,  he  neither 
observed  moderation  nor  what  appertained  to  his  dignity  and 
person,  continuing  oftimes  his  play  for  the  space  of  three  or  foure 
houres,  and  the  same  in  his  shirt,  rather  becoming  an  artesan  than 
a  Prince,  who  in  things  of  that  nature  are  onely  to  affect  comeli- 
nesse,  or  rather  a  kind  of  carelessnesse  in  shew,  to  make  their 
activities  seeme  the  more  naturall,  than  a  laborious  and  toiling 
industry.  ..." 

"  In  the  beginning  of  the  reign  of  Henry  V,"  says  Mr.  Marshall, 
"occurred  the  memorable  incident,  which  is  best  known  by  the 
passage  in  Shakespere's  '  Henry  V,'  in  which,  the  French  Am- 
bassadors having  brought  the  young  king  'a  tun  of  treasure'  from 
the  Dauphin,  Henry  asks, — 

'  What  treasure,  uncle  ? 
Exeter. — Tennis  balls,  my  liege. 


CH.  XL]  TENNIS  277 

K.  Henry.— VJ&  are  glad  the  Dauphin  is  so  pleasant  with  us  ; 
His  present,  and  your  pains,  we  thank  you  for  : 
When  we  have  match'd  our  rackets  to  these  balls, 
We  will,  in  France,  by  God's  grace,  play  a  set. 
Shall  strike  his  father's  crown  into  the  hazard  : 
Tell  him,  he  hath  made  a  match  with  such  a  wrangler, 
That  all  the  courts  of  France  will  be  disturb'd 
With  chases.'" 

"  The  author  of  '  The  Tricks  of  the  Town  laid  open,'  "  Mr.  Julian 
Marshall  says,  "  begins  by  remarking  that  '  Tennis  is  one  of  the 
most  manly  and  active  Diversions  we  have  in  England;  and  here- 
tofore was  hardly  used  by  any  but  the  Young  Nobility,  and 
Gentlemen  of  the  Chief  Rank  :  King  Charles  the  Second  was  a 
great  Master  and  Judge  of  it,  and  would  very  often  divert  himself 
with  a  Set  or  two  in  the  Royal  Court  at  the  Cock-pit,  with  a  great 
deal  of  Satisfaction.  This  is  a  game  that  depends  purely  upon 
Skill  and  Activity,  and  not  to  be  acquired  without  considerable 
Expence,  and  Practice  ;  upon  which  Account  indeed  it  has  had 
the  advantage  of  most  of  the  rest,  and  Abundance  of  Sharpers 
and  Cheats  have  been  kept  out  of  it,  for  want  of  Money  to  pay 
the  charge  of  the  Court,  and  other  Expences  that  are  consequent 
to  it.'" 

And  in  our  own  days  the  game  is  still  a  royal  game. 
The  young  princes  used  to  play  it  in  the  old  East  Road 
Court  at  Cambridge.  (This  Court  was  afterwards,  alas, 
turned  into  a  show-room  for  carriages,  and  is  now  used 
as  a  University  Correspondence  College.)  The  Prince 
of  Wales  plays  Tennis  and  Racquets  at  Prince's. 
Bishops  and  nobles  also  enjoyed  their  play  ;  and  we 
hear  of  Elizabeth  watching  her  nobles.  In  fact  a 
well-known  writer  has  said  that  all  young  men  of  any 
leisure  or  wealth  played  it. 

While  it  was  the  game  of  the  kings  and  nobles,  it 
was  in  England,  as  in  France,  forbidden  to  the  common 
people  by  special  edicts,  as  in  1365  and  1389.  Mr. 
Marshall  quotes  these  in  his  *  Annals ' : — 

"The  purpose  of  this  first  Act  (1365)  is  clear  ;  it  was  intended  to 
encourage  the  practice  of  archery,  and  discourage  that  of  '  hand- 
ball, football,  cock-fighting,  and  other  vain  games,'  under  severe 


278  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  V 

penalties.  Casting,  or  '  putting '  the  stone,  or  bar  of  wood  or  iron, 
hockey  (bacularis),  and  golf  (cambuca),  were  all  included  in  the 
prohibited  category  of  unprofitable  sports. 

"The  next  of  these  repressive  statutes  was  enacted  in  1389,  and 
partakes  still  more  markedly  of  the  character  of  '  class  legislation.' 
It  regulates  the  pastimes  of  servants  and  labourers,  allowing  them 
the  use  of  bows  and  arrows  on  Sundays  and  holidays,  but  forbidding 
them  '  idle  games '  such  as  Tennis,  etc." 

It  was  forbidden  even  by  some  of  those  Kings  who 
themselves  played  it;  Henry  VIII  was  one  of  these. 
The  chief  reason  was,  as  we  saw,  that  it  was  considered 
as  a  hindrance  to  military  training. 

Nevertheless,  as  in  Paris  so  in  England,  there  were 
many  rude  Tennis  Courts  to  be  found  out-of-doors,  as 
early  as  1447.  In  1558  hatters  and  joiners  played  it, 
and  in  those  early  times  it  already  served  as  a  bond  of 
union  between  classes. 

In  England,  also,  the  Courts  were  used  for  other 
purposes  besides  play,  for  example  for  gambling  and  for 
acting.  As  Mr.  Marshall  says,  with  reference  to  a 
licence  : — 

"  If  Bedingfield  got  his  licence,  which  there  is  no  reason  for 
doubting,  he  had  his  hands  full.  To  manage  all  the  Tennis-Courts 
and  gaming-houses  of  London  and  Westminster,  then  a  '  a  very 
great  number,'  to  exclude  all  those  who  were  '  not  fit  to  play,'  and 
to  prevent  those  who  might  play  from  using  any  '  falsehood,  guile, 
or  deceit,'  and  from  '  swearing  or  blasphemy,'  was  no  light  task." 

In  Ireland,  we  hear  of  Tennis  and  rowdiness  classed 
together.  But  the  game  rose  in  tone  in  the  17th 
century. 

Not  a  few  old  Courts  are  still  to  be  traced  by  records  or 
by  their  names  in  London  and  elsewhere.  In  Fenchurch 
Street  there  was  a  Court,  69  feet  by  17.  Windsor  had 
its  Courts  in  the  time  of  Henry  VII  ;  Oxford  in  1508 ; 
Richmond  and  Blackfriars  in  15 16.  Hampton  Court 
apparently  owed  its  Tennis  Court  to  Henry  VIII  ;  this  is 


CH.  XL]  TENNIS  279 

the  oldest  now  existing  in  England,  though  it  has  been 
greatly  altered  since  its  original  foundation.  The  Court 
at  St.  James'  was  likewise  built  by  Henry  VIII.  Cam- 
bridge had  one  as  early  as  1637,  and,  at  a  certain  time,  it 
had  no  fewer  than  six.  London  alone  had  fifteen  in 
1619.  One  of  the  latest  to  disappear  was  the  Court  in 
James'  Street.  Among  the  most  interesting  and  beauti- 
ful of  all  Courts  is  the  one  at  Falkland  Palace.  There 
is  no  other  like  it.  It  has  no  roof,  no  Dedans,  no 
Tambour ;  and  was  used  at  least  as  early  as  the  reign  of 
Mary  Queen  of  Scots.  Sir  Edward  Grey,  to  whom  I  owe 
this  information,  re-opened  the  Court  by  an  Exhibition 
Match  some  years  ago. 

These  buildings  were  of  various  sizes,  the  length  vary- 
ing from  84  feet  to  55  feet.  Apparently  also  at  times 
there  were  three  players  a  side.  Across  the  middle  was 
stretched  a  line  or  cord.  In  an  old  print  we  find  no  trace 
of  a  Penthouse  ;  the  racket  used  to  be  strung  not  up  and 
down  but  diagonally. 

We  have  already  spoken  of  the  racket,  which  was  at 
first  a  luxury  rather  than  a  necessity.  It  used  to  be 
strung  diagonally,  but  we  find  it  in  1632  as  it  is  strung 
now,  though,  of  course,  more  loosely.  The  score  was  in 
those  days  by  Games  and  not  by  Sets.  The  Chase  was 
reckoned,  not  where  the  second  bounce  fell,  but  where 
the  ball  stopped,  as  in  La  longue  Paiime.  Later  on  we 
find,  in  the  engraving  of  the  Duke  of  York  (1633),  a 
racket  still  strung  diagonally,  the  Dedans  unprotected 
by  anything,  two  extra  Openings  below  the  Dedans,  and 
the  uncovered  Court.  Indeed,  we  find  an  open-air  Court 
as  late  as  1793.  This  open-air  game  was  the  mother  of 
Lawn  Tennis,  and  was  popular  in  country-houses.  The 
open-air  game  of  Pelota  is  described  at  the  end  of  the 
book. 


CHAPTER   XLI 

RACQUETS 

Note  on  the  Name, — The  derivation  of  the  words  "  racket "  and 
"Racquets"  has  been  much  disputed.  As  to  the  speUings,  it  is 
possible  that  raquet  {sic)  might  have  as  good  evidence  as  any. 
The  bat  certainly  should  always  be  spelt  now  as  racket.  The 
game  is  invariably  Racquets  in  the  United  States  and  Canada,  and 
also  in  many  English  Clubs.  And  hence  I  have  adopted  this  form 
here,  in  a  book  written  for  all  English-speaking  people,  and  also 
because  we  thus  can  distinguish  the  game  and  the  bat.  There  is, 
however,  much  to  be  said  for  the  variant.  Rackets,  whether  it  comes 
etymologically  from  reticulata  (cp.  rete,  a  net),  and  rachetta,  or 
from  rack  (cp.  the  stretching-torture),  or  from  the  noise  (cp.  "an 
awful  racket  and  hubbub  "),  or  from  racha  "  the  wrist,"  the  racket 
being  a  little  wrist  and  hand. 

With  regard  to  the  history  of  Racquets — a  history  not 
much  less  meagre  than  that  of  Squash — we  can  hardly 
do  better  than  quote  from  the  Badminton  volume,  in 
which  the  author  has  just  been  speaking  of  Tennis. 

"  Her  younger  sister,  on  the  other  hand,  has  had  no  such  advan- 
tages. Nobody  up-to-date  has  ever  in  writing  been  so  bold  as  to 
claim  high  rank  for  her.  If  she  existed  previous  to  this  century, 
she  has  been  passed  by  on  the  other  side  as  a  queen  who,  hid  either 
in  gaol  or  in  the  pot-house,  was  unworthy  of  notice  by  a  respectable 
person.  Where  kings,  in  fact,  played  one  game,  the  lowest  persons 
in  fiction  played  the  other.  The  author  of  '  Pickwick '  introduces  a 
racket-player  whose  dingy  appearance  is  only  equalled  by  the  gloom 
of  his  surroundings.  But  though  Henry  VI H  and  Charles  II  play 
one  game  in  a  palace,  and  'Smangle'  plays  the  other  within  the 
walls  of  the  Fleet,  those  facts  render  the  manner  in  which  rackets 
has  come  to  the  front  all  the  more  remarkable." 

280 


CH.  XLi]  RACQUETS  281 

Whether  the  game  originated  elsewhere  or  not,  we 
cannot  say  ;  but  modern  Racquets,  at  any  rate,  is  pre- 
eminently a  British  form  of  Sport ;  and  it  has  extended 
from  Great  Britain  to  Canada,  the  United  States,  and 
AustraHa. 

The  origin  of  the  game  is  suggested  by  the  writer  in 
the  Badminton  volume  (page  356). 

"Rackets  is  really  only  a  slight  development  of  a  game  frequently 
played  by  children,  who  happen  to  have  among  their  toys  (and 
what  child  has  not  ?)  a  ball  and  an  instrument  for  hitting  it.  Armed 
with  these,  a  child  is  put  to  play  alone.  It  discovers  that  hitting 
the  ball  to  a  distance  involves  walking  to  a  distance  to  fetch  it.  It 
enjoys  hitting  the  ball  hard,  but  does  not  enjoy  running  a  long  way 
after  it.  How  are  the  two  desiderata  to  be  combined  ?  Obviously 
by  hitting  the  ball  against  a  wall,  and  intelligently  awaiting  its 
return.  The  child,  having  thus  obtained  its  object,  manifests  such 
delight  that  another  child  wishes  to  share  therein.  The  rules  of 
equitable  partition  must  be  observed  ;  thence  arises  a  regulation 
that  neither  shall  have  a  greater  share  of  hits  than  the  other,  and 
the  principle  of  alternation  is  obtained.  Again,  it  is  discovered 
that  it  is  an  advantage  to  have  first  hit,  and  to  stand  in  a  certain 
place.  Equity  demands  that  these  advantages,  too,  must  be  shared. 
Assuming  that  nature  leads  us  as  far  as  this,  it  is  but  a  short  step 
to  the  game  of  rackets.  The  rule  that  a  return  to  be  good  must  be 
made  before  the  ball  has  twice  touched  the  floor  was  doubtless 
adopted  from  tennis." 

Strutt,  in  his  '  Book  of  Pastimes,'  does  not  mention 
Racquets  at  all  ;  and,  indeed,  the  history  of  the  game 
has  not  been  carefully  recorded  until  recent  years.  The 
first  important  date  for  modern  Racquets  was  the 
establishment  of  the  Amateur  Championship  at  the 
Queen's  Club,  London. 

Till  then,  the  game  had  been  played  in  open  Courts, 
of  which  the  most  celebrated  was  in  the  Fleet  prison. 
Another  was  to  be  found  in  the  Harrow  yard,  and  a 
third  in  Cambridge.    As  Mr.  Bouverie  cleverly  remarks  : 

"  It  is  a  curious  coincidence  in  the  history  of  the  game  that  its 
emancipation  from  the  area  of  a  gaol  should  be  almost  contem- 


282  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  v 

poraneous  with  its  incarceration  within  four  walls,  for  it  was  about 
this  time  that  the  close  court  finally  superseded  the  old-fashioned 
open  court  in  all  matches  of  importance." 

The  game  seems  to  have  now  become  fixed,  the 
rackets  being  of  more  or  less  uniform  size  and  shape, 
and  the  Court  being  about  60  feet  by  30.  There 
is  very  Httle  prospect  of  any  radical  change,  except  in 
the  introduction  of  an  imperishable  ball ! 


CHAPTER  XLII 

TENNIS-PLAYERS  IN   ENGLAND  AND  AMERICA 

Of  all  the  players  of  old  time,  Edmund  Barre  was  the 
most  celebrated.  The  game  which  he  played  would 
seem  slow  in  our  days.  We  cannot  say  that  he  would  not 
have  adapted  himself  to  modern  conditions,  though,  from 
his  figure,  we  cannot  help  believing  that  against  a  player 
like  Latham  he  would  not  have  stood  the  very  smallest 
chance.  But  no  account  of  experts  can  be  complete 
without  some  description   of  his  skill. 

The  greatest  player  of  the  old  school,  he  is  celebrated 
for  the  ease  and  facility  of  his  style,  the  power  of  judg- 
ing the  ball,  and  of  always  being  in  the  right  position 
for  receiving  it,  and  of  returning  it  in  the  most  severe  and 
decisive  way,  with  a  great  weight  of  stroke  ;  for  a  com- 
plete mastery  of  tactics,  for  a  variety  of  Service  (his 
Giraffe  Service  being  most  effective)  ;  and  last,  but  not 
least,  for  his  unfailing  tact  and  good  temper.  Mr. 
Marshall's  excellent  book  will  supply  further  details  :  I 
owe  these  chiefly  to  him. 

Delahaye   (Biboche)  was  a  careful  exponent  of  the 

game,  and  a  good  teacher.     The  Tompkins  family  were 

also  among   the  earliest  players.     Edmund  Tompkins, 

called  Peter,  was  beaten  by  Barre  in  1839.    Mr.  Charles 

283 


284  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  v 

Taylor  is  one  of  the  first  amateur  names  of  which  we 
have  records. 

Modern  Tennis,  however,  must  be  said  to  begin  with 
George  Lambert,  with  whom  1  used  to  play  frequently  at 
the  old  Court  in  Cambridge.  His  underhand  Service, 
his  hard  Force,  and  especially  his  Boasted  Force,  and 
his  power  to  win  Chases,  were  the  most  noticeable 
features  of  his  play.  I  remember  well  how  admirably  he 
used  to  adapt  his  standard  of  play  to  the  pupil.  During 
the  whole  of  one  term  he  gave  me  the  odds  of  Half- 
Fifteen.  Sometimes  he  won,  sometimes  I  won.  Every 
now  and  then  he  would  exert  himself,  and  win  a  very 
small  Chase  off  the  floor.  He  would  almost  invariably 
knock  the  head  of  his  racket  upon  the  ground  as  be  hit 
the  ball,  which  shows  that  he,  at  any  rate,  with  his 
terribly  severe  cut,  could  not  possibly  have  kept  the  head 
of  his  racket  above  the  level  of  his  wrist.  Even  these 
strokes,  however,  never  led  me  to  suspect  the  truth  till 
the  end  of  the  term,  when  Lambert  suggested  that  he 
should  give  me  Thirty  instead  of  Half-Fifteen.  Of  course 
I  said  that  it  was  ridiculous,  that  he  could  only  just  give 
me  Half-Fifteen.  He  insisted,  however,  and  then  played 
up  nearly  to  the  exent  of  his  skill,  and  beat  me  quite 
easily.  He  had  a  wonderful  power  of  encouraging 
beginners  ! 

Barre  gave  in  to  him,  and  resigned  the  Championship 
to  the  Englishman,  who,  in  turn,  had  to  resign  it  to 
Pettitt.  Tom  Pettitt  was  born  in  England,  in  Kent,  but 
has  lived  most  of  his  life  in  America.  He  will,  therefore, 
be  treated  as  an  American  player.  Like  Saunders,  he 
learnt  part  of  his  game  in  the  Racquet  Court.  He 
defeated  Saunders  for  the  Championship  in  the  Dublin 
Court. 

Saunders  was  the  best  English  exponent  of  the  old 


CH.  XLii]  TENNIS-PLA  VERS  285 

and  classical  style  of  play.  He  and  Mr.  Alfred  Lyttelton 
had  severe  struggles,  at  which  each  of  them  kept  the 
head  of  his  racket  up.  They  also  cultivated  good 
Services,  and  varied  the  pace  of  their  strokes.  Saunders 
was  too  slightly  made  to  last  for  many  years  at  a  game 
demanding  such  constant  strain  ;  and  he  had  to  yield  the 
palm  to  Latham.  Latham  first  beat  Saunders,  and  then 
Pettitt.  Latham  was  a  Racquet-player  for  years  before 
he  took  up  Tennis.  It  is  hard  to  say  what  are  the  most 
conspicuous  characteristics  of  his  success,  for  in  only  one 
point  does  he  seem  to  be  weak.  His  activity  is  almost 
incredible.  He  always  seems  to  be  ready,  and  in  the 
right  position.  His  play  off  the  Back-wall  and  off  the 
Tambour  has  never  been  equalled.  His  Side- wall  Service 
is  perhaps  the  best  of  its  kind.  His  Force  is  powerful, 
and  especially  his  Force  for  the  Grille.  In  addition  to 
this,  he  has  wonderful  resource,  and  a  power  of  getting 
himself  into  training,  and  of  keeping  his  head  during 
Matches. 

Next  to  him  among  the  professionals  come  Fairs, 
Fennell,  Gray,  Harradine,  Johnson,  White,  and  some 
others. 

Of  the  amateurs,  Mr.  J.  M.  Heathcote  held  the  Cham- 
pionship for  a  large  number  of  years.  He  is  sixty-eight 
years  old  to-day,  and  looks  wonderfully  active  still.  In 
early  days  he  defeated  Biboche  and  Seraphin,  who  was 
passed  by  Lambert.  With  his  tall,  wiry  figure  he  could 
reach  quickly  anywhere.  His  experience  was  greater 
than  that  of  any  other  player  of  his  time  or  subsequently. 
His  Force  was  powerful,  and  his  Volley  safe.  He  was 
one  of  the  last  players  to  use  the  interesting  Handicaps  ; 
for  example,  he  played  with  a  "  Special  Constable  "  staff, 
as  Pettitt  plays  with  a  piece  of  an  arm-chair,  and  as  I 
like    to   play  with  a  Cricket  bat.      These    Handicaps 


286  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  v 

are   excellent   practice ;    it  is   a   pity   that   they   have 
died  out. 

The  more  modern  players  "  speak  for  themselves."  Sir 
Edward  Grey,  Mr.  J.  B.  Gribble,  Mr.  H.  E.  Crawley,  Mr. 
Cooper- Key,  Mr.  E.  Crawley,  Mr.  P.  Ash  worth,  Mr.  E.  M. 
Baerlein,  stand  among  the  leading  names.  The  list  of 
winners  in  various  English  Competitions  is  appended 
here. 


THE  WINNERS   OF  THE   M.C.C.  GOLD  AND 
SILVER  PRIZES. 


Gold. 


1867 

Mr. 

J.  M.  Heathcote 

1868 

ditto 

1869 

ditto 

1870 

ditto 

I87I 

ditto 

1872 

ditto 

1873 

ditto 

1874 

ditto 

1875 

ditto 

1876 

ditto 

1877 

ditto 

1878 

ditto 

1879 

ditto 

1880 

ditto 

I88I 

ditto 

1882 

Hon.  Alfred  Lyttelton 

1883 

Mr. 

J.  M.  Heathcote 

1884 

Hon.  Alfred  Lyttelton 

1885 

ditto 

1886 

Mr. 

T.  M.  Heathcote 

1887 

Hon.  Alfred  Lyttelton 

1888 

ditto 

1889 

ditto 

1890 

ditto 

I89I 

ditto 

1892 

ditto 

1893 

ditto 

1894 

ditto 

1895 

ditto 

1896 

Sir  Edward  Grey 

Silver. 

Mr.  Julian  Marshall 
Mr.  G.  B.  Crawley 
Hon.  C.  G.  Lyttelton 

ditto 

ditto 

ditto 

ditto 
Mr.  G.  B.  Crawley 

ditto 
Mr.  R.  D.  Walker 

ditto 
Mr.  C.  E.  Boyle 

ditto 
Hon.  Alfred  Lyttelton 

ditto 
Mr.  J.  M.  Heathcote 
Hon.  Alfred  Lyttelton 
Mr.  J.  M.  Heathcote 

ditto 
Mr.  B.  N.  Akroyd 
Mr.  J.  M.  Heathcote 
Mr.  A.  J.  Webbe 
Sir  Edward  Grey 

ditto 

ditto 
Mr.  H.  E.  Crawley 
Sir  Edward  Grey 

ditto 

ditto 
Hon.  Alfred  Lyttelton 


CH.  XLIl] 


TENNIS-PLA  VERS 


287 


Gold. 

Silver. 

1897 

Mr.  Eustace  H,  Miles     . 

.     Sir  Edward  Grey 

1898 

ditto 

.     Mr.  H.  E.  Crawley 

1899 

ditto 

.     Sir  Edward  Grey 

1900 

Mr.  J.  B.  Gribble 

ditto 

I90I 

Mr.  Eustace  H.  Miles    . 

ditto 

1902 

ditto 

ditto 

JVofe. — These  Prizes  used  to  be  confined  to  Members  of  the 
M.C.C.,  and  so  could  not  at  first  claim  to  be  Amateur  Champion- 
ship Competitions,  but  now  they  are  open  to  all  Amateurs. 


THE  WINNERS  OF    THE  AMATEUR  CHAMPIONSHIP. 

The  Amateur  Championship  is  open  to  all  Amateurs 
and  is  played  at  Queen's  Club,  West  Kensington. 


First  Prize. 

Second  Prize. 

1889 

Sir  Edward  Grey 

Mr.  E.  B.  Curtis 

1890 

Mr.  E.  B.  Curtis 

Sir  Edward  Grey 

I89I 

Sir  Edward  Grey 

Lord  Windsor 

1892 

Mr.  H   E.  Crawley 

Sir  Edward  Grey 

1893 

ditto 

ditto 

1894 

ditto 

ditto 

189s 

Sir  Edward  Grey 

Mr.  H.  E.  Crawley 

1896 

ditto 

ditto 

1897 

Mr.  J.  Byng  Gribble    . 

ditto 

1898 

Sir  Edward  Grey 

ditto 

1899 

Mr.  Eustace  H.  Miles  . 

Sir  Edward  Grey 

1900 

ditto 

ditto 

I90I 

ditto 

Mr.  J.  B.  Gribble 

1902 

ditto 

ditto 

OXFORD  AND   CAMBRI 

DGE   SINGLES. 

The  yearly  competition  between  Oxford  and  Cam- 
bridge, played  at  the  Tennis  Court  at  Lord's,  has  hitherto 
gone  very  decidedly  in  favour  of  Cambridge,  partly 
owing  to  the  number  of  Courts  at  Cambridge,  and  partly 
to  the  excellent  practice  which  Jim  Harradine  (now  over 
fifty  years  of  age)  has  been  able  and  still  is  able  to  give 
to  the  players. 


288  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  v 

1859. — F.  J.  Ponsonby,  Oxford,  beat  C.  Barclay,  Cambridge,  3  sets 

to  o. 
i860. — F.  J.   Ponsonby,  Oxford,  beat  C.  Weguelin,  Cambridge,  3 

sets  to  2. 
1 86 1. — F.  N.  Langham,  Cambridge,  beat  J.  A.  Pepys,  Oxford,  3  sets 

to  I. 
1862.— F.  N.  Langham,  Cambridge,  beat  B.  M.  Davis,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  o. 
1863. — Hon.  C.  G.  Lyttelton,  Cambridge,  beat  O.  Mordaunt,  Ox- 
ford, 3  sets  to  I. 
1864. — No  match. 
1865. — R.  Stephenson,  Cambridge,  beat  E.  C.  Follett,  Oxford,  3  sets 

to  2. 
1866. — C.  E.  Boyle,  Oxford,  beat  R.  Stephenson,  Cambridge,  3  sets 

to  o. 
1867. — C.  E.  Boyle,  Oxford,  beat  R.  Stephenson,  Cambridge,  3  sets 

to  I. 
1868. — A.  F.  Kinnaird,  Cambridge,  beat  W.  H.  James,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  o. 
1869. — A.   F.  Kinnaird,  Cambridge,  beat  C.  J.  P.  Clay,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  o. 
1870. — W.  C.  Marshall,  Cambridge,  beat  C.  J.  Ottaway,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  2. 
1871. — W.  C.  Marshall,  Cambridge,  beat  C.  J.  Ottaway,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  2. 
1872. — W.  C.  Marshall,  Cambridge,  beat  C.  J.  Ottaway,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  o. 
1873. — T.  S.  Pearson,  Oxford,  beat  A.  T.  Myers,  Cambridge,  3  sets 

to  I. 
1874. — F.  Thornhill,  Cambridge,  beat  T.  S.  Pearson,  Oxford,  3  sets 

to  o. 
1875. — R-  O-  Milne,  Oxford,  beat  J.  B.  M.  Lingard,  Cambridge,  3 

sets  to  o. 
1876 — P.  E.  Crutchley,  Cambridge,  beat  J.  Oswald,  Oxford,  3  sets 

to  o. 
1877. — C.  G.  Hamilton,  Cambridge,  beat  J.  Oswald,  Oxford,  3  sets 

to  o. 
1878. — C.  G.  Hamilton,  Cambridge,  beat  O.  R.  Dunell,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  o. 
1879. — Hon.  A.  Lyttelton,  Cambridge,  beat  R.  R.  Farrer,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  I. 
1880. — Hon.  Ivo  Bligh,  Cambridge,  beat  H.  P.  Harris,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  o. 
1881.— J.  D.  Cobbold,  Cambridge,  beat  J.  H.  P.  Chitty,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  o. 
1882.— J.  D.  Cobbold,  Cambridge,  beat  E.  B.  C  Curtis,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  I. 


CI].  XLii]  TENNIS-PLA  VERS  289 

1883. — Sir  E.  Grey,Oxford,beat  J. D.Cobbold, Cambridge, 3  sets  too. 
1884. — J.  Dames  Longworth,  Cambridge,  beat  Sir  E.  Grey,  Oxford, 

3  sets  to  I. 
1885. — H.  Emmons,  Oxford,  beat  H.  Eaton,  Cambridge,  3  sets  to  i. 
1886. — H.  Ernest  Crawley,  Cambridge,  beat  F.   N.    Cazalet,   Ox- 
ford, 3  sets  to  I. 
1887. — H.  Emmons,  Oxford,  beat  H.  Ernest  Crawley,  Cambridge, 

3  sets  to  2. 
1888. — Eustace  Crawley,  Cambridge,  beat  H.  R.  Philipson,  Oxford, 

3  sets  to  o. 
1889. — F.  N.  Cazalet,  Oxford,  beat  Eustace  Crawley,  Cambridge, 

3  sets  to  2. 
1890. — S.  Bostock,   Cambridge,  beat  W.   Shelmerdine,   Oxford,  3 

sets  to  2. 
1891. — E.  H.  Miles,  Cambridge,  beat  W.  Shelmerdine,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  o. 
1892. — J.  B.   Cribble,  Cambridge,  beat  A.  R.  Hamilton,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  o. 
1893. — J-  ^-  Gribble,  Cambridge,  beat  F.  S.  Cokayne,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  o. 
1894. — C.  Andreae,  Cambridge,  beat  G.  R.  B.  McGrath,  Oxford, 

3  sets  to  o. 
1895. — W.  H.Allen,  Cambridge,  beat  E.  S.  Thomas,  Oxford,  3  sets 

to  o. 
1896. — P.  W.  Cobbold,  Cambridge,  beat  R.  H.  Hotham,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  o. 
1897. — J.  F.  Marshall,  Cambridge,  beat  A.  Page,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  o. 
1898. — A.  S.  Crawley,  Oxford,  beat  T.  C.  Tabor,  Cambridge,  3  sets 

to  I. 
1899. — E.  M.  Baerlein,  Cambridge,  beat  E.  A.  Biedermann,  Oxford, 

3  sets  to  o. 
1900. — E.  M.  Baerlein,  Cambridge,  beat  E.  A.  Biedermann,  Oxford, 

3  sets  to  o. 
1901. — E.  M.  Baerlein,  Cambridge,  beat  A.  M.  Robertson,  Oxford, 

3  sets  to  o. 
1902. — E.  M.  Baerlein,  Cambridge,  beat  S.  G.  J.  Hoare,  Oxford,  3 

sets  to  o. 

FOUR-HANDED    MATCHES. 
1859.— J.   P.   F.  Gundi-y  and  F.J.   Ponsonby,  Oxford,  beat  E.   C. 

Austen  Leigh  and  C.  Barclay,  Cambridge,  2  sets  to  i  ;  3 

only  being  played. 
i860. — J.  A.  Pepys  and  F.  J.  Ponsonby,  Oxford,  beat  E.  C.  Austen 

Leigh  and  C.  Weguelin,  Cambridge,  3  sets  to  i. 
1861.— J.  St.  V.  P.  Jervis  and  J.  A.  Pepys,  Oxford,  beat  J.  F.  A. 

Hervey  and  F.  N.  Langham,  Cambridge,  3  sets  to  i. 
1862. — M.  Hankey  and  F.  N.  Langham,  Cambridge,  beat  B.  M. 

Davis  and  O.  Mordaunt,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  o. 
21 


290  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  v 

1863. — Hon.  C.  G.  Lyttelton  and  J.  F.  A.  Hervey,  Cambridge,  beat 

G.  A.  Dodd  and  O.  Mordaunt,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  i. 
1864. — No  match. 
1865.— E.  C.  Follett  and  Hon.  H.  E.  Butler,  Oxford,  beat  R.  Dum- 

ford  and  R.  Stephenson,  Cambridge,  3  sets  to  2. 
1866. — C.  E.  Boyle  and  C.  C.  Cotes,  Oxford,  beat  R.  Stephenson  and 

C.  E.  Swaine,  Cambridge,  3  sets  to  i. 
1867. — C.  E.  Boyle  and  C.  C.  Cotes,  Oxford,  beat  R.  Stephenson  and 

C.  E.  Swaine,  Cambridge,  3  sets  to  o. 
1868.— W.  E.  Goschen    and  W.  H.  James,  Oxford,  beat   R.  D. 

Balfour  and  A.  F.  Kinnaird,  Cambridge,  3  sets  to  i. 
1869.— C.  J.  P.  Clay  and  W.  E.  Goschen,  Oxford,  beat  R.  D.  Balfour 

and  A.  F.  Kinnaird,  Cambridge,  3  sets  to  o. 
1870.— J.  T.  Hartley  and  C.  J.  Ottaway,  Oxford,  beat  W.  C.  Mar- 
shall and  A.  T.  Myers,  Cambridge,  3  sets  to  o. 
1871. — W.  C.  Marshall  and  A.  Hoare,  Cambridge,  beat  J.  Grahame 

and  C.  J.  Ottaway,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  i. 
1872. — W.  C.  Marshall  and  A.  Hoare,  Cambridge,  beat  R.  O.  Milne 

and  C.  J.  Ottaway,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  i. 
1873. — A.  T.  Myers  and  A.  Hoare,  Cambridge,  beat  T.  S.  Pearson 

and  T.  S.  Plumb,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  i. 
1874. — Hon.  R.  Lyttelton  and  F.  Thornhill,  Cambridge,  beat  R.  O. 

Milne  and  T.  S.  Pearson,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  i. 
1875. — G.  W.   Balfour  and  J.   B.    M.  Lingard,  Cambridge,  beat 

R.  G.  Hargreaves  and  R.  O.  Milne,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  2. 
1876. — P.  E.  Crutchley  and  H.  Leaf,  Cambridge,  beat  J.  Oswald 

and  C.  R  Seymour,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  i. 
1877. — Hon.  A.  Lyttelton  and  C.  G.  Hamilton,  Cambridge,  beat 

J.  Oswald  and  R.  A.  Farrer,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  2. 
1878. — Hon.  A.  Lyttelton  and  C.  G.  Hamilton,  Cambridge,  beat 

O.  R.  Dunell  and  R.  R.  Farrer,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  2. 
1879. — Hon.  A.  Lyttelton  and  Hon.  Ivo  Bligh,  Cambridge,  beat 

R.  R.  Farrer  and  G.  S.  Foljambe,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  o. 
1880.— Hon.  L  Bligh  and  H.  Whitfeld,  Cambridge,  beat  H.  P.  Harris 

and  J.  B.  Lubbock,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  o. 
1881.— J.  D.  Cobbold  and  G.  B.  Studd,  Cambridge,  beat  J.  H.  P. 

Chitty  and  E.  Grey,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  2. 
1882.— J.  D.  Cobbold  and  G.  B.  Studd,  Cambridge,  beat  J.  H.  P. 

Chitty  and  E.  B.  C.  Curtis,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  i. 
1883.— Sir  E.  Grey  and  E.  B.  C.  Curtis,  Oxford,  beat  J.  D.  Cobbold 

and  B.  F.  Buxton,  Cambridge,  3  sets  to  i. 
1884. — Sir  E.  Grey  and  E.  B.  C.  Curtis,  Oxford,  beat  F.  Dames 

Longworth  and  H.  M.  Leaf,  Cambridge,  3  sets  to  i. 
1885. — H.  Eaton  and  H.  E.  Crawley,  Cambridge,  beat  H.  Emmons 

and  Lord  R.  Cecil,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  i. 
1886. — H.  E.  Crawley  and  J.  N.  Heathcote,  Cambridge,  beat  Lord 

R.  Cecil  and  E.  Stainton,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  o. 


CH.  XLii]  TENNIS-PLA  VERS  291 

1887. — H.  E.  Crawley  and  C.  Buxton,  Cambridge,  beat  H.  Emmons 

and  F.  N.  Cazalet,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  o. 
1888. — H.  E.  Crawley  and   Eustace  Crawley,   Cambridge,    beat 

H.  R.  Philipson  and  G.  A.  Hammond,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  o. 
1889.— Eustace  Crawley  and  E.  M.  Butler,  Cambridge,  beat  F.  N. 

Cazalet  and  H.  R.  Philipson,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  o. 
1890. — S.  Bostock  and  E.  H.  Miles,  Cambridge,  beat  W.  Shelmer- 

dine  and  A.  R.  Hamilton,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  i. 
1891.— E.  H.  Miles  and  J.  B.  Gribble,  Cambridge,  beat  W.  Shel- 

merdine  and  A.  R.  Hammond,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  2. 
1892.— J.  B.  Gribble  and  V.  W.  Yorke,  Cambridge,  beat  A.  R. 

Hamilton  and  F.  S.  Cokayne,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  o. 
1893. — J.   B,   Gribble   and   W.   Travers,   Cambridge,  beat  F.   S. 

Cokayne  and  G.  R.  B.  McGrath,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  i. 
1894. — C.   Andreae  and  W.    H.  Allen,   Cambridge,  beat   G.    R. 

McGrath  and  G.  H.  K.  Bone,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  i. 
1895.— W.  H.  Allen  and  W.  H.  G.  Price,  Cambridge,  beat  E.  S. 

Thomas  and  R.  H.  Hotham,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  o. 
1896.— P.  W.   Cobbold   and  E.  Talbot,  Cambridge,  beat   R.  H. 

Hotham  and  B.  A.  Bailey,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  o. 
1897. — J.  F.  Marshall  and  E.  Garnett,  Cambridge,  beat  A.  Page 

and  T.  A.  Garnett,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  o, 
1898. — A.  S.  Crawley  and  E.  A.  Biedermann,  Oxford,  beat  T.  C. 

Tabor  and  Hon.  W.  James,  Cambridge,  3  sets  to  2. 
1899.— E.  A.  Biedermann  and  A.  Page,  Oxford,  beat  E.  M.  Baerlein 

and  T.  C.  Tabor,  Cambridge,  3  sets  to  i. 
1900. — E.  M.  Baerlein  and  E.  B.  Noel,  Cambridge,  beat  E.  A. 

Biedermann  and  H.  C.  Underdown,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  o. 
1 901. — E.  M.  Baerlein   and  E.  B.  Noel,  Cambridge,  beat  A.  M. 

Robertson  and  J.  N.  Williams,  3  sets  to  o. 
1902.— E.  M.  Baerlein  and  F.  B.  Wilson,  Cambridge,  beat  S.  G.  J. 

Hoare  and  C.  H.  Wild,  Oxford,  3  sets  to  o. 

Some  British  Tennis- Courts. — Those  which  are  marked 

with  an  asterisk  are  Private,  not  Club-Courts. 

*  Bridport  ;  Brighton  ;  *  Brougham  Hall  ;  Cambridge  ;  *  Can- 
ford  ;  *  Coombe  Abbey  ;  *  Crawley  Court  ;  *  Dublin  ;  *  Easton 
Neston  ;  East  Sheen  ;  *Fairlawn  ;  *  Goodwood  ;  Hampton  Court  ; 

*  Hardwick  ;  *  Hatfield  ;  *  Hewell  Grange  ;  *  Heythrop  ;  *  Holly- 
port  ;  Leamington;  Lord's  (M.C.C.)  ;  Manchester;  *Newcastle- 
on-Tyne  ;  *  Newmarket  ;  Oxford  ;  *  Petworth  ;  Prince's  (Knights- 
bridge)  ;  Queen's  (West  Kensington)  ;  *  Strathfieldsaye  ;  *  Theo- 
balds ;   *Tunbridge  Wells;    *Westgate-on-Sea  ;  *  Whittlebury  ; 

*  Woburn. 

Each  of  the  following  Clubs  have  two  Courts — 
Cambridge,  Prince's,  Queen's. 


292  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  v 

Tennis-Players  in  America. — In  America  there  are 
two  rival  schools,  taught  by  Tom  Pettitt  and  Alfred 
Tompkins.  Lately  there  has  been  added  a  third  school 
of  which  the  Markers  are  Ted  Johnson  (who  has  since 
returned  to  England),  Bob  Moore,  better  known  at 
Racquets,  and  Alfred  Kirton,  who  bids  fair  to  become  a 
good  player. 

Tom  Pettitt  is  famous  for  his  strength  and  agility.  It  is 
said  that  he  can  take  up  a  man  and  throw  him  as  he 
would  throw  a  ball.  The  best  of  his  strokes  have  never 
been  equalled,  and  can  only  be  realised  by  those  who 
stand  up  against  him  on  a  dark  day.  His  resource  is 
incalculable.  No  ball  is  ever  dead  while  Pettitt  is  in  the 
Court.  Last,  but  not  least,  he  conceals  the  direction  of 
his  strokes  in  a  way  which  I  can  never  imagine  to  be 
rivalled.  He  has  done  more  than  any  one  else  to  change 
ancient  into  modern  Tennis  ;  having  once  shown  that 
the  modern  game  was  more  paying  than  the  ancient 
game,  he  was  bound  to  have  his  followers.  He  forced 
hard  where  others  would  have  played  with  a  heavy  cut 
for  the  corners.  But  the  great  point  of  his  game  is  not 
his  sheer  Force.  I  have  always  considered  one  of  his 
finest  strokes  to  be  his  stroke  for  the  length  of  the 
Court :  he  hits  the  ball  into  the  Nick  time  after  time. 
This  stroke  is  among  his  most  effective,  and  I  have 
never  met  a  critic  who  recognised  the  skill  which  it 
implies. 

But  Pettitt  is  perhaps  even  greater  as  a  teacher  than 
as  a  player.  He,  like  George  Lambert,  has  the  art  of 
playing  an  even  game  with  every  learner  ;  and  he  makes 
every  learner  enthusiastic  and  happy.  What  he  has 
done  in  Tennis,  he  has  also  done  in  Racquets  and  Lawn 
Tennis.  He,  like  Latham,  stirs  up  keen  enthusiasm 
merely  by  talking  about  play. 


CH.  XLii]  TENNIS-PLA  VERS  293 

No  less  keen  and  no  less  devoted  to  the  cause  of  play 
and  players  is  Alfred  Tompkins,  of  New  York,  an  expert 
of  a  very  different  type,  belonging  to  the  careful  old 
school,  which  maintains  that  the  head  of  the  racket 
should  be  held  above  the  wrist.  He  aims  at  keeping  his 
strokes  of  a  good  level  excellence  and  with  a  severe  cut. 
For  him,  style  comes  before  safety ;  and,  indeed,  a 
Match  between  him  ancj  any  other  player  of  the  same 
school,  for  instance  Mr.  Cecil  Baring,  is  one  of  the 
greatest  treats  to  spectators.  Tompkins  is  quite  an 
authority  on  the  history  of  Tennis. 

Against  the  American  play  militates  the  fact  that  the 
Courts  at  New  York  and  Boston  are  both  small  and  low, 
partly  because  they  are  built  on  high  floors  of  the 
building.  The  Court  at  Tuxedo,  however,  is  one  of  the 
finest  in  the  world,  being  modelled  on  the  best  plans,  and 
made  of  the  best  material,  Bickley  cement.  Mr.  George 
Gould's  Court  at  Lakewood  is  scarcely  inferior.  At  this 
Court  Forester  is  marker.  He  bids  fair  to  become 
Champion  some  day.  Of  Boakes  of  Chicago,  unfortun- 
ately we  hear  very  little,  but  the  Club  at  Chicago  still 
exists,  and  very  probably  still  flourishes. 

In  this  book  it  is  impossible  to  mention  even  a  few  of 
the  old  names,  of  which  Sears  and  de  Garmendia  are  two. 
This  latter  player  was  one  of  the  most  experienced  and 
level-headed  of  American  athletes. 

Among  the  leading  experts  to-day  might  be  ranked 
the  following  : — 

Mr.  Richmond  Fearing  was,  in  his  time,  one  of  the 
best  all-round  athletes  that  the  world  has  ever  seen.  He 
is  tall  and  lithe,  and  has  an  enormous  reach.  Like  most 
American  players  of  Tennis  and  Racquets,  he  is  a 
delightful  opponent.  He  hits  hard,  with  a  severe  cut, 
but  with  great  power  to  conceal  the  direction  of  his 


294  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  V 

stroke.  Like  Pettitt,  he  never  gives  up  a  ball,  but 
returns  all  sorts  of  impossibilities. 

Mr.  L.  Stockton  relies  chiefly  upon  his  Service,  which 
is  of  the  fast  overhead  type,  and  upon  his  wrist-power. 
Last  year  he  was  beaten  by  Mr.  Crane,  whose  Service  is 
of  a  similar  kind,  but  rather  aims  at  the  Nick  than  at 
driving  the  opponent  forward  in  the  Court.  Crane's 
activity  is  wonderful,  and  he  is  bound  to  improve  as  he 
grows  older  :  what  he  chiefly  needs  is  experience. 

Among  the  other  players  may  be  mentioned  Messrs. 
M.  Paton,  M.  Barger,  O.  S.  Campbell  (for  several  years 
Lawn  Tennis  Champion  of  America),  T.  S.  Tailer,  Cecil 
Baring,  and  H.  Hunnewell. 

Though  many  of  the  American  players  are  rapidly 
raising  their  standard  of  play,  yet  perhaps  Mr.  L.  M. 
Stockton  is  still  Half-Fifteen  below  Sir  Edward  Grey,  at 
the  time  that  I  am  writing  this. 

WINNERS  OF  THE  AMERICAN  AMATEUR 
CHAMPIONSHIP. 


1892 

Mr. 

Richard  Sears. 

1893 

)j 

Fiske  Warren. 

1894 

jj 

B.  S.  de  Garmendia 

1895 

» 

ditto 

1896 

» 

L.  M.  Stockton. 

1897 

» 

ditto 

1898 

» 

ditto 

1899 

>> 

ditto 

1900 

?) 

Eustace  H.  Miles. 

I90I 

J! 

Jos.  Crane,  Jr. 

1902 

n 

ditto 

CHAPTER   XLIII 

RACQUET-PLAYERS  IN   ENGLAND  AND  AMERICA 

The  early  players  of  Racquets  were  chiefly  English, 
and  for  the  most  part  cricketers :  at  least  the  amateurs 
were. 

We  may  take  the  professionals  first,  and  we  may 
follow  in  outline  the  account  given  in  the  Badminton 
volume,  to  which  account  we  should  add  the  name  of 
George  Smale,  of  Wellington  College  (as  one  of  the 
greatest  teachers  of  play,  and  as  one  of  the  greatest 
players  of  the  Open-Court  game)  ;  with  some  of  the 
veterans,  for  instance,  with  Grimason  of  Eton,  and 
Judy  Stevens  of  Harrow. 

Among  the  earliest  records  we  find  those  of  Robert 
Mackay,  in  1820,  and  of  Thomas  Pittman,  who  played 
in  the  Belvedere  Gardens,  Pentonville.  In  those  days 
there  was  a  special  rule  in  case  the  ball  hit  a  tree !  John 
Pittman  was  brother  to  Thomas.  He  was  succeeded  by 
J.  Lamb,  who  indulged  in  the  slow  lobbing  game.  J.  C. 
Mitchell  succeeded  him  in  1846,  and  then  came  Francis 
Erwood  in  i860.  This  player  had  a  high  slow  Service, 
and  a  great  power  of  dropping  and  placing  the  ball. 

But,  in  one  of  the  most  famous  games  in  the  history  of 
Racquets,  he  was  defeated  by  Sir  William  Hart-Dyke, 
who  was  in  superior  condition,  and  who  used  the  drop 

295 


296  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  v 

stroke  with  great  effect.  He  was  the  first  and  the  last 
Amateur  Champion  who  was  also  Open  Champion. 

Racquets  proper  began  with  the  building  of  Prince's 
Court  in  1853.  In  this  Court  were  played  the  University 
Singles  and  Doubles  in  1858. 

The  next  professional  name  is  that  of  Henry  J.  Gray. 
William  Gray  was  perhaps  the  best  player  of  the  family. 
He  defeated  Foulkes,  the  Champion  of  America,  in 
1867.  William  was  a  thorough  sportsman,  and  insisted 
on  the  best  style  for  every  stroke.  He  apologised,  and 
was  truly  sorry — the  two  things  are  very  different — 
when  he  made  a  fluke.  He  was  slightly  built,  and  well- 
shaped,  with  long  arms,  and  he  preferred  the  Volley  or 
the  Half-volley  to  the  ordinary  stroke.  But  all  strokes 
he  made  with  ease  and  grace,  even,  as  Mr.  Alfred 
Lyttelton  points  out,  when  he  was  using  the  very  oldest 
of  rackets.  Like  the  earlier  players,  he  used  the  drop 
stroke  freely. 

On  his  death.  Punch  (H.  B.  Fairs),  the  father  of  the 
two  Markers  at  Prince's  Club,  defeated  Joe  Gray  in  1875. 
Punch  was  only  5  ft.  4  in.  in  height,  but  he  had  exception- 
ally long  arms,  and  seemed  to  be  able  to  reach  here, 
there,  and  everywhere.  The  writer  in  the  Badminton 
says,  of  the  great  Championship  game  : 

"The  1876  match  presented  great  differences  of  style,  Gray's 
self-contained  neatness  being  in  marked  contrast  to  'Punch's' 
slashing  sweep.  'Punch 'was  a  little  man,  standing  somewhere 
about  5  ft.  4  in.,  but  the  manner  in  which  he  reached  the  ball  would 
lead  one  to  suppose  that  he  had  the  length  of  arm  of  a  six-foot  man. 
That  arm  too  was  e.xtraordinarily  loose.  To  see  him  hit  gave  rather 
the  impression  of  a  racket  being  slung  at  the  end  of  a  rope,  so 
flexible  were  his  joints.  .'\s  he  played  it  seemed  as  though  H.  Fairs 
was  an  arm  and  a  racket,  the  rest  of  him  being  a  mere  appendage." 


Ti; 


Joe  Gray,  whom,  with  H.  J.  Gray,  I  know  best  of  the     I  j 
Gray  family,  held  the  Championship  from  1878  to  1887.     JpL-. 


CH.  XLiii]  RACQUET-PLAYERS  297 

He  had  the  cleanest  Backhand  stroke  that  I  have  ever 
seen,  and  a  beautiful  Volley  also.  He  hit  at  a  great 
pace,  but  his  stroke  was  not  so  powerful  as  that  of  his 
brother  Walter. 

Peter  Latham,  the  present  World's  Champion  at  both 
Racquets  and  Tennis,  defeated  Walter  at  Manchester 
by  four  games  to  two.  He  was  the  first  to  introduce 
the  very  heavily-cut  Service.  This  Service,  with  his 
activity  (unequalled  by  that  of  any),  and  his  power  of 
getting  into  position  before  he  began  to  move  towards 
the  ball,  his  incredible  quickness  in  flicking  up  balls  off 
the  Back-wall,  have  won  and  keep  for  him  his  pre- 
eminent position. 

Gray  beat  him  at  Rugby,  not  so  much  by  hard  hitting 
as  by  placing,  and  also  because  the  Rugby  Court  did  not 
allow  Latham's  Service  to  drop  down  so  heavily  as  the 
fastest  modern  Court  would  ;  but  Latham  in  the  next 
Match  beat  Gray.  Latham  plays  with  his  head  as  well 
as  with  his  wrist  and  his  feet. 

He  is  the  first  Champion  at  the  two  games,  and 
probably  there  has  lived  no  player  who  could  have 
beaten  him  at  either,  at  any  rate  without  utterly  altering 
his  style.  Latham  has  not  been  unchallenged  during 
his  career.  The  call  from  George  Standing,  Champion 
of  America,  led  to  the  home-and-home  Match  of  a  few 
years  ago  (see  Photograph  LIII).  Latham  was 
victorious.  He  has  since  been  challenged  by  Brown,  a 
calm  and  graceful  and  easy  player,  who  is  one  of  the 
Markers  at  Prince's  Club.  The  Matches  were  played 
early  in  1902. 

Among  the  other  Markers  who  come  below  Latham 
may  be  mentioned  Crosby,  Fairs,  Hawes,  and  Laker; 
Ellis  and  Moore  are  at  present  in  America,  Ellis  at 
Philadelphia,  and  Moore  at  Tuxedo. 


298  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  v 

The  first  of  the  Amateur  Champion  players  was  Sir 
WilHam  Hart-Dyke,  of  whom  we  have  spoken  above. 
In  a  copy  which  I  have  of  the  Cambridge  University 
Challenge  Racquet  Cup,  I  find  the  familiar  names  of 
Lyttelton,  Ponsonby,  Steel,  Studd,  Bligh,  and  Cobbold. 
Mr.  R.  D.  Walker  was  one  of  the  most  famous  of  the 
earlier  players.  He  had  the  power  of  placing  the  ball, 
and,  like  George  Standing,  never  seemed  to  have  to 
move  quickly  anywhere.  Few  players  have  played  so 
frequently  for  safety.  He  used  to  remark  that  there 
was  more  space  above  the  board  than  below  it.  But 
without  his  nerve  and  judgment  he  would  have  fared 
badly  in  a  Match  against  an  active  opponent.  Mr.  C. 
J.  Ottaway  is  also  said  to  have  been  an  impassive 
player.  Among  the  other  names  we  may  mention,  Mr. 
C.  F.  Buller,  T.  S.  Dury,  Cecil  Clay,  R.  V.  Milne,  A.  J. 
Webbe  (who  still  plays  a  good  game),  A.  G.  Steele,  and 
Col.  Spens,  one  of  the  ablest  exponents  of  the  drop 
stroke,  and  Messrs.  Leaf,  Eustace  Crawley,  and  Noble. 
The  game  still  flourishes  in  England  and  in  India  in  the 
army  stations.  Among  the  best  army  players  we  may 
mention  Cooper-Key,  Friend,  Hedley,  King,  and  Crawley. 

An  important  epoch  in  the  history  of  the  game  was 
when  the  Queen's  Club  was  opened  in  West  Kensington, 
and  the  Amateur  Championship  established.  In  this, 
Mr.  C.  D.  Buxton  beat  Major  Spens,  the  first  year. 
The  other  Amateur  Champions  have  been  Mr.  E.  M. 
Butler,  Mr.  Percy  Ashworth,  who  beat  both  Spens  and 
Hedley,  and  Mr.  Philipson.  Mr.  H.  K.  Foster  held  the 
prize  for  many  years  in  succession.  In  1901  he  was 
challenged  by  Mr.  Dames-Longworth,  but  did  not 
compete.  I  was  fortunate  enough  to  win  against  the 
latter  player  in   1902. 

At  Queen's  Club  the  Public  School  Championships 


f^ 


'^^ 

O 

K 

o 

C5 

1 

T-l 

<; 

^ 

pi 

A 

<! 

U 

ti 

<1  ^ 


o 


H     P. 


CH.  XLiii]  RACQUET-PLAYERS  299 

were  also  held,  as  well  as  the  University  Singles  and 
Doubles.  Since  1868,  Harrow  has  been  the  most 
successful  among  the  Public  Schools.  These  Inter- 
School  competitions  have  caused  far  more  excitement 
than  the  University  games,  although  as  yet  there  are 
no  Single  Matches. 

Of  American  Racquet  Professionals  we  have  somewhat 
scanty  records.  We  have  seen  that  Foulkes  and  Boakes 
were  beaten  by  the  English  Champions,  and  that,  later 
on,  Standing  shared  the  same  fate.  Standing  had  been 
used  to  a  very  slow  Court,  and  to  very  soft  balls,  and  to 
very  inferior  players  in  New  York  ;  and,  at  the  time  of 
his  Match,  he  was  probably  somewhat  over-trained. 
But  he  stands  out  as  far  the  best  player  of  the  slow 
game  in  a  slow  Court.  I  have  never  seen  any  one  move 
less  with  more  effect.  He  scarcely  ever  seems  to  run  ; 
and  he  has  the  power  of  throwing  his  weight  onto  one 
leg  or  the  other,  and  of  effecting  more  by  this  means 
than  an  ordinary  player  can  by  rushing  about  backwards 
and  forwards  and  from  side  to  side.  He  uses  the  Side- 
walls  far  more  than  we  do  in  England. 

He  and  Tom  Pettitt,  of  Tennis  fame,  played  an 
interesting  Match  in  Philadelphia;  they  represented 
America,  while  Peter  Latham  and  myself  represented 
England  (Photograph  LIV).  After  what  was  said  to  be 
the  most  exciting  game  ever  seen  in  America,  they  were 
beaten  by  four  games  to  three. 

i     As  to  Tom  Pettitt  and  Ellis   and    Moore,  probably 
each  might  beat  both  of  the  other  two  in  his  own  Court. 

For  the  American  amateur  players  one  must  refer  to 
the  American  book  of  amateur  sport.  Its  expense  puts 
it  beyond  the  reach  of  most  people ;  but  it  contains 
excellent  articles  on  many  forms  of  Athletics.     It  tells 


300  HISTORICAL  AND  PERSONAL  [pt.  v 

us  of  the  old  players  of  America,  and  especially  of  Mr. 
Lamontayne  and  of  a  number  of  others  who  fostered  the 
play  in  New  York.  But  Canada  was  a  still  earlier  home 
of  Racquets,  and  in  Canada  the  game  is  played  with 
great  keenness,  thanks  to  Mr.  Gillespie  and  other  leading 
men  in  Montreal,  and  to  the  energetic  Marker,  Albert. 

In  modern  times,  de  Garmendia  was  the  cleverest  and 
the  coolest  of  Racquet  as  well  as  of  Tennis  players  ; 
but  he  does  not  play  in  America  now,  and  has  yielded 
the  palm  to  Mr.  Q.  Shaw,  a  brilliant  left-handed  driver, 
whose  standard,  however,  is  far  from  reliable.  At  times 
he  is  probably  the  most  brilliant  of  all  players,  but  he 
seems  unable  to  keep  up  his  level  for  long  together. 

Mr.  Richmond  Fearing  is  far  steadier.  With  his  great 
reach  and  his  excellent  eye,  he  bids  fair  to  run  Shaw 
very  close.  Next  after  him  comes  Messrs.  Whitney, 
Mackay,  Hoyt,  Paton,  and  some  others.  Mackay  won 
the  American  Amateur  Championship  in  1902.  The 
best  Canadians  are  Messrs.  F.  F.  Rolland  and  Miller, 
who  should  improve  rapidly  every  year. 

But  it  is  probable  that  an  English  player  like  Mr.  H. 
K.  Foster  or  Dames-Longworth  or  Ashworth  would 
give  any  American  Amateur  player  upwards  of  7  aces. 


Part  VI 
SUGGESTIVE 


CHAPTER    XLIV 

HANDICAPS  AND  SCORING 

Not  a  little  has  already  been  said  on  the  subject  of 
Handicaps.  But  the  most  important  conclusions  may- 
be summed  up  here.  It  is  not  urged  that  Handicaps 
should  be  always  used,  but  it  is  urged  that  they  should 
be  occasionally  used.  They  should  be  far  commoner 
than  they  are,  since  they  not  only  bring  two  players  to 
the  same  level,  but  enable  two  players  to  play  without 
injury  to  their  own  game,  and  with  profit  to  it.  The 
weaker  player  gets  plenty  of  easy  balls,  and  is  encour- 
aged ;  the  stronger  player  can,  if  he  chooses  his  Handi- 
cap rightly,  strengthen  whatever  point  of  his  game  needs 
strengthening ;  and  anyhow  the  rallies  are  likely  to  be 
long. 

There  should  be  Club  lists  as  there  are  at  Golf.  The 
players  should  be  classed,  and  the  classes  should  be 
altered  as  the  standard  changes.  By  means  of  Handi- 
caps each  player  can  judge  of  his  improvement. 

There  should  also  be  frequent  competitions.  There 
need  be  no  expensive  prizes  :  just  a  mere  token — a  small 
cup,  or  a  cheap  medal — is  quite  sufficient.  It  is  wonder- 
ful what  has  been  done  for  the  play  in  the  delightful 
Philadelphia  Club  by  these  monthly  competitions. 

Players  should  be  ready  to  take  or  to  give  Handicaps. 

303 


304  SUGGESTIVE  [pt.  vi 

This  should  be  part  of  the  etiquette  of  the  game.  If 
there  should  be  any  objection,  then  let  there  be  a  rising 
and  falling  Handicap  according  to  the  result  of  each 
game  or  of  each  day's  play.  In  Racquets,  for  example, 
let  the  players  start  as  the  Marker  thinks  best  ;  let  us 
say  that  the  two  players  start  even,  although  F  knows 
that  he  is  far  stronger  than  S.  In  the  course  of  the  first 
few  games,  by  the  system  of  rising  and  falling  Handi- 
caps, if  F  really  be  the  stronger  player,  he  will  end  by 
giving  S  a  Handicap  of  several  points.  The  Handicap 
will  start  there,  the  next  time  that  F  and  S  meet 
Eventually  in  most  cases  it  will  be  found  that  the  Handi- 
cap will  hover  and  shiver  up  and  down  within  just  a  few 
points.  For  instance,  I  often  play  with  a  man  to  whom 
I  give  about  7.  When  I  get  up  to  10,  as  I  do  at  my 
best,  then  I  know  that  in  all  probability  there  will  be 
a  downward  rush  to  5  or  4,  or  even  3,  as  my  opponent 
recovers  his  form,  or  as  I  lose  mine. 

But  if  your  opponent  refuses  a  Handicap,  then  you 
have  several  alternatives.  Either  you  can  voluntarily 
take  off  your  strongest  stroke,  or  you  can  try  to  send 
balls  that  he  must  return.  This  is  good  practice  in 
placing — better  practice  in  Tennis  than  in  Racquets. 
But  it  were  far  better  if  a  fine  could  be  inflicted  at  both 
games.  At  Tennis,  the  loser  of  six  games  in  succession 
in  a  Set  is  supposed  to  pay  the  Marker  a  shilling.  The 
loser  of  a  love  game  at  Racquets  should  be  made  to  pay 
the  Marker  a  shilling  also. 

The  Markers  should  set  the  example  in  giving  and 
exchanging  Handicaps.  Surely  this  is  for  their  interest, 
for  they  often  complain  that  it  spoils  their  style  to  play 
with  (or  to  play  to)  inferior  players.  Let  them  give 
cramping  odds,  and  they  cease  to  have  this  cause  of 
complaint. 


CH.  XLiv]         HANDICAPS  AND  SCORING  305 

Among  the  best  of  Handicaps  are  the  implements 
with  a  smaller  face,  Half-the-Court,  No- Volleying  (the 
exception  will  be  when  the  Tennis  Openings  are 
defended),  Easy  Service — all  these  can  be  combined 
with  Handicaps  by  points. 

Left-handed  play  is  important  for  the  development 
of  the  other  side  of  the  body,  and  for  extra  care  and 
judgment  with  regard  to  the  pace  of  the  ball  and  the 
position  of  the  body. 

In  exchanging  Handicaps  each  player  should  try  to 
arrange  so  that  his  own  weaker  and  weakest  points  are 
strengthened,  and  that  time  may  be  saved.  Let  a  player 
with  a  good  Service  agree  that  a  Fault  shall  count  as 
a  stroke  against  him  ;  he  shall  only  be  allowed  one 
Service. 

The  rules  of  the  Handicaps  should  be  put  in  a  pro- 
minent place  on  a  single  sheet  of  cardboard. 

Let  us  conclude  with  a  very  emphatic  assertion : 
"  Points  "  are  not  enough — these  are  better  than  nothing, 
but  they  exaggerate  one  side  of  the  system  of  Handi- 
caps at  the  expense  of  the  other  sides.  Points  are  good, 
but  they  are  not  enough.  In  this  respect  Lawn  Tennis 
fails  miserably:  no  amount  of  points,  it  seems  to  me, 
can  produce  an  even  game  between  a  Doherty  and  a 
duffer  ;  and  yet  "  points  "  are  still  the  basis  of  the  Lawn 
Tennis  Handicap  system.  It  is  hoped  that  what  I  ■ 
suggest  about  Tennis  and  Racquets  may  be  applied 
(by  degrees  of  course)  to  Lawn  Tennis  also. 

With  regard  to  Racquets,  there  are  several  problems. 
First  of  all,  when  a  player  serves  all  round  the  walls,  so 
that  the  ball  would  naturally  be  taken  just  behind  him, 
and  so  that  his  own  person  would  be  in  danger  if  the 
taker  of  the  Service  made  a  free  stroke,  should  there  be 
a  Let  ?    A  Let  is  always  allowed  as  a  matter  of  course 


3o6  SUGGESTIVE  [pt.  vi 

in  America,  and  this  is  a  more  sensible  plan.  The 
English  refusal  to  allow  a  Let  in  some  Matches  seems 
utterly  ridiculous,  for  it  encourages  the  excited  player  to 
make  a  dash  for  the  ball.  This  is  extremely  risky,  as 
the  most  natural  stroke  may  be  the  stroke  right  into 
one's  opponent.  On  several  occasions  I  have  nearly 
been  killed  in  this  way.  Why  should  there  not  be  a 
Let  for  this  ball? 

There  is  no  need  for  a  Marker  to  call  "  Play  "  when  a 
Service  is  right.  Let  the  Marker  call  "  Cut  "  if  it  be  Cut, 
"  Short "  if  it  be  Short,  "  Fault "  if  it  be  Fault.  Other- 
wise let  him  be  silent.  The  Match-player  will  soon  get 
into  the  habit  of  knowing  that,  when  nothing  is  called, 
the  Service  is  right. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  taker  of  the  Service  should  be 
allowed  to  appeal  to  the  Gallery  for  a  Service  which  he 
thinks  to  be  a  Fault  or  Short.  Of  course  he  runs  a  risk 
in  not  trying  it,  but  that  is  his  own  look-out.  He  should 
not  be  at  the  mercy  of  the  scorer,  for  only  the  very  best 
scorers  can  call  "  Short "  in  time.  As  to  the  Cut,  that  is 
a  different  matter.  That,  I  think,  must  be  left  entirely 
to  the  Marker,  even  if  he  does  make  mistakes  sometimes. 

In  Tennis,  the  score  of  the  Server  should  surely  be 
called  first  instead  of  the  score  of  the  winner  of  the  last 
stroke.  This  would  make  the  game  far  more  intelligible 
and  interesting  to  the  spectators,  who,  for  the  most  part, 
are  familiar  with  Lawn  Tennis.  When  a  point  has  been 
decided,  surely  the  Server's  score  should  come  first, 
whether  he  has  won  that  point  or  not. 

Something  should  be  done  about  Passes.  Either  it 
should  be  etiquette  not  to  serve  them,  or  else  a  Pass 
should  count  as  a  Fault.  I  think  the  latter  would  be  the 
preferable  alternative. 


CHAPTER  XLV 

COURTS  AND  IMPLEMENTS 

My  object  is  not  to  abolish  the  old  Courts  and  imple- 
ments and  games,  which  are  far  too  good  for  any  such 
fate.  I  should  like  to  see  more  Courts  more  used  by 
more  people  of  more  ages.  For  these  two  games  are 
best,  for  the  best  players,  as  they  are  played  at  present ; 
it  is  rather  for  ordinary  players,  for  the  less  well-to-do, 
for  those  who  are  busy  during  the  day,  that  I  make  these 
suggestions. 

Let  us  start  with  the  last  class — those  who  are  busy 
during  the  day.  In  a  previous  Chapter,  we  have  advised 
the  building  of  clubs  in  central  positions  within  cities. 
Such  clubs  are  not  to  be  spread  out  over  a  large  area, 
which  would  necessitate  great  expense,  but  are  to  be 
built  high  up,  floor  upon  floor,  each  floor  being  well- 
lighted  for  evening  play.  These  clubs  would  be  useful 
for  city  men.  The  Americans  could  hardly  get  on  with- 
out them,  so  terrible  is  the  strain  of  business  upon  their 
nerves. 

The  less  well-to-do  find  that  the  games  are  beyond 
their  means,  because  of  the  expenses  mentioned  above. 
Why  should  they  not  try  some  game,  not  so  good  as  the 
very  real,  but  still  better  than  none  ?  Why  should  they 
not  be  content  with  wooden  Courts  ?     The  Front-wall  of 

307 


3o8  SUGGESTIVE  [pt.  vi 

the  Racquet  Court  could  be  of  pieces  of  wood  presenting 
their  edges  to  the  ball,  as  they  do  in  the  St.  Paul's  Court 
in  America.  The  Courts  and  the  building  could  be  well- 
ventilated  ;  and  there  might  be  some  arrangement  for 
sliding  glass  roofs  or  windows.  The  colour  should  be 
white,  or  at  any  rate,  light. 

Such  a  "  New  Tennis "  Court  might  easily  be  less 
elaborate  than  the  orthodox  one.  There  might  be  one 
Penthouse,  namely  the  Penthouse  down  the  left  side,  a 
smaller  Dedans,  and  no  Galleries,  except  the  Winning 
Gallery.  All  Chases  worse  than  the  Last  Gallery  might 
count  against  the  striker.  The  Chases  themselves  should 
be  fewer  in  number,  and  simpler,  so  that  there  would  be 
less  need  for  the  Marker  to  mark.  In  such  a  Court 
many  of  the  refinements  of  the  game  would  be  lost;  but, 
on  the  other  hand,  there  would  be  longer  rallies,  and — a 
most  important  reform — if  a  player  hit  above  an  Opening, 
then  he  would  make  such  a  bad  Chase  that  he  would 
probably  lose  a  stroke.  At  present  there  is  not  nearly 
enough  risk  attending  a  hard  stroke  for  an  Opening ;  the 
penalty  of  failure  is  not  nearly  severe  enough.  The  game 
would  certainly  be  cheaper ;  it  would  appeal  to  more 
people  because  it  would  be  less  complicated;  and  it 
would  be  possible  for  boys  and  ladies.  It  would  prepare 
for  the  full  game  itself,  and  would  be  within  the  reach  of 
every  one. 

As  to  the  balls  for  evening  play,  they  should  be  dark, 
while  the  Court  itself  should  be  light.  Early  Tennis  in 
Spain  was  played  with  dark  balls  in  light  Courts.  In 
Racquets,  a  small  solid  india-rubber  ball,  somewhat  less 
lively  than  the  ordinary  solid  ball,  could  be  used.  In 
Tennis,  an  uncovered  india-rubber  ball  lasts  longer  than 
a  covered  ball. 

So  far  there  would  be  small  expense,  for  the  balls 


CH.  XLV]  COURTS  AND  IMPLEMENTS  309 

would  be  almost  imperishable,  and  practically  imperish- 
able rackets,  with  metal  frame-work,  not  too  tightly 
strung,  might  be  introduced.  These  conditions  would 
give  an  inferior  game,  and  yet  a  similar  game.  Those 
who  could  afford  to  play  the  real  thing,  and  who  could 
play  it  well  enough  to  enjoy  it,  would  continue  to  do  so. 
Hundred  of  others  would  be  introduced  to  the  new 
games,  would  be  prepared  for  the  old  games,  and  would 
be  given  a  substitute  for  them  when  such  games  were 
not  forthcoming. 

As  to  the  different  kinds  of  Courts,  the  wooden  Racquet 
Court  at  St.  Paul's  School  need  not  be  the  only  one. 
Some  Courts  might  have  three  walls.  Others,  out-of- 
doors,  might  have  the  tent  covering.  The  cheapest  kind 
of  all  would  only  have  the  Front-wall  with  boundaries 
marked,  as  in  the  primitive  game.  There  might  be  flaps 
at  the  sides  and  netting  above  to  stop  the  strokes  that 
went  out.  The  open-court  game  was  for  eleven  aces, 
not  fifteen.  It  required  great  delicacy  of  touch,  great 
accuracy  of  placing,  and  wonderful  activity.  In  those 
days  the  player  could  not  stand  near  the  centre  of  the 
Court  and  wait  for  balls  to  come  off  the  Side-walls  and 
Back-wall.  The  open  Courts  were  healthy  as  well  as  cheap. 

But,  whether  we  build  them  or  not,  we  ought  at  least 
to  build  Squash  Courts  everywhere.  A  man  who  thinks 
nothing  of  spending  hundreds  of  pounds  on  his  hunters, 
which  may  last  only  for  a  short  while,  grudges  a  few  tens 
of  pounds  for  a  Squash  Court,  which  will  last  him  and 
his  friends  for  a  lifetime  and  beyond,  and  may  give  him 
abundance  of  health  all  through  the  year.  There  is  no 
need  that  all  Squash  Courts  should  be  plain  ;  it  is  easy 
to  arrange  hazards  against  the  walls — for  instance,  there 
could  be  a  three-cornered  piece  of  wood  as  a  kind  of 
Tambour.     Hotels  should  certainly   be   provided   with 


3IO  SUGGESTIVE  [pt.  VI 

Squash  Courts.  The  first  hotel  to  adopt  this  plan  will 
immediately  reap  the  advantage  in  an  increased  number 
of  health-seeking  clients. 

Among  the  smaller  reforms  in  Courts  and  implements, 
we  might  mention  the  use  of  three-cornered  blinds  let 
down  from  the  roof;  for  often  the  light  is  spoilt  by  a 
glare  coming  from  one  side  of  the  Court,  or  from  one  end 
of  it.  Instead  of  pulling  blinds  across,  and  thus  obscur- 
ing the  whole  light,  it  is  far  more  sensible  to  do  as  they 
do  in  Philadelphia :  to  pull  blinds  down  at  intervals,  so 
that  the  light  still  descends  directly  onto  the  Court,  but 
is  kept  from  the  eyes  of  the  players.  The  top-lights  of 
the  Court  should  not  be  obscured  by  great  beams,  as  they 
are  at  Queen's  and  Lord's.  Quite  thin  metal  supports 
are  amply  sufficient.  Beams  give  a  chequered  light, 
which  is  among  the  worst  possible.  The  Charterhouse 
Court  is  almost  ideal  in  this  respect ;  nearly  the  whole  of 
the  roof  is  of  glass.  The  object,  with  a  view  to  a  good 
sight  of  the  ball,  better  health,  and  greater  cheerfulness 
in  the  play,  should  be  to  give  the  maximum  of  bright 
light  without  glare. 

A  great  mistake  is  made  in  the  building  of  Racquet 
Courts.  At  present  only  the  front  row  of  spectators  in 
the  Gallery  can  see  the  game  properly.  The  beautiful 
play  off  the  Back-wall  is  missed  by  nine  spectators  out 
of  every  ten  in  a  crowded  Gallery.  Now  if  we  drew  a 
line  from  each  end  of  the  Gallery  up  along  the  Side-wall 
at  an  angle,  we  should  find  that  we  should  cut  out  a 
large  slice  of  the  Side-wall  without  affecting  the  play ; 
for  any  ball  which  hit  the  Side-wall  there,  would  go  into 
the  Gallery,  i.  e.  out  of  Court.  This  extra  space  might 
be  used  to  seat  at  least  half-a-dozen  spectators,  who  from 
it  could  see  the  whole  game.  There  would  be  so  much 
less  expense  with  respect  to  the  costly  Bickley  cement. 


CH.  XLV]  COURTS  AND  IMPLEMENTS  311 

The  seats  would  be  in  tiers  upwards,  and  a  railing  of  thin 
metal  would  prevent  the  spectators  from  falling  over. 
This  would  be  the  ideal  place  from  which  to  watch  a  game. 

In  Tennis  Courts,  the  Dedans  should  be  raised  as 
much  as  possible — not  so  much,  of  course,  that  the  top 
of  the  Penthouse  obscured  the  view,  but  so  much  that 
the  small  Chases  were  visible. 

Above  the  Side-walls,  or  at  least  above  one  Side-wall, 
there  should  be  a  Gallery  for  spectators.  The  game 
looks  very  different  from  above,  just  as  Cricket  looks  very 
different  from  the  top  of  the  Pavilion  at  Lord's.  One 
sees  from  this  point  of  vantage  much  that  one  cannot  see 
from  below,  much  that  even  the  players  themselves  do 
not  realise. 

The  Penthouses  of  a  Tennis  Court  should  be  of  double 
thickness,  with  sawdust  between  the  two  layers.  In  this 
case  there  is  less  noise.  The  game  becomes  quieter  and 
the  Marker  can  speak  with  a  lower  voice. 

The  Gallery-posts,  and,  in  fact,  the  whole  Court  at 
Tennis  should,  as  Mr.  Julian  Marshall  suggests,  have 
acute  angles.  The  Penthouse  bandeau  and  the  Gallery- 
posts  are  at  present  far  too  wide ;  one  really  needs  a 
sharp  edge,  not  only  to  prevent  dangerous  strokes,  but 
also  to  help  the  decision  of  the  Marker.  The  posts 
should  be  very  small :  metal  posts  are  therefore  better 
than  wood.  The  Net-post  might  be  some  way  back  from 
the  level  of  the  Side-wall.  The  only  disadvantage  is 
that  this  brings  the  middle  or  lowest  part  of  the  net  to  a 
spot  which  is  not  the  middle  of  the  Court. 

Surely  also  the  Net  itself  should  not  have  so  marked 
a  distinction  between  its  ends  and  its  middle  in  respect 
of  height.  What  applies  to  Lawn  Tennis  applies  equally 
to  Tennis.  There  is  no  reason  why  the  stroke  down  the 
sides  should  be  discouraged.     I  believe  that  in  a  few 


312  SUGGESTIVE  [PT.  vi 

years  we  shall  have  a  Lawn  Tennis  Net  of  the  same 
height  all  the  way  along. 

The  balls,  both  at  Tennis  and  at  Racquets,  should  be 
better  sewn.  This  seems  to  me  the  great  fault  in  modern 
Racquet  balls.  I  have  sometimes  calculated  that  two 
out  of  three  have  to  be  given  up,  not  because  they  have 
lost  their  shape,  but  because  they  have  come  unsewn.  I 
believe  that  they  have  been  sewn  with  very  inferior 
thread.  As  to  the  hardness  or  softness,  there  should 
perhaps  be  one  uniform  standard  for  Match  play.  For 
practice-games,  it  might  be  a  useful  rule  that,  the  worse 
a  player  is,  the  softer  a  ball  should  be,  so  that  there  may 
be  less  "  killing  "  and  more  return.  Old  balls,  i.  e.  balls 
once  used  in  a  Racquet  Court,  may  be  used  again  with- 
out shame  by  those  who  cannot  afford  new  balls,  and 
also  by  those  who  wish  to  practise. 

As  to  a  uniform  Tennis  ball,  I  suppose  we  shall  never 
see  it ;  nor,  indeed,  would  such  a  ball  be  altogether  ideal. 
For  example,  the  Boston  Court  takes  hardly  any  cut  at 
all.  The  New  York  Court  takes  a  great  deal.  The  same 
ball  is  hardly  likely  to  suit  both.  By  a  curious  perversity 
of  fate,  the  Boston  players  use  a  ball  which  takes  little 
cut,  and  the  New  York  players  a  ball  which  takes  much 
cut.  The  insides  of  the  balls  are  not  essentially  different, 
I  think.  It  is  the  covering  that  differs.  It  seems  to  me 
that  the  Bostonians  should  use  a  ball  which  will  take  a 
great  deal  of  cut ;  the  New  Yorkers  a  ball  which  will 
take  very  little  cut :  in  fact,  the  two  sets  of  players  should 
exchange  balls.  The  players  at  Tuxedo,  which  has  a 
smooth  and  fast  Court,  might  use  a  ball  between  the 
two.  At  present,  I  believe  that  they  have  several  sets 
to  suit  the  different  players.  This  is  not  a  bad  plan. 
The  English  ball  seems  to  be  a  fairly  good  average  for 
those  who  are  in  doubt. 


CH.  XLv]  COURTS  AND  IMPLEMENTS  313 

Tennis  balls  should  not  be  used  for  more  than  an  hour 
and  a  half  consecutively.  They  are  like  human  beings 
and  animals :  they  need  intervals  of  rest.  The  more 
sets  we  keep  going,  the  better  each  set  will  play.  It  is 
on  the  same  principle  that  some  people  have  seven 
razors,  one  for  each  day  of  the  week. 

With  regard  to  rackets,  certainly  both  Racquet  and 
Tennis  bats  should  be  matured  for  longer  than  they  are 
at  present.  Very  few  makers  keep  their  rackets  long 
enough.  I  have  seen  hundreds  and  hundreds  of  frames 
of  almost  green  wood  sent  out  to  various  Clubs.  This 
doubles  or  trebles  the  expense.  I  have  broken  two  new 
Racquet  bats  in  a  single  day,  not  through  bad  strokes, 
but  because  the  wood  was  green.  Some  process  of 
maturing  wood  should  certainly  be  introduced  for  games. 
There  can  be  no  doubt  that  such  processes  exist.  All 
that  is  needed  is  a  little  open-mindedness,  and  a  little 
self-sacrifice  on  the  part  of  makers  and  Markers. 

The  Tennis  racket  is  at  present  lop-sided.  I  have 
never  yet  heard  that  this  is  an  advantage  for  the  modern 
game.  The  Lawn  Tennis  racket  is  certainly  even-sided. 
Why  should  not  the  Tennis  racket  be?  It  may  be  urged 
that  the  curve  helps  the  cut.  But  how  about  the  Racquet 
Service  ?  Surely  that  has  its  cut,  and  the  Racquet  bat 
is  not  curved. 

Every  Court  should  be  provided  with  plaster  in  case 
of  blisters,  and  with  presses  in  which  the  rackets  should 
be  put  as  a  matter  of  course.  Private  presses  should  be 
for  sale.  To  the  habitual  player  a  press  saves  a  large 
number  of  pounds  a  year. 

The  Tennis  and  Racquet  bag  is  to  be  recommended. 
It  can  be  obtained  at  Hamilton's  shop,  in  23rd  Street, 
New  York.     I  do  not  know  of  any  other  manufacturer. 


CHAPTER  XLVI 

CLUBS  AND  EVENING  PLAY 

Modern  city  life  is,  to  the  uneducated  liver,  a  life  of 
strain  and  worry,  as  well  as  of  fog  and  dirt.  It  needs 
antidotes,  it  needs  cleansers.  The  absence  of  exercise  is 
especially  fatal  to  people  who  are  used  to  abundant  if 
not  excessive  exercise  in  early  life  at  school  or  College. 
For  parts  of  the  body  which  are  developed  or  over- 
developed at  school  or  College  are  allowed  to  atrophy  in 
later  life.  This  is  especially  the  case  with  the  lungs, 
which  thus  become  an  empty  space  in  which  rubbish 
may  be  deposited  ;  and  in  city  air  there  is  plenty  of 
rubbish  seeking  for  just  such  a  home. 

But  at  present  there  are  few  attempts  to  face  the 
problem  of  exercise  in  cities.  Our  whole  body  drinks  in 
filth,  and  the  ordinary  washing  with  hard  and  often  cold 
London  water  does  little  to  eliminate  it.  Nor  is  our 
ordinary  method  of  eating  such  as  to  produce  the  mini- 
mum of  waste-products  !  This  being  the  case,  healthy 
exercise  in  cities  becomes  a  crying  need  of  the  day. 

It  is  true  that  we  have  cheap  trains  out  of  cities ;  that 
in  cities  we  have  some  Gymnastics,  which  are  dull,  and 
some  Boxing,  Fencing,  Bartitsu,  etc.,  which  are  interest- 
ing ;  but  why  should  we  not  meet  the  difficulty  compe- 
tently in  the  city  itself? 

314 


CH.  XLVi]        CLUBS  AND  EVENING  PLAY  315 

Squash  Courts  are  cheap  ;  they  give  good  exercise  at 
any  time  of  the  day,  any  time  of  the  year,  any  time  of  life. 
Squash  can  be  played  by  artificial  light,  is  an  interest- 
ing and  exciting  game  in  itself,  and  is  a  preparation  for 
other  games.  Let  us  repeat  once  again  that  all  those 
who  are  fairly  well-to-do  should  build  Squash  Courts,  if 
only  for  the  sake  of  their  families  and  friends.  Or  they 
should  use  a  bare  room  for  this  purpose.  A  bare  room 
is  of  great  value,  not  only  for  various  games,  such  as 
Squash  and  Badminton,  but  also  for  the  mere  extension 
and  free  expansion  of  the  limbs. 

But  it  would  be  better  to  have  Clubs  somewhat  like 
the  Boston  Athletic  Association  in  America.  In  these 
Clubs  there  can  be  simple  refreshments,  and  the  social 
side  need  not  be  neglected.  There  should  be  apparatus 
for  washing,  and  a  swimming-bath.  There  can  be 
Billiards ;  and  a  Gymnasium  or  a  plain  room,  with  a 
running  track  round  it  as  a  gallery  :  this  is  the  common 
American  plan.  On  the  top  floors  can  be  the  Tennis 
and  Racquet  Courts  and  the  Squash  Court  which  can 
also  be  used  for  Fives. 

The  whole  building  must  be  excellently  ventilated,  and 
lighted  by  electric  or  incandescent  light. 

This  light  should  be  indirect,  the  lower  part  of  it  being 
protected  from  the  balls,  screened  from  the  eye,  and 
reflected  upon  the  walls.  It  should  be  thrown  onto  the 
walls  and  onto  a  white  roof  or  a  sheet  on  the  roof. 
The  Court  itself  should  be  as  white  or  light  as  possible. 
In  this  case,  black  balls  are  good  ;  they  give  an  excel- 
lent game  in  the  light-coloured  wood  Courts  at  the 
Merion  Club  near  Philadelphia. 

The  question  of  Courts  within  these  Clubs  we  have 
considered  in  a  special  Chapter ;  and  the  question  of 
these  Clubs  themselves  will  be  dealt  with  in  a  volume 


3i6  SUGGESTIVE  [pt.  vi 

on  Training  in  the  "  Imperial  Athletic  Library."  Here 
we  can  only  urge  that  the  Club  should  consist  of  many 
storeys  in  a  central  part  of  the  city ;  that  in  it  there 
should  be  space  for  a  variety  of  games  and  athletics ; 
that  there  should  be  various  health  devices,  including  a 
swimming  tank ;  and  that  there  should  be  every  oppor- 
tunity for  evening  play.  Such  Clubs  should  be  formed 
either  by  voluntary  donations,  or  by  subscription  among 
the  members.  Ladies  might  be  allowed  to  use  them  in 
the  day-time.  This  movement  would  do  much  for  the 
health  of  our  nation.  Ladies  have  little  inducement  to 
take  healthy  exercise  in  cities.  Squash  Courts  can  be 
built  by  employers  of  labour  ;  they  are  quite  cheap,  and 
their  employees  would  work  none  the  worse  for  such 
recreation. 

If  there  is  space,  Courts  can  be  grouped  together. 
Besides  the  great  Main-wall,  which  may  serve  as  the 
Main-wall  of  a  Tennis  Court,  and  the  Side-wall  of  a 
Racquet  Court,  the  outer  walls  can  be  used  for  Squash 
and  Fives  Courts. 

Otherwise,  advantage  should  be  taken  of  plain  rooms, 
of  barns  and  stables,  of  unused  walls  and  corners.  If 
these  surfaces  be  not  plain,  then  the  unevennesses  can 
serve  for  hazards  and  give  variety  to  the  play. 

But  it  is  the  importance  of  Clubs  especially  that  I  wish 
to  insist  on  here.  In  such  Clubs  every  effort  should  be 
made  to  attract  young  men  who  can  afford  to  play.  No 
bets  should  be  allowed  above  a  certain  amount.  A 
book  should  be  kept  in  which  Matches  are  registered. 
Exhibition  Matches  should  be  frequent ;  Handicaps 
should  be  frequent  also.  There  should  be  many  Matches 
between  different  Clubs,  and  many  competitions  within 
the  Club  itself 

Last,  but  not  least,  the  Club  should  have  a  simple  set 


CH.  XLVi]        CLUBS  AND  EVENING  PLAY  317 

of  rules.  A  specimen  set  is  suggested  here,  not  as  an 
ideal,  but  as  an  example  of  those  in  actual  use  at  a 
successful  American  Club, 

RULES  GOVERNING  THE  ENGAGEMENT  OF  THE 
TENNIS  COURT. 

1.  Subject  to  the  limitations  prescribed  in  sections  5  and  6,  the 
Court  may  be  engaged  in  advance  by  members  without  Hmit  of 
time  or  number  of  engagements.  An  entry  of  the  member's  name, 
in  a  book  provided  for  that  purpose,  shall  constitute  an  engage- 
ment, and  reserves  for  that  member  the  exclusive  use  of  the  Court 
for  one  hour. 

2.  Engagements  must  be  made  in  good  faith,  in  the  name  of  the 
member  intending  to  use  the  Court. 

3.  Members  desiring  to  play  with  a  marker  shall  make  an  entry 
to  this  effect  in  the  book.  The  head  marker  shall  decide  as  to 
the  fitness  of  any  particular  marker  to  play  at  any  particular  time. 

4.  Engagements  made  more  than  seven  days  in  advance,  or  which 
reserve  the  Court  in  any  one  member's  name  for  more  than  two 
hours  in  any  one  week,  are  charged  to  members  at  the  time  of 
booking.  An  additional  charge  of  one  dollar  is  made  in  case  the 
Court  is  not  used  after  having  been  booked  in  advance.  The  week 
is  regarded  as  beginning  at  8  a.m.  on  Monday. 

5.  On  Sundays,  legal  holidays,  and  after  4.30  p.m.  on  all  other 
days,  the  following  rules  shall  apply  : 

(i)  Not  more  than  two  engagements  may  be  made  in  the  name 
of  one  member.  (2)  No  member  may  engage  the  Court  for  the 
purpose  of  playing  with  a  marker,  or  to  the  exclusion  of  another 
member  desirous  of  sharing  the  Court  wirh  him. 

6.  The  Court  will  be  reserved  for  exhibition  matches  from  time 
to  time,  at  the  discretion  of  the  Governors. 

7.  Members  should  stop  play  punctually  at  the  end  of  the  time 
for  which  they  have  engaged  the  Court. 

8.  When  play  has  once  begun,  no  member  may  book  the  Court 
for  the  current  hour. 

9.  If  the  Court  be  not  claimed  within  ten  minutes  of  the  time  for 
which  it  is  engaged,  that  Court  shall  be  forfeited,  and  may  be  used 
by  other  memloers.  Sons  of  members  have  the  privilege  of  using 
unclaimed  Courts  on  payment  of  fifty  cents  for  each  player. 

GENERAL   REGULATIONS. 

r.  Shoes  soled  with  soft  material  must  be  worn  by  members 
entering  the  Court.  A  charge  of  $10  is  made  for  the  first  in- 
fringement of  this  rule,  and  $25  for  subsequent  infringements. 


3i8  SUGGESTIVE  [pt.  vi 

2.  Spectators  should  refrain  from  making  noises  calculated  to 
distract  the  attention  of  players. 

3.  When  there  is  a  great  discrepancy  between  the  form  of  two 
players,  both  desiring  to  play  at  a  given  time,  it  is  customary  for  the 
stronger  of  the  two  to  invite  the  other  to  play,  not  vice  versa. 

4.  The  marker's  decision  is  final,  unless  a  referee  has  been 
appointed. 

5.  When  standing  between  the  Service  line  and  the  Net,  a 
player  should  not  force  straight  for  the  Dedans,  except  when 
returning  the  Service. 

6.  The  Service  should  not  be  delivered  before  the  striker-out  is 
ready,  or  while  a  ball  is  rolling  in  the  Court. 

7.  Boxes  are  provided  for  the  safe -keeping  of  members'  valuables. 

8.  Any  one  found  using  a  racket  belonging  to  another  member, 
without  written  permission,  will  be  handed  over  to  the  police. 

9.  The  use  of  rosin  on  the  floor  of  the  Court  is  forbidden. 

10.  Complaints  may  be  made  to  the  Court  Committee,  and  will 
receive  prompt  attention,  if  made  in  writing  immediately  after  the 
olifence. 


CHAPTER   XLVII 

HINTS  TO  MARKERS  AND  TEACHERS 

The  genius  may  be,  and  usually  is,  an  execrably  bad 
teacher,  either  because  he  does  everything  by  instinct, 
and  has  never  learnt  it  consciously,  or  else  because,  if  he 
has  learnt  it  consciously,  he  has  forgotten  the  upward 
steps.  Among  the  striking  exceptions  are  Latham  and 
Pettitt,  who  are  among  the  greatest  of  coaches.  But  it 
is  seldom  that  the  expert  player  can  understand  the 
difficulties  of  a  beginner  or  a  duffer.  This  is  the  case 
with  every  subject,  from  mathematics  down  (or  up  or 
along)  to  Racquets  and  Tennis. 

A  Marker  should  be  able  to  interest  all  his  learners, 
and  to  bring  them  together  in  Matches.  But  he  should 
not  think  so  much  of  games  at  first ;  rather  he  should 
impress  upon  the  learners  the  value  of  the  correct 
mechanism  of  play.  He  should  teach  them  to  do  the 
ordinary  strokes  safely,  just  as  the  billiard  teacher  should 
teach  the  learner  to  go  in  off  the  red  into  the  end 
pocket  with  absolute  certainty.  He  should  insist  on  the 
ABC  of  the  stroke,  and  should,  if  necessary,  teach  one 
part  of  it  at  a  time.  So  also  he  should  correct  the  faults 
one  by  one,  and  the  parts  of  a  fault  one  by  one. 

He  should,  therefore,  be  able  to  analyse  any  stroke  ; 
and  not  only  this,  but  he  should  explain  it  by  means  of 

319 


320  SUGGESTIVE  [pt.  vi 

the  Ball-Game  Exerciser,  in  order  to  show  where  the 
ball  should  be  when  it  is  struck,  how  the  body  should 
pose,  and  how  it  should  move. 

The  ABC  of  the  stroke  he  should  advise  the  learners 
to  practise  to  some  extent  outside  the  Court,  so  that 
when  they  come  into  the  Court  they  may  enjoy  them- 
selves. If  they  have  to  get  through  their  drudgery  in 
the  Court,  they  are  far  less  likely  to  patronise  it.  Rather 
he  should  urge  them  to  make  some  improvement  in 
between  times,  so  that  when  they  come  back  they  may 
each  time  feel  themselves  to  be  a  little  advanced. 

The  practice  outside  the  Court  can  consist,  not  only 
of  swings  and  movements,  but  of  exercises  with  the  Ball- 
Game  Apparatus,  and  of  practice  in  the  Squash  Court. 
Great  care  is  well  worth  while  during  the  early  weeks 
of  apprenticeship. 

Each  Marker  must  decide  how  he  shall  begin  to 
teach :  whether  he  shall  teach  safety  and  certainty  as 
the  first  requisite,  or  whether  he  shall  teach  style  and 
correctness  as  the  first  requisite.  Perhaps,  if  one  had  to 
reconcile  the  two  schools,  one  would  urge  that  style 
should  be  practised  outside  the  Court  by  means  of  the 
Ball-Game  Exerciser,  and  safety  inside  the  Court  by 
means  of  actual  strokes. 

The  Marker  should  have  at  his  fingers'  ends  a  list  of 
possible  errors,  as  well  as  of  essential  positions  and 
movements.  He  should  be  able  to  put  his  hand  at  once 
upon  the  weak  spot,  and  to  show  how  that  weak  spot 
may  be  strengthened. 

If  he  makes  this  one  of  his  first  cares,  he  will  avoid 
vagueness.  He  will  not  say  to  the  player  simply, 
"  Your  stroke  is  bad  " :  he  will  analyse  the  stroke,  and 
find  out  in  what  respects  it  is  bad. 

Then  he  will  stand  with  his  back  to  the  learner,  so 


CH.XLvii]  HINTS   TO  MARKERS  AND   TEACHERS  321 

that  the  learner  may  imitate  him  easily,  and  he  will  get 
the  learner  to  repeat  the  stroke  immediately  afterwards. 

When  he  first  allows  the  learner  to  play,  he  will 
employ  one  or  more  of  the  various  Handicaps,  by  means 
of  which  he  may  improve  his  own  weak  points,  if  he  has 
any,  and  may  give  the  beginner  a  few  simple  similar 
strokes  again  and  again.  He  will  not  weaken  his  play, 
and  the  learner  will  not  be  discouraged. 

Each  Marker  should  discuss  the  problems  of  teaching 
wath  other  Markers,  and  should  observe  their  methods : 
each  Marker  should  try  to  reconcile  his  theory  with  his 
actual  practice.  He  should  not  tell  the  learner  to  keep 
the  head  of  his  racket  up  at  Tennis,  unless  he  habitually 
carries  out  this  theory  in  his  own  game. 

The  ordinary  duties  of  a  Marker  are  obvious.  He  has 
to  see  that  the  Court  is  clean,  that  the  rackets  are  ready, 
that  the  Tennis  net  is  at  the  right  height,  that  the  balls 
are  in  the  box,  that  no  balls  are  scattered  over  the 
Court.  He  should  warn  players  if  there  are  balls  in  the 
way.  He  should  see  that  all  orders  for  chalk,  water, 
towels,  and  the  mending  of  rackets  are  promptly  executed. 
He  should  call  the  score  distinctly,  as  well  as  accurately 
and  promptly.  In  Racquets,  he  should  do  what  he  can 
to  abolish  the  old  plan  of  calling  "  Play  "  every  time  that 
a  ball  is  returned.  He  may  call  "  Play "  to  encourage 
beginners,  but  otherwise  it  is  as  unnecessary  as  it  would 
be  at  Lawn  Tennis.  There  is  not  one  Marker  in  ten 
who,  in  calling  out  the  Service,  can  call  "  Short "  or 
"  Fault  "  in  time,  if  he  has  first  called  "  Play." 

Last,  but  not  least,  the  Markers  should  be  encouraged 
to  give  friendly  advice  to  the  players  with  regard  to 
training  and  practice.  I  owe  a  great  deal  to  such 
friendly  advice  from  many  of  the  oldest  experts. 

23 


CHAPTER   XLVIII 

GENERAL   PRINCIPLES   OF   PRACTICE 

"  Let  us  take  a  concrete  instance.  Your  Backhand  stroke  is 
weak,  let  us  say,  for  several  reasons  :  you  do  not  hold  your  racket 
up  and  back  before  the  stroke  begins,  and  your  feet  face  forwards 
rather  than  sideways.  But  how  can  you  correct  these  faults  in  the 
middle  of  the  game,  when  you  want  to  be  thinking  where  the  next 
ball  will  come,  where  you  will  have  to  be,  and  where  you  will  hit 
the  ball  when  it  does  come  ?  How  can  you  concentrate  your  atten- 
tion on  one  point,  to  say  nothing  of  two  or  more  points,  when  it  is 
being  distracted  and  divided  now  in  this  direction,  now  in  that? 
Cvbviously,  you  cannot.  You  need  conditions  where  your  attention 
will  not  be  distracted  or  divided,  but  can  be  focused  and  con- 
centrated ;  you  need  to  be  where  you  can  do  just  one  thing  at  a 
time  ;  you  need  to  make  this  one  action  a  perfect,  familiar,  and 
almost  automatic  action,  before  you  prepare  for  the  second  action. 
Or,  to  put  it  in  another  way,  you  need  to  use  your  brain-power  so 
often  upon  this  action  that  the  action  may  at  last  be  handed  over, 
e.  g.  to  the  Spinal  Cord  :  it  is  thus  that  we  hava  learnt  to  walk. 
That  which  was  once  directed  by  the  will  and  the  conscious  effort 
of  the  brain  is  now  directed  almost  automatically  by  the  Spinal 
Cord.  We  want  to  be  able  to  delegate  as  much  work  as  we  can  to 
this  useful  apparatus,  so  that  we  may  have  our  whole  attention  free 
to  devote  to  the  play  and  its  tactics.  We  do  not  want  to  be 
bothered  with  the  mechanism  of  the  play. 

"  Now,  if  you  can  go  through  various  movements  correctly  and 
repeatedly,  these  will  soon  tend  to  become  automatic.  The  more 
you  concentrate  your  attention  and  energy  and  will  upon  the  move- 
ment, the  sooner  it  will  become  automatic. 

"The  piano-player,  the  writer,  the  typewriter,  the  cyclist,  may 
begin  slowly  and  carefully  :  but  it  does  not  follow  that  the  slowness 
and  carefulness  will  make  the  movement  slow  and  will  necessitate 
care  say  a  year  hence." — From  '  The  Game  of  Squash.' 

.^22 


CH.  XLviii]  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  PRACTICE  323 

"  It  is  only  by  gradually  adding  new  acquirements  to  what  you 
have  already  made  secure  and  made  your  very  own,  that  you  will 
be  able  to  get  everything  to  work  together  in  harmony — a  blessed 
state  which  is  called  Co-ordination :  for  a  good  eye  alone  is  not 
enough,  neither  is  activity  of  arm  alone,  nor  activity  of  foot  alone  : 
all  good  things  must  go  together,  or  else  the  result  will  not  be  the 
best  possible. 

"  Begin  with  one  thing  which  is  easy  and  simple,  do  it  again  and 
again,  at  first  slowly,  and  always  in  the  right  way  ;  n\ake  it  your 
very  own  ;  then  take  a  second  thing  which  is  easy  and  simple,  do 
it  again  and  again  in  the  right  way,  make  it  your  very  own  :  then 
try  the  first  and  the  second  together,  till  they  become  as  one. 
Then  acquire  a  third  thing  and  make  it  your  very  own,  and  add  it 
to  the  first  two,  and  so  on.  These  are  the  fundamental  laws  of 
Practice  all  the  world  over — from  the  easy  to  the  hard,  from  the 
simple  to  the  complex  ;  to  secure  each  step  before  you  make  a  new 
step,  constantly  repeating  and  correcting,  and — last  but  not  least — 
noting  your  mistakes  each  time  that  you  test  yourself  by  the 
experience  of  an  actual  trial." — Extract  from  an  article  on  '  Practice,' 
by  the  Author. 

It  is  a  common  fallacy  that  practice  for  Racquets  or 
Tennis  consists  chiefly  of  a  somewhat  dull  lesson  in  the 
Court ;  for  example,  at  Tennis,  a  basket-full  of  balls 
may  be  hit  over  the  net  by  the  Marker,  or  one  may  have 
a  practice-game.  Now  these  and  other  helps  are  not  to 
be  despised  :  indeed,  in  their  place,  they  are  essential, 
and  anyhow  they  are  far  better  than  no  practice  at  all. 
But  unblessed  is  the  man  who  has  acquired  a  bad  habit. 
It  is  harder  to  undo  that  habit  than  to  acquire  a  new 
habit  afresh. 

Against  such  practice  in  the  Court  there  is  also  the 
fact  that  men  are  human  beings.  When  they  come  into 
the  Court,  they  want  to  play  rather  than  to  learn. 

And  so  it  may  be  well  for  them  to  get  over  the 
drudgery  in  short  spells  outside  the  Court.  While  they 
are  waiting — and  they  often  have  to  wait  in  the  hurry 
of  modern  life! — they  can  do  a  few  simple  breathing 
exercises  or  wrist-exercises  or  finger-exercises.  This 
will  not  be  unhealthy. 


324  SUGGESTIVE  [PT.  vi 

Outside  the  Court  it  is  possible  to  master,  not  the 
game  itself,  nor  yet  the  strokes  themselves,  but  at  any 
rate  the  A  B  C  of  the  important  strokes,  including  the 
grip  of  the  racket,  the  way  to  hold  it,  the  positions  and 
movements  before,  during,  and  after  ordinary  strokes, 
and  the  mechanism  of  the  commonest  strokes  them- 
selves. 

By  watching  the  best  players,  by  watching  one 
particular  feature  of  their  play  at  a  time,  one  could  also 
learn  the  best  ordinary  positions  in  the  Court,  and 
which  returns  are  most  likely  to  be  made  off  the 
ordinary  strokes. 

The  first  aim  of  practice  is  correctness.  Therefore 
each  thing  which  we  practise  must  at  first  be  tried 
slowly  and  with  care,  that  is  to  say,  if  we  need  practice 
at  all.  We  must  concentrate  and  fix  or  (as  Elmer  Gates 
would  call  it)  dirigate  with  our  whole  mind  and  will ; 
we  must  throw  our  will  into  our  muscles  ;  for  with  our 
will  there  must  flow  into  those  muscles  more  blood, 
more  energy.  We  must  get  the  mechanism  absolutely 
correct  at  all  costs.  It  will  help  this  end  if  we  do  some 
of  our  exercises  before  a  looking-glass,  or  if  we  get 
some  experienced  friend  to  correct  us  in  the  first  stages. 

This  does  not  mean  that  practice  need  begin  with  a 
study  of  parts.  In  fact  it  may  be  better  to  grasp  the 
game  first  as  a  whole,  before  we  begin  to  practise  these 
parts :  to  see  what  is  the  relation  of  each  stroke  to  the 
whole  game,  and  what  is  the  relation  of  each  part  of  a 
stroke  to  the  whole  stroke.  We  can  do  this  either  by 
watching  or  by  playing. 

But,  having  once  found  out  the  parts  of  a  stroke,  and 
having  made  these  parts  an  integral  portion  of  ourselves, 
then  we  can  practise  them  more  and  more  briskly,  more 
and  more  frequently. 


CH.  XLViii]  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  PRACTICE  325 

In  early  stages  of  learning  there  should  be  no  strain. 
Nearly  all  the  so-called  "  Physical  Culture  "  Exercisers 
are  a  vast  mistake  for  beginners ;  for,  next  to  correctness 
should  come  not  strain,  but  pace — that  is  the  physio- 
logical order.  If  strength  is  to  come  at  all,  let  it  come 
last. 

Nor  should  any  exercise  be  practised  to  excess.  The 
numbers  of  times  one  practises  it  can  be  gradually 
increased,  and  will  increase  themselves  ;  the  pace  will 
also  increase  itself.  Before  fatigue  comes,  there  should 
be  either  a  change  or  else  a  rest. 

If  we  ask  why  it  is  that  the  heart  is  not  tired,  we  find 
that  the  reasons  are  as  follows.  The  heart-muscles  are 
large ;  they  work  rhythmically ;  they  have  had  much 
practice ;  and  so  we,  if  we  wish  to  get  through  more 
exercise  in  a  short  time,  can  use  our  large  muscles  in 
particular,  can  use  them  rhythmically,  singing  or  hum- 
ming or  counting  during  the  exercises,  and  we  can 
repeat  similar  exercises  again  and  again. 

Having  once  acquired  the  movements,  however,  we 
must  learn  to  use  them  briskly  and  promptly,  and  then 
to  combine  them  two  or  three  at  a  time  in  various  ways. 

It  is  important  that  we  should  enjoy  the  exercise  that 
we  take,  for  pleasant  exercise  is  least  tiring,  and,  indeed, 
has  a  favourable  effect  upon  the  blood.  It  is  hard  to 
enjoy  dull  drill.  But  part  of  the  tedium  disappears  if 
we  sing  whilst  we  exercise,  and  if  we  remind  ourselves 
that  the  work  will  improve  our  success  at  the  game. 
Any  exercise  which  leaves  us  with  a  feeling  of  heaviness 
and  slackness  is  probably  bad  for  us ;  that  is  the  fatal 
tragedy  of  the  strain-movements  of  the  ordinary  "  strong 
men."  Their  typical  movements  do  not  make  one  feel 
the  better  for  having  done  them. 

At  the  start  one  should  secure  easy  conditions :  the 


326  SUGGESTIVE  [pt.  vi 

clothing  should  be  free,  if  indeed  any  clothing  be  worn 
at  all ;  the  air  should  be  fresh ;  the  room  should  be  as 
devoid  of  furniture  as  is  possible.  I  have  recently  had 
my  attention  called  by  an  able  writer  in  '  Health  and 
Strength,'  to  the  cramping  effect  of  low  ceilings  and 
furniture  in  one's  neighbourhood.  They  encourage  one 
seldom  to  extend  one's  arms  or  legs,  seldom  to  stand  or 
sit  upright ;  they  have  a  narrowing  and  hunching  effect. 
This  is  bad  for  both  these  games. 

Besides  this,  good  light  should  be  secured,  and,  after 
the  exercise,  there  should  be  a  thorough  wash.  It  is 
needless  to  say  that  for  our  exercise  a  change  of  clothing 
is  absolutely  essential. 

And  not  only  should  the  conditions  be  easy  at  the 
start ;  the  tasks  also  should  be  easy.  Simple  movements 
should  precede  complex  movements :  for  instance,  the 
foot-exercises  described  in  a  previous  Chapter  can  be 
learnt  all  by  themselves.  During  an  actual  stroke, 
with  the  ball  to  attend  to,  it  is  almost  impossible  for 
us  to  learn ;  for  we  have  to  attend  to  so  many  other 
things. 

To  repeat  similar  simple  movements  again  and  again, 
one  by  one — that  is  the  great  secret  of  successful  practice. 
Then  gradually  to  increase  the  pace,  the  number  of 
times,  the  endurance,  the  promptitude,  the  complexity, 
the  variety — that  is  the  second  secret. 

Those  who  have  not  tried  such  a  plan  of  learning  will 
object  that  it  produces  a  mechanical  style  of  play.  We 
believe  that,  if  forcible  attention  be  given  to  the  move- 
ments at  the  start,  hardly  any  attention  need  be  given 
to  them  afterwards.  Many  soldiers  have  to  learn  the 
goose-step.  When  they  march  correctly  afterwards,  do 
they  think  of  the  goose-step?  Not  at  all.  The  more 
thoroughly   they   have   fixed    their    attention    on    the 


CH.  XLViii]  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  PRACTICE  327 

goose-step,  the  less  they  will  have  to  think  of  it 
afterwards. 

If  any  one  doubts  this,  let  me  refer  him  to  any  hand- 
book on  Psychology.  He  will  learn  that  movements 
repeated  with  concentration  of  attention  tend  to  become 
half-automatic,  and,  indeed,  quite  automatic.  Or,  if  he 
needs  practical  illustrations,  let  him  ask  himself  to  what 
extent  he  is  conscious  and  careful  about  the  way  in 
which  he  walks,  or  skates,  or  rides  a  bicycle,  or  plays 
the  piano,  or  typewrites,  or  writes,  or  reads,  or,  in  fact, 
does  anything  that  is  complex  and  yet  seems  to  be 
simple. 

In  America  I  used  to  be  told  that  I  was  seldom  out  of 
position  at  Tennis.  At  the  time  I  was  quite  unconscious 
of  moving  into  position,  and  yet,  some  years  before,  I 
had  been  obliged  to  fix  my  whole  will  and  energy  on 
my  foot-movements.  So  easy  and  mechanical  had  they 
become,  so  sub-conscious  were  they,  that  they  were 
being  done  by  a  part  of  me  without  the  ordinary  man 
having  the  least  notion  that  they  were  being  done.  I 
was  thinking  all  the  time,  not  of  my  feet,  but  of  my 
opponent,  and  of  the  Court,  and  of  the  tactics  of  the 
game. 

Even  after  each  part  of  the  mechanism  has  been 
mastered,  even  then  it  may  be  necessary  to  divide  up 
wholes  into  parts,  and  to  practise  various  parts,  so  that 
we  may  correct  faults.  This  brings  us  to  a  very  import- 
ant principle  of  practice,  namely  equilibrium  by  ex- 
aggeration in  the  opposite  direction.  As  we  showed 
elsewhere,  if  a  piece  of  music  has  been  rolled  up,  you 
will  not  get  it  straight  simply  by  unrolling  it :  you  must 
roll  it  up  in  the  opposite  direction.  So  it  is  with  faults. 
Aristotle  said  that  a  virtue  was  a  mean  between  two 
extremes.     If  you  should  tend  towards  one   extreme. 


328  SUGGESTIVE  [pt.  vi 

you  must  right  the  balance  by  tending  purposely 
towards  the  other  extreme.  If  your  feet  face  too  much 
forwards,  you  must  acquire  the  right  position  by  making 
them  face  too  much  backwards.  Having  repeated  this 
for  a  number  of  times,  then,  when  you  come  into  the 
Court,  you  will  probably  strike  the  happy  mean  between 
your  two  previous  faults. 

The  last  principle  of  practice  which  need  be  touched 
on  here  is  this.  Use  your  strongest  points  in  Matches  ; 
use  your  strong  and  less  weak  points  in  practice-games ; 
use  your  still  weaker  points  in  practice  inside  the  Court ; 
develop  your  weakest  points  into  strong,  and  then  into 
strongest  points,  in  practice  outside  the  Court. 


PELOTA:   A  CONTRAST 

Note. — The  following  translation  from  Pierre  Loti's 
*  Ramuntcho '  was  most  kindly  sent  me  by  a  friend,  whom 
I  here  thank  sincerely  not  only  for  this  but  also  for 
valuable  suggestions  throughout  the  book. 

"The  smallest  hamlet  in  the  Basque  country  has  its 
place  for  the  jeu  de  paume,  large,  scrupulously  tended, 
usually  beside  the  church,  under  oak-trees.  But  this 
one  is  rather  the  centre  and  so  to  say  the  training-school 
of  the  French  players,  of  those  who  become  celebrated 
both  in  the  Pyrenees  and  in  America  and  who,  in 
the  great  international  contests,  are  opposed  to  the 
champions  of  Spain.  The  place  itself  has  an  especial 
beauty  and  dignity,  surprising  in  a  village  so  remote. 
It  is  paved  with  large  stones,  between  which  grass 
sprouts,  proclaiming  its  eld  and  giving  an  air  of 
abandon.  On  both  sides  there  extend,  for  the  spectators, 
long  tiers  of  seats  which  are  in  the  pink  granite  of  the 
neighbouring  mountain,  and,  at  this  moment,  all  aglow 
with  the  autumn  scabious.  At  the  bottom  stands 
the  old  monumental  wall,  against  which  the  pelotes 
(balls)  strike;  it  has  a  rounded  front  which  resembles 
the  outline  of  a  dome  and  bears  this  inscription,  partially 
effaced  by  time :  '  Blaidka  haritzea  debakatua,'  *  The 
game  of  b/az'd  is  forbidden.' 

"  All  the  same,  it  is  b/at'd  that  is  to  be  the  game  to- 

329 


330  PELOTA:  A   CONTRAST 

day;  but  the  inscription  dates  back  to  the  splendid 
period  of  the  national  sport,  degenerated  to-day  as 
everything  has  degenerated ;  it  was  placed  there  to 
preserve  the  tradition  of  rebot,  a  more  difficult  game, 
requiring  greater  agility  and  strength,  which  has  only 
survived  in  the  Spanish  province  of  Guipuzcoa. 

"As  the  seats  fill  up,  the  court  paved  with  stones 
which  the  grass  trims  and  which  has  witnessed,  since 
old  days,  the  running  and  leaping  of  the  most  active 
and  vigorous  men  in  the  country-side,  remains  empty. 
The  lovely  autumn  sun,  in  his  decline,  lights  and  warms 
it ;  here  and  there  some  great  oaks  shed  their  leaves 
over  the  seated  spectators.  One  sees  lower  down  the 
church  and  the  cypresses,  the  sacred  corner  from  which  the 
saints  and  the  dead  folk  seem  to  watch  so  as  to  protect 
the  players,  sharing  an  interest  in  this  game  which  still 
impassions  even  as  it  characterises  a  whole  people,  .  .  . 
At  last  they  come  into  the  arena  {sic),  the  pelotaris 
(players  with  the  ball),  the  six  champions  amongst  whom 
there  is  one  in  a  soutane — the  parish  priest.  With 
them,  some  other  personages :  the  crier  (marker)  who 
in  a  moment  will  call  the  strokes;  the  five  judges, 
chosen  among  the  connaisseiirs  from  different  villages  to 
intervene  in  case  of  discussions ;  and  some  other  persons 
carrying  espadrilles  (a  sort  of  rope  slipper)  and  the 
spare  balls.  To  his  right  fist  the  player  attaches  a 
strange  thing,  made  of  osiers,  which  looks  like  a  large 
curved  finger-nail,  lengthening  for  him,  by  one-half,  his 
fore-arm.  It  is  with  this  glove  (manufactured  in  France 
by  a  single  maker  in  the  village  of  Ascain)  that  he  must 
seize  and  fling  or  strike  the  ball — a  little  thing  of  wound 
string  and  covered  in  sheep-skin,  which  is  as  hard  as  a 
ball  of  wood. 

"  Now  they  test  their  balls,  choosing  the  best,  and 


1 


PELOTA:  A   CONTRAST  331 

unlimber,  in  a  {q^n  first  strokes,  which   do  not   count, 
their  arms,  which  are  the  arms  of  athletes. 

"  Then  they  take  off  their  vests,  to  confide  them,  each 
one,  to  the  care  of  some  chosen  spectator ;  Ramuntcho 
carries  his  to  Gracieuse,  seated  in  the  first  row,  on  the 
lowest  tier.  And,  save  for  the  priest,  who  will  play 
trussed  within  his  black  robe,  see  them  all  there  in  the 
tenue  de  combat,  the  torso  free  under  a  shirt  of  pink 
cotton  or  modelled  beneath  a  light  singlet. 

"  The  audience  know  them  well,  these  players  ;  in  a 
moment  they  will  excite  themselves  for  and  against, 
and  will  encourage  them  with  frenzy,  as  they  do  the 
toreadors. 

"At  such  a  moment,  the  whole  village  is  animated 
by  the  spirit  of  other  days ;  in  its  expectation  of 
pleasure,  in  its  life,  in  its  ardour — it  is  very  Basque  and 
very  old — in  the  great  shadow  of  Gizune,  the  overhang- 
ing mountain,  which  flings  already  upon  the  scene  the 
charm  of  twilight. 

"And  play  begins  in  the  chastened  melancholy  of 
evening.  The  ball,  served  with  full  swing,  flies,  strikes 
the  great  wall  with  sharp,  dry  report,  rebounds  and 
speeds  through  the  air  with  the  celerity  of  a  bullet. 
This  bottom  wall,  curved  like  the  top  of  a  dome  against 
the  sky,  is  gradually  crowned  by  the  heads  of  children — 
little  Basque  boys  with  little  Tam-o'-Shanter  caps — the 
players  of  the  future ! — who  like  a  flight  of  birds  will  in 
a  moment  rush  along  to  collect  the  ball  each  time 
that,  struck  too  high,  it  flies  out  of  Court  and  disappears 
to  the  fields  beyond. 

"  Gradually  the  players  warm  up,  as  their  arms  and 
wrists  grow  suppler,  in  a  delirium  of  movement  and  of 
speed.  Already  they  acclaim  Ramuntcho.  The  father, 
too,  will  be  one  of  the  fine  players  of  to-day,  strange 


332  PELOTA:  A   CONTRAST 

to  watch  with  his  wild-cat  leaps  and  his  gestures  of  the 
athlete,  imprisoned  in  his  priest's  robe. 

"  This  is  the  rule  of  the  game :  when  the  Champion 
of  one  side  has  let  the  ball  die,  it  is  a  point  to  his 
opponents,  and  they  play  usually  for  sixty  points. 
After  each  stroke  the  accredited  marker  calls  at  the 
top  of  his  voice, '  Le  but  ^  a  tant,  le  refil  a  tant,  messieurs.' 
And  his  long  clamour  sounds  above  the  noise  of  the 
crowd  which  applauds  or  murmurs. 

"  On  the  Court  the  zone,  gilded  and  reddened  by  the 
sun,  diminishes,  disappears,  devoured  by  the  shadows ; 
more  and  more  the  great  screen  of  Gizune  dominates 
the  scene,  seeming  to  close  in,  in  this  tiny  corner  of 
world  at  its  feet,  that  special  life,  that  special  ardour 
of  this  mountain  people, — who  are  the  residue  of  a  people 
singularly  mysterious,  with  no  analogy  among  all  the 
peoples.  Growing  and  invading  the  silence  the  shadow 
of  evening  is  almost  sovereign  ;  far  away,  only  a  few 
spurs  above  the  many  darkened  valleys  are  luminous 
in  violet  rose. 

"  Ramuntcho  plays  as  never  in  his  life  has  he  played 
before ;  it  is  one  of  those  moments  when  one  feels  him- 
self saturated  with  strength,  light,  weighing  nothing, 
when  it  is  a  pure  joy  to  move,  to  bound,  to  extend 
one's  arms.  But  Arrochkoa  (his  partner)  is  failing ;  the 
priest,  two  or  three  times,  becomes  entangled  in  his 
soutane,  and  the  opposite  side,  outplayed  at  first,  is 
creeping  up  little  by  little  ;  then,  in  view  of  this  valiantly 
disputed  game,  the  shouts  are  redoubled,  and  caps  fly 
in  the  air,  thrown  by  the  hands  of  enthusiasts. 

"Now  the  score  is  even;  the  marker  calls  'thirty 
air  and  chants   the   old  refrain,    immemorial   on   this 

1  Le  but  is  the  side  which,  after  winning  the  toss,  has  played  first 
at  the  opening  of  the  game.   Le  refil  is  the  side  opposed  to  the  but. 


PELOTA:  A    CONTRAST  333 

occasion :  '  Les  parts  en  avantl  '  Pay  for  drinks  of 
players  and  judges.' 

"  It  is  the  signal  for  a  moment  of  repose,  while  they 
carry  into  the  Court  wine  at  the  charges  of  the  Com- 
munity. The  players  sit  down  and  Ramuntcho  seats 
himself  by  Gracieuse,  who  throws  upon  his  sweat- 
drenched  shoulders  the  vest  of  which  she  was  custodian. 
Then  he  begs  his  little  friend  to  be  so  good  as  to  undo 
the  cords  that  bind  his  glove  of  wood,  of  osiers,  and 
of  copper  to  his  reddened  arm.  And  he  rests  in  the 
proud  consciousness  of  his  success,  meeting  only  smiles 
of  encouragement  on  the  faces  of  the  girls  who  look 
at  him.  .  .  . 

"...  The  game  begins  again,  and  his  reflections  are 
lost  in  physical  lust  of  the  struggle.  From  moment  to 
moment,  clac !  the  whip-crack  of  the  ball,  its  sharp 
sound  against  the  wall  which  launches,  the  floor  which 
receives  it,  each  sound  giving  the  idea  of  all  the  force 
expended.  .  .  .  Clac !  it  will  go  on  striking  till  the 
moment  of  twilight,  that  ball  impelled  by  arms  both 
young  and  strong.  Sometimes  the  players,  with  a 
frightful  shock,  arrest  its  flight,  with  a  shock  to  strain 
other  muscles  than  their  own.  More  frequently,  sure 
of  themselves,  they  let  the  ball  placidly  strike  the 
ground  .  .  .  almost  die  .  .  .  one  would  say  they  never 
could  return  it,  but  clac !  it  flies  again,  caught  just  at 
the  right  moment,  thanks  to  a  marvellous  precision  of 
eye-judgment  and  speed,  to  re-strike  the  wall,  always 
with  the  pace  of  a  bullet.  When  it  strays  over  the 
seat-tiers,  over  the  mass  of  woollen  Tam-o'-Shanters  and 
pretty  chignons  bound  with  a  handkerchief  of  silk,  then 
all  the  heads  and  bodies  too  bow  themselves,  as  though 
bent  by  the  wind  of  its  passage ;  this  that  they 
may  not  risk  touching  it  while  it  is    '  living '  and  can 


334  PELOTA  :  A    CONTRAST 

yet  be  returned ;  but,  when  really  dead,  one  of  the 
spectators  thinks  himself  favoured  to  pick  it  up  and 
fling  it,  with  a  clever  throw  that  places  it  squarely  in 
the  hands  of  a  player.  .  .  . 

"...  Meantime  Ramuntcho  is  still  the  winner  ;  and 
the  applause,  the  shouts  redouble  his  happy  zest ;  each 
time  he  makes  fifteen,  the  men,  erect  now  upon  the  old 
granite  seats,  acclaim  him  with  the  fervour  of  the  Midi. 
The  last  stroke,  the  sixtieth  point.  ...  It  is  Ramuntcho's, 
and  see,  the  game  is  won. 

"  Then  there  is  an  immediate  descent  upon  the  Court 
of  all  the  Tam-o'-Shanters  that  filled  the  stone  amphi- 
theatre ;  they  press  round  the  players  who  now  become 
immobile  in  attitudes  of  fatigue.  Ramuntcho  undoes 
his  glove  amidst  a  crowd  of  fervent  admirers  ;  from  all 
sides  honest  if  rough  hands  are  thrust  out  to  shake  his 
own  or  strike  him  in  friendly  fashion  upon  the  shoulder. 
...  A  robust  old  man,  square  of  shoulder  and  of  jaw, 
with  beardless  face  like  a  monk,  around  whom  people 
group  themselves  respectfully,  approaches; — it  is  Haram- 
burn,  a  player  of  long  ago,  who  was  celebrated  fifty 
years  since  in  America  for  the  game  of  rebot  and  who 
made  quite  a  little  fortune  at  it.  Ramuntcho  reddens 
with  pleasure  to  find  himself  complimented  by  this 
difficult  old  man  .  .  .  and  down  there,  standing  on  the 
pink  granite  seat  among  the  long  grass  and  the  November 
scabious  flowers,  his  little  friend,  who  in  going,  followed 
by  a  train  of  young  girls,  turns  to  smile  at  him  and  to 
wave  with  her  hand  a  sweet  adios  in  the  Spanish 
manner.  .  .  ." 

We  do  not  hope,  in  this  free  translation  of  Loti's 
charming  text,  to  convey  the  full  glamour  of  the  scene 
he  describes.  Perhaps  no  one  writing  in  France  to-day 
has  such  a  pen  as  his,  and  I  am  proud  to  think  that 


PELOTA:  A   CONTRAST  335 

even  the  Spanish  cousin  of  my  favourite  games  should 
have  enjoyed  the  honour  of  its  services. 

We  may  scorn  the  force  of  those  wild  volleys  he 
mentions  as  bruising  the  muscles  of  others  ;  we  may  dwell 
in  horror  upon  the  possible  fate  of  the  children  who  leaned 
over  the  wall — so  strangely  dome-like  in  its  curve  and 
accountable  no  doubt  for  undreamable  angles  ;  we  may 
hold  our  breath  as  the  ball  spins  above  the  heads  of 
the  crowd,  brushing  possibly  a  curl  of  that  "  Gracieuse  " 
who  holds  the  vest  of  the  champion. 

We  may  contrast  with  this  full-blooded  Basque  popu- 
lace and  its  frenzied  shouting — unless  indeed  we  think 
of  a  Public  School  Racquet  Match  at  Queen's ;  and  the 
game  just  described  is  nearer  to  Racquets  than  to 
Tennis — ,  the  silence  of  our  own  Tennis  Dedans,  the 
security  of  our  own  ladies  behind  the  netting,  where 
the  scrape  of  a  chair  and  the  striking  of  a  match  have 
often  before  now  lost  me  a  point  at  a  crucial  moment 
in  the  game.  But  we  may  allow  that,  in  exchange  for 
the  cold  precision  of  our  cloistered  and  roofed  Court, 
its  vaster  science,  its  more  ruseful,  more  suddenly  strik- 
ing racket — we  miss  the  glory  of  that  Spanish  sunshine, 
the  shadow  of  that  watching  mountain,  the  intimate, 
quiet  suggestion  of  that  dim  churchyard  with  its  re- 
membered dead,  who,  in  their  day,  were  Pelota  players 
to  a  man,  whose  sweethearts  throbbed  and  smiled  like 
Gracieuse. 

Here  our  tennis  is  the  game  of  the  few,  and  at  the 
end  of  play  we  return  not  to  plaudits  of  some  hundreds 
of  keen  players — that  old  man  of  Loti's  is  a  fine  touch 
and  well-seen — but  to  the  quiet  approval  of  a  narrow 
circle,  not  less  warm  for  that.  Where  Ramuntcho, 
reeking,  seeks  his  vest  at  the  hands  of  his  lady,  we  step 
calmly  to  the  bath-room,  and  it  is  fairly  certain  that 


336  PELOTA:  A   CONTRAST 

our  evening  is  not  spent  in  dancing  the  fandango  with 
what  forces  remain  to  us. 

But  to  me,  whether  it  be  Pelota  or  Court  Tennis,  it 
would  be  good,  and  I  should  count  it  joy  to  match  my 
meagre  prowess  in  some  Pyrenees  highland  where  the 
Court  is  grown  over  with  grasses,  and  the  autumn 
scabious,  in  their  blues  and  pinks  and  lavenders,  wave 
above  the  granite  benches  that  were  set  there  any  time 
this  two  hundred  years. 


(1) 


THE  END 


(.' 


\^ 


^lUBRARYOc 


j;;OFCAllF0R^ 


^t^EUNIVER% 

CO 


^lOSANCElfx^ 


<I^3NVS01^      %a3AINn-3WV' 


^^WE•UNIVER% 


%13!}NYSm^ 


A>:lOSANCEUr^ 


6 


^^lUBRARYC?^ 


^  -     —   ^ 


^lOSANCeifj^ 


-v^UIBRARYC?/^ 


^tllBRARYQr^ 


^/JMAINnmV^  ^OJITVDJO^ 


.^WM)NIVERS/A 


<rjl3DNVS01^ 


j^ios-ANcntr^ 


^OFCAUFOfc^      ^OFCAllFOfti^         ^^^\^UNIVER% 


>&AaV88!l'# 


..    .    f= 

^<?Aava8n# 


f  ? 


^^lUBRARYac. 


^OFCAllFOftj^ 


^lOSANCaa^ 


<f5U0NVS01^       %a3AIN(l-3l\V 


< 


^lOSANCFl£r^        ^OF-CAIIFO% 


"^i^iUDNVSOV^^ 


%a3AiNn-3WV^     "^^Aavaan-^ 


s^-lOSANCElfj^K 


^>^lllBRARYQr^       A^UIBRARYOc. 


if  1  ir-'  ^    'i?  1  ir^  ^      '^ 


5MEUNIVERS/A 


,^WE•UNIVE]^5'//v 


L  006  213  164  4 
%13DNVS01^      '^AMAIND-aW^''         '^^(tfOJIIfJ-JO'^ 


AWEUNIVERJ/a 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


AA    001  170  579    5 

^j:?ii3nvsov'^     "^aaAWV^^     ''^<?Aavaan-#' 


\IUBRARY< 


^OJITVDJC 
^OFCAUFO^ 


^^Aavaan-3 


^lUBRARYQc. 
i2  i   (i— '  ^ 


^lUBRARYQ^ 


^OFCAIIFOR)^      ^OFCAllFOff,^ 


^(7Aavaan# 


>&Aavaan# 


.^WEUNIVER% 

< 


\mm'i^     '^smmm^ 


o 


^^MEUNIVER% 


"^AajAINfl-JV 
^lOSANCn£ 


■^i^iaoNv-soi^ 


%a3AINft-3V 


,\MEUNIVER% 


^       ^IOSANCE^Aa. 


<f^30NVS01=^ 


AWEUNIVERS/a 


%MAINII-3ftV^ 
^lOSANCEl^^ 


^IUBRARY(?A, 


i^tUBRARY( 


^OFCAllFOff/j^ 


^OFCAIIFO^ 


<riy3KV$0V'^ 


'^•^imm\s0 


"^"^o-mmP 


^^AHvaan-B 


^lllBRARYi?/-        -j^^lllBRARY^/-  A\\EUNIVIRS'/A       ^lOSANCEU 

Siifrlliirrl  g^cxrs  lor^ 


